B.E. (MECHANICAL ENGINEERING)

B.E. (MECHANICAL ENGINEERING) 2011 Regulations, Curriculum & Syllabi

BANNARI AMMAN INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY (Autonomous Institution Affiliated to Anna University of Technology -Coimbatore Approved by AICTE - Accredited by NBA and NAAC with “A” Grade and ISO 9001:2008 Certified)

SATHYAMANGALAM – 638 401 Erode District Tamil Nadu Phone: 04295 226000 Fax: 04295 226666 Web: www.bitsathy.ac.in E-mail:[email protected]

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING CURRICULAM DESIGN & INTERLINKING OF COURSES

360 o FLEXIBLE LEARNING FRAME WORK

XIII

Professional Ethics

Elective V

Elective VI

Project Phase II

Total Quality Management

Computer Integrated Manufacturing

Roboticsand Machine Vision System

Automotive Electronics

Elective III

Elective IV

ComputerAided Design and ComputerAided Manufacturing laboratory

Robotics Laboratory

Project Work Phase I

Modelling and Simulation

Applied Hydraulics & Pneumatics

Micro Controller and PLC

Design of Mechatronics System

Dimensional Metrology

Elective II

Micro Controller and PLC Lab

Hydraulics and Pneumatics Lab

Technical Seminar

Engineering Metrology & Quality Assurance

ElectroMagneti c Theory

Instrumentatio n and Control Systems

CNC Technology

Sensors and Signal Processing

Elective I

Instrumentatio n & Controls Laboratory

CNC Laboratory

Sensors and Signal Processing Laboratory

Numerical Methods

Microprocessor s and Applications

Strength of Materials

Power Electronics

Control Systems

Dynamics of Machinery

Microprocessor s Lab

Machine Dynamics Lab

Power Electronics Laboratory

Engineering Mathematics III

Engineering Materials & Metallurgy

Fluid Mechanics & Machineries

Digtal Electronics

Electrical Machines and Drives

Kinematics of Machinery

Fluid Mechanics & Machinery Lab

Electrical Machines and Drives Lab

Computer Aided machine Drawing

Engineering Mathematics II

Engineering Chemistry

Language Elective

Engineering Mechanics

Applied Material Science

Manufacturing Processes

C Programming

Engineering Chemistry Laboratory

Manufacturing Technology Lab I

Engineering Mathematics I

Engineering Physics

Communicativ e English

Basics of Civil & Mechanical Engineering

Envrionmental Science

Basics of Electrical & Electronics Engineering

Engineering Graphics

Engineering Phyiscs Laboratory

Workshop Practice

S8

S7

S6

S5

S4

S3

S2

S1

RULES AND REGULATIONS B. E. /B. Tech. Programmes (for the batches of candidates admitted in Academic year 2011-2012 and subsequently) NOTE: The regulations hereunder are subject to amendments as may be decided by the Academic Council of the Institute from time to time. Any or all such amendments will be effective from such date and to such batches of students (including those already in the middle of the programme) as may be decided by the Academic Council. 1.

Conditions for Admission Candidates for admission to the B.E. / B.Tech. degree programmes will be required to satisfy the conditions of admission thereto prescribed by the Anna University of Technology, Coimbatore and the Government of Tamil Nadu.

2.

Duration of the Programme (i) For purposes of these regulations, the academic year will be normally spanning from June to May. Each academic year will be divided into Two semesters, the odd semester normally spanning from June to November and the even semester from December to May. (ii) Minimum Duration: The Programme will extend over a period of Four years with Eight semesters (3 years with six semesters for lateral entry) leading to the Degree of Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) / Bachelor of Technology (B.Tech.) of the Anna University of Technology, Coimbatore. (iii) Maximum Duration: The candidate shall be required to successfully complete all the requirements to qualify for the award of B.E./B.Tech. degree programme within a maximum period of 7 years (6 years for lateral entry), these periods reckoned from the commencement of the semester to which the candidate was first admitted to the programme.

3.

Branches of Study B. E. Programmes I Aeronautical Engineering II Civil Engineering III Computer Science and Engineering IV Electrical and Electronics Engineering V Electronics and Communication Engineering VI Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering VII Mechanical Engineering B. Tech. Programmes I II III IV

4.

Biotechnology Information Technology Textile Technology Textile Technology (Fashion Technology)

Structure of Programmes i.

The curriculum will consist of courses of study (Theory, Practical, Project) and Personality Development Programme and syllabi as prescribed by the respective Boards of Studies from time to time.

1

Based on the language proficiency in the first semester, the students will be divided into two categories. The students who show good proficiency in English can opt for German / Japanese / French / Hindi and the remaining students will study Advanced Communicative English in II Semester. iii. Every student will be required to opt for six electives from the list of electives. Under Choice Based Credit System (CBCS), students can opt for any course as elective in consultation with respective HoDs during VIth & VIIth Semesters from any branches of B.E / B.Tech. Programme including electives pertaining to Physical Sciences. (not more than two from Physical Sciences) ii.

iv. Candidates can also opt for one credit courses of 20 hours duration which will be offered at our institution from industry / other institution / our institution on specialised topics. Candidates can complete such one credit courses during the semesters III to VI as and when these courses are offered by different departments. A candidate will also be permitted to register for the one credit courses of other departments provided the candidate has fulfilled the necessary pre-requisites of the course being offered subject to approval by both the Heads of Departments. Credits will be indicated for these courses in the grade sheet, but it will not be considered for computing CGPA. However, if a candidate wishes to avail exemption of electives V or elective VI of the VIII Semester, he/she can do so by exercising his/her option in writing to the respective Head of the Department during the beginning of the VIII Semester by following the equivalence norm that one elective in the VIII Semester is equivalent to three one credit courses completed by the candidate during the previous semesters. v.

Every student will be required to undertake a suitable project work in Industry / Department during VII semester in consultation with the Head of the Department and the faculty guide and submit the project report Phase I and thereon submit the project report Phase II at the end of the VIII Semester on dates announced by the Institute/Department.

vi. A candidate can register for Self-Study Elective(s) over and above the electives from any branch of Engineering / Technology one per semester starting from V semester onwards provided he/she maintains a Cumulative Grade Point Average(CGPA) of 7.5 or above till the previous semesters with no standing arrears. Credits will be indicated for these courses in the grade sheet, but it will not be considered for computing CGPA. 5.

Special Courses: Students can opt for any one of the special courses as self-study in addition to the courses specified in the curriculum in V, VI and VII semesters to get exposure in the recent research areas, under the guidance of the faculty provided he/she maintenance a minimum CGPA of 7.5 till the previous semester with no standing arrears. The credits obtained will be indicated in the grade sheet, but will not be considered for CGPA.

6.

Certificate Courses: Students can opt for any one of the certificate courses offered in the various departments in IV, V, VI and VII semesters. A separate certificate will be issued on successful completion of the course.

7.

Requirements of Attendance and Progress (I)

Minimum Attendance: A candidate will be deemed to have completed the requirements of study of any semester only if:

2

a) He / she has kept not less than 70% of attendance in each course and at least 80% of attendance on an average in all the courses in that semester put together. [However, a candidate who has secured attendance between 70% & 79% in the current semester due to medical reasons (hospitalization / accident/ specific illness) or due to participation in Institute/ University/ State/ National/ International level sports events with prior permission from the Principal shall be given exemption from the prescribed attendance requirements and he/she shall be permitted to appear for the current semester examinations.] b) His / her academic progress and conduct have been satisfactory (II)

Personality Development : Every candidate shall be required to undergo a minimum of 40 hours of Personality Development Programme viz, NSS / NCC / YRC / YOGA / Sports and Games activities during the first year failing which he/she will not be permitted to appear for the Semester - End examinations of semester III onwards. Such candidates are permitted to appear for the Semester End examinations of semester III onwards only after completing the above mentioned requirement. The record of attendance for Personality Development Programmes shall be maintained and sent to the Academic Section at the end of 1 st and 2nd Semesters. National Cadet Corps (NCC) will have parades. National Service Scheme (NSS) will have social service activities in the community and camps. Youth Red Cross (YRC) society activities will include peace time activities like health and hygiene, international friendship, awareness camps, etc. Yoga will be practiced through Yoga master Sports and Games will include preparation for Intra Institute and inter-collegiate sports events.

8.

9.

Procedure for Completing Programme (i)

A candidate will be permitted to proceed to the courses of study of any semester only, if he / she has satisfied the requirements of attendance and progress in respect of the preceding semester and had registered for the highest semester examination for which he / she was eligible to register. vide Clause 7. In the case of project work, no candidate will be permitted to appear for the project work examination unless he /she had submitted the project report not later than the prescribed date.

(ii)

A candidate who is required to repeat the study of any semester for want of attendance / unsatisfactory progress and conduct or who desires to rejoin the course after a period of discontinuance or who upon his / her own request is permitted by the authorities to repeat the study of any semester, may join the semester for which he / she is eligible or permitted to rejoin, only at the time of its normal commencement for a regular batch of candidates and after obtaining the approval from the Director of Technical Education and Anna University of Technology, Coimbatore. No candidate will however be enrolled in more than one semester at any time. In the case of repeaters, the earlier assessment in the repeated courses will be disregarded.

Assessment (i)

The assessment will be based on the performance in the Semester - End examinations and / or continuous assessment, carrying marks as specified in Clause 12.

(ii)

At the end of each semester, final examinations will normally be conducted during October/November and during April / May of each year. Supplementary examinations may also be conducted at such times as may be decided by the Institute.

3

(iii)

(a) Continuous Assessment Marks will be awarded on the basis of Continuous Evaluation made during the semester as per the scheme given in Clause 12. (Credit assignment: Each course is normally assigned with certain number of credits @ 1 credit per one hour of lecture, 0.5 credit per one hour of tutorial/practical per week.) (b) The letter grade and the grade point are awarded based on the percentage of marks secured by a candidate in individual course as detailed below: Range of Percentage of Total Marks 90 to 100 80 to 89 70 to 79 60 to 69 55 to 59 50 to 54 0 to 49 Incomplete Withdrawal Absent

Letter grade S A B C D E RA I W AB

Grade Point (g) 10 9 8 7 6 5 0 0 0 0

RA − Reappearance in the course. (A candidate who fails in the Semester - End Examination in any course(s) including Project Work after having registered for the same, shall be awarded grade RA.) I

− Incomplete (as per clause 7 (I) & (II)) and hence prevented from writing Semester – End Examination. W − Withdrawal from the Semester - End Examination vide clause 11 AB − Absent (A candidate who is eligible but fails to register and also fails to appear after registration for the Semester - End examination will be awarded the grade AB.) (c) After completion of the programme, the Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) from the I Semester to VIII Semester (from III to VIII semester for lateral entry)is calculated using the formula:

 g *C C n

CGPA

=

1

i n

1

where

i

i

g i : Grade Point secured corresponding to the course. Ci : Credit allotted to the course.

n : Total number of courses for the entire programme.

4

10. (a). Passing Requirements and Provisions i.

The minimum number of total credits to be earned by a candidate to qualify for the award of degree in the various branches of study as prescribed by the respective Boards of Studies is given below:

Branch of Study BE Programmes Aeronautical Engineering Civil Engineering Computer Science and Engineering Electrical and Electronics Engineering Electronics and Communication Engineering Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Mechanical Engineering B Tech Programmes B.Tech. Biotechnology B.Tech. Information Technology B.Tech. Textile Technology B.Tech. Textile Technology (Fashion Technology)

Minimum Credits lateral entry entry at first at third semester semester 193 193 192 193 193 192 193

141 141 142 143 141 142 143

192 193 192 193

143 143 143 141

(Students Migration- Credit Accounting) The Board of Studies of the respective department will decide on normalization of credits to the students migrating from other institutions to Bannari Amman Institute of Technology ii. A candidate who secures a minimum of 50% marks in the Semester - End Examinations of a course and a minimum Grade point 5 with internal assessment and Semester - End Examination put together will be declared to have passed that course. iii. A candidate, who absents or withdraws or is disqualified to appear (as per clause 7 (I) and (II)) or secures a letter grade RA (Grade Point 0) or less than 50% in the Semester - End Examination in any course carrying Internal Assessment and Semester - End Examination Marks, will retain the already earned Internal Assessment Marks for two subsequent attempts only of that course and thereafter he / she will be solely assessed by Semester - End examination marks.. iv. A candidate shall be declared to have qualified for award of B.E/B.Tech. degree if (i) He/she successfully completed the courses requirement (vide clause 7 ) and has passed all the prescribed courses of study of the respective programme listed in clause 13 within the duration specified in clause 2 and (ii) No disciplinary action is pending against him/her. (b). Classification of degree i. First Class with Distinction : A candidate who qualifies for the award of the Degree (vide clause 10 a (iv) ) having passed all the courses of study of all the eight semesters (six semesters for lateral entry candidates) at the first opportunity, within eight consecutive semesters (six consecutive semesters for lateral entry candidates) after the commencement of his /her study and securing a CGPA of 8.5 and above (vide clause 9c) shall be declared to have passed in First Class with Distinction. For this purpose the withdrawal from examination (vide clause 11) will not be construed as an opportunity for appearance in the examination.

5

ii. First Class : A candidate who qualifies for the award of the Degree (vide clause 10 a (iv)) having passed all the courses of study of all the eight semesters (six semesters for lateral entry candidates) within maximum period of ten consecutive semesters (eight consecutive semesters for lateral entry candidates) after the commencement of his /her study and securing a CGPA of 6.50 and above shall be declared to have passed in First Class. iii. Second Class : All other candidates who qualify for the award of the degree shall be declared to have passed in Second Class. 11. Withdrawal from the Examination (i)

A candidate may, for valid reasons, be granted permission by Principal to withdraw from appearing for the examination in any course or courses of only one semester examination during the entire duration of the degree programme. Also, only ONE application for withdrawal is permitted for that semester examination in which withdrawal is sought.

(ii)

Withdrawal application shall be valid only if the candidate is otherwise eligible to write the examination and if it is made prior to the commencement of the examination in that course or courses and also recommended by the Head of the Department.

(iii)

Withdrawal shall not be construed as an opportunity for appearance in the examination for the eligibility of a candidate for First Class with Distinction.

12. Scheme of Assessment (a) (i) THEORY Semester - End Examination Internal Assessment

: 50 Marks : 50 Marks

Distribution of marks for Internal Assessment: Assignments Test 1 Test 2 Model Examination

10 10 10 20 ---50 ---An optional test will be conducted in the respective test portion after the second test, to the students who opt, on valid reasons (ii) THEORY - ONE CREDIT COURSE TOTAL 100 Marks Semester - End Examination Internal Assessment


Distribution of Marks for Internal Assessment: Assignment (Two Assignments) 10 Test I 15 Test II 15 Viva voce 10 ---50 ----

6

(b) (i) PRACTICAL (Without Mini Project) Semester - End Examination : 50 Marks Internal Assessment : 50 Marks Distribution of Marks for Internal Assessment Preparation 10 Observation & Results 15 Record 10 Model Examination & Viva-Voce 15 ---50 ---(ii) Practical (With Mini Project) Semester - End Examination Internal Assessment


Distribution of Marks for Internal Assessment Preparation 05 Observation & Results 10 Record 10 Mini Project Report 10 Model Examination & Viva-Voce 15 ---50 ---(c) THEORY WITH LABORATORY COMPONENT Semester - End Theory Examination Internal Assessment Theory Test I Test II Model (Theory)

Practical Observation & Results Model Practical

(d) SPECIAL COURSES

: 50 Marks : 50 Marks 10.0 10.0 15.0

5.0 10.0 ----50.0 -----

Internal Assessment: 100 Marks State of Art Preparation Presentation Discussion & Conclusion Viva - voce

20 15 10 15 40 ---100 ----

7

(e) SELF STUDY ELECTIVES Semester - End Examination Internal Assessment Assignments (minimum 2 Nos) Test I Test II Model

: 50 Marks : 50 Marks 15 10 10 15 ---50 ----

(f)COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH & ADVANCED COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH / GERMAN / JAPANESE / FRENCH / HINDI Semester - End Examination Internal assessment


Test 1 Test 2 Model Examination (Theory) Model Examination (Practical : (Listening 5 and Speaking 10)

10 10 15 15 ----50 -----

(g) PROJECT WORK i) PHASE – I Semester - End Examination Internal Assessment


Distribution of Marks for Internal assessment Literature survey (one seminar) 10 Problem formulation 10 Approach (one seminar) 15 Progress (one seminar) 15 ----Total 50 ----Distribution of Marks for Semester - End Examination Report Preparation & Presentation 25 Viva-Voce 25 ----50 -----

8

ii) PHASE – II Semester - End Examination Internal Assessment


Distribution of Marks for Internal assessment Continuation of Approach & Progress (Two seminars – 2x20) Findings, Discussion & Conclusion (Two seminars - 2x30) Total

40 60 ----100 -----

Distribution of Marks for Semester - End Examination Report Preparation & Presentation Viva Voce

(h) TECHNICAL SEMINAR

50 50 ----100 -----

Internal Assessment: 100 Marks Two Seminars (2 X 50)

100

Distribution of Marks Each Seminar Report Evaluation Presentation Viva – voce

10 20 20 ---50 ---(A team of 2 members and HOD constituted by the Principal, will evaluate the seminar report and conduct the viva-voce for assessment.) 13) Curriculum and Syllabi

9

Department of Mechanical Engineering, Bannari Amman Institute of Technology | Regulation 2011 Approved in Sixth Academic Council Meeting

1

B.E. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING (Minimum credits to be earned: 193) First Semester Code No. 11O101

Engineering Mathematics I*

11O102

Engineering Physics*

Objectives & Outcomes PEOs POs I (a)

Course

Language Elective I * 11O202

Environmental Science

* **

L

T

P

C

3

1

0

3.5

I

(a)

3

0

0

3.0

IV

(f)

3

0

0

3.0

V

(a), (h)

3

0

0

3.0

II

(a)

4

0

0

4.0

11O105

Basics of Civil and Mechanical Engineering

11O205

Basics of Electrical and Electronics Engineering+

II

(a), (g)

4

0

0

4.0

11O208

Engineering Graphics$

III

(a,) (d)

2

0

2

3.0

I

(a)

0

0

2

1.0

I

(a)

0

0

2

1.0

22

1

6

25.5

L

T

P

C

3

1

0

3.5

11O108

Engineering Physics Laboratory

11M209

Workshop Practice

#

Total Second Semester Code No. 11O201 11O103

Objectives & Outcomes PEOs POs I (a)

Course Engineering Mathematics II* *

Engineering Chemistry *

I

(a)

3

0

0

3.0

11M204 11M106

Language Elective II Applied Materials Science@ Engineering Mechanics

IV II II

(f) (a,) (c) (a)

3 3 3

1 0 0

0 0 0

3.5 3.0 3.0

11M206

Manufacturing Processes

II

(c), (g),( i)

3

0

0

3.0

11M207

Manufacturing Technology Laboratory I

II

(c), (g)

0

0

2

1.0

11M107

‘C’ Programming

I

(a), (g)

2

0

3

3.5

11O109

Engineering Chemistry Laboratory¥

I

(a)

0

0

2

1.0

20

2

7

24.5

Total

*

Common for all branches of B.E./B.Tech ** Common to all branches of B.E./B.Tech AE & CE; ECE,EIE,ME,MXE,BT &TT (I Semester) and to CSE,EEE,FT,IT &TT (II Semester) + Common for all branches of B.E./B.Tech except ECE,EEE & EIE; AE,CSE,ME,MXE,IT & FT (I Semester) and to CE,BT&TT (II Semester) $ Common for CE,EEE,ME,MXE,BT,IT & TT (I Semester); AE,CSE,ECE,EIE & FT (II Semester) # Common for AE,CSE, ECE & EIE , ME & MXE (I Semester); CE,EEE,BT,IT,TT & FT (II Semester) @ Common for AE, CE, MXE & ME ¥ Common to AE,CE,CSE,ECE & EIE (I Semester); EEE,ME,MXE,BT,IT,TT & FT (II Semester)


Third Semester Code No.

Objectives & Outcomes PEOs POs

Course

L

T

P

C

11O301

Engineering Mathematics III*`

I

(a)

3

1

0

3.5

11M302

Engineering Materials and Metallurgy

II

(c)

3

0

0

3.0

11M303

Electrical Machines and Drives

I

(a)

3

0

0

3.0

11M304

Engineering Thermodynamics

II

(b), (i)

3

1

0

3.5

11M305

Fluid Mechanics and Machinery

II

(b), (i)

3

1

0

3.5

11M306

Manufacturing Technology

II

(c), (g)

3

0

0

3.0

11M307

Fluid Mechanics and Machinery Laboratory

II

(e), (k)

0

0

3

1.5

11M308

Electrical Machines Laboratory

I

(a), (e)

0

0

3

1.5

11M309

Manufacturing Technology Laboratory II

II

(c), (e), (i), (k)

0

0

3

1.5

18

3

9

24.0

L

T

P

C

Total Fourth Semester Code No.


Course

11M401

Numerical Methods***

I

(a)

3

1

0

3.5

11M402

Theory of Machines I

II

(d), (k)

3

1

0

3.5

11M403

Computer Aided Design

II

(d)

3

0

0

3.0

11M404

Thermal Engineering

II

(b), (i)

3

1

0

3.5

11M405

Strength of Materials**

II

(c)

3

1

0

3.5

11M406

Engineering Design Concepts*

III

(d)

3

0

0

3.0

11M407

Thermal Engineering Laboratory I

II

(a), (e), (k)

0

0

3

1.5

II

(c), (e), (k)

0

0

3

1.5

II

(a),(e)

1

0

3

2.5

19

4

9

25.5

11M408 11M409

Strength of Materials and Metallurgy Laboratory Computer Aided Machine Drawing Laboratory Total

* ** ***

Common to all branches of B.E./B.Tech except BT and CSE Common to AU & ME Common to Aero, MXE, ME and CE

2


Fifth Semester Objectives & Outcomes PEOs POs

Code No.

Course

L

T

P

C

11M501

Engineering Metrology and Quality Assurance

II

(a), (c)

3

0

0

3.0

11M502

Theory of Machines II

II

(i),(k)

3

1

0

3.5

11M503

Heat and Mass Transfer

II

(b), (g),(i)

3

1

0

3.5

11M504

Design of Machine Elements

III

(C)

3

1

0

3.5

11M505

Total Quality Management

IV

(e), (h), (k)

3

0

0

3.0

-

-

-

3.0

Elective I 11M507

Instrumentation and Dynamics Laboratory

II

(e)

0

0

3

1.5

11M508

Thermal Engineering Laboratory II

II

(b), (g), (i)

0

0

3

1.5

11M509

Metrology Laboratory

IV

(f)

0

0

3

1.5

11M510

Technical Seminar I

-

-

-

1.0

15

3

9

25.01

L

T

P

C

Total Sixth Semester Code No.


Course

11M601

Automated Manufacturing

II

(h), (k)

3

0

0

3.0

11M602

Hydraulics and Pneumatics

II

(a), (g)

3

0

0

3.0

11M603

Design of Transmission Systems

II

(i), (k)

3

1

0

3.5

11M604

Gas Dynamics and Jet Propulsion

II

(a), (b), (i)

3

0

0

3.0

11M605

Operations Research

II

(a), (g),(i)

3

0

0

3.0

-

-

-

3.0

Elective II 11M607

Computer Aided Manufacturing Laboratory

II

(c), (g),( j), (k)

0

0

3

1.5

11M608

Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Laboratory

I

(g), (i), (j)

2

0

2

3.0

11M609

Technical Seminar II

IV

(f)

-

-

-

1.0

17

1

5

24.01

Total

3


4

1

Seventh Semester Code No.

Objectives & Outcomes PEOs POs (a), (b), (g), (i), IV (k)

Course

L

T

P

C

3

0

0

3.0

11O701

Engineering Economics*

11M702

Mechatronics

I

(g), (i)

3

0

0

3.0

11M703

Finite Element Methods

II

(d), (i), (k)

3

1

0

3.5

11M704

Power Plant Engineering

II

(b)

3

0

0

3.0

Elective III

-

-

-

3.0

Elective IV

-

-

-

3.0

11M707

Computer Aided Engineering Laboratory

II

(d), (i), (k)

0

0

3

1.5

11M708

Mechatronics Laboratory

I

(g), (i)

0

0

3

1.5

11M709

Project Work Phase I

III

(e)

-

-

-

3.0

12

1

6

24.52

L

T

P

C

2

0

0

2.0

Elective V

-

-

-

3.0

Elective VI

-

-

-

3.0

-

-

-

12.0

2

0

0

20.02

Total Eighth Semester Code No. 11O801

11M804


Course Professional Ethics*

IV

Project Work Phase II

III

(e), (f), (h)

(e)

Total

11

Minimum credits to be earned. The maximum number of credits as well as the total number of L T P hours may vary depending upon the elective courses opted *

Common to all branches of B.E./B.Tech Minimum credits to be earned. The maximum number of credits as well as the total number of L T P hours may vary depending upon the elective courses opted

2


ELECTIVES L

T

P

C

LANGUAGE ELECTIVE I 11O10B

Basic English I

3

0

0

3.0

11O10C

Communicative English

3

0

0

3.0

3 3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 1 1 1 1 1

3.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.5 3.0

3 3 3 4 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3.0 3.0 3.0 4.0 3.0 3.0 3.0

LANGUAGE ELECTIVE II 11O20B 11O20C 11O20H 11O20G 11O20J 11O20F

Basic English II Advanced Communicative English Hindi German Japanese French

DISCIPLINE ELECTIVES Thermal Engineering 11M001 11M002 11M003 11M004 11M005 11M006 11M007

Internal Combustion Engines Computational Fluid Dynamics Direct Energy Conversion Techniques Cryogenic Engineering Refrigeration and Air-conditioning Renewable Energy sources Automobile Engineering

Design Engineering 11M008 11M009 11M010 11M011 11M012 11M013 11M014 11M015

Instrumentation and Control Engineering Design of Jigs and Fixtures and Press Tools Composite Materials and Mechanics Design of Heat Exchangers Vibration and Conditions Monitoring Mechanical Behavior of Materials Design of Mechanical Drives Engineering Innovation

Advanced Technology 11M016 11M017 11M018 11M019 11M020 11M021 11M022

Automotive Electronics Micro-Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS) Nano-Technology Design of Air–Craft Structures Flexible Manufacturing Systems Computer Integrated Manufacturing Non Traditional Machining Processes

5


Production Engineering 11M023 11M024 11M025 11M026 11M027 11M028 11M029

Advanced Casting Processes Metal Forming Process Planning and Cost Estimation Industrial Robotics Rapid prototyping Welding Technology Industrial Engineering

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0

3 3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0

3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0

3 3 3 3

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0

3 3

0 0

0 0

3.0 3.0

General and Management 11M030 11M031 11M032 11M033 11M034 11M035 11M036 11M037 11M038 11M039 11M040

Probability and Statistics Marketing Management Organizational Behavior and Management Principles of Management Optimization Techniques for Engineering Application Industrial Tribology Operation Management Project Management Six sigma concepts Toyota production system Non-Destructive Testing

PHYSICS ELECTIVES 11O0PA 11O0PB 11O0PC 11O0PD 11O0PE

Nano Science and Technology Laser Technology Electro-Optic Materials Vacuum Science and Deposition Techniques Semiconducting Materials and Devices

CHEMISTRY ELECTIVES 11O0YA 11O0YB 11O0YC 11O0YD

Polymer Chemistry and Processing Energy Storing Devices and Fuel Cells Chemistry of Nanomaterials Corrosion Science and Engineering

ENTREPRENEURSHIP ELECTIVES$ 11O001 11O002

Entrepreneurship Development I Entrepreneurship Development II€

6


2

ONE CREDIT COURSES*

11M0XA 11M0XB 11M0XC 11M0XD 11M0XE 11M0XF 11M0XG 11M0XH 11M0XI 11M0XJ 11M0XK 11M0XL 11M0XM 11M0XN 11M0XO 11M0XP 11M0XQ

Condition Monitoring Design for Manufacture and Assembly Design of Experiments using Taguchi Approach Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing Intelligent Optimization Techniques Lean Manufacturing Supply Chain Management Tool Design and Manufacturing Total Productive Maintenance Introduction to Piping Engineering Product Reliability Indian Patent Law Problem Solving Techniques Electric Vehicle Technology Automotive Exhaust System Continuous Improvement (KAIZEN) Embedded Programming

-

-

-

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

-

-

-

3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0

SPECIAL COURSES 11M0RA 11M0RB 11M0RC 11M0RD 11M0RE 11M0RF 11M0RG 11M0RH 11M0RI 11M0RJ 11M0RK 11M0RL

$ €

Design of Automotive Systems Geometric Modeling of CAD Design of Experiment Industrial Safety Plant Layout and material Handling Introduction to Automotive Controls Advanced Materials Characterization Techniques Work Study and Ergonomics Applied Mechanics and Design Product and Process Development Metrology in Industry Air Pollution Effects Measurements and Control

Offered during VI and VII semesters only Pre-requisite for this course is Entrepreneurship Development I

7

Department of Mechanical Engineering, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech. | Regulation 2011

11O101 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-I (Common to all Branches)

3 1 0 3.5 Objectives  Acquire knowledge in matrix theory, a part of linear algebra, which has wider application in engineering problems.  To make the student knowledgeable in the area of infinite series, their convergence and to solve first and higher order differential equations using Laplace transform. Programme Outcomes (POs) a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to get knowledge in basic concepts of engineering mathematics.  Able to improve problem evaluation technique.  Able to choose an appropriate method to solve a practical problem. ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No 1 2 3 4 5 Total

Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version) Remember Understand Apply Analyze/ Evaluate Create

Test I1

Test II1

20 40 30 10 100

20 40 30 10 100

Model Examination1 20 40 30 10 100

End Semester Examination 20 40 30 10 100

Remember 1 State Cayley Hamilton theorem. 2 Define eigen value and eigen vector of a matrix. 3. Write the definition of convergence and divergence of a series. 4. State the necessary and sufficient condition for the differential equation to be exact. 5. Write the Radius of curvature in cartesian coordinates. 6. Define evolute, centre of curvature and Circle of curvature. 7. Write the Leibneitz’s form of linear equation in x and y. 8. Write the general form of Euler’s and Legendre linear differential equations. 9. Define Convolution of two functions on Laplace transform. 10. State the existence conditions for Laplace transform. Understand

2 

2 5

1. Find eigen values and eigen vectors of the matrixA =  3

8 

1

0  1 3 

2. Find the radius of curvature at ( a,0) on the curve xy = a – x3 3. Find the circle of curvature of the parabola y2 = 12x at the point ( 3.6) 2

1

3

The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and model examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly, internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks.

8


dy + y = tan x dx

4. Solve cos2 x

5 Solve y (2xy + ex ) dx = ex dy. 6. Find evolute of the parabola x2 = 4ay. 7. Solve ( D2 + 4 ) y = x2 . 8 Solve ( D – 3 ) 2 y = x e-2x. 9. Find the Laplace transform of e2t sin3t. 10. Find the laplace transform of t cos4t.

Apply 3 1 1

1 by means of an orthogonal transformation  1 3 

1

1. Diagonalise the matrix A= 

3 1

1 2. Find the inverse of the matrix A =  4  1  3. Test the convergence of the series

7  3  us ing Cayley Hamilton theorem. 1 

3 2 2

3 3.4 3.4.5 + + + ..... 4 4.6 4.6.8

4. Using Convolution theorem, find inverse Laplace transform of

1 . ( s  1)( s  2)

5. Use method of variation of parameters , to solve (D 2+4)y = tan 2x 6. Use Laplace transform to solve ( D2 + 4D + 13) y = e-t sin t, given y = 0 and Dy = 0 at t = 0. 7. Test for convergence of the series

n

1 n

dy =1 dx dy 9. Use Leibnitz’s linear equation to solve ( x  1)  y  e 2 x ( x  1) 2 dx 8. Use Bernoulli’s equation to solve xy ( 1 + xy2 )



10. Use Laplace Transform to evaluate,

 0

e  t (sin 3t ) dt t

Analyze / Evaluate 2

2

2

1. Reduce the quadratic form 8x 1 +7x 2 +3x 3 -12x 1 x 2 -8x 2 x 3 +4x 3 x 1 to canonical form by orthogonal transformation and find the rank, signature, index and the nature. 2

2

2

2. Reduce 3x + 5y + 3z - 2yz + 2zx - 2xy to its canonical form through an orthogonal transformation and find the rank, signature, index and the nature. 3. Find the evolute of the cycloid : x = a(  +sin  ) ; y = a(1 - cos  ).

a a x  y   at  ,  4 4 1 2 3 5. Discuss the convergence of the series    ... 3.4.5 4.5.6 5.6.7 4. Find the circle of curvature of

9


1 1  2 6. Verify Cayley-Hamilton theorem for the matrix A=  . Hence find its inverse.  1  1 2  1  1 2  2 7. Using the method of variation of parameters, solve (D + a 2) y = tan ax.

8. Solve (x2D2 + 4xD + 2) y = x2 +

1 . x2

9. Find the envelope of the straight line x  y  1 , here a and b are connected by the relation a2 + b2 = c2 a b 10. Find the Laplace transform of the following functions (i) (t + 2t 2)2

(ii) sin2 2t

(iii) sin 3t cos 2t

Unit I Matrices Characteristic equation - eigen values and eigen vectors of a real matrix - properties of eigen values Cayley–Hamilton theorem- Reduction of a real matrix to a diagonal form- Orthogonal matrices- Quadratic form -Reduction of a quadratic form to a canonical form by orthogonal transformation-application to engineering problems. 9 Hours Unit II Series and Differential Calculus Series- Convergences and divergence- Comparison test– Ratio test - Curvature in Cartesian CoordinatesCentre and radius of curvature - Circle of curvature – Evolutes –Envelopes – application to engineering problems. 9 Hours Unit III Differential Equation of First Order Linear differential equation of first order-exact-integrating factor- Euler’s equation-Bernoulli’s-modelingapplication to engineering problems. 9 Hours Unit IV Differential Equations of Higher Order Linear differential equations of second and higher order with constant and variable coefficients - Cauchy’s and Legendre’s linear differential equations - method of variation of parameters –application of engineering problems. 9 Hours Unit V Laplace Transforms Laplace Transform- conditions for existence(statement only) -Transforms of standard functions – properties (statement only) - Transforms of derivatives and integrals - Initial and Final value theorems (statement only) - Periodic functions - Inverse transforms - Convolution theorems(statement only) - Applications of Laplace transforms for solving the ordinary differential equations up to second order with constant coefficients-application to engineering problems. 9 Hours Total: 45+15 Hours

10


Text Books 1. B S Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publications , New Delhi 2000 . 2. K A Lakshminarayanan, K.Megalai, P.Geetha and D.Jayanthi, Mathematics for Engineers, Volume I, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi. 2008. Reference Book 1. P. Kandasamy, K. Gunavathy and K. Thilagavathy, Engineering Mathematics, Volume I, S. Chand and Co., New Delhi-2009. 2. T. Veerarajan , Engineering Mathematics , Tata McGraw Hill Publications , New Delhi 2008. 3. E. Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 8th Edition, John Wiley and Sons, Inc, Singapore, 2008. C. Ray Wylie and C. Louis Barrett, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, 2003

11


11O102 ENGINEERING PHYSICS (Common to all branches) 30 0 3 Objectives  To impart fundamental knowledge in the areas of acoustics, crystallography and new engineering materials  To apply fundamental knowledge in the area of LASERS and fiber optics  To use the principles of quantum physics in the respective fields  At the end of the course the students are familiar with the basic principles and applications of physics in various fields Program Outcome (POs) a)

The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them

Course Outcomes (COs) At the end of the course, the student will be able to  learn the basic concepts of acoustics and ultrasonics.  develop applications for real world problems such as designing acoustic buildings and study the basics and applications of crystal physics.  analyze the construction, working and applications of laser. ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6

2

Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version) Remember Understand Apply Analyze Evaluate Create Total

Test 1*

Test 2*

Model Examination*

25 25 20 20 10 100

25 25 20 20 10 100

20 25 20 20 15 100

Semester End Examination 20 25 20 20 15 100

Remember 1. Give the classifications of sound. 2. Write a note on loudness. 3. Define decibel. 4. What is meant by reverberation time? 5. Define magnetostriction effect. 6. Give the classification of crystals. 7. Define Miller indices. 8. Define lattice and unit cells. 9. Mention the applications of X-ray diffraction. 10. Write a short note on air wedge. 11. List the applications of air wedge method. 12. Give the applications of LASER. 13. Give the classification of laser based on refractive index. 14. Write a note on holography. 15. Draw the block diagram of fiber optic communication system. 16. Define the term Compton effect.

22*

The marks secured in Test 1 and Test 2 will be converted to 20 and Model examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks.

12


17. 18. 19. 20. 21.

What is the physical significance of wave function? What are metallic glasses? Write a note on shape memory alloys. Mention the merits of nano materials. List the advantages of ceramic materials.

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

How Weber-Fechner law is formulated? Explain the characteristics of loudness. Elucidate the significance of timber. How the magnetostriction effect is utilized in the production of ultrasonic waves? What is the importance of reverberation time in the construction of building? Give the importance of lattice and lattice planes in a crystal. How do you measure the d-spacing? How do you calculate the packing factor of BCC structure? How air wedge is used in determining the flatness of a thin plate? Give the importance of optical pumping in the production of LASER. What are the various steps involved in holography? How can you derive the acceptance angle in fiber? Why the wave function is called as probability density? Why the wave function is finite inside the potential well? Why the particle is not escaping through the walls of the well? How ceramic materials are prepared by slip casting technique? What are the advantages of nano materials?

Apply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

Discuss the factors affecting the acoustics of buildings. Ultrasonic waves are electromagnetic waves. Justify. Sketch the circuit diagram for piezo electric oscillator. How can you determine the velocity of ultrasonic by acoustic grating? Explain how Miller indices are used in crystal structures? How do you calculate the packing factor for FCC structure? Draw the crystal lattice for (110) plane. Why does air wedge occur only in the flat glass plates? Explain the various steps involved in holography techniques. Discuss the particle in a one dimensional box by considering infinite length of well. Explain how shape memory alloy change its shape? How can you prepare the nano materials synthesized by sol gel technique?

Analyze/ Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Compare magnetostriction and piezo-electric method in the production of ultrasonic waves. Differentiate musical sound and noises. Compare the packing factor of BCC, FCC and HCP structures. Distinguish between photography and holography. Compare slip casting and isostatic pressing.

13


Unit I Acoustics and Ultrasonics Acoustics: Classification of sound – characteristics of musical sound – loudness – Weber – Fechner law – decibel – absorption coefficient – reverberation – reverberation time – Sabine’s formula (growth & decay). Factors affecting acoustics of buildings and their remedies. Ultrasonics: Ultrasonic production – magnetostriction - piezo electric methods. Applications: Determination of velocity of ultrasonic waves (acoustic grating) - SONAR. The phenomenon of cavitation. 9 Hours Unit II Crystallography Crystal Physics: Lattice – unit cell – Bravais lattices – lattice planes – Miller indices – ‘d’ spacing in cubic lattice – calculation of number of atoms per unit cell – atomic radius – coordination number – packing factor for SC, BCC, FCC and HCP structures - X-ray Diffraction: Laue’s method – powder crystal method. Crystal defects. 9 Hours Unit III Waveoptics Interference: Air wedge – theory – uses – testing of flat surfaces – thickness of a thin wire. LASER: Types of lasers – Nd – YAG laser – CO2 laser – semiconductor laser (homojunction). Applications: Holography – construction – reconstruction – uses. Fiber Optics: Principle of light transmission through fiber expression for acceptance angle and numerical aperture - types of optical fibers (refractive Index profile, mode) fiber optic communication system (block diagram only) Laser gas sensors . 9 Hours Unit IV Modern Physics Quantum Physics: Development of quantum theory – de Broglie wavelength – Schrödinger’s wave equation – time dependent – time independent wave equations – physical significance – applications – particle in a box (1d). X-rays: Scattering of X-rays – Compton Effect – theory and experimental verification. Degenerate and non degenerate. 9 Hours Unit V New Engineering Materials Metallic glasses: Manufacturing – properties – uses. Shape Memory Alloys: Working principle – shape memory effect – applications. Nanomaterials: Preparation method – sol gel technique – mechanical – magnetic characteristics – uses. Ceramics: Manufacturing methods – slip casting – isostatic pressing – thermal and electrical properties - uses. Carbon nano tubes and applications. 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbooks 1. V. Rajendran, Engineering Physics, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2011. 2. P. K. Palanisami, Physics for Engineers, Vol. 1, Scitech Pub. (India) Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2002. References 1. M. N. Avadhanulu and P G Kshirsagar, A Textbook of Engineering Physics, S Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2005 2. S. O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, New Age International Publication, New Delhi, 2006. 3. V. Rajendran and A Marikani, Physics I, TMH, New Delhi, 2004. 4. Arthur Beiser, Concepts of Modern Physics, TMH, 2008. 5. R. K. Gaur and S L Gupta, Engineering Physics, Dhanpat Rai Publishers, New Delhi, 2006

14


Language Elective I (Common to all Branches) 3 0 0 3.0

15


11O202 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE (Common to all branches) 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives   

Imparting knowledge on principles of environmental science and engineering Understanding the concepts of ecosystem, biodiversity and impact of environmental pollution Awareness on value education, population and social issues

Program Outcomes (POs) a)

The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them h) The graduates will develop capacity to understand professional and ethical responsibility and will display skills required for continuous and lifelong learning and upgradation Course Outcomes (COs) At the end of the course, the students will be able to  comprehend the importance of environment, its purpose, design, exploitation of natural resources and perspectives.  understand fundamental physical and biological principles that govern natural processes and role of professionals in protecting the environment from degradation.  understand current environmental challenges like pollution and its management. ASSESSMENT PATTERN S.No 1 2 3 4 5 6


Test I

Test II

25 25 20 20 10 100

25 25 20 20 10 100

Model Examination 15 25 20 20 20 100


Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 

Give the scope and importance of environmental studies. Distinguish between renewable and non- renewable resources. Explain the impacts of mining on forests. Explain why fresh water is a precious resource and classification of different water pollutants? What are the Impacts of modern agriculture? State the two energy laws and give examples that demonstrate each law. List the physical, chemical, and biological factors responsible for soil formation. Give examples of point and nonpoint sources of pollution. Draw a food web that includes ten or more aquatic organisms. Distinguish between primary and secondary pollutants.

The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks.

16


11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30.

Identify the four parts of the atmosphere. Describe secondary and primary succession with suitable examples. Define the term extinction. Relate the concept of food web and food chain to trophic levels. Describe energy flow in a ecosystem. Define the roles of producers, herbivore, carnivore, omnivore, scavenger, parasite and decomposer. List some of the components of an ecosystem. Distinguish between the biotic and abiotic factors in an ecosystem. Give some impacts of water pollution. Explain the source and effects of e waste. What is the loudest sound possible? What are the laws regarding noise pollution? What is rainwater harvesting? Discuss the concept and reactions of acid rain. Describe the salient features of Wildlife (protection) Act, 1972. What is 3R approach? Give the effects of nuclear fallout. Differentiate between mortality and natality. What is exponential growth and zero population growth? What are the objectives and elements of value education?

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

Explain why providing adequate food for all of the world's people is so difficult? Rank the five major sources of energy used to produce electricity and classify the energy sources as renewable or nonrenewable. Describe the causes of desertification and its preventive measures. Describe the advantages and disadvantages of the green revolution. Explain the relationship between technology and global warming. Describe any three health effects of air pollution. Identify "greenhouse gases" and explain how they cause the "greenhouse effect". Identify a few plants and animals with the various biomes. Explain the importance of primary species. Explain the five major types of species interactions and give examples of each. Environmental problems involve social, political, and economic issues—Justify. What problems does noise pollution cause to animals? What type of pollution threatens wetlands? What are the major measures to attain sustainability? Why is urban energy requirement more than rural requirement? What are the major limitations to successful implementation of our environmental legislation? Explain the concept of Malthusian theory. How age-structure pyramids serve as useful tools for predicting population growth trends of a nation? Discuss various issues and measures for women and child welfare at international and national level.

Apply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Compare the energy efficiencies of any two inventions. Name some alternatives to pesticides. Identify four different habitats found in bodies of water and give examples of organisms that live in each habitat. Explain how we could reduce air pollution? What are the measures to be taken to reduce your own noise pollution? List the top ten polluted countries in the world? Identify the grants available for rain water harvesting in buildings?

17


8. What are the major implications of enhanced global warming? 9. Discuss the methods implemented by government to control HIV/AIDS. 10. What is the role of an individual in prevention of pollution? Analyze/ Evaluate 1. 2. 3.

List reasons why it is important that we seek alternatives to fossil fuels. Explain why fresh water is often in short supply? Give examples of human-made sources of radiation and explain how human-made sources differ from natural sources of radiation.

Unit I Introduction to Environmental Studies and Natural Resources Environment: Definition- scope - importance – need for public awareness. Forest resources: Use –over exploitation- deforestation - case studies- mining - effects on forests and tribal people. Water resources: Use – over utilization of surface and ground water- floods – drought - conflicts over water. Mineral resources: Use – exploitation - environmental effects of extracting and using mineral resources - case studies. Food resources: World food problems - changes caused by agriculture and overgrazing - effects of modern agriculture- fertilizer-pesticide problems - water logging - salinity -case studies. Energy resources: Growing energy needs - renewable and non renewable energy sources. Land resources: Land as a resource land degradation - soil erosion. Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources. Documentation of the effect of degradation of forest resource. 9 Hours Unit II Ecosystems and Biodiversity Concept of an ecosystem: Structure and function of an ecosystem – producers - consumers -decomposers – energy flow in the ecosystem – ecological succession – food chains - food webs and ecological pyramids. Types of ecosystem: Introduction - characteristic features - forest ecosystem - grassland ecosystem - desert ecosystem - aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries). Biodiversity: Introduction– definition (genetic - species –ecosystem) diversity. Value of biodiversity: Consumptive use productive use – social values – ethical values - aesthetic values. Biodiversity level: Global - national local levels- India as a mega diversity nation- hotspots of biodiversity. Threats to biodiversity: Habitat loss - poaching of wildlife – man wildlife conflicts – endangered and endemic species of India. Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ conservation of biodiversity - field study. Documentation of the endangered flora and fauna in your native place. 9 Hours Unit III Environmental Pollution Pollution: Definition –air pollution - water pollution - soil pollution - marine pollution - noise pollution thermal pollution - nuclear hazards. Solid waste management: Causes - effects - control measures of urban and industrial wastes. Role of an individual in prevention of pollution - pollution case studies. Disaster management: Floods – earthquake - cyclone - landslides. Electronic wastes. Investigation on the pollution status of Bhavani river. 9 Hours Unit IV Social Issues and Environment Sustainable development : Unsustainable to sustainable development – urban problems related to energy. Water conservation - rain water harvesting - watershed management. Resettlement and rehabilitation of people. Environmental ethics: Issues - possible solutions – climate change - global warming and its effects on flora and fauna - acid rain - ozone layer depletion - nuclear accidents - nuclear holocaust - wasteland reclamation - consumerism and waste products. Environment protection act: Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) act – water (Prevention and control of Pollution) act – wildlife protection act – forest conservation act – issues involved in enforcement of environmental legislation.

18


Analyze the recent steps taken by government of India to prevent pollution. 9 Hours Unit V Human Population and Environment Human population: Population growth - variation among nations – population explosion – family welfare programme and family planning – environment and human health – Human rights – value education – HIV / AIDS, Swine flu – women and child welfare . Role of information technology in environment and human health. Population explosion in India, China – the present and future scenario. 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbooks 1. 2.

T. G. Jr. Miller, Environmental Science, Wadsworth Publishing Co., 2004. Raman Sivakumar, Introduction to Environmental Science and Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, New Delhi, 2010.

References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Bharucha Erach, The Biodiversity of India, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmedabad India, 2010 . S. Divan, Environmental Law and Policy in India, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2001. K. D. Wager, Environmental Management, W. B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, USA, 1998. W. P. Cunningham, Environmental Encyclopedia, Jaico Publising House, Mumbai, 2004. S. K. Garg, R. Garg, R. Garg, Ecological & Environmental Studies, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2006.

19


11O105 BASICS OF CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING 4

0

0

4.0

Objectives  To impart basic knowledge in the field of Civil Engineering focusing building materials, surveying, foundation and transportation Engineering  To impart basic knowledge in the field of Mechanical Engineering focusing on generation of power from various natural resources and to know about various types of Boilers and Turbines used for power generation and to understand the working of IC engines and basic manufacturing processes Program Outcome (POs) a)


Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to understand the fundamental philosophy of Civil engineering and enable them to work together in a multidisciplinary technical team.  Able to identify the nature of building components, functions, construction practices and material qualities  Able to Understand the manufacturing processes like casting, welding, machining operations  Able to Understand the construction and working of IC engines and refrigerators  To Know about the working principle of boilers, turbines and various power plants utilizing conventional and non-conventional sources of energy ASSESSMENT PATTERN Bloom’s Taxonomy S. No. (New Version) 1 Remember 2 Understand 3 Apply 4 Analyze / Evaluate 5 Create Total

Test I†

Test II†

40 30 20 100

40 30 20 100

Model Examination† 40 30 20 100

Semester End Examination 40 30 20 100

Remember 1. What are the classifications of stones? 2. What is the frog in a brick? 3. What is quarrying? 4. What do you mean by dressing of stones? 5. What are the systems of bearing? 6. How the surveying is classified based on purpose? 7. Define Benchmark and state its effects. 8. What are the accessories used in chain surveying? 9. Define bearing of a line. 10. Define leveling & state its objectives. 11. State the objectives and requirement of good foundation. 12. Mention the site improvement techniques. 13. Define bearing capacity of soil. 14. How stone masonry is classified? †

The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated by giving equal weightage (50%) for both Civil and Mechanical Engineering

20


15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59.

Define Beam, Column and Lintel. What are the basic forms of roof? How floors are classified based on floor finish? List the materials used for damp proofing. How roads are classified? What do you mean by W.B. M. road? Define Gauge. What is a permanent way? How bridges are classified? What are the advantages of railways? What are docks? Classify sleepers. What are the requirements of a sleeper? What are the types of traffic signs? What are the advantages of road signs? What are the prohibitory signs? What is the main function of hangars? What are the sources of Energy Generation? What are the accessories used in a boiler? Define Turbine. Compare and contrast fire tube and water tube boiler? List the types of steam Turbines? Classify the I.C engine. List out the Part of the I.C. Engine. Define the terms: Top Dead Center, Bottom Dead Center. Define the term: Compression Ratio. What are the different sources of energy? Name four non-renewable sources of energy. Name some renewable sources of energy. Name four solid/liquid/gaseous/ fuels. Name two nuclear fuels. What are the advantages of wind energy? State some of the applications of steam boilers. Classify different steam boilers. What do you understand by Scavenging What do you understand by the term IC engine? What are the operations performed on a Lathe? What is impulse turbine? Give example. What is Reaction turbine? Give example. Define Boiler. Classify Boilers. List out the Boiler Mountings and Accessories. Define Refrigeration. Define refrigerant. Give some examples of refrigerant. Define C.O.P.

Understand 1. What are the qualities of good building stone? 2. What are the various stages of manufacturing brick? 3. What is mean by concrete? 4. State the properties of cement concrete. 5. What is curing of concrete? 6. What is water – cement ratio? 7. What is the difference between a plan and a map? 8. Differentiate between plane surveying and geodetic surveying.

21


9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60.

State the principles of surveying. What is the use of cross – staff? What are the functions of foundation? Differentiate between shallow foundation & deep foundation What are the causes of failure of foundation? Compare stone masonry and brick masonry. Why bonding in brick wall is necessary? State the special features of English and Flemish bond. Define super elevation. What are the uses of fish plates? What are the necessities of highway drainage? What are the three stages of construction of a new railway track? Define the term visibility. Define passenger flow. Differentiate between wharf and jetty. What are the requirements of a good harbour? What are the requirements of a good naval port? How Solar Energy is generated? How Energy is Generated using steam Turbines? How power plants are classified? Compare and contrast reaction and impulse turbines. How energy is generated from Diesel Power Plants? What is the difference between renewable and non-renewable sources of energy? Mention the applications of solar energy. What is the function of a hydraulic turbine? What is the function of a surge tank? What is the function of a moderator? What are the functions of a control rod? Name of the important components of diesel power plant. Name the important parts of gas turbine. State the function of condenser in steam power plant. What are the requirements of a good boiler? What are the specific advantages of water-tube boilers? What are the aims of pre-heating of air in a boiler? State the function of economizer. How does a fusible plug function as a safety device? What is the function of a steam nozzle? What is the function of flywheel? What is the function of a spark plug? What is the function of a fuel injector in diesel engine? Why is cooling necessary in an IC engine? Define compression ratio of an IC engine. List the ports used in a 2-stroke engine What are the requirements of a good boiler? What is the difference between impulse and reaction turbine? How energy is generated from Nuclear Power Plants? How energy is generated from Hydro Power Plants? Compare and contrast 4 stroke and 2 stroke engine. What is the Purpose of a fusible Plug? Differentiate petrol & diesel engines. How Taper Turning is carried out in Lathes? Various Mechanical properties of Cast Iron, Steel and HSS.

22


Apply/Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

What is Hardness? What are the operations to be performed while setting up a plane table at a station? Explain the steps involved in measuring vertical angle of an object using theodolite Explain the methods to improve bearing capacity of soil What are the points to be observed in the construction of brick masonry? Explain the method of construction of cement concrete flooring. What are the methods of applying surface dressing in bituminous roads? Explain the construction steps in bituminous macadam road. How can you express the hardness number of stones? Apply the concept of power generation and saving from other energy sources Apply the concept of Refrigeration in Heat removal and Heat addition Draw the pressure-velocity diagram for a single stage impulse turbine.

Unit I Introduction to Civil Engineering History, development and scope of Civil Engineering - Functions of Civil Engineers. Construction Materials: Characteristics of good building materials such as stones - Bricks, A.C. sheets - G.I. sheets and Ceramic tiles - Timber, cement - Aggregates and concrete. Surveying: Definition and purpose – Classification – Basic principles – Measurement of length by chains and tapes – Calculation of area of a plot – Measurement of bearings and angles using a prismatic compass – Leveling – Contours Application of contours 10 Hours Unit II General Concepts Relating to Buildings Selection of site – Basic functions of buildings – Major components of buildings. Foundations: Purpose of foundation – Bearing capacity of soils – Types of foundations. Proper methods of construction of: Brick masonry – Stone masonry – Hollow Block masonry. Beams – Lintels – Columns – Flooring – Doors and windows – Roofing Damp proof course – Surface finishes 10 Hours Unit III Transportation Engineering Classification of Highways – Cross sections of water bound macadam - Bituminous and cement concrete roads – Traffic signs and signals. Importance of railways - Gauges – Components of a permanent way – Classification of bridges – Components of Airport Examples of Marvelous Structures 10 Hours Unit IV Engineering Materials and Manufacturing Processes Classification of Engineering materials, Mechanical properties and uses of cast iron, steel, and High Speed Steel. Introduction to casting process, Green sand moulding - Pattern, Melting furnaces - Cupola and Electric Furnace. Metal Forming - Forging Process. Introduction to Arc and Gas Welding. Centre Lathe Specifications - Principal parts - Operations - Straight turning, Step turning, Taper turning methods, Knurling, Thread cutting methods, Facing, Boring, and Chamfering - Lathe tools and Materials. Drilling – Radial drilling machine - Specification and Operation Milling operation 10 Hours

23


Unit V Internal Combustion Engines and Refrigeration Classification of IC engines, Main components of IC engines, working of a 4 stroke & 2 stroke petrol & diesel engine, differences between 4 stroke and 2 stroke engine, Lubrication and Cooling systems in IC Engines. Refrigeration: Working Principle of Vapour Compression & Vapour Absorption System, Domestic refrigerator Domestic air conditioning 10 Hours Unit VI Alternate Sources of Energy, Power Plants and Boilers Solar, Wind, Tidal, Geothermal and Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion (OTEC). Power Plant: Classification of Power Plants- Steam - Nuclear, Diesel, and Hydro Power Plants. Types of Boilers – Simple Vertical, Babcock and Wilcox and La-Mont Boiler, Differences between fire tube and water tube boiler. Types of steam turbines- working of a single stage impulse and reaction turbines Biomass and Biofuels in power generation 10 Hours Total: 60 Hours Textbooks 1. 2.

M. S. Palanichamy, Basic Civil Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2009 G. Shanmugam & S Ravindran, Basic Mechanical Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2010


N. Arunachalam, Bascis of Civil Engineering, Pratheeba Publishers, 2000 B. K. Sarkar, Thermal Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2008 P. N. Rao, Manufacturing Technology: Foundry, Forming and Welding, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2003. S. R. J. Shantha Kumar, Basic Mechanical Engineering, Hi-tech Publications, Mayiladuthurai, 2000 http://www.tutorvista.co.in/content/science/science-ii/sources-energy/sources-energyindex.php

24


11O205 BASICS OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING (Common to all branches except EEE, ECE, EIE) 4 0 0 4.0 Objectives  To understand the basics concepts of electric circuits & magnetic circuits  To learn the operations of electrical machines  To impart knowledge in the concepts of Communication systems Program Outcomes (POs) a) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in Mechanical, Mechatronics and Electrical Engineering as well as IT companies g) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to analyze the power in single phase AC systems  Able to derive an equation for self and mutual inductance  Able to determine the characteristics of Bipolar junction transistors ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No. 1 2 3 4 5

Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)

Test I†

Test II†

Model Examination†

Semester End Examination

Remember Understand Apply Analyze / Evaluate Create Total

10 20 30 40 100

10 20 30 40 100

10 20 30 40 100

10 20 30 40 100

Remember 1. What is an inductor? 2. State Ohm’s law. 3. State the operating principle of a transformer. 4. Draw the circuit symbols of i] step up transformer ii] step down transformer. 5. What is resistor? Give its symbol. 6. What are impurities? 7. Draw the neat-labelled I-V characteristics of zener diode. 8. Draw circuit symbol of diode and zener diode, 9. Which process is used to convert the material into extrinsic? 10. What is junction barrier? 11. Define the term rectification and efficiency 12. What is done in the base region of a transistor to improve its operation. 13. What is BJT? 14. List the needs for modulation. 15. Draw symbol of 2-input NOR gate & write its truth table. Understand 1. Explain Ohm’s law relating to (V), (I) and (R). †

The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks

25


2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

Explain the working principle of a transformer. Explain the working principle of an induction motor. Discuss intrinsic semiconductor are pure semiconductors. Explain pentavalent impurities with example. Explain trivalent impurities with example. Explain in brief, knee voltage of diode. Explain in brief, breakdown voltage of diode. Explain the operation of P-N Junction diode when forward and reverse bias. Explain the formation of depletion region in P-N Junction. Explain Zener diode as voltage regulator. With a neat circuit diagram explain the working of a half wave rectifier. Derive an expression for the efficiency of a half wave rectifier. With a neat circuit diagram, explain the working of full wave rectifier. What is Ex-OR gate? Explain its working & tabulate the truth table.

Apply 1. 2. 3.

Why opamp is called as linear amplifier? Why impurities are used? Calculate the value of resistance having co lour code sequence Red , Yellow, orange and Gold. 4. Why do we use transformer in rectifier circuit? 5. Which impurity play important role in formation of P type semiconductor? 6. Calculate the % ripple factior, if the dc output voltage 20 V and ac voltage 2V. 7. Three resistors are connected in series across a 12V battery. The first resistance has a value of 2 Ω, second has a voltage drop of 4V and third has power dissipation of 12 W. Calculate the value of the circuit current. 8. A 25 Ω resistor is connected in parallel with a 50 Ω resistor. The current in 50 Ω resistor is 8A. What is the value of third resistance to be added in parallel to make the total line current as 15A. 9. A toroidal air cored coil with 2000 turns has a mean radius of 25cm, diameter of each turn being 6cm. If the current in the coil is 10A, find mmf, flux, reluctance, flux density and magnetizing force. 10. The self inductance of a coil of 500turns is 0.25H.If 60% of the flux is linked with a second coil of 10500 turns. Calculate a) the mutual inductance between the two coils and b) emf induced in the second coil when current in the first coil changes at the rate of 100A/sec. 11. 2.An air cored toroidal coil has 480 turns, a mean length of 30cm and a cross-sectional area of 5 cm2.Calculate a)the inductance i\of the coil and b) the average induced emf, if a current of 4 A is reversed in 60 milliseconds Analyze / Evaluate 1. Why inductor is referred as a choke? 2. Why single phase induction motor are not self starting? 3. How the barrier potential is developed across the P-N Junction, what are the approximate values this potential for Germenium and Silicon? 4. Trivallent impurity is called as donor impurity, comment. 5. Distinguish with diagram, then solid material on the basis of band diagram. 6. How a zener diode can be used for voltage regulation in power supply? 7. How voltage source is converted into current source and vice versa? 8. Differentiate P type and N type semiconductor 9. Distinguish between metal, semiconductor and insulator. Give examples of each. 10. Distinguish between half wave and full wave rectifier Create 1. Design a half wave uncontrolled rectifier and calculate the ripple factor. 2. Design a full wave uncontrolled rectifier and calculate the efficiency.

26


Unit I Electric Circuits Definition of Voltage, Current, Power & Energy, Ohm’s law, Kirchoff’s Law & its applications – simple problems, division of current in series & parallel circuits, generation of alternating EMF, definition of RMS value, average value, peak factor, form factor. Power in single phase AC – three phase system. Star to delta and delta to star transformations, R-L and R-C series circuit 12 Hours Unit II Magnetic Circuits Definition of MMF, Flux, Reluctance, Properties of Flux lines, Self & Mutual Inductance, Ampere Turns, Series & parallel magnetic circuits, Comparison between Electric & magnetic circuits, Law of Electromagnetic induction, Fleming’s Right & Left hand rule. Magnetic impedance, Effective resistance, Magnetic capacitivity 12 Hours Unit III Electrical Machines Construction, Type, Principle of Operation & Working Principle of DC Generator, DC Motor, Transformer, Induction Motor, Induction type single phase energy meter, Domestic wiring practice, Tube light circuit, Earthing & earthing methods. Characteristics of DC generators and DC motors, 12 Hours Unit IV Electronics Engineering PN Junction diode & Zener diode – Characteristics – Half wave and full wave rectifier – Bipolar junction transistors – CB,CE, CC Configurations and characteristics – basic concepts of amplifiers and oscillators – Logic gates – Inverting, Non inverting amplifiers and Operational amplifiers- Basic Computer organization – Block diagram of Microprocessors (8085). Semiconductor theory, Diode clippers, op-amp parameters and applications 12 Hours Unit V Communication Engineering Introduction to communication systems – Need for modulation – Types- Block Diagram representation only – Block diagram of TV system – Introduction to cellular & mobile telephony- Block diagram of Optical and Satellite communication systems. Analog and digital signals, Transmission medium, Digital communication 12 Hours Total: 60 Hours Textbooks 1. T. K. Nagsarkar and M S Sukhija, Basic of Electrical Engineering, Oxford Press, 2005 2. R. Muthusubramaninan, S Salivahanan and K A Muraleedharan, Basic Electrical, Electronics and Computer Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004 References 1. J. A. Edminister, Electric Circuits, Schaum’s Series, McGraw Hill, 2005 2. Van Valkenbergm, Electric Circuits and Network Analysis, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2005 3. Smarjith Ghosh, Fundamentals of Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2005

27


11O208 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS (Common for CE,EEE,ME,MXE,BT,IT & TT (I Semester); AE,CSE,ECE,EIE & FT (II Semester) 2 0 2 3.0 Objectives    

Upon Successful completion of this course, the student should be able to: Understand and appreciate the importance of Engineering Graphics in Engineering Understand the basic principles of Technical/Engineering Drawing Understand the different steps in producing drawings according to BIS conventions


The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them d) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of engineering design. Understanding theconcept generation, design optimization and evaluation. Knowing the fundamentals of intellectual property rights. Students will be able to effectively design various engineering components and make process plan for the production Course Outcomes (COs)   

Able to understand the pictorial representation Able to understand different views of orthographic projection Able to draw the three dimensional object from the given orthographic views

ASSESSMENT PATTERN Internal Assessment


Preparation

10

15

Observation and Results

15

25

Record Mini-project/ Model examination/ Viva-voce

10

-

15

10

50

50

Total Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

Define Graphic communication or Drawing. List the different drawing instruments. What is blueprint? What are the applications of engineering graphics? What are the two types of drawings? What are the different types of projections? Define Orthographic projection. What do you mean by I angle projection? What is III angle projection? Define Plan. What is Elevation? List the various types of lines. What do you mean by a Plane? Name the five standard sizes of drawing sheets that are specified by BIS. Give the BIS codes for Lettering, Dimensioning and lines.

28


16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25.

State few important dimensioning rules. What are the two types of Solids? What is Representative Fraction (RF)? What is a Frustum? Define Truncation. Define Section Plane and give its types. What do you mean by development of surfaces? State the principle of Isometric projection. What is Isometric View? Define Isometric scale.

Understand 1. 2. 3.

When an object is said to be in III quadrant? Why are the projectors perpendicular to the Projection Plane in the Orthographic projection? What is the Shape of the section obtained when a cone is cut by a plane passing through the apex and center of the base of the cone? 4. Why II and IV angle projections are not used in industries? 5. What are the differences between I angle and III angle projections? 6. Which method is suitable for developing a truncated prism? 7. Why is a hexagonal headed bolt and nut more common in use as compared to square headed bolt and nut? 8. Which is the most suitable method for drawing the Perspective Projection? 9. What are the prerequisites for Free hand sketching? 10. What are the two methods used to obtain the Isometric view of a circle? 11. Why CAD is preferred over Conventional drafting? Apply/Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

13.

How will you project a point which is above HP and in front of VP? How will you project a point which is below HP and behind VP? What is the method used to determine the True length and inclination of a line inclined to both the planes? How will you project a prism whose axis is inclined to HP and parallel to VP by Change of Position method? How will you project a cylinder when the axis is inclined to VP and parallel to HP by change of position method? How will you project a pyramid whose axis is inclined to HP and parallel to VP by Change of Position method? How will you project a cone when the axis is inclined to VP and parallel to HP by change of position method? How will you obtain the Sectional view of solids in simple vertical position cut by planes inclined to any one reference plane? How will you develop the lateral surfaces of simple and truncated solids? How will you develop the complete surfaces of Frustums? Construct an isometric scale. A cricket ball thrown from the ground level reaches the wicket keeper’s gloves. Maximum height reached by the ball is 5m. The ball travels a horizontal distance of 11m from the point of projection. Trace the path of the ball. The Pictorial view of an object is shown below. Draw the following views to full size scale. a) Elevation in the direction of arrow b) Left end elevation c) Plan

29


14. Read the dimensioned drawing shown below. Redraw the figure to full size and dimension it as per Indian Standards.

Q. No. 13

Q. No. 14

Unit I Concepts and Conventions Use of drafting instruments – BIS conventions and specifications – Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets – Lettering and dimensioning. General principles of orthographic projection – First angle projection – Layout of views – Projection of points, located in all quadrant and straight lines located in the first quadrant – Determination of true lengths and true inclinations. 6 Hours Unit II Projection of Solids Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is inclined to one reference plane by change of position method. 6 Hours Unit III Section of Solids and Development of Surfaces Sectioning of solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone in simple vertical position by cutting planes inclined to one Reference: plane – Obtaining the true shape of section. Development of lateral surfaces of simple solids – prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones. 6 Hours Unit IV Isometric Projection and Perspective Projection Principles of isometric projection – isometric scale – isometric projections of simple solids, pyramids, cylinders and cones. Orthographic projection - Systems of orthographic projection - First angle orthographic projection - Conversion of pictorial to orthographic views (Free hand). 6 Hours Unit V Introduction to AutoCAD and 2D Modeling Starting AutoCAD – Interfaces – Menus – Tool bars – Coordinates – Limits – Units – 2D commands – Drawing Commands - Creating a Point, Construction of Lines, Polyline, Multiline, Circles, Arcs, Rectangle, Polygon, Ellipse, Hatch, Text, Mtext, Linetypes – Edit and Modify commands - Copy, Move, Erase, Mirror, Zoom, Pan, Arrays, Trim, Break, Fillet, Chamfer, Redraw, Regen, Dimensioning, Colors, Layers – Exercises 6 Hours Total: 30+30 Hours

30


Textbook 1.

K. V. Natarajan, A Textbook: of Engineering Graphics, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai, 2006


S. Julyes Jaisingh, Engineering Graphics, Tri Sea Publishers, 2010 V. Rameshbabu, Engineering Graphics, VRB Publishers Pvt Ltd., 2009 K. Venugopal, Engineering Graphics, New Age International (P) Limited, 2002 N. D. Bhatt, Engineering Drawing, Charotar publishing House 2003 K. L. Narayana and P. Kannaiah, Engineering Graphics, Scitech Publications (Pvt) Limited-2002

List of Experiments 1. 2. 3. 4.

Projection of points located in all quadrants. Projection of straight lines located in the first quadrant inclined to both the planes. Determination of true lengths and true inclinations of Straight lines. Projection of Solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is inclined to one reference plane by change of position method. 5. Sectioning of solids in simple vertical position by cutting planes inclined to one reference plane and obtaining true shape of section. 6. Development of lateral surfaces of simple and truncated solids like prisms, pyramids cylinder and cone. 7. Isometric Projections / Views of Solids like prisms, pyramids and Cylinders. 8. Orthographic Projection of various components from pictorial views. 9. Drawing of front, top and side views from given pictorial views using AutoCAD. 10. Drawing sectional views of prism, pyramid and cylinder using AutoCAD. Total: 30 Hours Practical Schedule Sl. No

Experiment

Hours

1 2

Projection of points located in all quadrants

3

Projection of straight lines located in the first quadrant inclined to both the planes.

3

3 4

Determination of true lengths and true inclinations of Straight lines

3

Projection of Solids when the axis is inclined to one reference plane by change of position method.

3

5

Sectioning of solids in simple vertical position by cutting planes inclined to one reference plane and obtaining true shape of section

3

6 7 8 9

Development of lateral surfaces of simple and truncated solids. Isometric Projections / Views of Solids like prisms, pyramids and Cylinders. Orthographic Projection of various components from pictorial views.

3 3 3

Drawing of front, top and side views from given pictorial views using AutoCAD.

3

10

Drawing sectional views of prism, pyramid and cylinder using AutoCAD.

3

31


1O108 ENGINEERING PHYSICS LABORATORY (Common for AE,CSE, ECE & EIE & ME (I Semester); CE,EEE,BT,IT,TT & FT (II Semester) 0 0 2 1.0 Objectives    

To know how to execute experiments properly, presentation of observations and arrival of conclusions It is an integral part of any science and technology program To view and realize the theoretical knowledge acquired by the students through experiments At the end of the course, the students able to realize the theoretical knowledge acquired through experiments

Program Outcome (POs) a)


Course Outcomes (COs) At the end of the course, the student will be able to  Develop proper and efficient usage of instruments in the Laboratory.  Attain practical knowledge in physics principles and laws especially in optics, thermal physics and properties of matter by performing experiments.  Design experiments by using the concepts of optics, thermal physics and properties of matter for solving engineering problems. ASSESSMENT PATTERN

Preparation Execution Observation and Results Record Model Examination Viva Voce Total

Internal Assessment 10 10 10 5 10

Semester End Examination 15 15 15 -

5

5

50

50

List of Experiments (Any 10 Experiments) 1. Determination of moment of inertia and rigidity modulus of wire using torsion pendulum (symmetrical masses method). 2. Determination of Young’s modulus by non-uniform bending. 3. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee’s disc. 4. Determination of frequency of vibrating rod using Melde’s apparatus. 5. Determination of viscosity of a liquid - Poiseulle’s method. 6. Determination of thickness of a thin wire - air wedge method. 7. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum – grating. 8. Determination of refractive index of a liquid and solid using traveling microscope. 9. Determination of energy band gap of a semiconductor diode. 10. Determination of wavelength of LASER and particle size of a given powder. 11. Measurement of numerical aperture and acceptance angle of a optical fiber. 12. Young’s modulus – uniform bending (pin and microscope).

32


PRACTICAL SCHEDULE S.No

Total: 30 Hours Experiment

Hours

1.

Determination of moment of inertia and rigidity modulus of wire using torsion pendulum (symmetrical masses method).

3

2.

Determination of Young’s modulus by non-uniform bending.

3

3.

Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee’s disc.

3

4.

Determination of frequency of vibrating rod using Melde’s apparatus.

3

5.

Determination of viscosity of a liquid - Poiseulle’s method.

3

6.

Determination of thickness of a thin wire - air wedge method.

3

7.

Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum – grating.

3

8. 9.

Determination of refractive index of a liquid and solid using traveling microscope. Determination of energy band gap of a semiconductor diode.

3 3

10.

Determination of wavelength of LASER and particle size of a given powder.

3

33


11M209 WORKSHOP PRACTICE 0 0 2 1.0 Objectives  To learn the use of basic hand tools and  To know the need for safety in work place  To gain hands on experience on Carpentry, Fitting, Sheet metal, Plumbing, Arc welding, Foundry and Basic electrical circuits  To have the basic knowledge on working of domestic appliances

Program Outcome (POs) a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them Course Outcomes (COs)  Students will be able to use their skills during their project work  Students will be able to understand the practical difficulties encountered in industries during any assembly work  Students will be able to do simple electronic and electrical work throughout their carrier.  Students will be able to rectify simple problem connected with pipe fittings ASSESSMENT PATTERN Preparation Observation and Results Record Mini-Project/ Model Examination / Viva-Voce Total

Internal Assessment


10 10 10

20 10 -

20

20

50

50

Remember 1. What are the tools used in sheet metal work? 2. What are the types of joints in sheet metal work? 3. What is moulding? 4. What is green sand mould? 5. What is gas welding? 6. List out the types of flames in welding. 7. What is meant by carpentry? 8. What is the use of Saw? 9. What are the types of joints in pipe connection? 10. What is staircase wiring? 11. What is the working principle of centrifugal pump? 12. What are the types of valves in plumbing and where it is used? 13. List out the cutting tools used in carpentry with specification. 14. What are the necessary equipments used in Arc Welding? 15. What are the methods used in sheet metal work? 16. List out the types and components of Air- Conditioner. Understand 1. Compare the Refrigeration system with air Condition system. 2. How the refrigeration system works? 3. How will you select the suitable welding process for various materials? 4. How will make a V joint in the given MS flat?

34


5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

How will you make a green sand mould using solid pattern? How gadget like chair, sofa, table, cell phone stand by using welding joints? How metals are manufactured by using casting process? How cavity is formed by using pattern? How the wires are joined by soldering?

Apply / Evaluate 1. Sketch the wiring diagram for a room consist of two fans ,three tubelights, and one plug point. 2. Sketch the line diagram of the plumbing work carried out in your house. 3. Sketch all the wooden furniture present in your house in three dimensional view. 4. How will make a connection of basic pipe lines, using PVC pipes, that includes valves and taps? 5. How will form Staircase and Godown wiring? 6. Prepare a hexagonal shape pen stand by using power tools. 7. Prepare a cover with handle by using sheet metal to cover a motor. 8. Prepare a small trolley to carry wastage by using welding work. List of Experiments 1. Forming of simple objects using sheet metal. 2. Preparing a V joint from the given MS flat. 3. Demonstration of Assembly and Disassembly of centrifugal pump. 4. Making simple gadget like chair, sofa, table, cell phone stand by using welding joints. 5. Making simple gadget like pen stand, box, cell phone stand etc., by using power tools. 6. Making a connection of basic pipe lines, using PVC pipes, that includes valves and taps. 7. Demonstration of working of domestic appliances: Washing Machine/ Refrigerator and Window Air-Conditioner. 8. Preparing a half round joint from the given MS flat. 9. Preparing a green sand mould using solid pattern. 10. Staircase and Godown wiring. 11. Soldering practice. 12. Assembly and Disassembly of Computer System /Television. 13. Demonstration of working of domestic appliances: Mixie, Electric Iron/ Heater. Total: 30 Hours Practical Schedule SI. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Experiment Forming of simple objects using sheet metal. Preparing a V joint from the given MS flat. Demonstration of Assembly and Disassembly of centrifugal pump. Making simple gadget like chair, sofa, table, cell phone stand by using welding joints. Making simple gadget like pen stand, box, cell phone stand etc., by using power tools. Making a connection of basic pipe lines, using PVC pipes, that includes valves and taps. Demonstration of working of domestic appliances: Washing Machine/ Refrigerator and Window Air-Conditioner. Preparing a half round joint from the given MS flat. Preparing a green sand mould using solid pattern. Staircase and Godown wiring. Soldering practice. Assembly and Disassembly of Computer System /Television. Demonstration of working of domestic appliances: Mixie, Electric Iron/ Heater.

Hours 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 1

35


11O201 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS II (Common to all branches)

3 1 0 3.5 Objectives • Acquire knowledge to use multiple integrals to find area and volume of surfaces and solids respectively. • Have a good grasp of analytic functions, complex integration and their interesting properties and applications. Programme Outcomes (POs) a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to acquire more knowledge in basic concepts of engineering mathematics.  Able to improve problem evaluation technique.  Able to choose an appropriate method to solve a practical problem. ASSESSMENT PATTERN Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)

S. No 1 2 3 4 5

Remember Understand Apply Analyze/ Evaluate Create Total

Test I3

Test II1

Model Examination1

End Semester Examination

20 40

20 40

20 40

30 10 100

30 10 100

30 10 100

20 40 30 10 100

Remember 1. Define Jacobian in two dimensions. 2. State Green’s theorem. 3. Define directional derivative of a vector point function. 4. Define analytic function. 5. What is the formula for finding the residue of a double pole? 6. State Cauchy’s integral formula. 7. Write the necessary condition for a function f (z) to be analytic. 8. Write the formula for unit normal vector? 9. Write all types of singularities. 10. State the sufficient conditions for a function of two variables to have an extremum at a point.

Understand

3

1. If

u  2 xy, v  x 2  y 2 , x  r cos  , y  r sin  compute

2.

If

 (u, v ..  ( x, y )

 y x z x u u u  show that x 2 u  f  ,  y2  z2  0. . xz  x y z  xy


36


 y

3. Transform the integral

  f ( x, y)dxdy to polar coordinates. 0 0

2 x

4.

Change the order of integration in

  f x, y dydx . 0 0

j + (x-y+2z) k is solenoidal.

5.

Find a, such that (3x-2y+z) i + (4x+ay-z)

6. 7.

What is the greatest rate of increase of   xyz at (1,0,3)? Test the analyticity of the function w = sin z. 2

dw given w = tan z. dz dz 9. Evaluate  where c is the circle z  1 . 2 c ( z  3) 4 10. Find the residue of the function f ( z )  3 at its simple pole. z ( z  2) 8.

Find

Apply

u  x 4  y 4  2 x 2  4 xy  2 y 2 for extreme values. x y xy ,v 2. Check if u  are functionally dependent. If so find the relationship x y x  y 2 1.

Examine the function

between 3.

them.

By transforming into cylindrical polar coordinates evaluate

 ( x

2

 y 2  z 2 )dxdydz taken

R

over the region of space defined by x

2

 y  1 and 0  x  1 . 2



4.

Using Gauss divergence theorem evaluate





 F  nˆds where F  4 xz i  y

2





j  yz k and S

s

is

the surface of the cube bounded by x = 0, y = 0, z = 0, x = 1, y = 1, z = 1.

5.

When the function f(z) = u + iv is analytic, show that u = constant and v = constant are orthogonal.

6.

Determine the image of 1 < x < 2 under the mapping

7.

Find the area of the cardiod r = 4 ( 1+ cos ) using double integral.

8.

Apply Green’s theorem in the plane to evaluate

 (3x

w 2

1 . z

 8 y 2 )dx  (4 y  6 xy )dy

c

where C is the boundary of the region defined by x = 0, y = 0 and x + y = 1. 9.

If

u  log( x 2  y 2 ) , find v and f (z) such that f (z) = u + iv is analytic.

10. Using Cauchy’s integral formula evaluate

 C

z  3.

e z dz where C is the Circle ( z  2 ) ( z  1) 2

37


Analyze / Evaluate 1. Prove that

2. If

x

u v w are functionally dependent. ,y ,z  vw wu uv

g ( x, y)  (u, v) where u  x 2  y 2 , v  2 xy prove that 2 2g 2g  2 2 2      4 ( x  y )   u 2 x 2 y 2 v 2 

3. Evaluate the integration

   xyzdxdydz

.  

taken throughout the volume for which

x, y, z  0 and

x2  y 2  z 2  9 . 4. Evaluate the following integral by changing to spherical coordinates 1

1 x 2

  0

1 x 2  y 2

dxdydz



0

1  x2  y 2  z 2

0





. 



5. Verify Gauss divergence theorem for F  x i  y j  z k where S is the surface of the cuboid formed by the planes x= 0, x= a, y = 0, y = b, z = 0 and z = c. 2

2

2

6. Determine the bilinear transformation that maps the points -1, 0, 1 in the z-plane onto the points 0, i, 3i in the w-plane. 2 cos 2 7. Evaluate 0 5  4 cos  d . 

8. Using contour integration, evaluate

 0

9. Expand

f ( z) 

z

z  1z  3

x2 dx . x2  9 x2  4





as Laurent’s series valid in the regions:

1  z  3 and 0  z  1  2 . 10. Show that

F  (6 xy  z 3 )i  (3x 2  z ) j  (3xz 2  y)k is irrigational vector and find the

scalar potential function

 such that F   .

Unit I Functions of Several Variables Functions of two variables - Partial derivatives - Total differential - Derivative of implicit functions Maxima and minima - Constrained Maxima and Minima by Lagrangian Multiplier method - Jacobiansapplication to engineering problems. 9 Hours Unit II Multiple Integrals Double integration in cartesian and polar co-ordinates - Change of order of integration - change of variables- Area and volume by multiple integrals- application to engineering problems. 9 Hours

38


Unit III Vector Calculus Gradient - divergence - curl- line - surface and volume integrals - Green’s - Gauss divergence and Stokes’ theorems (statement only) - application to engineering problems. 9 Hours Unit IV Analytic Functions Analytic functions- Necessary condition of analytic function-Sufficient condition of analytic function(statement only)- properties - Determination of analytic function using Milne Thomson’s method, conformal mappings - Mappings of w= z + a, az, 1/z, ez- bilinear transformation - application to engineering problems. 9 Hours Unit V Complex Integration Cauchy’s fundamental theorem (statement only)- and application of Cauchy’s integral formula(statement only) – Taylor’s and Laurent’s series- classification of singularities - Cauchy’s residue theorem (statement only) – Contour integration - circular and semi circular contours (excluding poles on the real axis)application to engineering problems 9 Hours Total: 45+15 Hours Textbooks 1. 2.

B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publications, New Delhi, 2000. K. A. Lakshminarayanan, K. Megalai, P. Geetha and D. Jayanthi , Mathematics for Engineers, Volume II, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi. 2008.

References 1. 2. 3. 4.

P. Kandasamy, K. Gunavathy and K. Thilagavathy, Engineering Mathematics, Volume II, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi, 2009. T. Veerarajan, Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, New Delhi, 2008. E. Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, Singapore, 2008. C. Ray Wylie and Louis. C. Barrett, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 2003.

39


11O103 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY (Common to all branches) 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives   

Imparting knowledge on the principles of water characterization, treatment methods and industrial applications Understanding the principles and application of electrochemistry and corrosion science Basic information and application of polymer chemistry, nanotechnology and analytical techniques



Course Outcomes (COs) At the end of the course, the student will be able to  Differentiate hard and soft water, understand the disadvantages of using hard water domestically and industrially, select and apply suitable treatments.  Gain an understanding of oxidation and reduction reactions as they relate to engineering applications such as batteries and electroplating.  Comment on design of a metallic part which shows resistance to corrosion and analyze losses incurred due to corrosion. ASSESSMENT PATTERN S.No 1 2 3 4 5 6


Test I

Test II

Model Examination


20 20 30 20 10 100

20 20 30 20 10 100

10 20 30 20 20 100

10 20 30 20 20 100

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.



Distinguish between alkaline and non alkaline hardness. What is meant by priming? How it is prevented? What is meant by caustic embrittlement? What is the role of calgon conditioning in water treatment? What is break point chlorination? Write the significances of EMF series.

The marks secured in the Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks

40


7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25.

Define single electrode potential of an electrode. Differentiate between electrochemical and electrolytic cells. What are the advantages of H2-O2 fuel cell? What are reference electrodes? Mention the various factors influencing the rate of corrosion. State Pilling-Bedworth rule. What are the constituents of water repellant paints? What is pitting corrosion? Write any four applications of galvanic series. Differentiate between nanocluster and nanocrystal. List the monomers of nylon -6 and nylon-11. Define functionality of a monomer. What are the monomers of epoxy resin? Differentiate between addition and condensation polymers. What are auxochromes? Give examples. Give any two applications of IR spectroscopy. State Beer-Lambert’s law. Write any two applications of flame photometry. What are the limitations of Beer-Lambert’s law?

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

Soft water is not demineralized water whereas demineralized water is soft water- Justify. Why sodium carbonate conditioning is not advisable for high pressure boilers? Boiling cannot give protection to water for all time – Reason out. What are the significances of RO method of water treatment? Compare reversible and irreversible cells? Reason out why do the properties of materials change at nanoscale? Why calomel electrode is called as secondary reference electrode? A steel screw in a brass marine hardware corrodes. Why? What is the action of brine solution on iron rod? Why magnesium element is coupled with underground pipe line? Which is the easier way to control corrosion? Lithium battery is the cell of future- Justify. Iron corrodes at a faster rate than aluminium- Give reason. Differentiate between electro and elctroless platting. How thermoplastics differ from thermosetting plastics? TEFLON is superior to other addition polymers-Justify. Write any two advantages of free radical polymerization. Calculate the degree of freedom of water molecule. Differentiate between AAS and flame photometry. What is the role of thiocyanide solution in the estimation of iron by colorimetry?

Apply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

A water sample contains 204 mgs of CaSO4 and 73 mgs of Mg(HCO3)2 per litre. Calculate the total hardness in terms of CaCO3 equivalence. 100 ml of sample water has hardness equivalent to 12.5ml of 0.08N MgSO 4. Calculate hardness in ppm. What is the single electrode potential of a half cell of zinc electrode dipped in a 0.01M ZnSO4 solution at 250C? E0Zn/Zn2+ = 0.763 V, R=8.314 JK-1Mol-1, F= 96500 Coulombs. Calculate the reduction potential of Cu2+/Cu=0.5M at 250C. E0Cu2+/ Cu= +0.337V. Mention the type of corrosion that takes place when a metal area is covered with water. Bolt and nut made of the same metal is preferred in practice. Why? Caustic embrittlement is stress corrosion- Justify. Metals which are nearer in electrochemical series is preferred in practice. Why?

41


9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

What are the disadvantages of NICAD battery? What are the requirements of a good paint? What information can you get from DP? What is degree of polymerization? Calculate the degree of polymerization of polypropylene having molecular weight of 25200. How the functionality of monomer influences the structure of polymer? Mention the commercial applications of epoxy resins. On what basis polyamide is named as NYLON? Why UV spectroscopy is called as electronic spectra? IR spectrum is called as vibrational spectrum- Justify. How absorption spectrum is differing from emission spectrum?

Analyze/Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Distinguish between hardness and alkalinity. Distinguish between battery and cell. Corrosion phenomenon is known as thousand dollar thief - reason out. What is the basic difference between polymers and oligomers? How do you identify an organic molecule using IR spectrum?

Unit I Chemistry of Water and its Industrial Applications Hardness of water: Equivalents of calcium carbonate - Units of hardness - Degree of hardness and its estimation (EDTA method) - Numerical problems on degree of hardness - pH value of water. Use of water for industrial purposes: Boiler feed water-scale-sludge - caustic embrittlement. Softening of hard water: External conditioning – zeolite - ion exchange methods - internal conditioning – calgon - phosphate methods. Desalination: Reverse osmosis - electrodialysis. Use of water for domestic purposes: Domestic water treatment - Disinfection of water - break point chlorination. Characterization of your campus water. 9 Hours Unit II Electrochemistry for Materials Processing Introduction – emf - Single electrode potential - Hydrogen electrode - Calomel electrode - Glass electrode - pH measurement using glass electrode - Electrochemical series. Cells: Electrochemical cells – Cell reactions- Daniel cell – Reversible cells and irreversible cells - Difference between electrolytic cells and electrochemical cells. Concept of electroplating: Electroplating of gold - electroless plating (Nickel). Batteries: Secondary batteries - lead acid, nickel - cadmium and lithium batteries. Fuel cell: Hydrogen oxygen fuel cell. Electricity assisted painting. 9 Hours Unit III Chemistry of Corrosion and its Control Corrosion: Mechanism of corrosion- – Chemical and electrochemical - Pilling-Bedworth rule - Oxygen absorption – Hydrogen evolution - Galvanic series. Types of corrosion: Galvanic corrosion - Differential aeration corrosion - Examples - Factors influencing corrosion. Methods of corrosion control: Sacrificial anodic protection - Impressed current method. Protective coatings: Paints - Constituents and Functions. Special paints: Fire retardant - Water repellant paints. Applications of vapour phase inhibitors. 9 Hours

42


Unit IV Introduction to Polymer and Nanotechnology Polymers: Monomer - functionality - Degree of polymerization - Classification based on source applications. Types of polymerization: Addition, condensation and copolymerization. Mechanism of free radical polymerization. Thermoplastic and thermosetting plastics - Preparation, properties and applications: Epoxy resins, TEFLON, nylon and bakelite. Compounding of plastics. Moulding methods: Injection and extrusion. Nanomaterials: Introduction – Nanoelectrodes - Carbon nanotubes - Nanopolymers Application. A detailed survey on application of polymer in day to day life. 9 Hours Unit V Instrumental Techniques of Chemical Analysis Beer – Lambert’s law - Problems. UV visible and IR spectroscopy: Principle- Instrumentation (block diagram only) - Applications. Colorimetry: Principle – Instrumentation (block diagram only) - Estimation of iron by colorimetry. Flame photometry: Principle - Instrumentation (block diagram only) - Estimation of sodium by flame photometry. Atomic absorption spectroscopy: Principle - Instrumentation (block diagram only) - Estimation of nickel by atomic absorption spectroscopy. Applications of analytical instruments in medical field. 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbooks 1. 2. 3.

P. C. Jain and M. Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publications., New Delhi, 2009. R. Sivakumar and N. Sivakumar, Engineering Chemistry, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2009. B. R. Puri, L. R. Sharma and Madan S. Pathania, Principles of Physical Chemistry, Shoban Lal Nagin Chand & Co., 2005.


Sashi Chawla, Text Book of Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publications, New Delhi, 2003. B. S. Bahl, G. D. Tuli and Arun Bahl, Essentials of Physical Chemistry, S. Chand & Company, 2008. J. C. Kuriacose and J. Rajaram, Chemistry in Engineering & Technology, Vol. 1&2, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2009. C. P. Poole Jr., J. F. Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, Wiley India Private Limited, 2007. Andre Arsenault and Geoffrey A. Ozin, Nanochemistry: A Chemical Approach to Nanomaterials, Royal Society of Chemistry, London, 2005.

43


Language elective II (Common to all branches) 3 1 0 3.5

44


11A204/11C204/11M204 - APPLIED MATERIALS SCIENCE (Common to AE, CE, and ME) 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives  To make students familiar in the properties of conducting, semiconducting, magnetic and dielectric materials  To acquire knowledge in thermal properties of materials used in construction and non-destructive techniques Program Outcomes (POs) a. The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them c. The graduates will be able to learn various techniques available to make shapes and designs in various materials. Students will be understood the methodologies to be followed in casting, fabrication, machining, materials, metallurgy and forming of engineering materials. At the end of the course, students will be able to select and perform suitable method of producing a desirable component in industry Course Outcomes (COs) At the end of the course, the student will be able to  Understand how conducting materials are influencing engineering design.  Demonstrate magnetic and electrical properties of materials.  Gain the fundamentals of polarizable solids. ASSESSMENT PATTERN Bloom’s Taxonomy S.No (New Version) 1 Remember 2 Understand 3 Apply 4 Analyze 5 Evaluate 6 Create Total

Test 1

Test 2

25 25 20 20 10 100

25 25 20 20 10 100

Model Examination 20 25 20 20 15 100


Remember 1. Mention the postulates of classical free electron theory. 2. State Wiedemann-Franz law. 3. Define the term Fermi energy and mention its importance. 4. Define drift velocity. How is it different from thermal velocity of an electron? 5. Explain the Fermi-Dirac distribution function of electrons. Illustrate graphically the effect of temperature on the distribution. 6. Define mean free path. 7. Distinguish between the p-type and n-type semiconductors. 8. What are donors and acceptors? 9. What is the meaning of band gap of a semiconductor? 10. Discuss the variation of Fermi level with temperature in the case of p-type and n-type semiconductors.



The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks.

45


11. Explain the different types of polarization mechanisms in dielectrics and sketch their dependence on the frequency of applied electric field. 12. What is dielectric breakdown? Summarize the various factors contributing to breakdown in dielectrics. 13. Discuss the different modes of heat transfer and mention their special features. 14. Write a note on X-ray fluoroscopy. 15. Describe the construction and working of ultrasonic flaw detector. Also write merits and demerits. 16. What is the basic principle of liquid penetrant method? 17. Briefly discuss the different stages involved in LP testing. 18. What are the characteristics of the LP testing materials? Understand 1. Mention the salient features of the ‘free electron gas’ model. Obtain the Ohm’s law based on it. 2. Mention the limitations of classical free electron theory. 3. Define density of states and also mention its uses. 4. Explain thermal conductivity and derive an expression for thermal conductivity of metals. 5. Derive an expression for density of states in a metal and hence obtain the Fermi energy in terms of density of free electrons. 6. Distinguish between relaxation time and collision time. 7. Why do you prefer extrinsic semiconductor over intrinsic semiconductor? 8. What is Hall effect? What is its use in semiconductors? 9. Deduce the relation for the local field of a dielectric material which is in cubic structure. 10. Deduce Clausius-Mosotti relation and explain its use in predicting dielectric constants of solids. 11. Distinguish between thermal conductivity and thermal diffusivity. 12. Explain the heat flow through compound media in series and parallel. 13. Explain the principle behind radiography. Apply 1.

2. 3. 4.

Assuming the electron-lattice interaction to be responsible for scattering of conduction electrons in a metal, obtain an expression for conductivity in terms of relaxation time and explain any three drawbacks of classical free electron theory of metals. Explain any two practical applications of conduction and convection. Explain the thermal conductivity of rubber. Elaborate how you will explore the defects in automotive parts?

Analyze/Evaluate 1. State the relation between thermal conductivity and electrical conductivity. Does it hold good for all types of materials? 2. Calculate the Fermi energy of copper at 0K. Atomic weight and density of copper are 63.54 and 8950 kg/m3 respectively. 3. By how many orders of magnitude is the mean free path reduced in a certain metal when temperature increases from 0°C to 340°C? The temperature coefficient of resistivity α = 5x10-3. 4. Why do you prefer silicon for transistors and GaAs for laser diodes? 5. Sketch variation of conductivity with temperature incase of intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors. 6. How will you determine the type of charge carriers present in a semiconductor? 7. Mention the limitations of LP testing. Unit I Electrical Properties of Metals Introduction- Derivation of microscopic form of Ohm’s law- postulates of classical free electron theoryderivation of electrical conductivity of metals (Drude- Lorentz theory)- merits and demerits. Derivation of thermal conductivity – Wiedemann-Franz law- verification. Electron energies in metal and Fermi energyFermi-Dirac distribution function and its variation with temperature- density of energy states- calculation of density of electron and fermi energy at 0K- average energy of free electron at 0K- Importance of fermi energy- problems. Quantum free electron theory and Band theory of solids. 9 Hours

46


Unit II Semiconducting Materials & Devices Introduction - elemental and compound semiconductors - Intrinsic semiconductors: density of electrons density of holes- determination of carrier concentration and position of Fermi energy- band gap energy determination (quantitative treatment). Extrinsic semiconductors: carrier concentration in p-type and n-type semiconductors. Hall effect- theory of Hall effect- experimental determination of Hall voltageapplications. Semi conducting devices: solar cells (Photovoltaic effect) – uses. Photo detectors: pin photo diodes – applications. Variation of Fermi level with temperature and doping concentration in extrinsic semiconductors. 9 Hours Unit III Dielectrics Introduction- fundamental definitions in dielectrics- expressions for electronic, ionic and orientation polarization mechanisms- space charge polarization- Langevin- Debye equation- frequency and temperature effects on polarization- dielectric loss- internal field- expression for internal field (cubic structure)- derivation of Clausius-Mosotti equation – importance. Dielectric breakdown- various breakdown mechanisms with characteristics- applications of dielectric materials and insulating materials problems. Charging and discharging of capacitors. 9 Hours Unit IV Thermal Physics Mode of heat transfer-thermal conductivity-thermal diffusivity-thermal conduction through compound media (bodies in series and parallel) - thermal conductivity of good conductor - Forbe’s method-thermal conductivity of bad conductor- Lee’s disc-radial flow of heat-expression for thermal conductivity of rubber-experimental determination-practical applications of conduction-problems. Thermal and ventilation design of buildings . 9 Hours Unit V Non-Destructive Testing Introduction - various steps involved in NDT process-X-ray radiographic technique -displacement method – merits, demerits and applications of X-ray radiography - X-ray fluoroscopy – liquid penetrant methodadvantages, disadvantages and applications –ultrasonic flaw detector - block diagram - construction and working - merits and demerits. Thermography: types-block diagram - recording of thermal images - merits, demerits and applications. Fluoroscopy or Real-time Radiography. 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbooks 1. V. Rajendran, Engineering Physics, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2011. 2. M. Arumugam, Physics II, Anuradha Publications, Kumbakonam, 2005. References 1. S. O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, New Age International Publications, New Delhi, 2006. 2. M.N. Avadhanulu and P.G. Kshirsagar, A Text Book of Engineering Physics, S. Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2005. 3. V. Raghavan, Materials Science and Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2009. 4. D.S Mathur, Elements of properties of matter, S.Chand Publications, New Delhi, Reprints 2010. 5. P.K. Palanisami, Physics For Engineers, Scitech Publications (India)Pvt. Ltd, Chennai, 2002

47


11M106 ENGINEERING MECHANICS 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives  To comprehend the static equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies, effect of friction on equilibrium, laws of motion, kinematics of motion and the interrelationship  To gain knowledge on properties of surfaces and solids, learn the behaviour of particles and rigid bodies under motion  To be able to write the equation for dynamic equilibrium  All these should be achieved both conceptually and through solved examples Program Outcomes (POs) a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to solve problems dealing with forces in a plane or in space and equivalent force systems.  The student will be able to solve truss, beam, frame and cable problems and understand distributed force systems.  The student shall be able to solve friction problems and determine moments of inertia and centroid using integration methods. ASSESSMENT PATTERN Bloom’s Taxonomy S. No. (New Version) 1 Remember 2 Understand 3 Apply 4 Analyze 5 Evaluate 6 Create Total

Test 1*

Test 2*

20 30 30 20 --100

20 20 20 20 20 -100

Model Examination* 10 20 30 20 20 -100

Semester End Examination 10 20 30 20 20 -100

4

Remember 1. What is rigid body? 2. Name the system of units. 3. Mention the two systems of dimensions. 4. Give the dimension of acceleration under MLT system. 5. What is a force? 6. Define system of forces. 7. How the force system is classified? 8. Which is known as resultant force? 9. State Newton’s three laws. 10. Name three graphical methods used to find the resultant of a system of forces. 11. Which are known as laws of mechanics? 12. What is dimensional homogeneity? 13. State parallelogram law of forces. 14. State Lami’s theorem. 15. Define ‘equilibrium’. *

The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated by giving equal weightage (50%) for both Civil and Mechanical Engineering

48


16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50.

Define equilibrant. What is a moment? Define ‘couple’. What are the types of supports used in beams? Name the types of loads applied onto a beam. Give an example for coplanar concurrent system of forces. What is a truss? How the forces in a truss are analyzed? Give the equations of equilibrium for particle in 2D and in space. Write down the equations of equilibrium of a rigid body under 2D and 3D. What is called as resolving a force? Define friction. How the friction is classified? What is motion impending? State the nature of friction force. What is angle of friction? What is cone of friction? State the usage of wedge. Give the condition for self-locking of screw jack. What is polar moment of inertia? State parallel axis theorem. State perpendicular axis theorem. Give the relation between area MOI and mass MOI. Write down the formula to find centroid of right angled triangle. State the law of conservation of momentum. State the work-energy principle. What is general plane motion? Give the expression for Newton’s laws of motion. What is angular velocity? What is angular acceleration? Define displacement. Define velocity. Define acceleration. What is linear motion? Classify the motions of a rigid body.

Understand 1. Differentiate unit and dimension. 2. How to get the net effect of forces acting simultaneously on a particle? 3. What does the principle of transmissibility imply? 4. State the difference between mass and weight. 5. At what situation Lami’s theorem can be used. 6. When to apply parallelogram law or triangular law of forces. 7. Mention the relation between resultant force and an equilibrant. 8. Give two practical examples for application of moment. 9. Give two practical examples for application of couple. 10. How to convert a force into force couple system? 11. Which kind of support has maximum reactions and what are they? 12. Which law is applicable to analyze supports and reactions? 13. Which theorem helps to determine resultant of a parallel coplanar system of forces? 14. Differentiate moment from couple. 15. How will you identify whether the given system is under equilibrium or not? 16. Why force is called as a vector? 17. In problems involving three dimensions, which kind of approach is used to determine the resultant force? Why?

49


18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32.

Give two practical situations where friction is considered as good. Why friction force is not liked at some situations? F = µN is applied only during motion impending condition. State the reason. How to decide whether a body is in motion or not? When to include friction forces? What is the difference between applied force and friction force? When does centroid and centre of gravity will be same? A jet is used to irrigate the plants in a lawn. How to get the maximum length of the jet? A bobber plane is dropping a bomb on the enemy’s target. Under which category the analysis can be carried out inorder to find the correct position of dropping? A droplet of water is dropping from the tap. To find the distance between the drops, which laws could be used? What is the use of radius of gyration? How principal MOI differs from MOI? At what situation conservation of momentum principle can be applied? Differentiate distance from displacement. Write the difference between moment and momentum.

Apply / Evaluate 1. A boat is towed by two ropes making certain inclination from the boat axis. How to determine the resulting direction of boat movement? 2. A load is hanging through rope and a pulley fixed to the ceiling. Knowing the friction coefficient between rope and pulley and the magnitude of weight compute the effort and its direction required to hold the weight in equilibrium position. 3. Given the applied forces, frictional coefficient and weight of a block resting on a rough plane how to check the equilibrium condition of the block? 4. A non-coplanar parallel system of forces is acting on a structure. How to reduce it to a forcecouple system? 5. In a 3D analysis of forces a ball and socket support is used. Give the procedure to determine the value of support reactions. 6. Knowing the friction co-efficients and position of the ladder compute the distance through which a man can climb on the ladder before the ladder starts slipping. 7. What is understood by calculating the effort applied to a screw jack to lift up and lower down the given amount of load? Justify the phenomenon. 8. In positioning a beam in a structure, always the depth portion is chosen greater than its width portion. Analyze and write down the reason. 9. Two trains are starting at different time from the same station. Assume that first train always moves with velocity less than that of second train and the acceleration pattern for both trains is different during start, motion and stop of the trains. Enumerate the approach of finding the distance at which second train overtake the first train 10. How to determine the velocity and direction of two bodies having an oblique central impact after the impact is over?

11.

50


The girl has a mass of 17kg and mass center at Gg, and the tricycle has a mass of 10kg and mass center at Gt. Determine the normal reactions at each wheel for equilibrium. [N A = 128.8 N, NB = NC = 68.0 N] 12.

The crane provides a long-reach capacity by using the telescopic boom segment DE. The entire boom is supported by a pin at A and by the telescopic hydraulic cylinder BC, which can be considered as a two-force member. The rated load capacity of the crane is measured by a maximum force developed in the hydraulic cylinder. If this maximum force is developed when the boom supports a mass m = 6 Mg and its length is l = 40 and θ = 60°, determine the greatest mass that can be supported when the boom length is extended to l = 50 m and θ = 45°. Neglect the weight of the boom and the size of the pulley at E. Assume the crane does not overturn. Note: when θ = 60° BC is vertical; however, when θ = 45° this is not the case. [m = 3.26 Mg] 13.

The boy at D has a mass of 50 kg, a center of mass at G, and stands on a plank at the position shown. The plank is pin-supported at A and rests on a post at B. Neglecting the weight of the plank and post, determine the magnitude of force P his friend (?) at E must exert in order to pull out the post. Take = 0.3 and C = 0.8. [P = 264 N] 14.

51


The mine car is being pulled up to the inclined plane using the motor M and the rope-and-pulley arrangement shown. Determine the speed vp at which a point P on the cable must be traveling toward the motor to move the car up the plane with a constant speed of v = 5 m/s. [VP = 15.00 m/s] 15. .

Each of the three barges has a mass of 30 Mg, whereas the tugboat has a mass of 12 Mg. As the barges are being pulled forward with a constant velocity of 4 m/s, the tugboat must overcome the frictional resistance of the water, which is 2 kN for each barge and 1.5 kN for the tugboat. If the cable between A and B breaks, determine the acceleration of the tugboat. [a = 0.0278 m/s2 ] Unit I Basics and Equilibrium of Particles Introduction - Units and Dimensions - Laws of Mechanics – Parallelogram Law of forces – Vectors – Vectorial representation of forces -Coplanar Forces – Resolution and Composition of forces – Equilibrium of a particle under coplanar forces – Forces in space - Equilibrium of a particle in space Equivalent force systems 9 Hours Unit II Equilibrium of Rigid Bodies Free body diagram – Types of supports and their reactions – Moments and Couples – Vectorial representation of moments and couples – Scalar components of a moment – Varignon’s theorem – resolution of a given force into a force acting at a given point and a couple – reduction of a system of coplanar forces acting on a rigid body into a single force and a single couple - Equilibrium of Rigid bodies in two dimensions – Equilibrium of Rigid bodies in three dimensions – Problems involving ball and socket joint only Internal forces in a member 9 Hours Unit III Friction Frictional force – Laws of Coulomb friction – Angle of friction – cone of friction – Equilibrium of bodies on inclined plane – Ladder friction - Wedge Friction – Belt friction – Band brakes - Screw Jack - Self locking - Rolling Resistance – Friction in journal bearing 8 Hours Unit IV Properties of Surfaces and Solids Determination of Areas and Volumes – First moment of area and the Centroid of sections – Rectangle, circle, triangle from integration – T section, I section, Angle section, Hollow section by using standard formula – second and product moments of plane area – Rectangle, triangle, circle from integration – T section, I section, Angle section, Hollow section by using standard formula – Parallel axis theorem and perpendicular axis theorem – Polar moment of inertia – Principal moments of inertia of plane areas – Mass moment of inertia – Relation with area MOI – Mohr’s circle to determine principal MOI 9 Hours

52


Unit V Dynamics of Particles Displacements, Velocity and acceleration, their relationship – Linear motion – Curvilinear motion (no derivations) – Newton’s law – Work Energy Equation of particles – Principle of Impulse and Momentum – Impact of elastic bodies Dependent motion between particles 10 Hours Total: 45 + 15 Hours Textbook 1. F.P. Beer, and Jr. E.R Johnston, Vector Mechanics for Engineers – Statics and Dynamics, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 2007 References 1. Irving H. Shames, Engineering Mechanics - Statics and Dynamics, Pearson Education Asia Pvt. Ltd., 2006 2. R.C.Hibbeller, Engineering Mechanics: Combined Statics & Dynamics, Prentice Hall, 2009 3. D. P. Sharma, Engineering Mechanics, Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010 4. S. Rajasekaran and G. Sankarasubramanian, Fundamentals of Engineering Mechanics, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005 5. Robert W. Soutas-Little, Daniel J. Inman and Daniel S. Balint, Engineering Mechanics - Statics and Dynamics, Cengage LearningIndia Private Limited, New Delhi, 2009 www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=112103108 www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=122104015

53


11M206 MANUFACTURING PROCESSES 3

0 0 3.0

Objectives  To learn various techniques available to make shapes and designs in various Materials  To make students understand requirements and methodologies to be followed in casting, fabrication and forming of engineering materials Program Outcomes (POs) c. The graduates will be able to learn various techniques available to make shapes and designs in various materials. Students will be understood the methodologies to be followed in casting, fabrication, machining, materials, metallurgy and forming of engineering materials. At the end of the course, students will be able to select and perform suitable method of producing a desirable component in industry. g. The graduates can become job-givers rather than just job-seekers i. The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in Mechanical, Mechatronics and Electrical Engineering as well as IT companies Course Outcomes (COs) 

Able to know about the different types of Metal casting processes, Welding processes, Bulk deformation processes, Sheet metal processes and Shaping of plastic materials. Able to know the application and advantages of varies manufacturing processes. Able to select best manufacturing processes for the products.

 

ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No 1 2 3 4 5 6

Bloom’s Taxonomy (New version) Remember Understand Apply Analyze Evaluate create Total

Test I*

Test II*

25 25 20 10 20 100

25 25 20 10 20 100

Model Examinations* 25 25 20 10 20 100


5

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. *

Define casting What is meant by pattern? List out various types of patterns Define solidification. Define core print. List out various types of pattern allowances. What are the various methods of special casting process? Define centrifugal casting What do you mean by lost wax process? What are the defects of casting? Define welding.

The marks secured Test I and Test II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks.

54


12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29.

List out various types welding process What are the different types of electrodes used in arc welding? What are the different flames available in gas welding? Define brazing and soldering. Define recrystalization What do you mean by hot working and cold working? What is meant by plastic deformation? Define metal forming. Define blanking and piercing. What is meant by trimming and nibbling? Define embossing and coining? What is meant by stretch forming? What is meant by high energy rate forming? Give some application of metal spinning process and explosive forming. List out various types of plastics What is meant by thermoplastic and thermosetting plastic? Give some application of Blow molding process. What is meant by rotational molding?

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

What are the functions of a binder in moulding sand? Why the cores are reinforced? What are the special features of “resistance projection welding”? What effect does carbon content of steel have on weldability? What is arc Stability? How is it achieved? What is press forging? How does it differ from drop forging? What is purpose of heat treatment of forgings? Write down the significance of parison.

Apply / Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Can the ferrous metals be cast by die-casting method? If yes, then how? Why permanent moulds are preheated before operation? How the dies for die casting are manufactured? Why the cleaning of a joint is important before welding? Why tungsten is preferred for non-consumable electrodes? Why cold worked metal is annealed? Why four high rolling mill is usually used for cold rolling? How the moulds for plastic parts are manufactured? How the injection moulding machines are rated? What are the applications of investment casting?

Unit I Metal Casting Processes Different terminologies used in production processes - Sand casting – Sand moulds - Type of patterns – Pattern materials – Pattern allowances – Types of Moulding sand – Properties – Core making – Methods of Sand testing – Moulding machines – Types of moulding machines - Melting furnaces –Cupola – Electric furnaces – Sand Casting defects – Inspections methods - Importance of Special casting processes – Shell, investment casting – Pressure die casting – Centrifugal casting To find the coarse grain fineness number for the sand particles. 9 Hours

55


Unit II Fabrication Processes Fusion welding processes – Types of Gas welding – Equipments used – Flame characteristics – Filler and Flux materials - Arc welding equipments - Electrodes – Principles of Resistance welding – Spot, butt, seam stud welding – Percussion welding - Gas metal arc welding – Submerged arc welding – TIG welding – Principle and application of Plasma arc welding, Thermit welding, Electron beam welding and Friction welding –Weld defects – Brazing and soldering Process - adhesive bonding – Gluing Laser welding techniques 9 Hours Unit III Bulk Deformation Processes Hot working and cold working of metals – Forging processes – Open and close die forging – Characteristics of the process – Types of Forging Machines – Typical forging operations – Rolling of metals – Flat strip rolling – Types of Rolling mills – Shape rolling operations – Tube piercing – Defects in rolled parts – Principles of Extrusion – Types of Extrusion –Principle of rod and wire drawing – Equipments used Orbital forging and Isothermal forging process 9 Hours Unit IV Sheet Metal Forming Processes Sheet metal characteristics - Typical shearing operations, bending and drawing operations – clinching operation - Stretch forming operations –– Working principle and application of special forming processes Hydro forming – Rubber pad forming – Metal spinning – Explosive forming – Magnetic pulse forming – Peen forming – Super plastic forming–Process characteristics Formability of sheet metal – Test methods 9 Hours Unit V Forming and Shaping of Plastics Types of plastics - Characteristics of the forming and shaping processes – Moulding of Thermoplastics – Working principles and typical applications of Injection moulding – Plunger and screw machines – Blow moulding – Rotational moulding –– Extrusion - Typical industrial applications – Thermoforming – Processing of Thermosets – Working principles and typical applications - Compression moulding – Transfer moulding – Bonding of Thermoplastics – Fusion and solvent methods Film blowing 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1.

P. N. Rao, Manufacturing Technology vol I, Tata-McGraw-Hill Publishing Limited, 2010

References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Serope Kalpakjian and Steven R. Schmid, Manufacturing Engineering and Technology, Pearson Education, Inc. 2009 (Second Indian Reprint). Begman, Manufacturing Process, John Wilely & Sons, VIII Edition, 1999 Radhakrishnan, Manufacturing Technology I, Scitech Publications Pvt Ltd, 2010 Hajra Choudhury, Elements of Workshop Technology, Vol. I & II, Media Promotors Pvt Ltd., 2009 Thirupathy Reddy, Production Technology, Scitech Publications Pvt Ltd, 2010 http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT-ROORKEE/MANUFACTURINGPROCESSES/index.htm

56


11M207 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY I 0 0 2 1.0 Objectives  Manufacturing processes used for converting raw materials into finished products. Various processes,machinery, and operations will be examined with emphasis placed on understanding engineering materials and processing parameters that influence design considerations, product quality, and production costs  The program also helps students develop basic machinability concepts and improve to your teamwork and entrepreneurial skills Program Outcomes (POs) c) The graduates will be able to learn various techniques available to make shapes and designs in various materials. Students will be understood the methodologies to be followed in casting, fabrication, machining, materials, metallurgy and forming of engineering materials. At the end of the course, students will be able to select and perform suitable method of producing a desirable component in industry. i)

The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes

g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in Mechanical, Mechatronics and Electrical Engineering as well as IT companies Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to work in a centre lathe.  Able to do Facing, Turning, Boring, Knurling, Grooving, Chamfering and Drilling operations in a given component as per the drawing.  Able to calculate angle and to make taper in a given component as per the drawing.  Able to calculate gear trains and to cut external thread in a given component as per the drawing. ASSESSMENT PATTERN Internal Assessment

Semester end examination

Preparation  Remember  Understand  Apply

30

30

Observation and results  Analyze  Evaluate

20

50

20

--

30

20

Record Mini project / Model Examination / Viva-Voce

57


Remember 1. Lathe specification 2. What are the parts present in lathe 3. Write down the names of any four lathe accessories 4. lathe bed material 5. Difference between 3 jaw and 4 jaw chuck? 6. What are the operations performed in lathe machine 7. Purpose of dead centre 8. Purpose of tail stock 9. What is meant by orthogonal cutting? 10. Give two examples for orthogonal cutting 11. What are the four important characteristics of materials used for cutting tools? 12. What is the purpose of chamfering and boring? 13. Types of knurling 14. Types of threads with suitable angles 15. Define the term ‘Thread cutting’ 16. Give the HSS composition 17. Define feed and depth of cut. 18. What is meant by tool signature? 19. What is side rake angle? And mention its effects? 20. What is clearance angle? And mention its types? 21. What is meant by nose radius? 22. What is function of chip breakers? 23. Name the factors that contributes to poor surface finish in cutting 24. What are the functions of cutting fluids? 25. What is meant by milling? 26. purpose of end milling cutter 27. Purpose of flute in drill tool 28. Drill tool point angle________ 29. Name the taper turning methods used in lathe 30. Purpose of swivel base in lathe machine 31. Define tolerance 32. Difference between unilateral and bilateral tolerance 33. Define pitch 34. Define clearance 35. List out some quality symbols 36. Types of jigs and fixtures used in lathe machine Understand 1. Name the various cutting tool materials. 2. List out various type of feed mechanisms 3. Name the various tool parts of a single point cutting tool 4. What are the standard angles of cutting tool? 5. What is the application of air operated chuck? 6. Write down the formula for calculating taper turning angle by compound rest method. 7. Merits on automatic machine. 8. What are the advantages of automatic lathes? 9. How surface finish obtain in lathe machine. 10. How quality component acquire in lathe machine?

58


Apply/ Evaluate 1. To find cutting forces are calculated? 2. How taper angle are calculated? 3. Write the formula for tail stock set over method 4. Write the formula for tolerance List of Experiments 1. Exercise on Simple Facing & Turning 2. Exercise on Step Turning using four jaw chuck 3. Exercise on Taper turning Model 4. Exercise on Knurling & Grooving 5. Exercise on Boring & Chamfering 6. Exercise on External thread cutting. 7. Exercise on Drilling using lathe 8. Study on semiautomatic & automatic lathes 9. Design experiment 10. Application oriented experiment Total: 45 Hours Practical schedule Sl.No

Experiment

Hours

1.

Introduction to Lathe Laboratory

6

2.

Exercise on Simple Facing & Turning

3

3.

Exercise on Step Turning using four jaw chuck

6

4.

Exercise on Taper turning Model

3

5.

Exercise on Knurling & Grooving

3

6.

Exercise on Boring & Chamfering

3

7.

Exercise on External thread cutting

3

8.

Exercise on Drilling using lathe

3

9.

Study on semiautomatic & automatic lathes

3

10.

Design experiment

6

11.

Application oriented experiment

6

59


60


11M107 ‘C’ PROGRAMMING 2 0 3 3.5 Objectives   

To know the basic concepts problem solving. To understand the basic concepts of C. To develop the programming skills of students in C.

Program Outcomes (POs) a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in Mechanical, Mechatronics and Electrical Engineering as well as IT companies Course Outcomes (COs)  

Able to develop programming ability. Able to develop applications for real world problems.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN S.No 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Bloom’s Category (New Version) Remember Understand Apply Analyze/ Evaluate Create TOTAL

Test I

Test II

20 20 50 10 0 100

10 20 40 20 10 100

Model Examination 10 10 40 20 20 100

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

What is the general structure of a C program? List the rules for defining a variable. What are the I/O functions in C? What is a header file? State the associativity property of an operator. Define a ternary operator. Give example What is an array and a pointer? What is the significance of function? Define a structure. What are bit-wise operators?

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Compare while loop with do – while Loop. What are the advantages of using Macro? Explain how recursive functions affect the run time efficiency. Differentiate between Structure and Union in C. How is memory managed in C? How garbage collection is done in C?

End-semester Examination 10 10 40 20 20 100

61


Apply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Write a recursive function to calculate the factorial of number. Write a C program to check whether the given number is palindrome or not Write a program to check whether the given number is prime or not. Write a C program to find the roots of quadratic equation ax 2+bx+c=0. Write a C program to find average of ‘n’ numbers. Write a program to generate the pay slip of an employee using Structure. Write a C program to search for a specified element in an array. Write a program to compute Matrix Multiplication.

Analysis 1. 2. 3. 4.

Explain the difference between while and do-while statements Why are pointers so powerful? Analyze their efficiency giving an example? Is there any advantage of using recursion over looping control structures? Give a suitable example. Illustrate the Limitation of array of pointers to strings using a sample example.

Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4.

Differentiate the keywords BREAK and CONTINUE. Justify the need for Type Casting over Type Conversion. Compare and contrast I/O mapped I/O with Memory mapped I/O. Summarize the various built in String functions.

Create 1.

Create a structure to store the following details: Rollno, Name, Mark1, Mark2, Mark3, Total, Average, Result and Class. Write a program to read Rollno, name and 3 subject marks. Find out the total, result and class as follows: a) Total is the addition of 3 subject marks. b) Result is "Pass" if all subject marks are greater than or equal to 50 else "Fail". c) Class will be awarded for students who have cleared 3 subjects i. Class "Distinction" if average >=75 ii. Class "First" if average lies between 60 to 74 (both inclusive) iii. Class "Second" if average lies between 50 & 59 (both inclusive) d) Repeat the above program to manipulate 10 students' details and sort the structures as per rank obtained by them.

2 0 3 3.5 Unit I Fundamentals of C History of C-Importance of C-Basic structure of C programs-Programming style-Executing a C programCharacter set-C tokens-Keywords and identifiers-Constants (Declaration, Definition)-Variables (Declaration)-Data types. 6 Hours

62


Unit II Operators and Expressions Arithmetic operators-Relational operators-Logical operators-Assignment operator-Increment and decrement operator-Conditional operator-Bitwise operator-Arithmetic expressions-Evaluation of expressions-operator precedence-Managing I/O operations. 6 Hours Unit III Branching and Looping Decision making - IF statement-IF-ELSE-Nested IF-ELSE, ELSE-IF Ladder-Switch statement-GOTO statement-?: operator-While statement-DO statement-FOR statement-Jumps in loops. 6 Hours Unit IV Arrays and Strings One dimensional, two dimensional, multi dimensional arrays-Initialization and declaration-Dynamic arrays-Strings-Declaring-Initializing-Reading-Writing strings-Arithmetic operations on characters-string comparison-string handling functions. 6 Hours Unit V Functions, Structures and Pointers User defined function-Declaration-Definition of function-function calls-category of functions-Nesting of functions-Recursion-Structures-Definition, Declaration, Accessing structure members-PointersDeclaration, Initialization, Accessing. 6 Hours List of Exercises 1. Simple C programs. 2. Program using operators and expressions. 3. Programs to implement Looping and decision statements. 4. Write a C program to copy the content of one array into another array in reverse order. 5. Write a C program to reverse a string and check whether the string is a palindrome or not. 6. Write a C program to illustrate the concept of Call by Value and Call by Reference. 7. Write a C Program to find factorial of given N numbers with recursion function. 8. Simple programs using structures and pointers Total: 30+45 Hours Textbook 1. E.Balagurusamy, Programming in ANSI C, Fourth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,2007 References 1. Behrouz A.Forouzan and Richard F. Gilberg, Computer Science: A Structure program approach using C, Cengage learning –India edition. 2008 2. Ritchie D.M, Kernighan B.W, C Programming Language, PHI, 2000.

63


11O109 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LABORATORY (Common to all branches) 0 0 2 1.0 Objectives   

Imparting knowledge on basic concepts and its applications of chemical analysis Training in chemical and instrumental methods Develop skills in estimation of a given sample by chemical and instrumental methods

Program Outcomes (POs) a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them Course Outcomes (COs) At the end of the course, the students will be able to  Analyze and assess various parameters such as hardness, TDS, pH and alkalinity in the given water samples.  Perform experiments to verify the molecular weight of a polymer using viscometry and to analyze rate of corrosion and inhibition efficiency by weight loss measurements.  Apply contextual knowledge of electrodes such as calomel, glass for determination of ferrous ions and pH of a solution. ASSESSMENT PATTERN Internal Assessment


Preparation

10

15

Execution

10

15

Observation & Results Record Model Examination Viva Voce

10 5 10 5

15 5

Total

50

50

List of Experiments (Any ten experiments) 1. Preparation of molar and normal solutions of the following substances – oxalic acid, sodium carbonate, sodium hydroxide, hydrochloric acid. 2. Determination of alkalinity in a water sample. 3. Determination of molecular weight of a polymer by viscometry method. 4. Determination of total, temporary and permanent hardness of water by EDTA method. 5. Conductometric titration of mixture of acids. 6. Determination of strength of iron by potentiometric method using potassium dichromate. 7. Estimation of iron (thiocyanate method) in the given solution by spectrophotometric method. 8. Determination of strength of hydrochloric acid by sodium hydroxide using pH meter. 9. Determination of sodium and potassium ions in water sample by flame photometric method. 10. Determination of corrosion rate by weight loss measurements. 11. Comparison of alkalinities of the given water samples. 12. Comparison of total dissolved solids (TDS) and hardness of water in Bhavani river and Bannari Amman Institute of Technology campus. Total: 30 Hours

64


65

Practical Schedule S.No

Experiment

Hours

1

Preparation of molar and normal solutions of the following substances – oxalic acid, sodium carbonate, sodium hydroxide, hydrochloric acid.

3

2

Determination of molecular weight of a polymer by viscometry method.

3

3

Conductometric titration of mixture of acids.

3

4

Determination of strength of iron by potentiometric method using potassium dichromate.

3

5

Estimation of iron (thiocyanate method) in the given solution by spectrophotometric method.

3

6

Determination of strength of hydrochloric acid by sodium hydroxide using pH meter.

3

7

Determination of sodium and potassium ions in water sample by flame photometric method.

3

8

Determination of corrosion rate by weight loss measurements.

3

9

Comparison of alkalinities of the given water samples.

3

10

Comparison of total dissolved solids (TDS) and hardness of water in Bhavani river and Bannari Amman Institute of Technology campus.

3


11O301 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS III (Common to all branches Except CSE and Bio-Tech) 3 1 0 3.5 Objectives  To obtain the knowledge of expressing periodic functions as Fourier series, Fourier transform and Z transform which is used to analyze signals in signal processing.  Ability to solve boundary value problems in heat and wave equation using partial differential equations. Programme Outcomes (POs) b) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to understand the basic concepts of engineering mathematics.  Able to improve problem evaluation technique.  Able to choose an appropriate method to solve a practical problem. ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No


1 2 3 4 5


Test I6

Test II1

Model Examination1


20 40

20 40

20 40

30 10 100

30 10 100

30 10 -100

20 40 30 10 100

Remember 1. State the Dirichlet’s Conditions. 2. Define even and odd function graphically. 3. Write down the complex Fourier transform pair. 4. State convolution theorem in Fourier transform. 5. Define unilateral and bilateral Z-transform of {f(n)}. 6. State initial value theorem in Z-transform. 7. Define complete solution of a partial differential equation. 8. Write the complementary function of non homogeneous second order equations of distinct and repeated roots. 9. What does a2 represent in the equation ytt = a2yxx ? 10. Write any two solutions of the Laplace equation obtained by the method of separation of variables. Understand



1. Find the general solution of x z  y 2. Solve

D

2



2

2

 p  y x

 2DD  D 2 z  x 2 y  e x y .

3. Find the half-range cosine series for the function the

6

2







 z2 q  z y 2  x 2 .

f x   x, 0  x   and hence deduce the sum of


66




series

1

 2n  1

4

n 0

.

4. Find the Fourier series of period 2 for the function

x f ( x)    2  x 

0  x 1 1 x  2



Deduce the sum of

1 . 2 n 1, 3, 5,.. n



5. Find the Fourier transform of 

1  x f x     0

2

 sin x  Hence evaluate    dx and x  0



for x  1 . for | x |  1 4

 sin x    x  dx. 0



6. Solve the integral equation

 f ( x) cos x dx = e



.

0

4z3 7. Find inverse  transform 2 z  12 z  1 2n  3 8. Find Z –transform of . n  1n  2 9. Use convolution theorem to find the inverse Z –transform of

8z 2 2 z  14 z  1

10. Give a function which is self reciprocal under Fourier sine and cosine transform. Apply 1. Find the PDE of all planes having equal intercepts on the x and y axis. 2. Form the PDE of all planes passing through the origin. 3. Expand the function

f ( x )  cos x in (   ,  ) as a Fourier series of periodicity 2.

4. A function y=f(x) is given by the following table of values. Make the harmonic analysis of the function in (0,T) up to the second harmonic. x 0 T/6 T/3 T/2 2T/3 5T/6 T y 0 9.2 14.4 17.8 17.3 11.7 0 5. Obtain the constant term and the first harmonic in the Fourier series expansion in (0,12) for the function y = f(x) defined by the table below x 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 f (x) 1.8 1.1 0.3 0.16 0.5 1.5 2.16 1.88 1.25 1.30 1.76 2.00 6. A taut string of length L is fastened at both ends. The midpoint of the string is taken to a height of b and then released from rest in this position. Find the displacement of the string at any time t. 7. A string is stretched between two fixed points at a distance 2L apart and the points of the string are given initial velocities v where v = cx /L 0 < x 0. x

7. Find Fourier sine and cosine transform of e-ax , a > 0 and hence find Fourier sine and cosine transform of x e-ax. 8. Find Fourier transform of

e

 a2 x2

, a > 0 and hence find Fourier transform of

e



x2 2

.

9. Find Fourier sine and cosine transform of x n-1. 10 Find inverse

 transform

4z3 . 2 z  12 z  1

Unit -I Fourier Series Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half range cosine and sine series – Parseval’s Identity - Harmonic Analysis- Application to engineering problems. 9 Hours Unit –II Fourier Transform Fourier transform pair – Sine and Cosine transforms – Properties – Transforms of simple functions – Convolution theorem - Parseval’s Identity-Finite Fourier Transform- Application to engineering problems. 9 Hours Unit – III Z -Transform and Difference Equations Z-transform - Elementary properties – Inverse Z-transform – Convolution theorem -Formation of difference equations – Solution of difference equations using Z- transform - Application to engineering problems. 9 Hours

68


Unit-IV Partial Differential Equations Formation of partial differential equations by elimination of arbitrary constants and arbitrary functions – Solution of standard types of first order partial differential equations (excluding reducible to standard forms – Lagrange’s linear equation – Linear partial differential equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients. 9 Hours UNIT –V Boundary value problems Classification of second order quasi linear partial differential equations – Fourier series solutions of one dimensional wave equation – One dimensional heat equation (Insulated ends excluded ) – Steady state solution of two-dimensional heat equation (Insulated edges excluded ) – Fourier series solutions in Cartesian coordinates . 9 Hours Total: 45+15Hours Textbook (s) 1 B. S .Grewal , Higher Engineering Mathematics , Khanna Publications , New Delhi ,2000. 2 K. Megalai, P. Geetha and D. Jayanthi , Mathematics for Engineers, Volume III, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi,2008. Reference (s) 1. P. Kandasamy, K. Gunavathy and K. Thilagavathy, Engineering Mathematics ,Volume III , S. Chand & Co., New Delhi, 2008. 2. E. Kreyszig. Advanced Engineering Mathematics , 8th Edition , John Wiley & Sons, Inc,Singapore (2008). 3. T. Veerarajan , Engineering Mathematics ,Tata McGraw Hill

69


11M302 ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND METALLURGY 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives   

To impart knowledge on the structure, properties, treatment, testing and applications of metals and non-metallic materials To acquire overall sound knowledge in metallurgy and materials engineering To predict and control material properties through an understanding of atomic, molecular, crystalline, and microscopic structures of engineering materials

Program Outcome (POs) (c) The graduates will be able to learn various techniques available to make shapes and designs in various materials. Students will be understood the methodologies to be followed in casting, fabrication, machining, materials, metallurgy and forming of engineering materials. At the end of the course, students will be able to select and perform suitable method of producing a desirable component in industry. Course Outcomes (COs) 1. Able to acquire knowledge of the major types of materials and how their properties can be calculated or determined experimentally; 2. Able to design, perform and analyze experiments to characterize materials and devices; 3. Able to develop practical laboratory skills, together with relevant knowledge of health and safety ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No. 1 2 3 4 5

Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version) Remember Understand Apply Analyze/Evaluate Create Total

Test 1*

Test 2*

40 30 30 100

40 30 30 100

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

Define alloy and steel. What are cooling curves? What is an equilibrium phase diagram? How the materials are classified? Define the term heat treatment. List the various stages of heat treatment processes. List some quenching medium generally used in industries. What is TTT and CCT diagram? How can you classify iron and steel? List the bearing materials that commonly used. What are HSLA and maraging steels? Define the term degree of polymerization Name any four thermosetting and thermoplastics. Define engineering ceramics and composites. List the various matrix materials used. What are the factors affecting mechanical properties. Define the term slip and twinning

Model Examination* 40 30 30 100


70


18. 19. 20. 21.

What is meant by fatigue and creep fracture? What are the properties that can be determined by tensile test. How the Brinell hardness number is calculated? Write down the various formulas to determine the various properties by tensile test.

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

When the materials attain their required properties. How cast iron differ from steel in carbon content? What are the types of testing carried out to test the mechanical properties How the deformation of materials taken place? How the ceramics are manufactured by various processes. How the ceramics and composites are manufactured? How the hardness is achieved by various heat treatment processes?

Unit I Constitution of Alloys and Phase Diagrams Phase diagram – Solid solutions – Substitutional and interstitial–- intermetallic compound – cooling curves, phase rule, lever rule, equilibrium diagrams– Isomorphous, and eutectic, peritectic, and eutectoid reactions with examples – Iron – Iron carbon equilibrium diagram Study on microstructure of iron in various transformation phase 9 Hours Unit II Heat Treatment Heat treatment of steel, annealing – stress relief, recrystallisation and spheroidizing – normalizing, hardening and Tempering of steel – TTT Diagram - Isothermal transformation diagrams – cooling curves superimposed on TT diagram, CCR – Austempering, martempering, ausforming – Hardenability, Jominy end quench test, Case hardening processes – Carburising, Nitriding, Cyaniding, Carbonitriding – Flame and Induction hardening. Testing of salt content in bath, sub zero treatment, Cryogenic treatment 9 Hours Unit III Metals and Alloys Classification of steel and cast iron -- properties and application. Gray, White, Malleable, Spheroidal Graphite – alloy cast irons – Effect of alloy additions on steel (Mn, Si, Cr, Mo, V Ti & W) – Stainless and tool steels, HSLA, Maraging steels Alloys of copper, aluminum, magnesium, nickel and zinc – composition and their uses – Bearing materials – precipitation treatment – Alloys for brazing and soldering Extraction of copper by Smelting process and aluminum by Bayer’s process 9 Hours Unit IV Non Metallic Materials Polymers – types, Properties and applications of PE, PP, PS, PVC, PMMA, PET, PC, PA, ABS, PI, PAI, PPO, PPS, PEEK, PTFE Polymers – Rubber and its types- Metal matrix composites – manufacturing, properties and applications - Ceramics – Properties and applications of Al2O3, SiC, SiN3, PSZ and Sialon, ceramic composites Smart materials such as shape memory alloys 9 Hours

71


Unit V Mechanical Properties and Testing Mechanism of elastic and plastic deformation, slip and twinning – tensile test, stress strain curve for ductile and brittle materials – Compression test – Hardness tests – Impact test – Creep test – fatigue test, endurance limit S – N Curve, fatigue limit, Fracture – Types - ideal fracture stress, Fracture toughness, ductile failure - cup and cone type fracture Metallurgical testing-spectrometer, Strolin apparatus - NDT - Dye Penetrant Test 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1.

William D Callister, Material Science and Engineering, John Wiley and Sons, Singapore, 2007

References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Kenneth G Budinski and Michael K Budinski, Engineering Materials, Prentice-Hall of India, New Delhi ,2002 V. Raghavan, Materials Science and Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi 2009 Sydney H Avner, Introduction to Physical Metallurgy, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi 1994 P. Khanna, Text Book of Material Science and Metallurgy, Dhanpat Rai Publication (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2007 G. E. Dieter, Mechanical Metallurgy, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi 2007 http://freevideolectures.com/Course/3104/Principles-of-Physical-Metallurgy http://freevideolectures.com/Course/3058/Advanced-Materials-and-Processes

72


11M303 ELECTRICAL MACHINES AND DRIVES 3 0 0 3 Objectives    

To understand the working principle, performance characteristics of DC Generator and DC Motor To understand the working principle, operation of 3-phase and 1-phase Induction motor and synchronous motor To provide knowledge in the area of electrical dives and their control techniques. To impart knowledge on o Basics of electric drives and their characteristics o Different speed control methods o Various motor starters o Applications of electrical machines

Program Outcomes(POs) a)

The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them.

Course Outcomes (COs)   

Able to determine the generated EMF, Speed of DC Generator. Able to Construct of DC machines and AC machines. Able to demonstrate the different speed control methods of DC and AC drives.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No. 1 2 3 4 5

Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version) Remember Understand Apply Analyze / Evaluate Create Total

Test 1*

Test 2*

20 30 20 30 100

20 30 20 30 100

Model Examination* 20 30 20 30 100

Semester End Examination 20 30 20 30 100

7

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

What is the function of carbon brush and commutator used in DC generator? Write the number of parallel paths in a lap and wave connected windings Name the types of DC generators. What is meant by self excited and separately excited dc generator? What is the basic difference between dc generator and dc motor? What are open circuit characteristics of DC shunt generator? How can one differentiate between long shunt compound generator and short shunt compound generator? 8. Why is the emf not zero when the field current is reduced to zero in a dc generator? 9. On what occasions dc generators may not have residual flux? 10. Define the term armature reaction in dc machines.

*

The marks secured in Test 1 and Test 2 will be converted to 20 and Model examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks

73


11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40.

What is the basic principle of operation of DC motor? How does a DC motor differ from DC generator in construction? How will you change the direction of rotation of a DC motor? What is back emf in DC motors? Write down the equation for back emf of DC motor. Write down the equation for torque developed in DC motor. Why is the starting current high in a DC motor? What is the need for starter in a DC motor? What is the function of over-load release coil provided in a DC motor starter? What is the function of a no-voltage release coil provided in a DC motor starter? How does 4 point starter differ from 3 point starter? Enumerate the factors on which the speed of a DC motor depends. Write the two extra features of slip ring induction motors. What are slip rings? State the difference between slip ring rotor and cage rotor of an induction motor? Write an expression for the slip of an induction motor Define slip of induction motor? What are the advantages of cage motor? What is Rotating magnetic field? Write down the equation for frequency of emf induced in an alternator List the different methods of speed control employed for DC motors. List the different methods of speed control employed for AC motors. What is meant by solid state speed control? What is meant by dc chopper? Write down the main feature of v/f control? What is stator voltage control? Write the output voltage equation for single phase full converter and half converter. Define slip power. What are the slip power recovery schemes? Define power factor.

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

Draw the performance characteristics curve of DC shunt, series, and compound generator. Derive the EMF equation of DC generator. Explain the different types of DC generators. Derive the equation for torque developed in DC motor Describe the working of three point starter and four point starter How will you control the speed of DC shunt and series motor? What are the various method used for selection of drives? Draw the slip-torque characteristics curve of three phase induction motor Explain the different types of induction motor. Derive the equation for torque developed in induction motor Explain the operation of synchronous motor. Describe the working of alternator What are the different types of speed control of three phase induction motor? Explain Describe the operation of Kramer’s system & Scherbius system Explain in details about single phase half full converter drive speed control for DC drive Explain in detail about V/F control? Explain in detail about Ward Leonard drives. What are the different power factor correction methods? Explain chopper control DC drives.

74


Apply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Why are carbon brushes preferred for dc machines? Why DC motors are not operated to develop maximum power in practice? Why starter is necessary for DC motors? Why a differentially compound motor is not used in practice? Why an induction motor is called rotating transformer? Why an induction motor will never run at its synchronous speed? Why starter is necessary for the induction motor? Why the Chopper controlled DC drives are used? Why the static Rotor resistance control is used? Why the slip power recovery schemes are used?

Analyze / Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4.

Formulate the relation between speed and torque of DC motor. For a given DC machine, evaluate the drop across the armature and field. Construct the equivalent circuit diagram of Induction motor. Analyze the Control of DC drives using controlled rectifiers and chopper.

Unit I DC Machines Constructional details of DC Generator – Emf equation – Types of DC Generators – Characteristics of DC generators – Principle of operation of DC motor – Back emf and torque equation – Characteristics of DC motors - Starting of D.C. motors – Types of starters. 9 Hours Unit II AC Machines and Transformers Construction of AC machines – Types – Principle of operation of three phase induction motor – Equivalent circuit –Speed torque characteristics– Single phase induction motors – Principle of operation – Starters for induction motor – Construction of synchronous machines – types – Induced emf – Voltage regulation – Principle of operation of synchronous motor – Starting of synchronous motor – Three phase Transformer, construction, principle of operation. 9 Hours Unit III Drive Characteristics Types of electrical drives –Advantages of electrical drives- Factors influencing the choice of electrical drives, heating and cooling curves – Loading conditions and classes of duty – Braking – Types of braking – Braking characteristics for DC drive and AC drive. 9 Hours Unit IV Conventional and Solid State Speed Control of DC Drives Speed control of DC series and shunt motor using armature control, field control and Ward - Leonard control system – Speed control characteristics – Control of DC drives using controlled rectifiers and choppers – Applications. 9 Hours Unit V Conventional and Solid State Speed Control of AC Drives Control of three phase induction motors using stator voltage and frequency control – static rotor resistance control – Slip power recovery schemes – Static Kramer control method – Static Scherbius control method – Power Factor correction-Applications. 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours

75


Textbooks 1. 2.

G. K. Dubey, Fundamentals of Electrical Drives, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi, 2007. D. P. Kothari and I. J. Nagrath, Basic Electrical Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2007.

References 1. 2. 3.

S. K. Pillai, A First Course on Electrical Drives, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi, 2008 M. D. Singh and K. B. Khanchandani, Power Electronics, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2007 Vedam Subrahmaniam, Electric Drives (concepts and applications), Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2007

76


11M304 ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS 3 1 0 3.5 Objectives   

To acquire knowledge about the fundamentals of thermodynamic laws, concepts, principles and mechanism in accounting for the macroscopic physical systems To study and understand the concepts and working of power generating equipments To apply the thermodynamic concepts in various applications like IC engines and Air conditioning systems

Program Outcomes (POs) (b) The graduates will be able to acquire the knowledge, capability of analyzing and solving any concept or problem associated with heat energy dynamics and utilization. Students will be able to understand the working concepts of thermal engineering. (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes.


Able to understand the first and second laws of thermodynamics and their application to a wide range of systems. Able to evaluate entropy changes in a wide range of processes and determine the reversibility or irreversibility of a process from such calculations. Able to understand various Gas laws & ideal gas processes

ASSESSMENT PATTERN

S. No. 1 2 3 4 5


Test 1*

Test 2*

Model Examination*


Remember Understand Apply Analyze / Evaluate Create Total

20 20 30 30 100

20 20 30 30 100

20 20 30 30 100

20 20 30 30 100

8

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

*

Define entropy. Define enthalpy. Define refrigerator. Define heat engine. Define internal energy. Define property and state. Define path, process, cycle. Define Coefficient of Performance. State Clausius statement of second law of thermodynamics


77


10. 11. 12. 13.

State Kelvin-plank statement of second law of thermodynamics. Define volumetric efficiency and clearance ratio Define Avagadro’s law. Define Dalton’s law of partial pressure

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

Identify a steady flow system and indicate the expressions. Give examples for open system and closed system Justify the limitations for first law of thermodynamics? Name the various gas power cycles. How is vapour power cycle suited for three phase flow? Give some examples. Sketch the p-V and T-s diagram for Carnot cycle. Why we apply Maxwell relations? Indicate the importance of work ratio in vapour cycles? What is the effect of Cut-off ratio in the efficiency of a Diesel cycle? Sketch the P-V diagram of dual cycle and mark the processes Differentiate 2-stroke and 4-stroke engines based on construction.

Apply/Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

What do you mean by reversible process? Brief with examples. Write down the continuity equation for the flow process. Explain for various applications. Give the limitations of critical point for pure substances. With suitable examples explain the term wet, dry and saturated and super heat. Mention the relation between heat and work transfer for a flow and non flow process. Relate the terms enthaphy, entropy, internal energy for a thermodynamic system. Prove that the difference in specific heat capacities equal to Cp-Cv = R and Cp-Cv = TVβ2 / kT 8. Evaluate clausius inequality with its p-V diagram. 9. How will you differentiate dual cycle with diesel cycle in IC engines? 10. How the ignition takes place in C.I.Engine?

Unit I Concepts and First Law of Thermodynamics Basic Concepts – concept of continuum – Macroscopic approach – Thermodynamic systems – Closed Open – Control volume – Thermodynamic properties and equilibrium state of a system – Path and process – Quasi Static process – Modes of work – Zeroth law of thermodynamics – Concept of temperature and heat – Concept of ideal and real gases. First law of thermodynamics – Applied to closed and open systems – Internal energy – Specific heat capacities Cv and Cp – Enthalpy. Study on Perpetual motion machine of the first kind 9 Hours Unit II Second Law of Thermodynamics Second law of thermodynamics – Kelvin Planck and Clausius statements – Reversibility and Irreversibility – Clausius inequality – Entropy concept efficiency – COP – Principle of increase of entropy - Change of Entropy – Carnot theorem – Absolute entropy – Availability. Third law of Thermodynamics and Postulatory Thermodynamics 9 Hours

78


Unit III Properties of Pure Substances Thermodynamic properties of pure substances in solid , liquid and vapour phases, P-V, P-T, T-V, T-S, H-S diagrams – Thermodynamic properties of steam – Calculations of work done and heat transfer in non – flow and flow process. Measurements of steam quality 9 Hours Unit IV Properties of Gases, Thermodynamic Relations Properties of ideal and real gases - equation of state - Avagadro’s law - Vander Waal’s equation of states Dalton’s law of partial pressure - Properties of mixture of Gases - Maxwell relations - T- dS equation Clausius Clayperon equations - Joule Thomson Coefficient. Conditions of stability 9 Hours Unit V Air Standard Cycles and Psychrometry Air standard cycles – Otto, Diesel and Dual – Calculation of mean effective pressure and Air standard efficiency - Concepts of Stirling cycle and Ericsson cycle - Psychrometric properties and processes Psychrometric chart. Adiabatic flame Temperature 9 Hours Total: 45 + 15 Hours Textbook 1.

Y. Cengel and Boles, Thermodynamics - An Engineering Approach, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2003.

References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

R.K.Rajput, Engineering Thermodynamics, Laxmi Publications Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi, 2011 R. S. Khurmi, Steam table with Psychometric chart, S. Chand Publications, New Delhi 2009 J. P. Holman, Thermodynamics, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi 2002 Vanwylen and Sontag, Classical Thermodynamics, Wiley Eastern, 1987 C. P. Arora, Thermodynamics, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2003 C. Merala, Pother, W. Craig and Somerton, Thermodynamics for Engineers, Schaum Outline Series, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2004

79


11M305 FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY 3 1 0 3.5 Objectives  To understand the application of fluid in various engineering requirements  To make familiar with calculation of forces in fluid structure interaction

Programme Outcomes (POs) a)

The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry- level. placement in both Mechanical Engineering as well as IT companies.


Able to get knowledge on about the imporatnce of fluid their properties and its effects. Understand the principles of continuity ,Momentum and energy as applied to fluid Motions. Able to recognize these principles written in form of Mathematical Equation.


Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version) Remember Understand Apply Analyze/ Evaluate Create Total

Test 1*

Test 2*

Model Examination*


30 20 25 25 -

30 20 25 25 -

30 20 25 25 -

30 20 25 25 -

100

100

100

100

9

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

*

What are all the properties of fluid? What are all the types of fluid? Write Pascal Law. What are all the methods of measuring pressure? Write an equation to measure pressure using Manometer. What are all the types of fluid flow? Write two and three dimensional continuity equation. State Euler and Bernoulli’s equation. State momentum principle. Write the methods of measurement of flow of fluid.


80


11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32.

Write equation to find loss of pressure due to friction. Write various minor Losses. Write equations to find loss of pressure due to minor losses. State the concepts of branched pipe flow. Write the dimensions of physical quantities used in fluid mechanics in terms of fundamental dimensions. What is dimensional homogeneity? State Buckingham’s pi theorem. What are all dimensionless numbers? State model laws. Write the concepts of boundary layer. What are boundary layer thicknesses? Define boundary layer separation. Write equations to find drag and lift. What are all the types of turbo machineries? Write the concept of velocity triangle. Write equations to find work done on turbine. Write equations to find efficiency of various turbines. What are all types of positive displacement pumps? What are all the types of draft tubes? What are unit quantities? Write equation to calculate work done by the centrifugal pump. What is Cavitations in pumps?

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

How importance is the various fluid properties in engineering application? What is all the application of different types of fluid? Why Concepts of measuring pressure is important? How manometers work? Why types of flow important in engineering application? How Continuity equations are applied in real world application? How Bernoulli’s equation is useful to fluid mechanics? How important is knowledge on fluid forces and momentum principle for an engineer? How Important is fluid flow losses in designing fluid circuits? How to form governing equations using dimensionless analysis? How important are dimensionless numbers? Why concept on boundary layer is important? How to differentiate turbines based on the working principle? How pumps are selected with respect to their working principle?

Apply/Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

Find various properties of given fluid Create various types of flow using given fluid and pump Designing manometers for various applications Applying Bernoulli’s equation and finding flow of given fluid flow Calculation and verification of losses of fluid flow in given pipe system Writing governing equation for a pipe system using dimensional analysis Designing a model for a real world prototype using dimensionless numbers Finding the significance of boundary layer in a fluid structure interaction Suggesting a suitable turbine for the given environment Designing of turbine for given environment Suggest suitable pump for given application Designing a pump for given application

81


Unit I Introduction to Fluid and Fluid Motions Units & Dimensions. Properties of fluids – Specific gravity, specific weight, viscosity, compressibility, vapour pressure and gas laws. Three dimensional Continuity equation in Cartesian and polar coordinates, Bernoulli equation, energy equation, momentum equation and moment of momentum equation, Measurement of Pressure using Manometers Capillarity and surface tension 9 Hours Unit II Internal and External Flow Laminar flow in pipe, between parallel plates - Turbulent Flow in a pipe – Flow Separation, Lift and Drag on Airfoils – Boundary layer thickness and boundary layer Theory - Losses in pipe system, Darcy – Weisbach equation - Friction factor - Flow through pipes in series and in parallel, Moody diagram Minor Losses 9 Hours Unit III Dimensional Analysis and Similitude Dimension and Units: Buckingham’s π theorem. Discussion on dimensionless parameters. - Dimensionless parameters –Reynold’s Number, Froude’s Number, Euler’s Number, Weber’s Number, Mach’s Number Laws of Models and similitude – Reynold’s model law – Froude Model Law Classification of Models 9 Hours Unit IV Hydraulic Turbine Fluid machines: definition and classification - exchange of energy - Euler's equation for turbo machines Construction of velocity vector diagram's - head and specific work - degree of reaction. Hydro turbines: definition and classifications - Pelton turbine - Francis turbine - propeller turbine - Kaplan turbine - working principles - velocity triangles - work done - specific speed – efficiencies Performance Curves for Turbine 9 Hours Unit V Hydraulic Pump Pumps: definition and classifications - Centrifugal pump: classifications, working principles, velocity triangles, specific speed, efficiency and performance curves - Reciprocating pump: classification, working principles, indicator diagram, work saved by air vessels - cavitations in pumps - rotary pumps: working principles of gear and vane pumps Characteristics curve for centrifugal pump 9 Hours Total: 45 + 15 Hours Textbook 1. R.K.Bansal, Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machinery, Laxmi Publications, NewDelhi, Ninth Edition 2010. References 1. Streeter and L. Victor, Fluid Mechanics, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New York, 1975 2. Bruce R Munson , Donald F Young, Theodore H Okiishi and Wade W. Huebsch, Fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics, John Wiley & Sons, 2009 3. Pijush K Kundu and Ira M Cohen, Fluid Machines, Academic Press, Burlington, USA, 2010 4. Yunus Cengel and John Cimbala, Fluid Mechanics Fundamentals and Application, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi 2009 5. Robert and W Fox, Introduction to Fluid Machines, 6th ed., John Wiley Eastern Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi 2006 6. Frank.M.white Fluid mechanics 7th ed., Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd,New Delhi

82


11M306 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives   

To acquire knowledge about the mechanism of chip formation in machining, cutting tool materials, tool life, cutting fluids To understand the working of machine tools such as semi automatic & automatic lathes shaping and allied machines, milling, drilling and allied machines, grinding and allied machines and broaching To understand the basic concepts of Non Traditional Machining, & computer numerical control (CNC) machine tool

Program Outcomes (POs) c)

The graduates will be able to learn various techniques available to make shapes and designs in various materials. Students will be understood the methodologies to be followed in casting, fabrication, machining, materials, metallurgy and forming of engineering materials. At the end of the course, students will be able to select and perform suitable method of producing a desirable component in industry. g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in both Mechanical Engineering as well as IT companies. Course Outcomes (COs)    

Acquire knowledge about the mechanism of metal cutting processes. Understanding about the working of machine tools and various operations performed Able to justify the most appropriate manufacturing process and material for a given product Understanding about advanced manufacturing processes



Test 1*

Test 2*

30 40 30 100

30 40 30 100



10

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. *

State Taylor’s tool life equation. List various cutting tool materials List various cutting tool characteristics. What is the purpose of cutting fluids? What is tool life? List various types of cutting fluids. List the basic parts of turret lathe. What are the machining operations performed on a capstan lathe?


83


9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25.

Define drilling Define reaming Define boring Define tapping What types of operations can be performed in planer? List out various milling operations List out different types of milling cutters Define milling List out the basic parts of plain milling machine. What is indexing? Define grinding process What is meant by grain size, grade, and structure of grinding wheel? Define broaching. Define honing, lapping, and polishing. What prompted the development of unconventional machining process? List out the main criteria for selecting the electrolyte in electro chemical machining Name the abrasive materials used in abrasive water jet machining.

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24.

Differentiate between orthogonal and oblique cutting. Why tool fails during cutting? What are the factors that affect tool life? List the reasons for tool wear. How the milling machine is specified? Where rough and finish turning are used? How the size of drilling machine is specified? How the size of lathe is specified? Name the machining process which uses single point cutting tool Compare drilling and reaming operation. What is the difference between planer and shaper? How the milling differs from turning in lathe? How gear hobbing differ from gear shaping process? What is the difference between a fixed and swiveling head vertical milling machine? What is the difference between rough and precision grinding? How the size of grinding machine is specified? Why a grinding wheel is to be balanced? How the jobs are held during surface grinding operation? List out the difference between capstan , turret , and centre lathe What are the different methods of production of gears? Why surface finish is an important in manufacturing process? Why surface finish is an important in manufacturing process? State the advantages of CNC machines over conventional machines What are the advantages of rapid prototyping?

Unit I Metal Cutting Theory Introduction – Orthogonal & Oblique Cutting – chip formation – Mechanisms of metal cutting: Shear plane, Stress, Strain and cutting forces – Merchant’s Circle – cutting tool materials, tool wear, tool life, cutting fluids – Single point cutting tool nomenclature - Machinability – Problems in Merchant’s Circle and tool life Metal Cutting Economics 9 Hours

84


Unit II Automatic Turning and Milling Introduction to Capstan and turret lathes – Indexing mechanism – Bar feeding mechanism - Automats – single spindle automates & its types - multi spindle automates & its types. Milling – Introduction – types – up milling & down milling, various operations – Milling cutter and its nomenclature – Indexing - types – simple, compound & differential – Accuracy and repeatability of a positioning system in conventional machine tools. Machining Time Calculation for Milling Machine 9 Hours Unit III Reciprocating Machine Tools and Hole Making Shaper– Introduction, types, specification & Quick return Mechanisms. Planer - Introduction, types, specification & Quick return Mechanisms Slotter - Introduction, types, specification & Quick return Mechanisms. Introduction to hole making operations – drilling, reaming, boring & tapping. Broaching -Introduction, types of broaching methods – nomenclature of broach tool. Drill Size Calculation for Tapping Operation 9 Hours Unit IV Gear Cutting and Finishing Processes Gear cutting – Introduction – forming, generation, shaping, and hobbing. Grinding – Introduction, types of grinding process – Grinding wheel selection – honing, lapping, super finishing, polishing and buffing Gear finishing operations 9 Hours Unit V Advanced Machining Processes Introduction to Unconventional Machining process – overview of all techniques – working principle of abrasive jet machining & water jet cutting process – Introduction to Electric Discharge Machining, Chemical & Electro Chemical Machining processes – Introduction to Laser Beam Machining –Introduction to CNC Machine Tool – Turning centre – Vertical turning centre - Milling centre Overview of Rapid Prototyping Processes 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1.

J P Kaushish, Manufacturing Processes, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010

References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Richerd R Kibbe, John E Neely, Roland O Merges and Warren J White, Machine Tool Practices, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003 Serope Kalpakjian and Steven R Schmid, Manufacturing Engineering and Technology, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2002 S. K. Hajra Choudhury, Elements of Workshop Technology – Vol. II, Media Promoters & Publishers Pvt Ltd., Mumbai,2003 P. C. Sharma, A Text Book of Production Engineering, S. Chand and Co. Ltd, New Delhi,2005 P. N. Rao, Manufacturing Technology- Metal Cutting and Machine Tools, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2006 http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcoursecontents/IIT%20Kharagpur/Manuf%20Proc%20II/New_index1.html

85


11M307 FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5 Objectives   

To reinforce and enhance the understanding of the fundamentals of Fluid mechanics and Hydraulic machines To introduce a variety of classical experimental and diagnostic techniques, and the principles behind these techniques To provide practice in making engineering judgments, estimates and assessing the reliability of your measurements, skills which are very important in all engineering disciplines

Program Outcomes (POs) e) The graduates develop skills to be effective members of a team. k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes (COs)    

Learn to Measure and differentiate between absolute, differential, and gauge pressure, Make basic pressure and velocity measurements. Determining the practical understanding of Friction losses, Boundary layer separation, lift, drag. Calculate flow characteristics such as Reynolds number, friction factor, pressure and drag coefficient from laboratory measurements. Learn to know the characteristics of pump by measuring their parameters to calculate its efficiency.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN Internal Assessment     

Preparation Remember Understand Apply Observation and Results Analyze Evaluate Record Mini-Project/Model Examination/Viva-Voce Total

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Define fluid statics. What is fluid mechanics? What is fluid kinetics? Define Viscosity. What are Newtonian and non-Newtonian fluids? Define Surface Tension What is meant by transition state Define Pascal’s law What is meant by energy lines Define the term drag


15

15

15

25

5

-

15

10

50

50

86


11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44.

What is boundary layer? Define energy thickness. State the methods of dimensional analysis Define density. Define Specific volume. List the types of fluid Define Pascal Law Mention the methods of measuring pressure Write equation to measure pressure using Manometer Mention Types of fluid flow Mention Two and three dimensional continuity equation Write Euler and Bernoullis equation Define Momentum principle Write Equation to find loss of pressure due to friction Mention Various minor Losses Equations to find loss of pressure due to minor losses Write the Concepts of branched pipe flow Define Dimensional homogeneity Define Buckingham’s pi theorem Define Dimensionless numbers Define Model laws Write the Concepts of boundary layer Define Boundary layer thicknesses What is meant Boundary layer separation Write Equations to find drag and lift Mention the types of turbo machineries Define Velocity triangle Write the Equations to find work done on turbine Write the Equations to find efficiency of various turbines Mention Types of positive displacement pumps Mention Types of draft tubes Mentions Unit quantities Write Equation to calculate work done by the centrifugal pump Define Cavitation in pumps

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

What are the similarities between model and prototype? When will you select a reciprocating pump? Compare the viscosity of the different fluid. Difference between the laminar and turbulent flow. How can Apply of Continuity equations How to apply Bernoulli’s equation for incompressible fluid. Difference between Fluid forces and momentum principle Why fluid flow losses in designing fluid circuits At what conditions, the laminar flow becomes turbulent flow? Difference between pump and turbine.

Apply/Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Calculation and verification of losses of fluid flow in given pipe system. Writing governing equation for a pipe system using dimensional analysis. Designing a model for a real world prototype using dimensionless numbers. Finding the significance of boundary layer in a fluid structure interaction. Suggesting a suitable turbine for the given environment. Designing of turbine for given environment.

87


7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

Suggestion of pump for given application. Designing a pump for given application. Find various properties of given fluid. Create various types of flow using given fluid and pump. Designing manometers for various applications. Applying Bernoulli’s equation and finding flow of given fluid flow.

List of Experiments 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Orifice meter. Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Venturi meter. Calculation of the rate of flow using Rota meter. Determination of friction factor for a given set of pipes. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of centrifugal pump/Submergible pump Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of reciprocating pump. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Gear pump. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Pelton wheel. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristics curves of Francis turbine. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Kaplan turbine. Conducting experiments to find the Lift and Drag of a given Aerofoil using wind tunnel. Demonstrating and measuring the boundary layer formation using various cross sectional objects in a open channel flow.  Design Experiments  Application oriented experiments  Mini Project Total: 45 Hours

Practical Schedule Sl. No. 1

Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Orifice meter.

3

2

Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Venturi meter.

3

3

Calculation of the rate of flow using Rota meter.

3

4

Determination of friction factor for a given set of pipes.

3

Experiment

7

Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of centrifugal pump/Submergible pump Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of reciprocating pump. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Gear pump.

8

Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Pelton wheel.

5 6

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristics curves of Francis turbine. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Kaplan turbine Conducting experiments to find the Lift and Drag of a given Aerofoil using wind tunnel. Demonstrating and measuring the boundary layer formation using various cross sectional objects in an open channel flow. Design Experiments Application oriented experiments Mini Project

Hours

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

88


11M308 ELECTRICAL MACHINES LABORATORY 0

0

3

1.5

Objectives   

To understand the working principle, performance characteristics of DC Generator and DC Motor To understand the different types of Transformers, working principle and their performance To estimate the various losses taking place in DC machines and Transformers and apply the different testing methods to arrive their performance

Program Outcomes (POs) a) e)

The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. The graduates develop skills to be effective members of a team.


Able to analyze the characteristics of DC and AC machines. Able to understand and conduct experimental testing on different types of electrical machines. Able to analyze the operation of electric machines under different loading conditions.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN Internal Assessment Preparation Remember Understand Apply Observation and Results Analyze Evaluate Record Mini-Project/Model Examination/Viva-Voce Total


10

15

15

20

10

-

15

15

50

50

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

What is the function of carbon brush used in DC generator? Distinguish between lap winding and wave winding used in dc machine. Write the number of parallel paths in a lap and wave connected windings Name the three things required for the generation of emf. What is meant by self excited and separately excited dc generator? What is the basic difference between dc generator and dc motor? Write down the emf equation of dc generator. Give the meaning of each symbol What is pole pitch? How can the voltage in a DC generator be increased? What is critical resistance of a DC shunt generator? What are the conditions to be fulfilled for a shunt generator to build up voltage? What do you mean by residual flux in DC generator? A DC generator fails to self excite. List the cause for the failure for the failure. What are open circuit characteristics of DC shunt generator? How can one differentiate between long shunt compound generator and short shunt compound generator?

89


16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71.

Why is the emf not zero when the field current is reduced to zero in a dc generator? Define the term ‘critical speed’ in dc shunt generator. On what occasions dc generators may not have residual flux? How the critical field resistance of a dc shunt generator is estimated from its OCC? Define the term armature reaction in dc machines. What are the two unwanted effects of armature reaction? Differentiate between geometric neutral axis (GNA) and magnetic neutral axis (MNA). In which part of the dc machine is the compensating winding situated? What are the various types of commutation? Name the two methods of improving commutation. What is reactance emf in dc machine? Define the term commutation in dc machines. How and why the compensating winding in dc machine excited? How is the interpole winding in dc machine excited? To what polarity are the interpoles excited in dc generators? What is the basic difference between DC generator and DC motor? What is the basic principle of operation of DC motor? What is torque proportional to? Distinguish between shunt and series field coil constructions. How does a DC motor differ from DC generator in construction? How will you change the direction of rotation of a DC motor? What is back emf in DC motors? Write down the equation for back emf of DC motor. Write down the equation for torque developed in DC motor. Under what condition the mechanical power developed in a DC motor will be maximum? Why shaft torque is always less than that developed inside the armature in a DC motor? Why is the starting current high in a DC motor? What is the need for starter in a DC motor? What is the function of over-load release coil provided in a DC motor starter? What is the function of a no-voltage release coil provided in a DC motor starter? How does 4 point starter differ from 3 point starter? Enumerate the factors on which the speed of a DC motor depends. List the different methods of speed control employed for DC series motor. Draw the N Vs Eb characteristics of a dc motor for two different field currents. What is the relation between electrical degree and mechanical degree? What is the meaning of electrical degree? List out some examples of prime movers. Give some applications of DC motor. State one advantage and disadvantage in the application of each of the three basic types of DC motors. List all the important information on name plate of a DC motor. Why field control is considered superior than armature control method of DC shunt motor? State the principle of operation of a transformer. What are the main parts of a transformer? The efficiency of a transformer is always higher than that of rotating electrical machines. Why? List the advantages of stepped core arrangement in a transformer. Why are breathers used in transformers? When will a Bucholz relay operate in a transformer? What is the function of transformer oil in a transformer? What are the applications of step-up and step-down transformers? State the condition for maximum efficiency. State the advantages of Swinburne’s test. Is it possible to conduct Swinburne’s test on DC series motor? Justify. Does the transformer draw any current when secondary is open? Why? What do you mean by no-load current of a transformer? What are the functions of no-load current in a transformer? How does change in frequency affect the operation of a given transformer?

90


72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 77. 78. 79. 80. 81. 82. 83. 84. 85. 86. 87.

How will you transfer the quantities from one circuit to another circuit in a transformer? Define voltage regulation of a transformer Can the voltage regulation of a transformer go to negative? If so under what condition? Full load copper loss in a transformer is 1600 watts. What will be the loss at half load? What is the angle by which no-load current will lag the ideal applied voltage? Distinguish between power transformer and distribution transformer. What is the purpose of providing ‘taps’ in transformer and where these are provided? What are the advantages of 3-phase transformers over 3 numbers of single phase transformers? State the conditions under which OC and SC tests are conducted in a transformer. What is the purpose of conducting OC test on a transformer? What is the purpose of conducting SC test on a transformer? What are the advantages of OC and SC tests of a transformer over the load test? What is the condition for obtaining maximum efficiency of a transformer? What do you understand by all-day efficiency? List the merits of an autotransformer. What are the components of magnetic losses in transformer and on what factors they depend?

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

Draw the performance characteristics curve of DC shunt, series, and compound generator. Derive the EMF equation of DC generator. Explain the different types of DC generators. Derive the equation for torque developed in DC motor Draw the mechanical and electrical characteristics of DC shunt, series, compound motors. What are the effects caused by armature reaction? Explain the different methods of commutation. Explain the parallel operation of two DC generators. Describe the working of three point starter and four point starter How will you control the speed of DC shunt and series motor? Derive an expression for EMF induced in single phase transformer. What are the differences between two winding transformer and auto transformer? Explain the different types of instrumentation transformers? Derive the equivalent circuit of single phase transformer. What are the various losses that occur in DC machines? Give the conditions for maximum efficiency in DC machines. What are the various losses that occur in transformer? Explain the different ways of connecting the three phase transformer.

Apply / Analyze / Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Why are carbon brushes preferred for dc machines? Why DC motors are not operated to develop maximum power in practice? Why a differentially compound motor is not used in practice? Why the iron losses in a transformer are independent of the load current? Why is the rating of a transformer given in kVA? Why OC test is generally performed on LV side of a transformer? Why SC test is generally performed on HV side of a transformer? Why are iron losses considered as constant losses in transformer? Why the range of efficiency of transformers higher than those of other electrical machines? A d.c series motor having a resistance of 1 ohm drives a fan for which the torque varies as the square of the speed. At 220 V the set runs at 350 rpm and takes 25 A. The speed is to be raised to rpm by increasing the voltage. Determine the necessary voltage and the corresponding current assuming the field to be unsaturated. 11. Two series motors run at the speed of 500 rpm and 550 rpm respectively when taking 50 A at 500 V. The terminal resistance of each motor is 0.5 ohm. Calculate the speed of the combination when connected in series and coupled mechanically. The combination is taking 50A on 500V supply.

91


12. A 4 pole 240 V, wave connected shunt motor given 1119 kW when running at 1000 rpm and drawing armature and field current of 50 A and 0.1 A respectively. It has 540 conductors. Its resistance is 0.1 ohm. Assuming a drop of 1 volt/brush, find (a) Total torque. (b) Useful Torque. (c) Useful flux/pole. (d) Rotational Losses. (e) Efficiency 13. A 45 kW, 250 V, 4 pole, lap connected dc shunt motor has 32 slots with 10 conductors/slot. The armature and shunt field resistance are 0.05 ohm and 125 ohm respectively. The flux/pole is 0.03 Wb. If the full load efficiency is 85% find at full load. (a) Useful torque at shaft. (b)The speed 14. A 1500 kW, 550 V,16 pole generator run at 1500 rpm.What must be the useful flux per pole if there are 2500 conductor in the armature of the winding is lap connected and full load armature copper loss in 25 kW? Calculate the area of the pole shoe if the gap flex density has a uniform value of 0.9Wb/m 2, Also find the no load terminal voltage. Neglect change in speed. 15. Formulate the relation between losses and efficiency of DC machines. 16. For a given DC machine, how to evaluate the constant and variable losses. 17. Analyze the performance of given transformer and evaluate the core loss and cu loss occurring in it. List of Experiments 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

Load test on DC Shut & DC Series motor O.C.C & Load characteristics of DC Shunt and DC Series generator Speed control of DC shunt ,motor (Armature, Field control) Load test on single phase transformer O.C & S.C Test on a single phase transformer Regulation of an alternator by EMF & MMF methods. Load test on single phase alternator Load test on three phase squirrel cage Induction motor Speed control of three phase slip ring Induction Motor Load test on single phase induction Motor. Study of DC & AC Starters  Design experiment  Application oriented experiment Total: 45 Hours

Practical Schedule Sl. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Experiment Load test on DC Shut & DC Series motor O.C.C & Load characteristics of DC Shunt and DC Series generator Speed control of DC shunt ,motor (Armature, Field control) Load test on single phase transformer O.C & S.C Test on a single phase transformer Regulation of an alternator by EMF & MMF methods. Load test on single phase alternator Load test on three phase squirrel cage Induction motor Speed control of three phase slip ring Induction Motor Load test on single phase induction Motor. Study of DC & AC Starters Design experiment Application oriented experiment

Hours 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 6 3

92


11M309 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY II 0 0 3 1.5 Objectives  

To impart knowledge and skill in the field of conventional machine tools used in the industries To supplement the theory course on Machining Processes

Program Outcomes(POs) c)

The graduates will be able to learn various techniques available to make shapes and designs in various materials. Students will be understood the methodologies to be followed in casting, fabrication, machining, materials, metallurgy and forming of engineering materials. At the end of the course, students will be able to select and perform suitable method of producing a desirable component in industry. e) The graduates develop skills to be effective members of a team. i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes(COs) 

Able to develop understanding about constructional features and operations of conventional machine tools. Able to work on different machine tools and prepare models according to given specification. Develop knowledge about usage of appropriate tools for various machining operations and measuring instruments to check the accuracy of the models produced.

 


 

Preparation Remember Understand Apply Observation and Results Analyze Evaluate

15

15

10

25

Record

10

-

Mini-Project/Model Examination/Viva-Voce

15

10

50

50

Total Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.


How the surface roughness is designated? What is meant by up-milling and down milling? What is multi point cutting tool? How the quick return mechanism works? What is the principal of working of slotting machine? Designate the milling cutter. List the different operations performed in slotting machine. List out different operations performed in milling machine. How the gear hobber works?

93


10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

How the speed of hob/work piece is calculated? List the types of abrasives used in grinding wheel. Name the types of grinding wheel used for finishing. Specify the applications of cylindrical grinding. Name the coolants used for grinding of different materials. Designate the drill bits. List the types of drill bits. Write the equation for finding tool life? How chips are coming out during drilling? Write the gear cutting calculation formulae. Write the formula to calculate indexing rotation.

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

How to select speed for drilling different materials? How the return speed is controlled in shaping machine? Why down milling is most preferred than up-milling? Why conventional grinding wheels not suitable for aluminium and its alloys? Why tolerances are allocated for parts? Why V- belt is preferred for transmission? How indexing carried out during face milling? Why universal milling machine is preferred in many cases? How the helical gear is formed in gear hobber? Which machine is suitable for surface milling?

Apply/Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

How will you calculate depth of cut for octagonal face milling? How the stroke of slider is controlled? How the proper tap is selected for making an internal thread? How will you relate surface roughness and abrasive grades? List solution for avoiding over heating of tool during machining. For mass production of surface milling parts which type of milling process is preferred?

List of Experiments 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Preparation of spur gear from cylindrical work piece using gear hobbing machine. Machining of Pentagonal/Hexagonal/octagonal sides from cylindrical work piece using Milling machine. Machining Metal flat using surface grinding machine. Machining a shaft using cylindrical grinding machine. Preparation of dovetail groove using Shaping Machine. Machining an internal keyway using Slotter. Preparing an internal thread in metal flat using Drilling & Tapping. Cut a simple shape like circle, rectangle from OHNS using Wire cut-EDM. Selection and allocation of proper fit and tolerances – Example and Simple problems  Design experiment  Application oriented experiment  Mini project. Total: 45 Hours

94


Practical Schedule Sl. No.

3

Experiment Preparation of spur gear from cylindrical work piece using gear hobbing machine. Machining of Pentagonal/Hexagonal/octagonal sides from cylindrical work piece using Milling machine. Machining Metal flat using surface grinding machine.

4

Machining a shaft using cylindrical grinding machine.

5

Preparation of dovetail groove using Shaping Machine.

6

Machining an internal keyway using Slotter.

1 2

10

Preparing an internal thread in metal flat using Drilling & Tapping. Cut a simple shape like circle, rectangle from OHNS using Wire cut-EDM. Selection and allocation of proper fit and tolerances – Example and Simple problems Design experiment

11


7 8 9

Hours 3 3 3 6 3 3 3 6 3 6 6

95


11M401 / 11C401 / 11A401 NUMERICAL METHODS 3 1 0 3.5 Objectives  

Acquire the knowledge of finding approximate solutions of algebraic, transcendental, differential and integral equations by numerical methods and interpolating the values of a function using Lagrange’s and Newton’s polynomial approximations. Ability to find solution of initial and boundary value problems using multi step approximations and ability to solve boundary value problems using finite difference methods.

Programme Outcomes(POs) c)



Able to acquire more knowledge in basic concepts of engineering mathematics. Able to improve problem evaluation technique. Able to choose an appropriate method to solve a practical problem.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No 1 2 3 4 5


Test I11

Test II1

Model Examination1



20 40 30 10 100

20 40 30 10 100

20 40 30 10 100

20 40 30 10 100

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

State the Fundamental theorem of algebra. Define Algebraic and Transcendental equations. Write the formula for Regula Falsi method . What do you mean by Interpolation? State the derivatives of Newton’s Forward and Backward Interpolation formula. Write the conditions for applying Trapezoidal and Simpson’s rules. Write the formula for two point and three point Gaussian quadrature. Mention the multistep methods available for solving ordinary differential equation. Write the Bender schmidt Scheme for solving one dimensional heat equation. Write the explicit formula for one dimensional wave equation.


96


Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Give an example of a transcendental equation? Write the condition of convergence of Iteration method. What is the order of convergence of Newton - Raphson method? Write the differences between Direct and Iterative method. State the sufficient condition for solving Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Seidel method. Using Lagrange’s interpolation, find the polynomial through (0,0), (1,1) and (2,2). What do you mean by power method. State the way in which you can find the solution for Laplace equation. Write Milne’s & Adam’s Predictor and Corrector formula. What are the methods for solving simultaneous algebraic equations.

Apply 1. Obtain by power method, the numerically largest eigen value of the matrix

 15  4  3 1 A    10 12  6 with the starting vector x ( 0 )  1 . Perform only 4 – iterations.  20 4  2 1 2.

Explain briefly Gauss Elimination Iteration to solve simultaneous equations.

3.

If

4.

What is the relation between divided differences and forward differences ?

5.

Find the value of

6.

The following data gives the velocity of a particle for 20- secs at an interval of 5-secs.

f ( x) 

1 , find the divided difference f (a, b). x2

f ' (8) from the table given below

Find the acceleration for the following data

7. 8. 9. 10.

,

x: 6 7 9 12 f ( x) : 1.556 1.690 1.908 2.158

time(sec) : 0 5 10 15 20 velocity (m / s) : 0 3 14 69 228

1 3

If y = xy , y (1) = 1, find y (1.1) using Taylor’s method. If y’= x2 + y2, y (0 ) =1 find y (0.1) by Euler’s method. For which points of x and y, the equation x fxx + y fyy = 0, x > 0, y > 0 is elliptic. Name at least two numerical methods that are used to solve one dimensional diffusion equation.

Analyze / Evaluate 2. Using Newton’s method, find the positive root of cos x = 3x – 1. 2. Solve by Gauss-Elimination method : 6x + 3y +12z = 36 ; 8x -3y +2z = 20 ; 4x +11y – z =33 . 5 0 1  3. Using Power method, find all the Eigen values of A = 0 2 0  .   1 0 5  4. Use Lagrange’s interpolation formula to find the value of x when y = 20 for the following data . X : 1 2 3 4 Y: 1 8 27 64 2  5. Given 5 x y + y – 2 = 0 ; y (4 )= 1; y (4.1) = 1.0049 find i)y ( 4.2 ) by Euler’s method ii) y (4.3) by Runge-kutta method

97


iii) y ( 4.4 ) by Adam’s method. 6. Using Taylor series method, find the value of y(0.1) , given dy /dx = x + y and y (0) =1 and correct to 3 decimal places. 7. Using Bender-Schmitt formula, solve

 2u u , u (0,t ) =0, u (5,t) = 0 , u (x,0) = x 2 (25 - x2).  2 x t

Assume x =1. Find u(x, t) up to t=5.

 2u  2u , 0 < x < 1, t >0; u (x,0) = 100 (x-x2) , ut (x,0) = 0, u (0,t) = 0, u (1,t) = 0.  t 2 x 2 9. Solve u xx  u yy  0 over the square mesh of side 4 units, satisfying the following conditions u (x,0) = 3x for 0  x  4 ; u (x,4) = x2 for 0  x  4 ; u (0,y )= 0 for 0  y  4 ; u (4,y) =12 + 8. Solve

y for 0

 y  4. 2. 2 2.6

10. Evaluate

dydx using Trapezoidal formula. 2  y2

x 2

1

Unit I Solution of Equations and Eigen Value Problems Solution of Algebraic and Transcendental equations by the method of False position – Newton- Raphson method- Solution of system of linear equations : Gauss- elimination method and Gauss-Jordan method Iterative method: Gauss – Seidel method- Inverse of a matrix by Gauss-Jordan method. Eigen value of a matrix by power method. 9 Hours Unit II Interpolation and Curve Fitting Newton ‘s Forward and Backward interpolation. Newton’s Divided difference interpolation formula – Lagrange’s interpolation formula – Fitting of curves by the method of Least squares: Straight line,Parabolic curves and the conversion of equations of the curves in the form of straight lines. 9 Hours Unit III Numerical Differentiation and Integration Derivatives from difference table – Numerical differentiation using Newton ‘s forward and backward interpolation formulae - Numerical integration by Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3 and 3/8 rules - Romberg’s method - Two and three point Gaussian quadrature formulae - Double integrals using Trapezoidal and Simpson’s rules. 9 Hours Unit IV Initial Value Problems for Ordinary Differential Equations Single step Methods : Taylor Series method for solving first and second order equations - Euler’s and Modified Euler’s methods - Fourth order Runge-Kutta method for solving first order equations Multistep methods –Milne’s and Adam’s predictor and corrector methods. 9 Hours Unit V Boundary Value Problems Finite difference solution for the second order ordinary differential equations- Finite difference solution for one dimensional heat equation by implicit and explicit methods - one dimensional wave equation and two dimensional Laplace’s and Poisson’s equations. 9 Hours Total: 45+15 Hours MAT LAB: Invited Lectures on Mat lab and its applications on Numerical methods.

98


Text books 1. 2.

P. Kandasamy, K. Gunavathy and K. Thilagavathy, Numerical Methods, S.Chand and Co. New Delhi, 2009. B.K. Moorthy, P.Geetha, Numerical Methods ,Tata McGraw-Hill Publication company Ltd, New Delhi 2010, First Edition


R. L Burden, and T.D Faries, Numerical Analysis, Seventh Edition, Thomson Asia Pvt. Ltd., Singapore, 2002. K. Sankara Rao , Numerical Methods for Scientists and Engineers, Third Ed.Prentice Hall of India, 2007. C.F Gerald., and P.OWheatley, Applied Numerical Analysis, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi.2006. T.Veerarajan, Numerical Methods with programs in C, Second Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publication,co.Ltd, New Delhi ,2008.

99


11M402 THEORY OF MACHINES I 3 1 0 3.5 Objectives    

To impart students with the knowledge about the basics of Mechanisms and understand the geometry of motion at any point in a link of a mechanism To facilitate students to understand the types of cam and follower, motion and profile drawing of cam To give awareness to students on the phenomenon of direction of rotation, speed and torque determination for simple, compound and planetary gear systems To understand the effects of friction in motion transmission and in machine components

Program Outcomes(POs) (d) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of engineering design. Understanding the concept generation, design optimization and evaluation. Knowing the fundamentals of intellectual property rights. Students will be able to effectively design various engineering components and make process plan for the production. (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices.

Course Outcomes(COs)  Determine the kinematic chain and mobility, and perform the kinematic analysis of a given mechanism,  Apply the fundamental principles of statics and dynamics to machinery,  Understand and avoid/suppress certain common dynamical problems a machine may undergo. ASSESSMENT PATTERN

S. No.


Test 1*

Test 2*

Model Examination*


1

Remember

25

20

10

10

2

Understand

30

30

20

20

3

Apply

30

30

30

30

4

Analyze / Evaluate

15

20

40

40

5

Create

-

-

-

-

100

100

100

100

Total 12

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 12 *

Define kinematic link, pair and chain. Define Inversion of Mechanism. What is lower and higher pair? What are the types of Constrained Motion? What is locked chain? What are the types of Joints in a Chain? Define Kutzbach Criterian to Plane Mechanism. State Grashof’s law for four bar mechanism.


100


9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40.

Give an example of straight line generators. Define Velocity and acceleration of a link Define Radial component of an acceleration Define Tangential component of an acceleration What is the direction of radial and tangential component of acceleration of a link? Define Rubbing Velocity at a pin joint. Write the formula to calculate the angular velocity (ω) of a link when speed (N) is given in rpm. What is Coriolis component of Acceleration? Define Cam and Follower. How to classify cams? Give the applications of cam and follower mechanism. Define Pressure angle of the cam What is meant by lift and stroke of the follower? Discuss the term of dwell period in the Cams and Follower? What is meant by Undercutting in Cams? State the advantages and disadvantages of gear drives. Define module What is spiral gearing? Define Law of gearing Which materials are used to make gears? Define gear train. What are the types of gear trains? Write the applications of flat, V belt and rope drive of belt. Which are the materials used for belts? Define Slip and Creep of the belt What is the use of idler pulley in the belt drive? Define Initial tension in the belt drive Define static and dynamic friction What is the use of friction clutches in automobiles? List out the materials used for brake lining What is the use of the collar bearing? Define Journal bearing.

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

What are the differences between a Machine and a Structure? What is a Sliding Pair, and how it differs from turning and rolling pair? Which is all the kinematic chain in the following arrangement? (a) Three links (b) Four links (c) Five links (d) Six links How to find the Length of Stroke of the Crank and Slotted Lever Quick Return Motion Mechanism? How to draw the velocity and acceleration diagram for a slider link? How to draw the velocity and acceleration diagram for a fixed link? How to calculate the radial and tangential component of acceleration of a link? What is the condition to draw the tangential component for an input link? What is the difference between Prime Circle and Pitch Circle of Cam? Differentiate Pitch and Trace point of a cam. How the follower is classified according to the surface in contact and path of motion? Compare the different types of motion used in cam and follower motion? Draw the displacement, Velocity and acceleration diagram for the follower moves with simple harmonic motion. What is helical gearing, and how it differs from heringbone gearing? How the power is transmitted in bevel and worm gear drive? Which type of profile generally used in gear? Give reason Discuss length of path of contact and length of arc of contact in gear systems. How to find the velocity ratio of epicyclic gear train? What are the factors affecting the amount of power transmission?

101


20. State the disadvantages of the V belt drive over flat belt drive. 21. What type of belt drive is selected for rotating the opposite direction of rotation of driver and driven pulley? 22. What are the factors considering the selection of the belt drive? 23. Compare Sliding friction and Rolling friction 24. List the various factors depends on the capacity of the brake. Apply/Evaluate 1. 2.

Sketch & describe working of bicycle free wheel sprocket mechanism A local toy shop has asked you to design a model to encourage parents to buy their young children mechanical toys. The partially made model is seen below Figure 1. Add a suitable cam that controls two followers so that they rise and fall.

Fig. 1 3. 4.

Design with suitable drive to transmit the power of 12 kW. What happens to friction when we use wheels to roll an object instead of sliding it?

Unit I Basics of Mechanisms Basic concepts of Link, Pair, Chain, Mechanism, Machine and Structure, Degree of freedom, Mobility of mechanism – Kutzbach Criterian, Grashoff’s Law – Inversions of mechanisms – Four bar and Slider Crank – Mechanical advantage – Transmission Angle – Description of some common mechanisms – Straight line generators, Dwell mechanisms, Ratchets and Escapements, Universal Joint – Basic structures of Robot Manipulators (serial & parallel) Davis and Ackermann’s steering mechanisms, Hooke’s joint and Pantograph 9 Hours Unit II Friction Laws – Static, Dynamic and Rolling friction – Dry and Viscous friction – Friction in inclined plane and screw threads – Friction in Journal bearings – Friction in clutches – Single plate and multi plate clutches, Cone clutches – Friction in Flat and V-belt drives - Friction aspects in brakes Band brake, block brakes, Internal and external shoe brakes, braking of vehicles 9 Hours Unit III Kinematics Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration - Graphical Method of Velocity (Relative Velocity Method) and Acceleration diagrams for Simple Mechanisms - Klien’s construction for Single Slider Crank Mechanism – Coriolis component of Acceleration Instantaneous method of velocity and acceleration diagram 9 Hours

102


Unit IV Kinematics of Cam Classifications of Cam and Follower – Radial cam nomenclature – Analysis of follower motion – Uniform Velocity Motion, Simple Harmonic Motion, Uniform Acceleration and Retardation Motion and Cycloidal Motion – Construction of Cam Profile for a Radial Cam – Pressure angle and undercutting Cams with specified contours, tangent and circular are cams 9 Hours Unit V Gears and Gear Trains Law of toothed gearing – Involutes and cycloidal tooth profiles –Spur Gear terminology and definitions – Gear tooth action – Interference and undercutting – Problems – Helical, Bevel, Worm, Rack and Pinion gears [Basics only] – Introduction to gear correction Gear trains – Speed ratio, train value – Parallel axis gear trains – Epicyclic Gear Trains – Determination of gear speeds using tabular method; torque calculations in simple, compound and Epicyclic gear trains Differentials – Automobile gear box 9 Hours Total: 45 + 15 Hours Textbook (s) 1. 2.

S. S. Rattan, Theory of Machines, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2009 R. L. Norton, Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2005


Ashok G. Ambekar, Mehanism and Machine Theory, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,2009. John J. Uichker and Joesph E. shigley, Theory of Machines and Mechanism, Tata McGraw Hall Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2005. Jack T. Kimbrell, Kinematics Analysis and Synthesis, Tata McGraw Hall Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 1991. Sadhu Singh, Theory of Machines, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2007. Syad and R. L. Singal, Kinematics of Machinery, Tech Mac Publishers,Chennai, 2007.

103


11M403 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives   

To make the students understand the computer graphics fundamentals, various data exchange formats that is used in design software To know the geometric modeling concepts and mating conditions of the different solids To build the students to identify with the various file types used in the CAD software

Program Outcome(POs) (d) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of engineering design. Understanding the concept generation, design optimization and evaluation. Knowing the fundamentals of intellectual property rights. Students will be able to effectively design various engineering components and make process plan for the production. Course Outcomes(COs)   

Understand the methods of representation of wireframe, surface, and solid modeling systems with corresponding algorithms. Understand advanced concepts of shading, colouring, animation, feature based modeling and parametric modeling. Be familiar with the background operation when they click icon on the software, eg., Scale, Pan and Rotate.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN

S. No. 1 2 3 4 5


Test 1*

Test 2*

Model Examination*


Remember Understand Apply Analyze/Evaluate Create Total

40 30 30 100

40 30 30 100

40 30 30 100

40 30 30 100

13

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 13 *

List out the scope of CAD What is Database Management System? Mention the CAD tools required to support various phases of the design. What do you mean by data structure? What is viewing transformation and windowing transformation? Define – Scaling Name the various approaches used in hidden line elimination algorithm.


104


8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22.

What are the entities of wire frame modeling? Give some characteristics of Bezier curves. List out the various principles of geometric based software. What is hidden line removal algorithm? Define – Segmentation. Write the various applications of modeling. Give the expansion for IGES. List out the various files for data exchange. What are the important sources of errors in FEA solution? Define – “Design of product” What is Rotation?’ What are the types of an animation? What are all the software’s used for Animation? Give the equation of Bezier curve? Give the equation of B-spline curve?

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4.

Some design applications would be better with CAD than others? Why? What characteristics make an application a good candidate for CAD? Can a light pen be used with a storage tube display? Why? How can a locating or pointing function be performed on this type of display? What is product cycle and explain the various steps involved in product cycle? What is the difference between Bezier surface and B-spline surface?

Unit 1 Fundamentals of CAD Product design and life cycle, Role of CAD in engineering , Definitions of CAD tools, Input and Output devices, Data structure- Database, DBMS – Coordinate systems, Mechanical Applications and benefits of CAD Industrial look at CAD/CAM 9 Hours Unit II Computer Graphics Fundamentals Introduction- Transformation of Geometric Models- Translation, scaling, reflection, rotation, Windowing, view port clipping, view port transformation Mappings of Geometric models 9 Hours Unit III Visual Realism Hidden -line, surface, solid removal algorithms, shading and coloring. Introduction to parametric and variation geometry based software’s and their principles - User Interface for Shading and Coloring 9 Hours Unit IV Geometric Modeling Introduction to modeling and viewing- geometric modeling of solids, surface, wire frame, Assembly modeling- mating conditions. Computer Animation – Types Parametric Representation of Synthetic Curves 9 Hours

105


Unit V Data Exchange and CAD in FEM Exchange of CAD data between software packages, File types- IGES, PDES, PARASOLID, ACIS, DXF Files. Applications of CAD in FEM- Finite element Modeling- Interfaces Mesh Generation in FEM 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1. Ibrahim Zied, CAD/CAM-Theory and Practice, Tata McGraw Hall Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2007 References 1. P. Radhakrishnan, CAD-CAM-CIM, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi 2000 2. Donald Hearn and M. Pauline Baker, Computer Graphics, Prentice Hall of India., New Delhi 2005 3. Richard M. Lueptow, Graphics Concepts for Computer-Aided Design, Pearson ESL Publishers, New Delhi 2006 4. William M. Neumann and Robert F. Sproul, Principles of Computer Graphics, Tata McGraw Hall Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2005 5. Mikell P. Groover and Emory W. Zimmers Jr., CAD/CAM Computer-Aided Design and Manufacturing, Prentice Hall of India., New Delhi, 2007

106


11M404 THERMAL ENGINEERING 3 1 0 3.5 Objectives  To integrate the concepts, laws and methodologies from the first course in thermodynamics  To analyze different cyclic processes involved in the power plant and IC Engines  To apply the thermodynamic concepts into various thermal application like IC engines, Steam Turbines, Compressors and Refrigeration and Air conditioning systems Program Outcomes(POs) (b) The graduates will be able to acquire the knowledge, capability of analyzing and solving any concept or problem associated with heat energy dynamics and utilization. Students will be able to understand the working concepts of thermal engineering. (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes.

Course Outcomes(COs)  Able to understand various laws of thermodynamics.  Able to apply fundamental concepts of thermodynamics to thermodynamic systems  Able to calculate properties of two phase system by using steam tables/ Mollier chart



Test 1*

Test 2*

20 20 20 40 100

20 20 20 40 100



14

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. *

What is thermodynamic cycle? List out the assumptions made for the analysis of thermodynamic air cycles. What is meant by compression ratio? Sketch the schematic arrangement of open cycle gas turbine plant and name the components. What is meant by highest useful compression ratio What are the limitations of simple carburettor? What are the various types of nozzles and their function? Define nozzle efficiency. Write down the expression for velocity at exit from steam nozzle. What is supersaturated flow? What is meant by compounding of turbines? Classify the various types of air-compressors. What is meant by free air delivered? Define: COP What is the function of throttling valve What is meant by sub-cooling?

The marks secured in Test 1 and Test 2 will be converted to 20 and Model examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks.

107


17. Define Degree of saturation. Understand 1. What are the effects of reheating process in Rankine cycle? 2. When will be the gas turbine cycle efficiency reaches maximum? 3. It is always useful to have a regenerator in gas turbine power cycle. Why? 4. Write down the effect of pressure ratio on the net output and efficiency of Brayton cycle 5. Compare two stroke and four stroke engines. 6. Why diesel engines are more efficient than petrol engines? 7. Which is efficient two stroke or four stroke engines? Why? 8. Why the actual cycle efficiency is much lower than the air-standard cycle efficiency? 9. Why a choke is used in carburetor and what is meant by automatic chocking? 10. What are the effects of super saturation in a steam nozzle? 11. Why clearance is necessary in reciprocating compressor? 12. Compare reciprocating and rotary compressor. 13. What is the effect of clearance volume on the power required and work done in a reciprocating air compressor? 14. How does the actual vapour compression cycle differ from that of the ideal cycle? 15. Which thermodynamic cycle is used in air conditioning of air planes using air as refrigerant? 16. High compression ratios not used in spark-ignition engines, why? Apply/Evaluate 1. Air enters the compressor of an air-standard Brayton cycle at 100kPa, 300K with a volumetric flow ratio of 5m3/s. The compressor pressure ratio is 10. The turbine inlet temperature is 1400K. Determine (a) thermal efficiency of the cycle, (b) back work ratio, (c) net power developed in kW. 2. A nozzle is to be designed to expand steam at the rate of 0.10 kg/s from 500kPa, 210°C to 100kPa. Neglect inlet velocity of steam. For a nozzle efficiency of 0.9, determine the exit area of the nozzle. 3. In a single-stage, single-row impulse turbine, the steam is entering at a velocity of 1200m/s with a nozzle angle of 20° and leaving the blade in the axial direction. The ratio of blade velocity to whirl velocity of steam is 0.6. Sketch the velocity diagram and calculate (a) Blade velocity (b) Work done per kg of steam. 4. Find the percentage saving in work input by compressing air in two stages from 1 bar to 7 bar instead of one stage. Assume a compression index of 1.35 in both the cases and optimum pressure and complete intercooling in a two-stage compressor. Unit I Power Plant Cycles Gas Turbine power plant cycle – Joule cycle - Expression for efficiency, work ratio – Modifications of Joule cycle with Intercooler, Reheater and Regenerator. Steam Power Plant cycle – Rankine cycle – Modifications with Reheater and Regenerator. Problems solving using Mollier chart Rocket engines, co-generation steam power plant 9 Hours Unit II Internal Combustion Engines Classification of IC engine- IC engine components and functions. Valve timing diagram and port timing diagram -Comparison of two stroke and four stroke engines. Comparison of petrol & diesel engine, Fuel supply systems - Ignition Systems Lubrication system and cooling system. Performance calculation – Heat balance sheet preparation- Air-fuel ratio calculation - Knocking and Detonation. Exhaust gas analysis, pollution control norms

Advanced fuel injection system-CRDi, Electronic fuel injection 9 Hours

108


Unit III Steam Nozzles and Turbines Flow of steam through nozzles-shapes of nozzles- Effect of friction- Critical pressure ratio, supersaturated flow. Impulse and reaction principles- Compounding of Turbines - velocity diagrams for simple and multistage turbines- Speed regulations- Governors Aircraft - nozzle and turbine 9 Hours Unit IV Air Compressor Classification and working principle- Work of compression with and without clearance. Volumetric efficiency- Isothermal efficiency and isentropic efficiency of reciprocating air compressors. Multistage air compressor and inter cooling – work of multistage air compressor. Working principle of various Rotary compressors - Centrifugal, vane and roots blower (Descriptive treatment only) Screw compressor-working, comparison with reciprocating compressor 9 Hours Unit V Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Vapour compression Refrigeration cycle – Effect of superheat, subcooling of refrigerant - performance calculations. Working principle of vapour absorption system. Ammonia – water, Lithium bromide – water systems (Description only), Comparison between vapour compression and absorption systems. Psychrometry- Psychometric chart, Cooling load calculations. Concept of RSHF, GSHF, ESHF, Air conditioning systems Automobile air-conditioning system-working 9 Hours Total: 45 + 15 Hours Textbook 1.

Mahesh M. Rathore, Thermal Engineering, Tata McGraw - Hill Education Private Limited, New Delhi, 2011


C. P. Kothandaraman, Steam Tables, New Age International Private limited, 2007 R. S. Khurmi & J. K. Gupta, Refrigeration Tables with Chart, S Chand & Company Limited, New Delhi, 2008 Yunus A. Cengel, Michael A. Boles, Thermodynamics An Engineering Approach, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2008 J. P. Holman, Thermodynamics, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2007 C. P. Kothandaraman, S. Domkundwar and A. V. Domkundwar, A course in Thermal Engineering, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 2002

109


11M405 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS 3 1 0 3.5 Objectives   

To develop the theoretical basis about the stress, strain and elastic modulus concepts in various components with sound mathematical principles and to enable students to systematically solve engineering problems regardless of difficulty To familiarize about finding shear force, bending moment, deflection and slopes in various types of beams with different load conditions To develop confidence and competence in solving problems related to the machine components like shafts, columns, springs and purposes

Program Outcome(POs) (c) The graduates will be able to learn various techniques available to make shapes and designs in various materials. Students will be understood the methodologies to be followed in casting, fabrication, machining, materials, metallurgy and forming of engineering materials. At the end of the course, students will be able to select and perform suitable method of producing a desirable component in industry.

Course Outcomes(COs) 

To establish an understanding of the fundamental concepts of mechanics of deformable solids and including static equilibrium, geometry of deformation, and material constitutive behaviour. To provide students with exposure to the systematic methods for solving engineering problems in solid mechanics. To build the necessary theoretical background for further structural analysis and design courses and to analyse long columns subjected to axial loads.

 

ASSESSMENT PATTERN

S. No. 1 2 3 4 5


Test 1*

Test 2*

25 30 30 15 100

20 30 30 20 100



15

Remember 51. Define Stress and strain. 52. What are the types of stress? 53. State Hook’s law. * The marks secured in Test 1 and Test 2 will be converted to 20 and Model examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks.

110


54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 77. 78. 79.

Define Poisson’s ratio. Write the equations which relate E and C and K. Define factor of safety. State the range of Poisson’s ratio value for ductile material. What do you mean by bulk modulus? Define resilience. Define proof resilience. Define principle stress and principle strain. Define hoop and longitudinal stress. List out the types of beams. What are the types of supports used in beams? Name the types of loads applied onto a beam. Define slenderness ratio. State the assumptions made in simple bending. Write the simple bending equation of beam. Define stiffness of the spring. Define crippling load. List the assumptions made in simple torsion. Write the torsional equation of the shaft. Name the theories of failure. Define section Modulus. Define fluctural rigidity. Define polar moment of inertia. Name the methods available to find the slope and deflection of beams. Define shear stress. Define bending stress.

Understand 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57.

State the role of factor of safety in the design of product? Differentiate true stress and engineering stress. How do you find the value of E using stress – strain diagram. Differentiate shear stress and shear strain. Give some practical examples where bending stress stresses may occur. What is the difference between limit of proportionality and elastic limit? Write the significance of elastic constants in product design. Distinguish pressure and stress. Differentiate Ultimate and Yield strength of material with respect to applied load. How do you reduce the induced stress value in cylindrical shells? How do you differentiate thin and thick cylinders? Why do cylindrical pressure vessels have hemispherical ends? Differentiate simple and compound stress. At what situation thin cylinders can be used? State the use of Mohr’s circle. What do you mean by composite beam? Draw the schematic representation of hinged, continuous and over hanging beams. What do you mean by radius of curvature of the beam? Compare the strength beams which have rectangular and I shape cross sections. How do you reduce the stress induced in the cantilever beam where the load value remains same? What do you mean by point of contra flexure of the beam? Differentiate open coil and closed coil helical springs. Give some real time applications for open coil and closed coil helical springs. What conditions must be met for neutral axis to pass through the centroid of a beam. Differentiate Resilience and Proof resilience.

111


Apply/Evaluate 12. For axially loaded members, what is the maximum normal stress and in which plane does this stress act? What is the value of shear stress in this plane? 13. State how normal stress varies with the orientation of the section in a long slender member under axial load. 14. Which shaft will you recommend for design purposes when maximum shear stress due to torsion is same in both solid and hollow shaft? 15. What is the difference between plane stress and plane strain situations? Give practical examples. 16. If axial force F is fixed, then find a relation of geometrical parameters of a cylindrical pressure vessel for attainment of equal axial and hoop stress. 17. How to find the maximum shear force and bending moment from shear force and bending moment diagrams? Explain with an example. 18. What is understood by calculating the effort applied to a screw jack to lift up and lower down the given amount of load? Justify the phenomenon. 19. In positioning a beam in a structure, always the depth portion is chosen greater than its width portion. Analyze and write down the reason. Unit I Stress, Strain and Deformation of Solids Mechanical properties of materials - Simple stress and strain – Stresses and strains due to axial force Stress-strain curve for ductile and brittle materials– Hooke’s law - Factor of safety – Poisson’s ratio Elastic constants and their relationship- Stresses in Stepped shafts and Uniformly varying sections – Stresses in Composite sections - Temperature stresses. Strain energy – Stresses due to different loadings – Strain energy in bending and torsion Viscoelastic Materials, Fatigue, Strain Gages 10 Hours Unit II Analysis of Stresses in Two Dimensions State of stresses at a point – Normal and tangential stresses on inclined planes - Principal planes and stresses – Plane of maximum shear stress - Mohr’s circle for biaxial stresses. Hoop and longitudinal stresses in thin cylindrical and spherical shells – Changes in dimensions and volume Behavior of thick wall pressure vessels 8 Hours Unit III Beams - Loads and Stresses Types of beams: Supports and Loads – Shear force and Bending Moment in beams – Cantilever Simply supported and overhanging beams - Point of contra flexure. Theory of simple bending - Stresses in beams: bending and shear stress - Stress variation along the length and section of the beam – Section modulus Shear flow and Shear centre 9 Hours Unit IV Deflection of Beams Slope and Deflection of beams: Double integration method, Macaulay’s method and Moment-area method, for Cantilever, Simply supported and overhanging beams. Columns – Buckling of long columns due to axial load - Equivalent length of a column – Euler’s and Rankine’s formulae for columns of different end conditions – Slenderness ratio Inelastic column buckling, Case studies related to column buckling 9 Hours

112


Unit V Torsion in Shafts and Springs Analysis of torsion of circular bars – Shear stress distribution – Bars of Solid and hollow circular section – Stepped shaft – Twist and torsion stiffness – Compound shafts – Fixed and simply supported shafts – Closed coil helical springs: Maximum shear stress in spring section including Wahl Factor – Deflection of helical coil springs under axial loads – Introduction to the design of helical coil springs – stresses in helical coil springs under torsion loads, Springs- Helical Springs, Leaf Spring-stiffness, deflections, Loads, Stresses of helical and leaf springs, problems - applications Theories of Failures, Stress concentrations 9 Hours Total: 45 +15 Hours Textbook 1. R. K. Bansal, A text book of Strength of Materials, Lakshmi Publications (P) Limited, New Delhi, 2007 References 1. 2. 3. 4.

Egor P. Popov, Engineering Mechanics of Solids, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2010. D. K. Singh, Mechanics of Solids, Pearson Education New Delhi ,2006. R.K. Rajput, Strength of Materials, S Chand & Co., New Delhi, 2006. F. P. Beer and R. Johnston, Mechanics of Materials, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2002. 5. B. K. Sarkar, Strength of Materials, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2006. 6. http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT ROORKEE/strength%20of%20materials/homepage.htm 7. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=112107147 8. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/IIT-MADRAS/Strength_of_Materials/ 9. http://www.onlinevideolecture.com/civil-engineering/nptel-iit-kharagpur/strength-ofmaterials/?course_id=704 10. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=105105108

113


11M406 ENGINEERING DESIGN CONCEPTS 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives  

To understand the concept generation, concept selection, design process, planning for manufacture To know the various techniques used in designing a product

Programme Outcome(POs) (d) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of engineering design. Understanding the concept generation, design optimization and evaluation. Knowing the fundamentals of intellectual property rights. Students will be able to effectively design various engineering components and make process plan for the production.

Course Outcomes(COs)   

Able to select concepts for various product developments. Capability of selecting materials, making experimental plan. Strengthen the decision making skills of the students.



Test 1*

Test 2*

30 40 30 100

30 40 30 100



16

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

What is engineering design? What are the principles of engineering design? What are the six elements of design process? List the content of a PDS? What is meant by Brainstorming? List out the five creativity methods. List out the five concept selection methods. What are the five basic patterns of decision making? List the principles of engineering design. What are the steps follwed in industrial design? What is Ergonomics in Engineering Design? Define factor of safety? What are the elements of cost? What is meant by BOM?

* The marks secured in Test 1 and Test 2 will be converted to 20 and Model examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks.

114


15. What is meant by QFD? 16. List the content of a design report? 17. Name the three types of patents? Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

How does engineering design interfaces are made within and outside the design department? How will you identify a problem? Why we go for computer aided decision making? How will you identify customer needs? Differentiate between criteria weighting and datum method of concept selection? How will you make decision based on knowledge? How will you estimate a manufacturing cost? For what break even analysis is carried out in a company? Differentiate between final and intermediate design review. Differentiate between Patent and copyright? Differentiate between concept sketches and scheme drawing What are the steps followed in drafting a patent application?

Apply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Write PDS for a car? Write the concept generation for a under seat suspension system of an excavator. Write the methods of selection of material for aircraft. Write the material selection procedure for bought out components Write a design report for a new product? Write a patent draft for any one product you know.

Unit I Principles and Problem Identification Engineering design introduction and definition, Considerations of a good design, Engineering design interfaces, Principles of engineering design, Problem identification, Design process, Product Design Specification (PDS) criteria, Content of a PDS, specification Principles, Exercises Sample PDS 9 Hours Unit II Concept Generation and Selection Identifying customer needs, bench marking, Societal considerations in engineering, Creativity and problem solving, creativity methods - Brainstorming, Morphological analysis, Exercises. Concept selection - Subjective decision-making, Criteria ranking, Criteria weighting, Datum method, Computer aided decision making, Exercises Product and process cycle of a simple product 9 Hours Unit III Design Process Detailed description of design process, five basic patterns of decision making , decision making based on state of knowledge, Design for manufacturing (DFM), Design for Assembly (DFA), Industrial design, Human factors design - ergonomics, Design for environment, engineering design principles Design for X 9 Hours

115


Unit IV Planning for Manufacture Quality function deployment (QFD), Design review, Value analysis/engineering, Detail design, Factor of safety, Materials selection, break even analysis - problem, cost evaluation, Elements of cost, ISO concepts in brief Impact of Computer Aided Engineering in design 9 Hours

t

Unit V Report Preparation and Intellectual Property Rights Presentation Techniques - Introduction, Concept sketches, Scheme drawing, Design Validation Design report. Intellectual Property Rights – Introduction, Patent, Trademark, copyright, Patentability, patenting process

Patenting for a simple product - a case study 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook (s) 1. 2.

Ken Hurst, Engineering Design Principles, Elsevier Science and Technology Books, 2004 George E Dieter, Engineering Design, Tata McGraw Hill publishing Company Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2008

References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Danlel E. Whitney, Mechanical Assembles: Design Manufacture and Role in Product Development, Oxford University, Press, 2008 K. Otto, Product Design, Pearson Publications, 2005 Richard Birmingham, Graham Cleland, Robert Driver and David Maffin, Understanding Engineering Design, Prentice Hall of India, 1997 www.patentoffice.nic.in ep.espacenet.com/advanced Search http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=106106093

116


11M407 THERMAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY I 0 0 3 1.5 Objectives  

Expertise in the various thermodynamic concepts and principles Conduct performance tests on petrol engine and diesel engine, heat balance test, energy balance test on 4 stroke diesel engine Retardation test to find frictional power of a diesel engine, determination of oil viscosity, flash and fire point Comparative justification on conventional fuel with alternative fuel

 

Program Outcomes(POs) (a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. (e) The graduates develop skills to be effective members of a team. (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes(COs)   

Able to analyze the fundamental theories and the industrial applications of thermal engineering equipments Able to understand some very important concepts and applications in the field of IC engines and refrigeration. Able to understand how the typical thermal devices work (refrigerators, air conditioning devices, car engines or steam engines).

ASSESSMENT PATTERN

    

Preparation Remember Understand Apply Observation and Results Analyze Evaluate Record Mini-project / Model Examination / Viva-voce Total

Internal Assessment

Semester end Examination

10

15

25

25

5

-

10

10

50

50

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

What is valve timing and port timing? Define cetane number and octane number? List some factors that affect performance of the engine? Is the heat balancing is necessary? Give the firing order based on number of cylinder? What is Frictional power? Define Specific Fuel Consumption? What is Brake power? What roll the viscosity of oil plays in engine?

117


Understand 1. Real-time application of various cycles. 2. Thermodynamic Laws and application.. 3. Concepts of various thermal applications. 4. Efficiency of different type engines. 5. Energy balancing of thermal power. 6. Industrial engine performance testing set-up. Apply/Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

How to tune up the engine performance? How to avoid the heat loss in engine? How to differentiate diesel and petrol engine? How to best suit the right engine for the various application? How to avoid the engine breakdown? How the perfect energy utilization can be done? How the revolution can be done on conventional fuels? How to overcome the fossil fuel usage?

List of Experiments 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

Valve Timing and Port Timing Diagrams. Performance Test on 4-stroke Diesel Engine. Heat Balance Test on 4-stroke Diesel Engine. Morse Test on Multicylinder Petrol Engine. Retardation Test to find Frictional Power of a Diesel Engine. Performance Test on 4-stroke Diesel engine hydraulic loading with data acquisition system. Comparative study on conventional fuel with alternative fuel. Determination of Viscosity – Red Wood Viscometer. Determination of Flash Point and Fire Point. Study of Steam Generators and Turbines. Performance of Cooling Tower.  Design experiment  Application oriented experiment

118


Practical Schedule

Total: 45 Hours

Sl. No. 1 2

Valve Timing and Port Timing Diagrams. Performance Test on 4-stroke Diesel Engine.

3 3

3

Heat Balance Test on 4-stroke Diesel Engine.

3

4

Morse Test on Multicylinder Petrol Engine.

3

5

Retardation Test to find Frictional Power of a Diesel Engine.

3

6

Performance Test on 4-stroke Diesel engine hydraulic loading with data acquisition system.

3

7

Comparative study on conventional fuel with alternative fuel.

3

8

Determination of Viscosity – Red Wood Viscometer.

3

9

Determination of Flash Point and Fire Point.

3

10

Study of Steam Generators and Turbines.

3

11

Performance of Cooling Tower.

3

12

Design experiment

6

13


6

Experiment

Hours

119


11M408 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS AND METALLURGY LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5 Objectives     

To understand the procedure of doing different tests like hardness, compression, tension, shear and impact etc in various materials and automobile components. To inject the knowledge about the testing of springs and composites materials subjected to compressive and tensile loads To explain the concept of testing the mechanical properties of materials under untreated and heat treated conditions. The study would provide knowledge to the students for use in the designing of engineering components The student should acquire enough knowledge to understand: a) Basic elements of materials microstructures. b) Metals deformation and microstructures. c) Metal alloys and heat treatments

Program Outcomes(POs) (c) The graduates will be able to learn various techniques available to make shapes and designs in various materials. Students will be understood the methodologies to be followed in casting, fabrication, machining, materials, metallurgy and forming of engineering materials. At the end of the course, students will be able to select and perform suitable method of producing a desirable component in industry. (e) The graduates develop skills to be effective members of a team. (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes(COs)    

Learn specimen preparation, study of microstructure and heat treatment techniques of ferrous and non-Ferrous metals. Determine mechanical properties of materials by experiments Learn behavior of structural elements by experiments Learn to analyze and synthesize test results, write individual and group reports incorporating experimental data, graphs, assessment of results, and conclusions




10

15

25

25

5

-

10

10

50

50

120


Remember 1. Define stress. 2. Define strain. 3. What is Young’s modulus? 4. What is shear modulus? 5. What is bulk modulus? 6. State Hooke’s law. 7. What do you mean by limit of proportionality of elastic constants? 8. What do you mean by the term necking? 9. What do you mean by strain hardening? 10. List out the various types of support. 11. List the various types of loading conditions 12. What are the various assumptions made in the theory of simple bending? 13. What do you mean by torsion? 14. List out the various types of spring. 15. Define stiffness of a spring. 16. What do you mean by flexural rigidity? 17. Define Maxwell’s theorem. 18. Define alloy and steel? 19. What are cooling curves? 20. Define the term heat treatment. 21. List the various stages of heat treatment processes. 22. List some quenching medium generally used in industries. 23. What is TTT and CCT diagram? 24. Write the governing equation for torsion of circular shaft. 25. Write the formula to find the modulus of rigidity of springs 26. Write the formula to calculate the stiffness of a spring 27. How the Brinell’s hardness number is calculated? Understand 1. When a material is said to be of perfectly elastic? 2. What is the type of stress induced in a structural member subjected to torsional loading? 3. Why the shear stress is maximum at the outer surface of the shaft than the inner core? 4. Why hollow circular shafts are preferred when compared to solid circular shafts? 5. What are the differences between closed coil & open coil helical springs? 6. What are the various stresses induced in the open coil helical spring? 7. What is surge in springs? 8. When the materials attain their required properties. 9. How the deformation of materials taken place? 10. How the ceramics and composites are manufactured? 11. How the hardness is achieved by various heat treatment processes? Apply/Analyze/Evaluate 1. How will you calculate yield stress? 2. How will you calculate ultimate stress? 3. How the ultimate shear stress is estimated? 4. How will you calculate the value of shear stress at a particular distance from the neutral axis? 5. How the pitch of helical springs is calculated? 6. How will you evaluate the torsional stress of a shaft? 7. How will you choose the material for industrial application? 8. On what basis the cycle time is finalized in heat treatment process? 9. How will you estimate the hardness number in various testing methods? 10. How the ceramics are manufactured by various processes. 11. How you evaluate the fatigue strength of a shaft?

121


List of Experiments Standards to be referred: For cast iron: Grey cast iron - IS-210 Spheroidal cast iron - IS-1865 For alloy steels: Low carbon, Medium carbon & High carbon - IS -1570

Strength of Materials 1. Test involving axial compression and tension to obtain the stress – strain curve and the strength 2. Test involving torsion and flexure to obtain the torque vs. angle of twist and load deflection curve respectively and hence the stiffness 3. Tests on springs 4. Hardness tests and shear test on metal specimen 5. Test for impact resistance 6. Bending tests on metal beam 7. Verification of Maxwell’s reciprocal theorem 8. Tests on thin cylinders 9. Study on the variation of shear force and bending moment in a beam  Design Experiments  Application oriented experiments  Mini Project Metallurgy 1. Study of microstructure of low, medium, high carbon steels, tool steel and stainless steels. 2. Study of microstructure of various cast irons 3. Heat treatment – annealing, normalizing, hardening and tempering of plain carbon steels, Measurement of their hardness and study of their microstructure. 4. Performance study of specimen preparation with different polishing time.  Design experiment  Application oriented experiment Total: 45 Hours Practical Schedule Sl. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Experiment Test involving axial compression and tension to obtain the stress – strain curve and the strength Test involving torsion and flexure to obtain the torque vs. angle of twist and load deflection curve respectively and hence the stiffness Tests on springs Hardness tests and shear test on metal specimen Test for impact resistance Bending tests on metal beam Verification of Maxwell’s reciprocal theorem Tests on thin cylinders Study on the variation of shear force and bending moment in a beam Study of microstructure of low carbon, medium carbon, high carbon steels, tool steel and stainless steels. Study of microstructure of various cast irons Heat treatment – annealing, normalizing, hardening and tempering of plain carbon steels, Measurement of their hardness and study of their microstructure Performance study of specimen preparation with different polishing time. Design experiment - Application oriented experiment

Hours 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 6

122


11M409 COMPUTER AIDED MACHINE DRAWING LABORATORY 1 0 3 2.5 Objectives    

To know the specifications and symbols of standard machine components used in machine drawing To understand the concept of various tolerances and fits used for component design To understand and practice the drawings of machine components and simple assemblies using standard CAD packages At the end of the course the students will able to understand and create drawings manually or using any one CAD packages for standard machine components and assemblies with tolerance

Program Outcomes(POs) (g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in both Mechanical Engineering as well as IT companies (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes (j) The graduates can become job-givers rather than just job-seekers Course Outcomes(COs)   

Model 2D / 3D drawings of any mechanical products using modeling software Knowledge of computer recording of design and methods for constructing solid and flat objects. Draw the different kind of mechanism of machining parts.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN Internal Assessment Preparation Remember Understand Apply Observation and Results Analyze Evaluate Record Mini-Project/Model Examination/Viva-Voce Total

Semester Examination

End

10

15

15

20

10

-

15

15

50

50

Remember 1. State the role of CAD in product design. 2. Draw the symbols for first angle and third angle projections. 3. Name the input and output devices used in CAD. 4. What are the methods of dimensioning used in CAD? 5. Draw the symbols used for surface finish in machine drawing. 6. List out the types of tolerances used in machine drawing. 7. Name the types of fits. 8. Define tolerance. 9. Draw the symbol used in machine drawing for welding. 10. What do you meant by BIS specifications? 11. Name the different types of fasteners used in machine components.

123


Understand 1. Highlight the main advantages of CAD system in design and drafting. 2. What do you meant by designing of a component? 3. Differentiate Orthographic and isometric views. 4. Give two practical applications of reduced scale and enlarged scale drafting. 5. Differentiate first angle and third angle projection. 6. What is the use of Modeling in product life cycle? 7. State the use of windowing and clipping in drafting. 8. Differentiate CAD, CAM and CAE. 9. State the applications for different types of fits. 10. Differentiate limits and tolerances. 11. State the use of tolerances in product design. 12. Differentiate tolerance and allowance. 13. Name the methods used for tolerance analysis. Apply / Evaluate 1. Solving exercises for tolerance analysis

List of Experiments 1 Orthographic views of brackets and V- blocks 2 Screw threads and threaded fasteners 3 BIS specifications – Welding symbols, riveted joints, keys Referring to hand book for the selection of standard components like bolts, 4 nuts, screws, keys etc 5 Introduction to Modeling software – simple exercises using any one CAD package 6 Preparation of Assembly drawings – Piston and cylinder 7 Assembly of plummer block bearing 8 Assembly of flange Couplings 9 Assembly of universal Joint 10 Assembly of eccentric cam  Design Experiment  Application oriented experiment Total: 45 Hours Practical Schedule Sl. No.

Name of the Experiment

Hours

1

Orthographic views of brackets and V- blocks

6

2

Screw threads and threaded fasteners

6

3

BIS specifications – Welding symbols, riveted joints, keys

6

6

Referring to hand book for the selection of standard components like bolts, nuts, screws, keys etc Introduction to Modeling software – simple exercises using any one CAD package Preparation of Assembly drawings – Piston and cylinder

7 8 9 10

Assembly of plummer block bearing Assembly of flange Couplings Assembly of universal Joint Assembly of eccentric cam

4 5

6 6 3 3 3 3 3

124


Unit I Drawing Standards Code of practice for Engineering Drawing, BIS specifications –Welding symbols, riveted joints, keys, and fasteners – Reference to hand book for the selection of standard components like bolts, nuts, screws, keys etc. 3 Hours Unit II Introduction to Machine Drawing Fundamentals of machine drawing: Geometric Dimensioning - Limits, fits, Tolerances – Types - Tolerance Analysis. Isometric to Orthographic conversion of Part drawings and vice versa, Assembly Drawings - Manual drawing. 6 Hours Unit III Preparation of Part Models using Modeling Software Preparing isometric view of various industrial oriented machine components - Selection of machine components from software library - Conversion of part drawing into orthographic views. (Drafting) 3 Hours Unit IV Preparation of Assembly Models using Modeling Software Preparing the assembly views (with minimum four components) of various industrial oriented equipments.(E.g. Piston and connection rod, Coupling and shafts, Plummer block etc) 3 Hours Total: 45 + 15 Hours References 1. 2. 3. 4.

N. D. Bhatt and V. M. Panchal, Machine Drawing, Charotar Publishing House, Anand, Gujarat, 388001, India. 2004. K R Gopalakrishnan, Machine drawing, Subhas Stores, Bangalore. 2007 www.ptc.com www.solidworks.com

125


11M501 ENGINEERING METROLOGY AND QUALITY ASSURANCE 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives  

To understand the concept of various measuring instruments like linear, angular, form, and Surface finish measurements To introduced the fundamental concept of statistical quality control


The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. c) The graduates will be able to learn various techniques available to make shapes and designs in various materials. Students will be understood the methodologies to be followed in casting, fabrication, machining, materials, metallurgy and forming of engineering materials. At the end of the course, students will be able to select and perform suitable method of producing a desirable component in industry. Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to understand the various types of measurements and its techniques.  Able to know the importance of various measuring instruments working and its application.  Able to select the proper selection of instruments for the suitable application. ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No 1 2 3 4 5

Bloom’s Taxonomy (New version) Remember Understand Apply Analyze/Evaluate Create Total

Test I*

Test II*

30 40 30 --100

30 40 30 --100

Model Examinations* 30 40 30 --100

Semester End Examination 30 40 30 --100

17

Remember 1. Define metrology. 2. What is meant by measurements? 3. List out various types of measurements. 4. Define range and span.. 5. Define sensitivity. 6. What is meant by repeatability and reproducibility? 7. Define precision and accuracy 8. List out various types of linear instrument. 9. What do you mean by least count? 10. What is meant by comparator? 11. Define angular measurement? 12. List out various types angular measurement 13. What are all the parameters obtained screw thread terminology? 17 *


126


14. State Taylor’s principle 15. Define eccentricity and circularity. 16. What are all the parameters obtained gear measurement? 17. Define RMS. 18. List out various methods for surface finish measurement. 19. Define LASER. 20. What are different types of geometric tolerance? 21. What is meant by CMM? 22. Define machine vision. 23. What is meant by CAI? 24. Define sample and population 25. What is meant by alternative and null hypothesis? 26. Define ANOVA 27. What is meant by acceptance sampling? 28. Define producer’s risk. 29. What is meant by LQL and AQL? Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Difference between accuracy and precision What are the different bases used for selection of measuring instrument? What are salient features of a comparator? What are the necessary conditions for interference of light waves? State the essential requirements for accuracy in the construction of a sine bar. Difference between the length and flatness interferometers? What are the essential characteristics of an autocollimator? What is the difference between primary texture and secondary texture? What is meant by ‘Best size wire? What do you understand about the ‘Alignment test’ of a machine tool?

Apply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

At what angle to the optical flat, the fringe pattern should be observed and why? How the accuracy of a straight edged is specified, and how it can be checked? Why surface finish is important in engineering applications? How you would check the accuracy of pitch of a plug screw gauge? How the quality of products can be improved? How would you check the flatness and squareness with the axis of the spindle end of a 25-50mm external micrometer? 7. Discuss the need for precision measurement in an engineering industry. 8. Design a plug gauge for checking the hole of 70H8. 9. Calculate the dimension of the maximum chord over four teeth when the gear under inspection has the following specifications. No. of teeth=32; module=4; Pressure angle =20 ° 10. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M20 x 25 screws. Unit I Linear and Angular Measurement Concept of Measurement – Definition of metrology– Levels of Measurement - Fits and Tolerances – Linear measuring instruments – Vernier, micrometer, Slip gauges and classification – interferometer, optical flats, limit gauges. Comparators – mechanical, optical, pneumatic and electrical types, applications – Angular measurements – Sine bar, optical bevel protractor, angle Decker – Taper measurements Bore micrometer 9 Hours

127


Unit II Form Measurement Measurement of screw threads – Thread gauges, floating carriage micrometer – Measurement of gears – tooth thickness – constant chord and base tangent method – radius measurements – surface finish, straightness, flatness and roundness measurements Parkinson’s gear testing machine 9 Hours Unit III Laser and Advances in Metrology Precision instruments based on laser – Principles - laser interferometer – application in linear – angular measurements and machine tool metrology. Coordinate measuring machine (CMM) – Constructional features, types, and applications – Digital devices– Computer aided inspection – 3D Scanning, Machine Vision Systems Nanometrology. 9 Hours Unit IV Statistical Testing Sampling theory and testing of Hypothesis – Population and Sample – influence of sample size – Random sampling – Confidence intervals – choice of sample size for estimation – Testing of hypothesis for large and small samples, testing of hypothesis for mean, difference between means – F distribution – Cdistribution – Goodness of fit Design of experiments 9 Hours Unit V Acceptance Sampling Sampling plans – need, types– probability of acceptance in single, double, multiple sampling techniques – OC curves, Producer’s risk and Consumer's risk AQL, LTPD, AOQL concepts – standard sampling plans for AQL and LTPD – uses of standard sampling plans General inspection levels 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbooks 1. 2.

Bewoor and Vinay Kulkarni, Metrology & Measurement, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd, New Delhi,2009. Douglas C. Montgomery, Introduction to Statistical Quality Control, John Wiley and Sons Inc, 2008.


Alan S. Morris, The Essence of Measurement, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi ,1996 R. K. Jain, Engineering Metrology, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1994. A. K. Jayal, Instrumentation and Mechanical Measurements, Galgotia Publications, New Delhi 2000. T. G. Beckwith and N. Lewis Buck, Mechanical Measurements, Addison Wesley, New Delhi 2008. Monohar Mahajan, Statistical Quality Control, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 2001.

128


11M502 THEORY OF MACHINES II 3 1 0 3.5 Objectives 

To impart with the knowledge about the static and dynamic force analysis on various parts of Reciprocating engine To understand the function of flywheel and to construct the various turning moment diagram To impart the knowledge about balancing of various parts for different engine To understand the effects of vibration in various beams under different load conditions and the basic concepts of governor and gyroscopes

  

Program Outcomes (POs) (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes (COs)  

Able to determine velocities & accelerations of various planar mechanisms. Students will have an understanding of static force relationships and inertia forces and their effect that exist in machines Students will demonstrate the dynamics of flywheel and their motion





Test 1*

Test 2*

25 30 30 15 -100

20 30 30 20 -100

Model Examination* 10 20 30 40 -100

Semester End Examination 10 20 30 40 -100

18

Remember State D Alembert’s principle Define ‘inertia force’ and ‘inertia torque’. Write an expression for the inertia force due to reciprocating mass in reciprocating engine, neglecting the mass of the connecting rod. 4. What are the methods of finding the crank effort in a reciprocating single acting, single cylinder petrol engine? 5. What is the acceleration of the piston in a reciprocating steam engine? 6. In an engine, what is the work done by inertia forces in a cycle? 7. What is turning moment diagram? 8. What is crank effort diagram? 9. Write the formula to calculate the turning moment on the crankshaft 10. Define : Fluctuation of energy 11. Define : Maximum fluctuation of energy 1. 2. 3.

18 *


129


12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52.

Define : Coefficient of fluctuation of energy In turning moment diagram, write the formula to calculate the workdone per cycle In turning moment diagram, write the formula to calculate the mean torque In turning moment diagram, Write the formula to calculate the workdone per cycle when number of working strokes per minute Define : Maximum fluctuation of speed Define : Coefficient of fluctuation of speed Define : Coefficient of steadiness Define : Static balancing Write the expression for primary unbalanced forces of reciprocating masses Write the expression for secondary unbalanced forces of reciprocating masses Write the formula to calculate the magnitude of the resultant centrifugal force What is tractive force in balancing? What is swaying couple in balancing? What is hammer blow in balancing? Define : Vibratory motion Define : Period of vibration Define : Time period Define : Cycle in vibration Define : Frequency in vibration Define : Free vibration Define : Natural vibration Define : Free frequency Define : Forced vibration Define : Damped vibration Define : Longitudinal vibrations Define : Transverse vibration What is critical speed of a shaft? Define the term Vibration Isolation What is the function of the governor? State the different types of governor State the difference types of centrifugal governor What is the controlling force in centrifugal governor? What is the function of a simple Watt governor? Define sensitivity of governor What is hunting of governor? What is the condition of isochronisms in governor? What is the stability of the governor? Write the formula for gyroscopic couple’s magnitude. Name the effect of gyroscopic couple acting on it, when the pitching of a ship is upward? What are the different cases of balancing? State the necessary conditions of dynamic balancing

Understand 1. 2.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

What is the difference between piston effort, crank effort and crank-pin effort? The inertia of the connecting rod can be replaced by two masses concentrated at two points and connected rigidly together. How to determine the two masses so that it is dynamically equivalent to the connecting rod? Show this Given acceleration image of a link. Explain how dynamical equivalent system can be used to determine the direction of inertia force on it. What is the function of flywheel? Draw the turning moment diagram for a single cylinder, double acting steam engine. Draw the turning moment diagram for a four stroke cycle internal combustion engine State the functional difference between the governor and flywheel? What is the effect of friction on the functioning of a Porter governor?

130


9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

State the limitations of the Watt governor How does a Porter governor differ from that of Watt governor? In what type of governors can isochronisms be achieved? What do you understand by gyroscopic couple? What is isochronous governor? Define sensitive of governor State the application of gyroscopic principles to aircrafts. In an automobile, what is the gyroscopic torque when the vehicle makes a left turn? What is the gyroscopic effect on sea going vessels? What is the effect of the gyroscopic couple on the reaction of the four wheels of a vehicle negotiating a curve? 19. What is the effect of the gyroscopic couple on a two wheeled vehicle when taking a turn? 20. What will be the effect of the gyroscopic couple on a disc fixed at a certain angle to a rotating shaft? 21. What is the couple applied to the disc causing precession when a disc is spinning with an angular velocity rad/s about the axis of spin? Apply 1. 2. 3. 4.

5.

How are velocity and acceleration of the slider of a single slider crank chain determined analytically? What is the velocity of the piston, When the crank is at the inner dead centre, in a horizontal reciprocating steam engine? Write the essential condition of placing the two masses, so that the system becomes dynamically equivalent A horizontal steam engine running at 240 r.p.m. has a bore of 300 mm and stroke 600 mm. The connecting rod is 1.05 m long and the mass of reciprocating parts is 60 kg. When the crank is 60 0 past its inner dead centre, the steam pressure on the cover side of the piston is 1.125 N/mm2 while that on the crank side is 0.125 N/mm2. Neglecting the area of the piston rod, determine: 1. The force in the piston rod ; and 2. The turning moment on the crankshaft. A machine has to carry out punching operation at the rate of 10 holes per minute. It does 6 kN-m of work per mm2 of the sheared area in cutting 25 mm diameter holes in 20 mm thick plates. A flywheel is fitted to the machine shaft which is driven by a constant torque. The fluctuation of speed is between 180 and 200 r.p.m. The actual punching takes 1.5 seconds. The frictional losses are equivalent to 1/6 of the work done during punching. Find: 1. Power required driving the punching machine, and 2. Mass of the flywheel, if the radius of gyration of the wheel is 0.5 m.

Analyze/ Evaluate 1. A rotating shaft carries four masses A, B, C and D which are radially attached to it. The mass centres are 30 mm, 38 mm, 40 mm and 35 mm respectively from the axis of rotation. The masses A, C and D are 7.5 kg, 5 kg and 4 kg respectively. The axial distances between the planes of rotation of A and B is 400 mm and between B and C is 500 mm. The masses A and C are at right angles to each other. Find for a complete balance, 1. The angles between the masses B and D from mass A 2. The axial distance between the planes of rotation of C and D, 3. The magnitude of mass B. 2. A shaft 1.5 m long is supported in flexible bearings at the ends and carries two wheels each of 50 kg mass. One wheel is situated at the centre of the shaft and the other at a distance of 0.4 m from the centre towards right. The shaft is hollow of external diameter 75 mm and inner diameter 37.5 mm. The density of the shaft material is 8000 kg/m3. The Young’s modulus for the shaft material is 200 GN/m2. Find the frequency of transverse vibration. 3. A Porter governor has all four arms 200 mm long. The upper arms are pivoted on the axis of rotation and the lower arms are attached to a sleeve at a distance of 25 mm from the axis. Each ball has a mass of 2 kg and the mass of the load on the sleeve is 20 kg. If the radius of rotation of the balls at a speed of 250 r.p.m. is 100 mm, find the speed of the governor after the sleeve has lifted 50 mm. Also determine the effort and power of the governor.

131


Unit I Force Analysis Applied and constraint forces – Free body diagrams – Static equilibrium conditions – Two, three & four members – Static force analysis of simple mechanisms – Dynamic force analysis – Inertia force and Inertia torque – D Alembert’s principle – The principle of superposition – Dynamic Analysis in reciprocating engines – Gas forces – Equivalent masses – Bearing loads – Crank shaft torque Inertia forces in a reciprocating engine considering the weight of the connecting rod 9 Hours Unit II Turning Moment Diagram and Flywheel Turning Movement Diagram for a Single Cylinder Double acting Steam Engine and Multi Cylinder Engine. Fluctuation of Energy. Flywheel and Flywheel in Punching Press. Balancing of masses – Basics only Flywheel in printing and cutting machines 9 Hours Unit III Balancing Single Rotating mass by a Single mass rotating in the Same plane and Two masses rotating in Different planes. Several masses rotating in the Same plane and Different planes. Partial Balancing of Unbalanced primary force in a Reciprocating Engine. Partial balancing of Locomotives. Variation of Tractive force. Swaying Couples. Hammer Blow. Coupled Locomotives. Primary and Secondary forces of Multi Cylinder In-line Engine. Radial and V Engines Effect of Partial Balancing of Reciprocating Parts of TwoCylinder Locomotives 9 Hours Unit IV Vibration Free Vibration. Natural Frequency of free transverse vibration due to a point load, Uniformly distributed load acting over a Simply Supported beam and Shaft fixed at both ends carrying a Uniformly distributed load and a shaft subjected to a number of point loads. Critical speed at a shaft. Viscous Damping. Damping and Magnification Factor. Randam vibrations. Resonance migration from one point to another. Isolation and Transmissibility. Free Torsional Vibrations of a Single, Two and Three Rotor System. Torsionally Equivalant Shaft. Logarithmic Decrement and Free torsional vibration of a geared system 9 Hours Unit V Mechanism for Control Governors – Types – Centrifugal governors – Gravity controlled and spring controlled centrifugal governors – Characteristics – Effect of friction – Controlling force – Other Governor mechanisms. Gyroscopes – Gyroscopic forces and torques – Gyroscopic stabilization – Gyroscopic effects in Automobiles, ships and airplanes. Sensitiveness and Hunting of governor 9 Hours Total: 45 + 15 Hours Textbooks 1. S. S. Rattan, Theory of Machines, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2011. 2. John J Uichker and Joesph E. Shigley, Theory of Machines and Mechanism, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2005. References 1. Ashok G Ambekar, Mechanism and Machine Theory, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2009. 2. R. L. Norton, Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2005. 3. Sadhu Singh, Theory of Machines, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007. 4. Syad and R. L. Singal, Kinematics of Machinery, Tech Mac Publishers, Chennai, 2007. 5. R. L. Norton, Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd,, New Delhi, 2005.

132


11M503 HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER (Use of standard heat and mass transfer data book is permitted) 3 1 0 3.5 Objectives    

The course is intended to build up necessary background for understanding the physical behavior of various modes of heat transfer, like, conduction, convection, and radiation, incompressible and compressible flow To understand the application of various experimental heat transfer correlations in engineering calculations To learn the thermal analysis and sizing of heat exchangers To understand the basic concepts of mass transfer

Program Outcomes (POs) (b) The graduates will be able to acquire the knowledge, capability of analyzing and solving any concept or problem associated with heat energy dynamics and utilization. Students will be able to understand the working concepts of thermal engineering. (g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in both Mechanical Engineering as well as IT companies (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to demonstrate general knowledge of heat transfer (conduction, convection, radiation) and general knowledge of mass transfer (molecular diffusion, convection).  Able to define and solve steady-state and transient problems.  Able to design heat and mass transfer processes and equipment. ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No. 1 2 3 4 5


Test 1*

Test 2*

20 20 20 40 -100

20 20 20 40 -100

Model Examination19* 20 20 20 40 -100


Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 19*

What is Fourier’s law and write the equation? What is conduction? State Newton’s law of cooling or convection law Write down the equation for heat transfer through a composite plane wall. Define overall heat transfer co-efficient. Define fins or extended surface. State the application of fins. Define Fin efficiency. Define Fin effectiveness. What is meant by steady state heat conduction?

The marks secured Test I and Test II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks

133


11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58.

What is periodical flow? What is meant by Lumped heat analysis? Define Biot number. What is meant by semi-infinite solids? What is meant by infinite solids? What are the factors affecting the thermal conductivity? Define Radiation Define Emmissive power. Define monochromatic emissive power. What is meant by absorptivity, reflectivity, and transmissivity? State Plank’s distribution law. State Wien’s displacement law. State Stefan-Boltzmann law. What is meant by gray body? Define intensity of radiation. What is the purpose of radiation shield? Define irradiation, radiosity. What are the assumptions made to calculate radiation exchange between the surfaces? What is meant by shape factor? What is dimensional analysis? State Buckingham π theorem. What are all the advantages of dimensional analysis? Define Reynolds number, Prandtl number, Nusselt number, Grashof number, Stanton number. What is meant by Newtonion and non-newtonion fluid? What is meant by laminar flow and turbulent flow? What is hydrodynamic boundary layer and thermal boundary layer? What are the dimensionless parameters used in forced convection? Define boundary layer thickness. Define Boiling. Give application of boiling and condensation. What is meant by filmwise condensation and dropwise condensation? Draw different regions of boiling and what is Nucleate boiling? What is Heat Exchanger? What are the types of heat exchanger? What is meant by direct and indirect contact heat exchanger? What is meant by Regenerators and Recuperators? What is meant by parallel flow and counter flow? What is meant by shell and tube heat exchanger and compact heat exchanger? What is meant by LMTD? What is meant by Fouling factor and effectiveness of heat exchanger? What is mass transfer? Give the examples of mass transfer. What are the modes of mass transfer? What is molecular diffusion and eddy diffusion? What is convective mass transfer? State Fick’s law of diffusion. What is meant by free and forced convective mass transfer? Define Schmidt number, Scherwood number.

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

What is different between thermodynamics and heat transfer? What is the significance of heat transfer? What is conduction heat transfer? How does it differ from convection heat transfer? What is the difference between the natural and forced convection? How is the conduction resistance of solids affected by its thermal conductivity?

134


6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32.

How is the convection resistance at a surface affected by the convection co-efficient? How is the radiation resistance affected by the surface emissivity? What is the physical basis for existence of a critical insulation radius? How do the thermal conductivity and the convection coefficient affect its value? Heat is transferred from hot water flowing through a tube to air flowing over the tube. To enhance the rate of heat transfer, should fins be installed on the tube interior or exterior surface? Under what condition the lumped capacitance method may be used to predict the transient response of a solid to a change in its thermal environment? Why is the semi-infinite solution applicable to any geometry at early times? Can snow be thought of as a good absorber or reflector of incident radiation? How is the thermal energy of material affected by the absorption of incident radiation? By reflection of incident radiation? Can the view factor of a surface with respect to itself be nonzero? If so, what kind of surface exhibits such behavior? What is the difference between local and average convection coefficient for species transfer? What are their units? Do we expect heat transfer to change with transition from a laminar to a turbulent boundary layer? If so, How? What quantities change with location in a velocity boundary layer? A thermal boundary layer? What important boundary layer parameters are linked by the Reynolds analogy? In what way Boiling & Condensation differs from other types of heat exchange? What physical features distinguish a turbulent flow from a laminar flow? How does the velocity boundary layer thickness vary with distance from the leading edge for laminar flow? For turbulent flow? How does the local convection heat transfer coefficient vary with distance from the leading edge for laminar flow over a flat plate? How is local heat transfer from the surface of a flat plate affected by the existence of an unheated starting length? How does the average convection coefficient of a tube vary with its location in a tube bank? Why are baffles used in a shell-and-tube heat exchanger? What effect does fouling have on the overall heat transfer coefficient and hence the performance of a heat exchanger? What effect does finned surfaces have on the overall heat transfer coefficient and hence the performance of a heat exchanger? When is the use of fins most appropriate? Will the fluid having the minimum or the maximum heat capacity rate experience the largest temperature change in a heat exchanger? Why is the maximum possible heat rate for a heat exchanger not equal to C max(Thi – Tci)? Can the outlet temperature of the cold fluid ever exceed the inlet temperature of the hot fluid? If so, why? If not why not? In using Fick’s law to determine the mass or molar flux of a species in a mixture, what specifically is being determined? Under what conditions does the species diffusion flux equal the absolute flux associated with transport of the species? In a transient diffusion process, what can be said about the mass transfer Biot number?

Apply 1. 2. 3. 4.

How would you approximate the total irradiation of a small surface in a large isothermal enclosure? How does the directional emissivity of a material change as the zenith angle associated with emission approaches 90ο If the spectral emissivity of material increases with increasing wavelength, how does its total emissivity vary with temperature? If a cube of sugar is placed in a cup of coffee, what is the driving potential for dispersion of the sugar in the coffee? What is the physical mechanism responsible for dispersion if the coffee is stagnant? What is the physical mechanism if the coffee is stirred?

135


5.

6.

7.

An aluminium alloy fin of 7mm thick and 50mm long protrudes from a wall which is maintained at 120ºC. The ambient air temperature is 22ºC. The heat transfer coefficient and conductivity of the fin material are 140 W/m2K and 55 W/mK respectively. Determine (a) Temperature at the end of the fin. (b) Temperature at the middle of the fin. (c) Total heat dissipated by the fin. A long cylindrical heater 30mm in diameter is maintained at 700ºC. It has surface emissivity of 0.8. The heater is located in a large room whose wall are 35ºC. Find the radiant heat transfer. Find the percentage of reduction in heat transfer if the heater is completely covered by radiation shield (ε=0.05) and diameter 40mm. In a double pipe heat exchanger, hot fluid with a specific heat of 2300J/kgK enters at 380ºC and leaves at 300ºC. Cold fluid enters at 25ºC and leaves at 210ºC. Calculate the heat exchanger area required for (a) Parallel flow (b) Counter flow. Take over all heat exchanger is 750W/m2K and mass flow rate of hot fluid is 1kg/s. CO2 and air experience equimolar counter diffusion in a circular tube whose length and diameter are 1.2m and 60mm respectively. The system is at a total pressure of 1atm and a temperature of 273K. The ends of the tube are connected to large chambers. Partial pressure of CO 2 at one end is 200 mm of Hg while at the other end is 90 mm of Hg. Calculate the following (a) Mass transfer rate of CO2 and (b) Mass transfer rate of air.

Analyze/ Evaluate Design a Heat exchanger that meets the following specification: m(kg/s) Tm,i (ºC) Hot water 28 90 Cold water 27 34

Tm,o (ºC) 60

Unit I Conduction Fourier law of conduction in simple and composite geometrics, types of boundary and initial conditions, contact resistance - conduction with heat generation, extended surface heat transfer, transient and periodic heat conduction Application of numerical methods 11 Hours Unit II Radiation Basic laws of radiation - radiation in ideal and real surfaces - view factor algebra - radiation shields electrical analog using radiosity and irradiation - gaseous emission and absorption. Concept of reradiating surface 7 Hours Unit III Convection Heat Transfer Dimensional analysis - boundary layer concept - basic governing equations - laminar and turbulent external and internal flows - forced and free convections - integral methods - semi – empirical correlations – flow over bank of tubes Concept of companied free and forced convection 9 Hours Unit IV Phase Change Heat Transfer and Heat Exchangers Modes of boiling - Nusselt theory of condensation - correlations in boiling and condensation - types of heat exchangers - methods of analysis - fouling factor and simple design problems Working principle of cooling tower 9 Hours

136


Unit V Diffusion Mass Transfer Introduction – Concentrations, Velocities and fluxes – Fick’s Law of Diffusion – The Diffusion Coefficient – Species Conservation Equation – Initial and Boundary Conditions – Steady-State Molecular Diffusion – Mass Transfer with Chemical Reactions – Transient Diffusion. Convective Mass Transfer Introduction – Convective Mass Transfer Coefficient – Concentration Boundary Layer – Governing Equations – Momentum, Heat and Mass Transfer Analogies – Turbulence Effects on Mass Transfer – Convective Mass Transfer Correlations – Evaporation of Water into Air Concept of sublimation 9 Hours Total: 45 + 15 Hours

Textbooks 1. R. C. Sachdeva, Fundamentals of Engineering Heat and Mass Transfer, New Age International Private limited, New Delhi, 2009. 2. C. P. Kothandaraman and S. Subramanyan, Heat and Mass Transfer Data Book, New Age International Private limited, New Delhi, 2008. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Iacropera, DeWitt, Bergmann and Lavine, Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer, Wiley India Edition Private limited, 2011. Yunus A Cengel, Heat and Mass Transfer an Practical Approach, Tata McGraw Hill publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2007. J. P. Holman, Heat Transfer, Tata McGraw Hill publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2009. C. P. Kothandaraman and S. Subramanyan, , Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer, New Age International Private limited, New Delhi, 2008. R. K. Rajput, Heat and Mass Transfer, S Chand and Company, New Delhi, 2003. http://www.gobookee.org/nptel-mechanical-heat-and-mass-transfer-hand/

137


11M504 DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS 3 1 0 3.5 Objectives 

To understand the basic geometrical specifications of various machine component with their functional and strength requirements To understand the procedures and standards for designing various machine components with maximum economy and efficiency To inject the knowledge to evaluate the design parameters of machine components.

 

Program Outcome (POs) c)

The graduates will be able to learn various techniques available to make shapes and designs in various materials. Students will be understood the methodologies to be followed in casting, fabrication, machining, materials, metallurgy and forming of engineering materials. At the end of the course, students will be able to select and perform suitable method of producing a desirable component in industry.

Course Outcome (COs)   

Able to select the proper dimensions for the machine component for specific applications. Able to check the failure modes in machine component and identify the solution. Able to design the machine component for particular applications.



Test 1*

Test 2*

25 30 30 15 -100

20 30 30 20 -100



20

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 20 *

Define standardization. List out the factors influencing machine design. Define principal stress. What do you meant by curved beams? Name some of the failure theories. Define factor of safety. Define torsional rigidity of the shaft. Define critical speed of the shaft. What do you meant by flexible shafts? What is coupling? Where do you use it? Define lead of screw threads. Define pitch of the thread. Name the types of threads used in fasteners.


138


14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26.

List out types of joints used in welding. Define stiffness of the spring. Define spring index. What is solid length of the helical compression springs? Name the types of bearings used in machine components. What are the functions of bearings? State some of the applications of ball and roller bearings. What is coefficient of fluctuation of speed? What is the difference between the function of flywheel and governor? Define fatigue failure. Define mechanical advantage. What is leverage? How will you classify bearings?

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32.

State the significance of factor of safety in machine design. What are the causes for stress concentration? What are the effects of stress concentration on machine component? What are the methods of reducing stress concentration? Why hollow shaft is stronger than solid shaft? How resonance will be avoided in shafts? Why maximum principal stress theory is not applicable for shafts? What is the difference between coupling and clutch? State the difference between rigid and flexible coupling. In What situation flexible coupling is used? Why taper is provided in the key? If a coupling is assembled to the shaft by key which should be stronger? What are the advantages of threaded joints? What are the advantages of V threads? What is the function of plain washer in bolted joints? State the difference between course and fine threads. List out the name of stresses induced in threaded joints. What are the advantages of welded joints compared to riveted joints? What are the causes of residual stress in welded joint? How they are relieved? How do you differentiate open and closed coil helical spring? Name the types of stresses induced in the springs. What is the use of Wahl’? Name the types of springs. What do you meant by nip of leaf spring? What do you meant by active coils of the spring? Why ball and roller bearings are called antifriction bearings/ Why taper roller bearings are used in pairs? What is the function of flywheel? What do you understand by fluctuation of energy and maximum fluctuation of energy? What types of stresses are induced in the spokes of a rimmed flywheel? What is the effect of keyway on the torsional rigidity of the shaft? Why steps are provided in the shaft? How it affects the shaft strength?

Apply 1. 2.

What is approximate friction power loss in a single radial ball bearing having a bore diameter of 55mm and subjected to a radial load of 225KN? The shaft rotates at 600RPM. Determine the approximate friction torque expected in single deep groove ball bearing under a radial load of 30KN. The bore of the bearing is 50mm.

139


3.

A shaft is subjected to the varying load cycle as follows; 3KN for 1 Sec, 1 KN for 1s and 0.5KN for 3s. If the shaft rotates at the constant speed of 500RPM, What basic load rating for each fraction of cycle should be used in selecting the ball bearing with a life of 15000 hours?

Analyze / Evaluate 1.

2.

3.

Taking stress concentration into account find the maximum stress induced when a tensile load of 20kN is applied to i) A rectangular plate 80mm wide and 12mm thick with a transverse hole of 16mm diameter ii) A stepped shaft of 60mm and 30mm diameter with 6 mm fillet radius. A factory line shaft is 4m long and is to transmit 75KW at 200rpm. The allowable stress in shear is 40Mpa and maximum allowable twist is 10 in a length of 20mm diameter. Determine the required shaft diameter. Design a journal bearing for a centrifugal pump with the following data. Diameter of the journal = 150mm Load on bearing = 40KN Speed of journal = 900Rpm

Unit 1 Steady Stresses and Variable Stresses in Machine Members Introduction to the design process - factor influencing machine design, selection of materials based on mechanical properties – Direct, Bending and Torsional stress equations – Impact loading – Calculation of principle stresses for various load combinations– Design of curved beams – Crane hook and ‘C’ frame Factor of safety - theories of failure – Introduction to fracture mechanics-Stress concentration – Design for variable loading – Soderberg, Goodman and Gerber relations Stress intensity factor 9 Hours Unit II Design of Shafts and Couplings Design of solid and hollow shafts based on strength, rigidity and critical speed – Design of keys and key ways - Design of rigid flange and flexible couplings – Muff, Clamp, Rigid Flange and Bushed-pin flexible couplings – Design of knuckle joints Introduction to gear and shock absorbing couplings 9Hours Unit III Design of Joints and Levers Threaded fasteners - Design of bolted joints – Eccentrically loaded bolted joint in shear – Eccentric load perpendicular to axis of bolt – Eccentric load on Circular base – Design of welded joints for pressure vessels and structures – Butt, Fillet welded Joints – Strength of Parallel, Traverse fillet Welded Joints Theory of bonded joints – Failures in pressure vessel joints - Design of Levers Metal stir welding Process 9 Hours Unit IV Design of Springs and Flywheel Design of helical, multi- leaf and torsional springs under constant loads and varying loads - End conditions and length of springs - Stresses in Helical springs of circular wire – Wahl stress factor – Concentric torsion springs – Belleville springs – Special springs - Design of flywheels involving stresses in rim and arm Flywheel energy storage 9 Hours

140


Unit V Design of Bearings Design of bearings – Sliding contact and rolling contact types – Cubic mean load – Design of journal bearings – Mckees equation – Lubrication in journal bearings – Calculation of bearing dimensions – Fundamentals of engineering Tribology Advance Bearings 9 Hours Total: 45 + 15 Hours Textbook 1.

V. B. Bhandari, Design of Machine Elements, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2010.

References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, PSG College of Technology, Design Data Book, M/s.Kalaikathir Achchagam, 2009. J. E. Shigley and C. R. Mischke, Mechanical Engineering Design, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2003. R. C. Juvinall and K. M. Marshek, Fundamentals of Machine Component Design, John Wiley & Sons, New Delhi, 2002. R. L. Norton, Design of Machinery, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2004. W. Orthwein, Machine Component Design, Jaico Publishing Co, 2003. http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcourse contents/IIT%20Kharagpur/Machine%20design1/New_index1.html

141


11M505 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives    

To understand the Total Quality Management concept and principles and the various tools available to achieve Total Quality Management To understand the application of statistical approach for quality control To create an awareness about the ISO and QS certification process and its need for the industries To apply the quality concepts in product design, manufacturing etc in order to maximize customer satisfaction

Program Outcomes (POs) (e) The graduates develop skills to be effective members of a team (h) The graduates will develop capacity to understand professional and ethical responsibility and will display skills required for continuous and lifelong learning and upgradation (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices

Course Outcomes (COs)  

Students will understand the concept of total quality management Students will be able to select and apply appropriate techniques in identifying customer needs, as well as the quality impact that will be used as inputs in TQM methodologies One can measure the cost of poor quality and process effectiveness and efficiency to track performance quality and to identify areas for improvement Able to choose a framework to evaluate the performance excellence of an organization and determine the set of performance indicators that will align people with the objectives of the organization.

 



Test 1*

Test 2*

Model Examination*


40 40 20 --100

40 40 20 --100

40 40 20 --100

40 40 20 --100

21

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. *

Define the term Total Quality Management. Enlist the basic concepts of Total Quality Management. Write the names of any four gurus of Total Quality Management. Define the term Quality. How the quality can be quantified? List the obstacles for TQM implementation


142


7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62.

Mention few benefits of TQM. Define the term leadership. List the characteristics of quality leaders. Mention some concepts of leadership. Write the functions of quality council. What is meant by quality policy? What meaning is conveyed through vision statement? What is meant by mission statement? Draw customer satisfaction organization diagram. Who is a customer? What is the customer perception to quality? Name the elements of customer service. What is the meaning of customer retention? What is meant by motivation? What are the concepts used to achieve motivated workforce? What is meant by empowerment? Mention few benefits of empowerment. What is a team? What are the different types of teams? Give one example' for cross functional team and natural work team. List any four characteristics of successful team. What is meant by gain sharing? " . What is meant by profit sharing? State the meaning of performance appraisal. What is meant by employee involvement? Write few benefits of employee involvement What is continuous process Improvement? State Juran's Trilogy. List the objectives of performance measures. Write the meaning of quality cost. Write the meaning of vital few and useful many with respect to Pareto diagram. What are the functions of a check sheet? What is a histogram? What is the difference between histogram and check sheet? How the central tendency is calculated? What is the objective of measuring central tendency? Write an equation for sample standard deviation. What is a non conforming unit? What is meant by nonconformity? State the meaning of attributes related to quality. How the subgroup is sized? What is a scatter diagram? What is an np chart? Name the benefits of quality management tools What is an affinity diagram? What is a tree diagram? What is a matrix diagram? State the benefits of matrix diagram. What is meant by PDPC? What is an activity network diagram? What are the reasons for benchmarking? Mention few benefits of benchmarking. Mention the pitfalls of benchmarking. Initiated the quality function deployment. What is quality function deployment? List the benefits of QFD.

143


63. Draw the structure of the house of quality. 64. What is meant by house of quality? 65. List the steps for building house of quality. 66. What are the technical descriptors? 67. What is the need for competitive assessment? 68. How QFD is carried out? 69. What is the value of Cp and Cpk? 70. State the meaning of Total Productive Maintenance. 71. List the goals of TPM. 72. Mention the planned downtimes in an organization. 73. List the unplanned downtimes in an organization. 74. How the down time loss is measured? 75. How the loss of reduced speed is measured? 76. Name the losses due to poor quality as per Taguchi. 77. What is average loss? How it is estimated? 78. Write Taguchi's quadratic loss function. 79. What is meant by FMEA? 80. Enlist the important types of FMEA. 81. What is meant by reliability? 82. How the failure rate is predicted? 83. State the benefits of FMEA. 84. Name the stages of FMEA. 85. How RPN is calculated? 86. How the central tendency is calculated? 87. What is the objective of measuring central tendency? 88. Write an equation for sample standard deviation 89. What is meant by population? 90. What is a sample? 91. What is a control chart? 92. What is the meaning of upper and lower control limits? 93. Mention the control charts used for variables. 94. What is meant by process capability? 95. Define process capability index. 96. What is the significance of Cp and Cpk? 97. What is the difference between mean and median? 98. What is meant by mode? 99. Abbreviate ISO and ASQ. 100. List the benefits of ISO certification. 101. What is ISO 9000 standard and series? 102. Write the applications of ISO/TSI 16949. 103. List out the ISO 9000 requirements. 104. What are the customer related processes in ISO. 105. What are the important steps required to implement a quality management system? 106. List the objectives of internal quality audits. 107. Mention the environmental management systems. 108. What are the requirements of ISO 140001? Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

How the suppliers are rated? How a process flow diagram can be used as a quality improvement tool? How an interrelationship diagram can be used for the quality improvement? How the loss of poor quality is measured? What is the difference between a document and a record? Differentiate between the chance causes and assignable causes of variations giving suitable examples When a process is ‘in control’ or ‘stable’? What type of variations is present in the process?

144


8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35.

Compare X Bar & R charts. How do recognition and reward affect employee involvement? When do you use the scatter diagram? Why poission distribution curve is used for preparing c-chart? How the service quality affects company’s performance? Why the implementation of TQM is necessary? How control charts helps in finding poor quality? Why do we invest more on prevention cost than appraisal cost? How the dispersion of the data is measured? Why motivation is necessary? Why team works? How the benchmarking is done? How customer requirements are converted into product specifications? How environmental management systems are benefit to industries? What is the difference between histogram and check sheet? Differentiate defect and defective. When are c-charts used? Is customer complaint necessary for an organization? If yes, list the various tools used for collecting customer complaints. Differentiate control limit and specification limit Why np chart is not recommended when the sub group size is variable? Under what situation, one can use cause and effect diagram. How should control charts be used by shop-floor personnel? Differentiate discrete and variable data, with suitable example? When do you use the affinity diagrams? Under what situation, one can use matrix diagram? Differentiate the term failure mode and failure effect Why aero diagrams are called PERT diagrams? Differentiate recognition and reward.

Apply 1. Assuming that the life in hours of an electric bulb is a random variable following normal distribution with a mean of 2000 hrs and standard deviation of 840 hrs. Find the expected number of bulbs from a random sample of 2000 bulbs having life i) More than 3000 hrs ii) Between 2600 and 2800 hrs. 2. Consider a company involved in testing the strengths of components. Currently 50 engineers are working in the company. Explain briefly the steps that the company should take to implement ISO 9000:2000 based quality system and obtain the certificate from a certifying agency. 3. The inspection results of copper bushes in a machine shop based on samples size 50 are as given below. Construct a suitable control chart and offer r inference about the process.

4.

Sample no No of rejections

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

9

2

7

11

3

6

2

4

3

7

Sample no No of rejections

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

5

4

10

16

3

14

4

1

5

8

A machine shop produces steel pins. The width of 100 pins was checked after machining and data was recorded as follows Width 9.509.509.509.509.509.509.509.50in mm 9.51 9.51 9.51 9.51 9.51 9.51 9.51 9.51 Frequency

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

145


(1) Find the arithmetic mean, standard deviation and variance. (2) What percentage of the pins manufactured has width of 9.52 to 9.63? 5.

6.

A certain product has been statistically controlled al a process average of 36.0 and a S:D. of 1.00. The product IS presently being sold to two users who have different specification requirements. User A has established a specification of 38.0 ± 4.0 for the product, and user R has specification of 36.0±4.0. (i) Based on the present process set up, what percent of the product produced will not meet the specifications set up by user A? (ii) What percent of the product will not match the specifications of user B? (iii) Assuming that the two users’ needs are equal, a suggestion is made to shift the process target to 37.0. At this suggested value, what percent of the product will not meet the specifications of user A? (iv) At the suggested process target, what percent or the product will not meet the specifications of user B? (v) Do you think .that this shift to a process target of 37.0 would be desirable? Explain your answer. In the manufacture of connecting rod assemble; the numbers of defectives found in the inspection of 15 samples of 50 Items in each sample are given in the following table Sample no: No of defectives:

7.

8.

9.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

8

7

5

4

8

7

9

21

12

10

9

8

16

15

17

(i) Determine the trial control limits, construct the np chart and state whether the process is in control. (ii) If any point goes outside the control limits, determine the revised control limits eliminating that point. (i) An industrial product was subjected to inspection with a batch size of 500 for consecutive days The number of defective pieces found are 33, 42, 44, 56, 60, 43, 55, 42, 28 and 70. Draw a p-chart and discuss. (ii) How is process Decision Program Chart (PDPC) used? Give an example. The mean weight of 500 male students at a certain college is 65.6 kg and tile standard deviation is 10 kg. Assuming tl1at the weights are normally distributed, find how many students, weigh (i) more than 75.5 kg, and (ii) between 55.5 and 75.5 kg At a certain examination 10% of the students who appeared for the paper in statistics got less than 30 marks and 97% of the students got less than 62 marks. Assuming tire distribution is normal, find the mean and tile standard deviation of the distribution

Unit I Introduction Definition of Quality – Dimensions of Quality – Quality Planning – Quality costs – Analysis Techniques for Quality Costs – Basic concepts of Total Quality Management – Historical Review – Quality Statements – Strategic Planning, Deming Philosophy – Crosby philosophy – Continuous Process Improvement – Juran Trilogy, PDSA Cycle, 5S, Kaizen – Obstacles to TQM Implementation OSHA standards 9 Hours

146


Unit II TQM Principles Principles of TQM, Leadership – Concepts – Role of Senior Management – Quality Council, Customer satisfaction – Customer Perception of Quality, Customer Complaints, Service Quality, Customer Retention, Employee Involvement – Motivation, Empowerment, Teams, Recognition and Reward, Performance Appraisal, Benefits– Supplier Partnership – Partnering, sourcing, Supplier Selection, Supplier Rating, Relationship Development, Performance Measures – Basic Concepts, Strategy, Performance Measure Supplier certification 9 Hours Unit III Statistical Process Control (SPC) The seven tools of quality – Statistical Fundamentals – Measures of central Tendency and Dispersion, Population and Sample, Normal Curve, Control Charts for variables X bar and R chart and attributes P, nP, C, and u charts, Industrial Examples, Process capability, Concept of six sigma – New seven Management tools Application of Poisson’s distribution 9 Hours

Unit IV TQM Tools Benchmarking – Reasons to Benchmark – Benchmarking Process, Quality Function Deployment (QFD) – House of Quality, QFD Process, and Benefits – Taguchi Quality Loss Function – Total Productive Maintenance (TPM) – Concept, Improvement Needs, and FMEA – Stages of FMEA- Case studies Failure rate 9 Hours Unit V Quality Systems Need for ISO 9000 and Other Quality Systems – ISO 9000:2000 Quality System – Elements, Implementation of Quality System, Documentation, Quality Auditing, ISO 9000:2005 (definitions), ISO 9001:2008 (requirements) and ISO 9004:2009 (continuous improvement), TS 16949, ISO 14000, AS9100 – Concept, Requirements and Benefits- Case studies Benefits of EMS 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1. Dale H. Besterfiled, Total Quality Management, Pearson Education Inc, New Delhi, 2003. References 1. N. Gupta and B. Valarmathi, Total Quality Management, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2009. 2. James R. Evans and William M. Lidsay, The Management and Control of Quality, South-Western 2002. 3. Dr S. Kumar, Total Quality Management, Laxmi Publications Ltd., New Delhi 2006. 4. P. N. Muherjee, Total Quality Management, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,2006. 5. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT-roorkee/industrial enginerring/index.htm

147


11M507 DYNAMICS LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5 Objectives    

To explain the various practical aspects of Instrumentation with emphasis on Mechanical domain To introduce the various types of Governor, cam, balancing of rotating masses and to determine the M.I. of various systems To explain the concept of Mechanical measurement and various methods used for measuring the variables At the end of the course, students will be able to handle various instruments to measure mechanical parameters and get inference out of it for further action

Program Outcomes (POs) (e) The graduates develop skills to be effective members of a team. Course Outcomes (COs)   

Able to check the profile of cam. Able to find out the MOI for different apparatus. Able to determine the gyroscopic couple effect.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN

Preparation Remember Understand Apply Observation and Results Analyze Evaluate Record Mini-Project/Model Examination/Viva-Voce Total Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

Define equilibrium speed. Define height of a governor. Define the effect of governor Define hunting of a governor Define stability of governors Define sensitivity of governors Define axis of precession Define period of vibration or time period Define a cycle Define simple harmonic motion Define degree of freedom Define the pressure angle of cam Define whirling or critical speed of a shaft Define logarithmic decrement

Internal Assessment


10

15

15

20

10

-

15

15

50

50

148


15. Define variation in tractive effect 16. Define damping 17. Define damping factor or damping ratio Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

What are the function of the governor? What are the centrifugal governor? What are the types of governors? Write down the expression for finding the speed of the balls of porter governor. What is the porter governor? Write down the expression for governor effort and power of a porter governor Write down the expression for finding the speed of a proell governor What is active force? What is centripetal acceleration and its magnitude? What is reactive force? What is frequency? What is the function of flywheel? What is the crank pin effect? What is the crank effect? Difference between free and forced vibration. What is viscous damping? What are the types of damping?

Apply / Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

When the load sleeve moves up and down along the spindle, the frictional force acts on it in a direction______ to that of the motion of sleeve. A governor is said to be unstable if the radius of the rotation __________ as the speed ___________ Centrifugal force is ___________ to centripetal force but __________ How cams are classified? How followers are classified according to motion of follower? How followers are classified according to surfacing contact? What are cams and its purpose? What is the maximum fluctuation of speed? The factors affecting the critical speed of a shaft is ________ What are the methods for finding out natural frequency of free longitudinal vibration? Application of torsional vibration What is the transmissibility at resonance and no damper condition? What is the need for balancing? What is the static, dynamic and complete balancing? What is the limiting condition in order that the wheel will not lift from the rails?

List of Experiments 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Determination of sensitivity and effort using Watt and Proell Governors. Study of jump phenomenon and drawing profile of the cam. Determination of gyroscopic couple using Gyroscope and verify its laws. Determination of critical speed of shaft with concentrated loads by Whirling of shaft apparatus. Exercise on Balancing of reciprocating masses. Exercise on Balancing of rotating masses. Determination of moment of inertia by oscillation method for connecting rod and Flywheel. Determination of damping co-efficient of Single degree of freedom system using spring mass system.

149


9.

Determination of torsional frequencies for compound pendulum and flywheel system with lumped Moment of inertia. 10. Exercise on Epicyclic gear train model differential & worm wheel reducers. 11. Determination of moment of inertia by bifilar suspension system 12. Exercise on measuring the displacement using LVDT (Linear variable displacement Transducer) 13. Exercise on measuring the torque using Torque indicator. 14. Determine the load using load cell apparatus. 15. Study of sound measurement.  Design experiment  Application oriented experiment  Mini project Total: 45 Hours Practical Schedule S.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Experiment Determination of sensitivity and effort using Watt and Proell Governors. Study of jump phenomenon and drawing profile of the cam. Determination of gyroscopic couple using Gyroscope and verify its laws. Determination of critical speed of shaft with concentrated loads by Whirling of shaft apparatus. Exercise on Balancing of reciprocating masses. Exercise on Balancing of rotating masses. Determination of moment of inertia by oscillation method for connecting rod and Flywheel. Determination of damping co-efficient of Single degree of freedom system using spring mass system. Determination of torsional frequencies for compound pendulum and flywheel system with lumped Moment of inertia. Exercise on Epicyclic gear train model differential & worm wheel reducers. Determination of moment of inertia by bifilar suspension system Exercise on measuring the displacement using LVDT (Linear variable displacement transducer) Exercise on measuring the torque using Torque indicator. Determine the load using load cell apparatus. Study of sound measurement  Design experiment  Application oriented experiment  Mini project

Hours 3 2 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1

15

150


11M508 THERMAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY II 0 0 3 1.5 Objectives   

To integrate the various basic thermodynamic concepts To apply the concept into various thermal applications like Heat exchanger, Heat transfer, conduction, convection, radiation, compressors, refrigeration and air conditioning To get the experimental skill


The graduates will be able to acquire the knowledge, capability of analyzing and solving any concept or problem associated with heat energy dynamics and utilization. Students will be able to understand the working concepts of thermal engineerings. (g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in both Mechanical Engineering as well as IT companies (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. Course Outcomes (COs)   

Able to analyze of different modes of heat transfer Able to identify the heat Transfer rate for different modes Able to calculate the performance of heat exchanger


 



10

15

15

20

10

-

15

15

50

50

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

What is Fourier’s law and write the equation? What is conduction? State Newton’s law of cooling or convection law Write down the equation for heat transfer through a composite plane wall. Define overall heat transfer co-efficient. What are the factors affecting the thermal conductivity? Define Radiation Define Emissive power. Define monochromatic emissive power. What is meant by absorptivity, reflectivity,transmissivity? State Plank’s distribution law. State Wien’s displacement law.

151


13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31.

State Stefan-Boltzmann law. What is meant by gray body? Define intensity of radiation. What are the assumptions made to calculate radiation exchange between the surfaces? What are all the advantages of dimensional analysis? Define Reynolds number, Prandtl number, Nusselt number, Grashof number, Stanton number. What is meant by Newtonion and non-newtonion fluid? What is meant by laminar flow and turbulent flow? What is hydrodynamic boundary layer and thermal boundary layer? What are the dimensionless parameters used in forced convection? Define boundary layer thickness. What is Heat Exchanger? What are the types of heat exchanger? What is meant by direct and indirect contact heat exchanger? What is meant by Regenerators and Recuperators? What is meant by parallel flow and counter flow? What is meant by shell and tube heat exchanger and compact heat exchanger? What is meant by LMTD? What is meant by Fouling factor and effectiveness of heat exchanger?

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22.

How is the conduction resistance of solids affected by their thermal conductivity? How is the convection resistance at a surface affected by the convection co-efficient? How is the radiation resistance affected by the surface emissivity? If heat is transferred from a surface by convection and radiation, how are the corresponding thermal resistance represented in a circuit? Can a material experiencing heat generation be represented by a thermal resistance and included in a circuit analysis? If so, why? If not, why not? What is the physical basis for existence of a critical insulation radius? How do the thermal conductivity and the convection coefficient affect its value? Heat is transferred from hot water flowing through a tube to air flowing over the tube. To enhance the rate of heat transfer, should fins be installed on the tube interior or exterior surface? Can snow be thought of as a good absorber or reflector of incident radiation?why? How is the thermal energy of material affected by the absorption of incident radiation? How is the thermal energy of material affected by reflection of incident radiation? Can the view factor of a surface with respect to itself be nonzero? If so, what kind of surface exhibits such behavior? What is the difference between local and average convection coefficient for species transfer? What are their units? Do we expect heat transfer to change with transition from a laminar to a turbulent boundary layer? If so, How? What quantities change with location in a velocity boundary layer? A thermal boundary layer? Under what conditions velocity, thermal and concentration boundary layers may be termed analogous? What is the physical basis of analogous behavior? What important boundary layer parameters are linked by the Reynold’s analogy? What physical features distinguish a turbulent flow from a laminar flow? Why are baffles used in a shell-and-tube heat exchanger? What effect does fouling have on the overall heat transfer coefficient and hence the performance of a heat exchanger? Will the fluid having the minimum or the maximum heat capacity rate experience the largest temperature change in a heat exchanger? Why is the maximum possible heat rate for a heat exchanger not equals to C max(Thi – Tci)? Can the outlet temperature of the cold fluid ever exceed the inlet temperature of the hot fluid in Heat Exchanger? Justify?

152


Apply / Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4.

5. 6. 7. 8.

How would you approximate the total irradiation of a small surface in a large isothermal enclosure? How does the directional emissivity of a material change as the zenith angle associated with emission approaches 90ο ? If the spectral emissivity of material increases with increasing wavelength, how does its total emissivity vary with temperature? If a cube of sugar is placed in a cup of coffee, what is the driving potential for dispersion of the sugar in the coffee? What is the physical mechanism responsible for dispersion if the coffee is stagnant? What is the physical mechanism if the coffee is stirred? How does the velocity boundary layer thickness vary with distance from the leading edge for laminar flow? For turbulent flow? How does the local convection heat transfer coefficient vary with distance from the leading edge for laminar flow over a flat plate? How is local heat transfer from the surface of a flat plate affected by the existence of an unheated starting length? How does the average convection coefficient of a tube vary with its location in a tube bank?

List of Experiments 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Thermal conductivity of lagged pipe Thermal conductivity of metal rod Heat transfer by natural convection Heat transfer by forced convection Heat exchanger test-parallel and counter flow Emissivity measurement Stefan – Boltzmann constant Refrigeration test Air conditioning test Reciprocating compressor testing  Design experiment  Application oriented experiment  Mini Project

Practical Schedule Total: 45 Hours Sl. No. 1

Experiment Introduction about laboratory

Hours 3

2

Thermal Conductivity of lagged pipe

3

3

Thermal Conductivity of Metal Rod

3

4

Heat transfer by natural convection

3

5

Heat transfer by forced convection

3

6

Heat exchanger test-parallel and counter flow

3

7

Emissivity measurement

3

8

Stefan – Boltzmann constant

3

9

Refrigeration test

3

10

Air conditioning test

3

11

Reciprocating compressor testing

3

12

Design experiment

3

13


6

153


11M509 METROLOGY LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5 Objectives  

To understand the concept Students will be able to measure various parameters by using standard measuring instruments To enable the students to use dimensional measuring instruments and SPC tools for manufacturing process analysis

Program Outcomes (POs) (j) The graduates can become job-givers rather than just job-seekers (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices Course Outcomes (COs)   

Able to identify &use basic metrology instruments Able to understand relative precision of measurements and source of measurement errors Learn to know the different measurement techniques and selection of instruments


 


10

15

15

20

10

-

15

15

50

50

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.


Define metrology. What is meant by precision and non-precision instrument? List out various methods of measurement. What is meant by direct and indirect methods of measurement? Define line and end measurement. What are the different types of errors. Define sensitivity. What is meant by repeatability and reproducibility? Write down the characteristics of precision measuring instrument. What is the purpose of surface and angle plate? Define least count. Define fits and tolerance. What is the least count for vernier and micrometer? What is the usage of vernier and micrometer? What is the purpose of gear tooth vernier? Define comparator. List out various types of comparators

154


18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40.

Mention any two advantages of comparators. State the working principle of electrical comparator. What are the advantages of electrical comparator? Classify the pneumatic comparator. Name the various types of pitch errors found in screw thread. Name the various method of measuring the minor diameter of the thread. Name the various method of measuring the major diameter of the thread. Name the various method of measuring the major effective diameter of the thread. Define drunken error. What is the best wire size? Name the various methods for measuring pitch diameter. What are the applications of the tool maker’s microscope? What are the commonly used forms of gear teeth? What are the types of gear. Name any four gear errors. What is meant by straightness measurement? Name the device used for measurement of roundness? What is interferometer? Name the different types of interferometer. List out various geometrical checks made on machine tools. What is the stylus probe instrument? What is CMM? Define machine vision.

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

What are the different bases used for selection of measuring instruments? Differentiate between systematic and random error. Distinguish between primary, secondary and working standards. How the mechanical comparator is used? Sate with any one example. How the displacement is measured using laser interferometer. How an autocollimator is calibrated? State the limitations of sine bar Why surface finish is important in engineering applications? What is the difference between primary texture and secondary texture? What is meant by ‘best size ‘wire?

Apply / Evaluate 1.

On which instrument you will use for measuring a) Diameter of a hole of up to 50mm b) Diameter of holes greater than 50mm c) Diameter of hole less than 5 mm 2. Aluminum though light, is not used for micrometer frames, why? 3. What are the important design considerations in design of metrological instrument? 4. How slip gauges are manufactured? 5. What do you understand by geometrical tolerances? 6. How the standard tolerance grades are designated? 7. Why hole-basis system to fit is generally employed? 8. Why is it that the use of a sine bar is not recommended for angles larger than 45 with the reference plane. 9. A 20mm diameter hole is drilled and reamed at an angle of 75° to a flat surface. How the angle could be checked by using two unequal rollers and calculate the values of the measurement which must be made, using suitable size of rollers. 10. Calculate the chord length and its distance below the tooth tip for a gear of module 2.5mm and 14.5°pressure angle.

155


List of Experiments 1.

Use of precision measuring instruments like a micrometer, vernier, height and depth gauge and surface plate etc., 2. Calibration of Vernier / Micrometer / Dial Gauge 3. Measurement of angles between center lines of holes drilled radially on a shaft. 4. Taper and bore measurement using spheres. 5. Measurements of Gear Tooth Dimensions using Gear Tooth vernier / Optical profile projector 6. Measurement of thread parameters using Tool Makers Microscope / Floating Carriage Micrometer 7. Checking the limits of dimensional tolerances using Comparators (Mechanical / Pneumatic / Electrical / Optical comparators) and construction of SQC chart. 8. Checking straightness of a surface plate using Autocollimator / Spirit Level. 9. Checking the alignment of radial drilling machine using dial gauges. 10. To check the dimensions of a machine component using CMM 11. Measurement of the Surface roughness.  Design experiment  Application oriented experiments  Mini Project Total: 45 Hours Practical Schedule Sl. No.

Experiment

Hours

1

Introduction about laboratory

3

2

Use of precision measuring instruments like a micrometer, vernier, height and depth gauge and surface plate

3

3

Calibration of Vernier / Micrometer / Dial Gauge

3

4

Measurement of angles between center lines of holes drilled radially on a shaft

3

5

Taper and bore measurement using spheres

3

6 7 8

Measurements of Gear Tooth Dimensions using Gear Tooth vernier / Optical profile projector Measurement of thread parameters using Tool Makers Microscope / Floating Carriage Micrometer Checking the limits of dimensional tolerances using Comparators (Mechanical / Pneumatic / Electrical / Optical comparators) and construction of SQC chart

3 3 3

9

Checking straightness of a surface plate using Autocollimator / Spirit Level

3

10

Checking the alignment of radial drilling machine using dial gauges.

3

11

Checking the dimensions of a machine component using CMM

3

12

Measurement of the Surface roughness.

3

13

Design experiment

3

14

Application oriented experiments

6

156


11M601 AUTOMATED MANUFACTURING 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives  

To set up, program, maintain and troubleshoot the automated machines during manufacturing process To give a broad exposure to Engineering graduates in the field of automated machines like CNC and robotics To understand the concept of Computer aided manufacturing systems, automated material handling systems and group technology



Program Outcomes (POs) (h) The graduates will develop capacity to understand professional and ethical responsibility display skills required for continuous and lifelong learning and up gradation. (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern Practices.

and

will


Able to understand the different CNC machine and its elements Able to write program for CNC lathe and Milling machine. Selecting of robot for the application with the knowledge of different components of it.



Test 1*

Test 2*

35 35 30 --100

30 40 30 --100

Model Examination* 30 40 30 --100


22

Remember 1. What are the ten strategies for Automation and process improvement? 2. Give examples for automated manufacturing system. 3. What is flexible automation? 4. What is lean production? 5. What is just-in-time delivery of parts? 6. What is mean time between failures (MTBF) and mean time to repair (MTTR?) 7. What are the basic elements of an automated system? 8. What is mean by CNC? 9. What are the advantages and disadvantages of CNC machine over conventional machines? 10. Name the four feed drives that are used in CNC machine tools. 11. Name the typical positional sensors used in the CNC machine tools. 12. What are the different types of EDM? 22 *


157


13. What is mean by basic load capacity? 14. What are the requirements of a good slide way system? 15. What is mean by flaking and how will you determine the nominal life of a linear motor bearing? 16. Name the three types of Spindle Heads. 17. What is the significance of touch trigger? 18. What are the various types of DC motors used in a CNC machine tools? 19. What are the advantages of AC servo motors over DC servomotors for axes feed drivers? 20. What is a machining center? How it differs from conventional CNC milling? 21. What are the advantages of digital feed-back devices over analog feedback. 22. What is a rotary type encoder? 23. State the principle of Moiré-fringes. 24. What are the advantages of circular interpolation technique. 25. What is APT system? 26. What do you understand by ‘modal’ and ‘non-modal’ G CODES? 27. What is meant by canned cycle? List any 4 types of canned cycle 28. Name the commonly available fixed cycles for Lathe Operations. 29. What is mean by Tool change cycle? 30. What are the features of custom macros? 31. What is Rapid Traverse Function? 32. When a Dwell function is to be used in the part programming? 33. What is Tool nose radius compensation and what is Cutter diameter compensation. 34. List out the functions of a post-processor in a CNC system. 35. What do you understand by the term machine zero, work zero and Zero Shift? 36. What is meant by the term contact and noncontact inspection? 37. What is a visual inspection method? 38. What is an industrial robot? 39. What do you understood by the term ‘Dead reckoning’? 40. What are the various components of an Industrial Robot? 41. What does a manipulator consists of in an industrial robot? 42. What is degree-of-freedom? 43. What are the common robot configurations? 44. Name the five types of joints commonly used in industrial robot 45. The operations that can be performed using the limited sequence control in a robot are? 46. What is a play back robot with point-to-point control? 47. What is a gripper? What are the various types of grippers used in industrial robot applications? 48. Name the types of sensor used in robots. 49. Write down the applications of industrial robot. 50. Write down the material handling applications of industrial robot. 51. Name some processing operation that a robot can perform? 52. What is mean by Repeatability and accuracy of a robot? 53. What is a robot program? 54. What is material handling? 55. What do you mean by External and internal logistics? 56. What are the commonly used material transport equipments? 57. What is the use of palletizer and depalletizer? 58. What are the design considerations to be considered during the design of a material handling equipment? 59. Name the principal types of powered trucks? 60. What are nonpowered material transport equipments? 61. Mention some typical applications of automated guided vehicle system? 62. What is an automated guided vehicle system (AGVS)? 63. What are the different types of automated guided vehicles? 64. What are the roles of material transport equipments inside an industry? 65. Mention the applications of AGVS. 66. What is vehicle guidance technology? 67. State the purpose of traffic control in an automated guided vehicle system.

158


68. What is frequency select method and path switch select method? 69. What are the advantages of Self-guided vehicle technology over fixed path ways? 70. What are the two aspects of vehicle management? 71. Name the two methods of traffic control used in a commercial AGV system. 72. What is forward sensing? 73. What is the use of obstacle detection sensor? 74. What is ‘on-machine inspection system’? 75. What do you understand by the term uniting equipment? 76. The methods used in AGV system to dispatch vehicles are_______________. 77. What is vehicle acquisition distance? 78. What is the use of emergency bumper in AGV system? 79. What are mono rails? 80. What is the function of material storage system? 81. What is storage capacity and storage density? 82. What is system throughput? 83. Name some advantages and applications of automated storage systems? 84. What is an automated storage/retrieval system (AS/RS)? 85. What is Work-in-process (WIP) storage technology? 86. What are the applications of carousel storage system? 87. What are the four basic components of nearly all automated storage/retrieval system? 88. What is a manufacturing support system? 89. Define CAD and CAM. 90. What is the role of CAD/CAM in design and manufacturing firms? 91. What are the features of CIM in the manufacturing process? 92. What are the elements of a CIM system? 93. What are the benefits of CAD system? 94. What is Lean product development? 95. What is Rapid prototyping? 96. What is shop floor control and inventory control? 97. W hat is ERP? 98. What is a retrieval CAPP system? 99. What is a generative CAPP system? 100. What is a Flexible manufacturing system? 101. What are the various types of workstation of a flexible manufacturing system? 102. The basic components of a flexible manufacturing system are__________________. 103. The four reasonable tests of flexibility in an automated manufacturing systems are __________. 104. What is a flexible manufacturing cell? 105. What is group technology? 106. What is a ‘route sheet’ and what does it contains? 107. What is a part family? 108. What are the benefits of group technology and part family in a manufacturing sector? 109. What is cellular manufacturing? Understand 1. How will you classify the manufacturing costs? 2. How manufacturers can successfully compete by employing modern manufacturing approaches and technologies. 3. Before starting programming what are the various items one must check in a CNC machine. 4. The four factors that govern the selection of tooling for CNC machines are? 5. Why linear tooling is preferred in some CNC Chuckers? 6. State the significance of preparatory function. 7. What are the significance of Subroutines and Do loops. 8. Differentiate between point-to-point control and continuous path control. 9. How do you pre-load a ball screw nut? 10. How canned cycle works?

159


11. What are the importance’s of feedback devices in a CNC Machine tool? 12. State the importance of sensors in a robot. 13. What are the advantages of dual grippers over a single gripper? 14. What is a robot control systems? 15. How are robot controllers classified? 16. What is the role of Machine vision in robotics? 17. What do you understand by the term ‘control resolution’ in a robot? 18. When a vehicle is said to be a Self-guided vehicle (SGV)? 19. How SGV differs from other guidance methods? 20. How forklift rider trucks are distinguished from walkie trucks? 21. What are the various capabilities that a manufacturing system must possess in order to be flexible? 22. What’s the main feature of cranes and hoists over other material transport equipments? 23. What is flexibility in a manufacturing system? 24. When a system is referred to as flexible manufacturing system? 25. What’s the importance for automating a company’s storage operations? 26. Compare the advantages of automated system over manual work system and worker-machine system. Apply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

On what attributes similar parts can be distinguished? How a Hierarchical structure differs from Chain –type structure? How a firm can automate the task of process planning using computers? Importance and necessity for making the manufacturing system automated? Justify the need to automate the manufacturing process. How a machining center differs from conventional CNC milling machine? Using the list of sensor devices used in robot work cells, describe several methods for determining the presence or absence of a nonmetallic part in a fixture. Assume the dimensions of the part are: length = 127.0 mm, width = 36.0 mm and thickness = 20.0 mm. The fixture is a mechanical vise with two jaws for holding the part. For each alternative make a sketch of how the sensor would be positioned relative to the part.

Unit I Introduction and Structure of CNC Machine Tools Introduction to Automation, definition, types, reasons for automating, and types of production. Development of CNC Technology, principles, features, advantages, economic benefits, applications, CNC,DNC concept, classification of CNC Machine, types of control, CNC Machine building, guide ways and its types, ball Screws and recalculating ball screw, working of 3 axis and 5 axis CNC machines CNC controllers, characteristics, interpolators 9 Hours Unit II CNC Programming and Tooling Coordinate system, structure of a part program, G & M Codes, Manual part programming for Fanuc, APT part programming using CAD/CAM, and simple Examples. Selection of CNC cutting tools Cutting tool materials, carbide inserts classification, tooling system for Machining centre and Turning centre;(work holding devices), Tool magazines - ATC, APC Maintenance of CNC Machines 9 Hours Unit III Industrial Robotics Introduction, robot anatomy, robot control systems, and other specifications, end effectors, sensors, drive system, safety monitoring. Robot applications- Characteristics of robot applications, work cell layout Robot applications in material handling, processing, Fettling, assembly, welding and inspection 9 Hours

160


Unit IV Automated Material Handling and Inspection Introduction to Automated Guided Vehicle (AGV) Systems and Automated Storage and retrieval system (AS/RS) - basic components, types and its application. Automated inspection principles- Off line & on line inspection, distributed inspection & final inspection Sensor technologies for automated inspection and Shop floor control 9 Hours Unit V Computer Aided Manufacturing and Group Technology Introduction to CAM- Manufacturing planning, manufacturing control- Computer integrated manufacturing, Flexible manufacturing systems -Components, Types of systems, FMS layout and FMS benefits. Computer aided process planning: Retrieval CAPP systems and generative CAPP systems, benefits of CAPP. Group Technology Part families, parts classification and coding- Benefits of group technology 9 Hours Total 45 Hours Textbook 1.

Mikell P. Groover, Automation, Production System and Computer Integrated Manufacturing, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2008.

References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

P. Radhakrishnan, S. Subramanyan and V. Raja , CAD/CAM/CIM, New Age International Private Ltd, NewDelhi, 2008. Mikell P. Groover, Mitchell Weiss and Roger N. Nagel G Odrey, Industrial Robotics, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd. New Delhi, 2007. M. M. M . Sarcar, Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2008. P. Radhakrishnan, Computer Numerical Control Machines, New Central Book Agency, 2004. HMT, Mechatronics, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2010. http://media.sakshat.ac.in/NPTEL-IIT-Videos/default.aspx

161


11M602 HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives     

To learn hydraulic fluid / Pneumatic air fundamentals including generation and distribution To understand working principles, operation of hydraulic and pneumatic components To expose to various techniques of circuit building in pneumatics Have exposure to diagnose / troubleshoot Hydraulic pneumatic, electro pneumatic circuits To know about the ladder logic diagram to programmable logic control of fluid power system


The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in both Mechanical Engineering as well as IT companies. Course Outcomes (COs)   

Able to identify, understand, and draw fluid power symbols. Able to demonstrate the knowledge of basic fluid power theory and fluid conditioning. Able to describe the construction and operation of basic fluid power components.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)

S. No.

Test 1*

Test 2*

Model Examination*


1

Remember

30

30

30

30

2

Understand

40

40

40

40

3

Apply

30

30

30

30

4

Analyze/Evaluate

--

--

--

--

5

Create

--

--

--

--

100

100

100

100

Total 23

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 23 *

Define the term fluid power. Name three basic methods of transmitting power? Define the term mass density. Define the term absolute viscosity and kinematic viscosity. Define surface tension, capillarity. What is oxidation stability? What are fluid power symbols? State Pascal’s law. State the continuity equation.


162


10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45.

What are the various energy losses occur when liquid flows through a pipe? What is the function of pump? What is the function of hydraulic actuator? What are the types of hydraulic cylinder? What is the function of a Hydraulic motor? Name the basic types of rotary actuators? What is the function of direction control valve? What is check valve? What are its functions? What is pressure control valve? What is flow control valve? What is sequence valve? What is the function of an accumulator? Define the term intensifier ratio. What is the use of pressure switch? List the various types of accumulator. What are limit switches? What do you meant by electrical relay? What is the purpose of a timer? Define pneumatics. State Boyle’s law, Charles law. What is the function of air filter? What do you mean by FRL unit? What is the function of pneumatic actuator? What do you meant by sequencing of cylinders? What is hydro pneumatic circuit? What is servo system? What is the function of servo amplifier? What is fluidics? State the coanda effect. What is PLC? What are the fluid sensors? What is meant by contact sensing? What do you meant by SRT-Flip flop? List three major units of a PLC. What does the term trouble shooting refer? List four basic requirements on which the life of the fluid power system depend.

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

What is the fundamental difference between Hydraulics and pneumatics? State the effect of temperature and pressure on viscosity of liquids? What is the difference between the force and pressure? Differentiate between the laminar and turbulent flow? Where the hydrodynamic displacements pumps are employed? Why? Which pump-external gear, internal gear, screw vane and piston –generates the least noise? Why? Why are centrifugal pumps not preferred for fliud power application? Why are double acting cylinders known as differential cylinders? Which hydraulic motor is generally the most efficient? Why? State the difference between the hydraulic motor and hydraulic pump? When do you prefer poppet type hydraulic valves? Distinguish between a pressure control valve and pressure relief valve? Why is pressure measurement considered as a crucial process in the hydraulic system? For what type of application, you would prefer to use pneumatic systems rather than hydraulic system? Why are mufflers used in pneumatic system? Why is extension stroke faster than the retraction stroke in a regenerative circuit? What is the difference between an OR Gate and an EXCLUSIVE –OR Gate?

163


18. Where the fluidics control system preferred than other control system? 19. If a pump is delivering insufficient oil what are the possible causes and also give remedies for them? 20. What will you do to reduce /prevent excessive heating of oil in a hydraulic system?

Apply 1. To investigate a hydraulic and pneumatic system Requirements: Two syringes of equal size. A plastic tube of about 10 cm that will fit tightly over the opening of both syringes

Draw out the plunger (piston) of one syringe and push in the plunger of the other syringe. Connect the two syringes by means of the plastic tube. Push in the plunger of one syringe. Draw that plunger out again.

2. For the Hydraulic System shown, following data are given:  Pump is adding 5 hp (3730 W) to fluid  Pump flow is 0.001896 m3/s  Pipe has 0.0254 m inside dia  Sp. Gravity of oil = 0.9  Kinematic viscosity of oil is 100 CS  Elevation difference between station 1 & 2 is 6.096 m  Pipe lengths: 1 ft = 0.305 m, 4 ft = 1.22 m, 16 ft = 4.88 m Find pressure available at inlet to hydraulic motor. The pressure at the oil top surface level in the hydraulic tank is atmospheric (01 MPa).

164


Unit I Fluid Power Systems and Fundamentals Introduction to fluid power, Advantages of fluid power, Application of fluid power system. Types of fluid power systems, Properties of hydraulic fluids – General types of fluids – Fluid power symbols .Basics of Hydraulics-Applications of Pascals Law- Laminar and Turbulent flow – Reynold’s number – Darcy’s equation – Losses in pipe, valves and fittings.-Problems Bernoulli’s equation, Hydraulic circuit analysis 9 Hours Unit II Hydraulic System and Components Sources of Hydraulic Power: Pumping theory – Pump classification – Gear pump, Vane Pump, piston pump, construction and working of pumps – pump performance – Variable displacement pumps. Fluid Power Actuators: Linear hydraulic actuators – Types of hydraulic cylinders – Single acting, Double acting special cylinders like tandem, Rodless, Telescopic, Cushioning mechanism, Construction of double acting cylinder, Rotary actuators – Fluid motors, Gear, Vane and Piston motors. Pump characteristics 9 Hours Unit III Control Components Construction of Control Components : Direction control valve – 3/2 way valve – 4/2 way valve – Shuttle valve – check valve – pressure control valve – pressure reducing valve, sequence valve, Flow control valve – Fixed and adjustable, electrical control solenoid valves, Relays. Accumulators and Intensifiers: Types of accumulators – Accumulators circuits, sizing of accumulators, Intensifier – Applications of Intensifier Intensifier circuit.-Cylinder Sequencing circuits 9 Hours Unit IV Pneumatic System Components and Servo Systems Pneumatic Components: Properties of air – Compressors– Filter, Regulator, and Lubricator Unit – Air control valves, Quick exhaust valves, and pneumatic actuators. Servo systems – Hydro Mechanical servo systems, Electro hydraulic servo systems and proportional valves. Fluidics – Introduction. Simple circuits in fluidics devices 9 Hours

165


Unit V Design of Hydraulic and Pneumatic Circuits Introduction to PLC - ladder diagrams, PLC applications in fluid power control. Fluid Power Circuit Design, Speed control circuits, synchronizing circuit, Pneumo hydraulic circuit, Sequential circuit design for simple applications using cascade method. Fluid power circuits -failure and troubleshooting. 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1.

Anthony Esposito, Fluid Power with Applications, Pearson Education New Delhi, 2011.

References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

S. R. Majumdar, Oil Hydraulics, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd. New Delhi, 2004. James L. Johnson, Introduction to Fluid Power, Delmar Thomson Learning, 2003. S. R. Majumdar, Pneumatic systems – Principles and maintenance, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd. New Delhi, 2008. Andrew Parr, Hydraulics and Pneumatics, Jaico Publishing House, 2006. Illangov Soundarrajan, Introduction to Hydraulics and Pneumatics, Prentice hall of India, New Delhi, 2007. http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=108105062 http://elearning.vtu.ac.in/ME73.html

166


11M603 DESIGN OF TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS (Use of PSG design data book is permitted) 3 1 0 3.5 Objectives    

To gain knowledge on the principles and procedure for the design of power transmission components To understand the standard procedure available for the Design of Transmission systems To learn to use standard data and catalogues To familiarize the students with the different mechanisms like cam, geneva and ratchet and pawl

Course Outcomes (COs) 1. 2. 3.

Students will be able to design the various components such as flexible elements, gears and various mechanisms to satisfy the project requirements Students will have an ability to use the standard data and catalogues Students can draw the ray diagram for the single, multi stage and overlapping type of gear boxes and also calculate their output speeds

Program Outcomes (POs) i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. ASSESSMENT PATTERN Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)

S.No. 1 2 3 4 5


Test 1*

Test 2*

Model Examination*


25 30 25 15 05 100

20 30 25 20 05 100

20 20 30 25 05 100

20 20 30 25 05 100

24

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. *

Mention the types of power drive. State the Law of Belting What are the types of belts? State the materials for belts. What factors should be considered during the selection of a belt drive? What is meant by the ply of belt? Mention the different types of joints employed for joining flat belts. What are the various stresses induced in wire ropes? How is a wire rope specified? What is meant by chordal action in chain drives? What is a gear drive? State the Law of gearing Mention some applications of gear drives.


167


14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55.

What is meant by spur gear? How are gears classified? What factors influence backlash? What is meant by a corrected gear? What stresses are induced in gear tooth? What is a helical gear? What are the advantages of helical gears? Specify the types of gears failures. Define the following terms. a) Tip circle b) Root circle c) Pitch circle What is a herringbone gears? State the advantages of Herringbone gear. What is a bevel gear? What is a crown gear? Define the following terms: (a) Cone distance, (b) Face angle. In which gear drive, self locking is available? Write some applications of worm gear drive. Specify the machine tools used for producing spur gears. What are the components of gear box? Give the applications of gear box? What is a speed diagram? What is preferred number? What is step ratio? What does the ray diagram of gear-box indicate? What are the requirements of a speed gear box? State the types of cam. Define the term undercutting of cam profile What are the advantages of knife edge follower? What are the different types of follower motions? What is bearing? What are the functions of bearing? How bearings are classified? How do you classify cams? What is sliding contact bearing? What are the applications of sliding contact bearing? What is an antifriction bearing? Give two applications of hydrodynamic journal bearing. What is the range of number slots in Geneva mechanism? Give the applications of Geneva mechanism. What is the purpose of pawl used in ratchet mechanism? Write the common materials used for ratchet and pawl mechanism. In general what type of load acting on pawl pin? Give the applications of ratchet & pawl mechanism.

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

What conditions should be followed when flat belt drive is installed? Why tight-side of the belt should be at the bottom side of the pulley? In what ways, timing belts are superior to ordinary V belts? In what ways wire ropes are superior to fibre ropes? Find the difference between chain sprocket and gear. What are the possible ways by which a chain drive may fail? In what way silent chain is better than ordinary driving chain? At what occasions non-metallic gears are employed. What is interference in gears? How can you overcome it? Compare simplex, duplex and triplex chain type

168


11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30.

What preliminary design considerations should be, adopted, when selecting gear drive? Why dedendum value is more than addendum value? Differentiate axial pitch and normal pitch of the helical gear. Why pinion is made harder than gear? Why are gear drives superior to belt drives or chain drives? The advantages of gear drives? In what ways helical gears are differed from spur gears. Why is multistart worm more efficient than the single start one? The efficiency of worm gear drive comparatively lower than other drive. Why? When the number start of a worm is increased in worm gear drive, how it affects the other parameters and action of the drive? What is the specific feature of mitre gear? What is kinematic arrangement, as applied to gear boxes? What purpose does the housing of gear box serve? List out the possible arrangement to achieve 16 speed gear box. When do we use bevel gears? For what purpose we are using gear box? What is the purpose of cam drive? What is pressure angle? What is the effect of increase in pressure angle? Why ball and roller bearings are called antifriction bearing? Why hydrodynamic journal bearing is called self acting bearing? State advantages of hydrodynamic bearings over hydrostatic bearings.

Apply 1.

A motor shaft rotating at 1500 rpm has to transmit 15kW to a low speed shaft with a speed reduction of 3:1. Assume starting torque to be 25% higher than the running torque. The teeth are 200 involutes with 25 teeth on the pinion. Assume both the gears are made of same material and life of gear is 10000 hours. Design a spur gear drive to suit the above conditions and check for compressive and bending stresses and plastic deformations. Also sketch the spur gear drive Analyze/ Evaluate 1.

d.

The pulley system is used to lift small loads from a ground floor to an upper floor (Figure 1). The load being lifted is 200N.

a. What is the mechanical advantage of this pulley system? b. What is the velocity ratio of the system? c. What effort is required to lift the load? If the system moves the load 5metes upwards, how far must the effort move?

Figure 1

2.

A small hillside village has discovered a fresh water spring and wishes to pump the water up to the surface, into a bottling plant. A local engineer has developed a simple pump. Refer Figure 2 The motor has broken down and the pulley mechanism has been removed. Draw in the box an alternative mechanism, powered by hand, that could be used as a short term alternative to the motorised system. Refer Figure 3 List four advantages / disadvantages of your design

169


Figure 2

Figure 3

Create 1. 2.

Design a crushing machine is to be run at 560 rpm. Design a suitable drive to transmit 15 kW from a motor at 1200 rpm. Minimum centre distance is 1.5 m. Design a layout of a 9 speed gear box for a machine tool. The minimum and maximum speeds are 100 and 900 rpm. Power is 5 kW from 1200 rpm induction motor

Unit I Design of Transmission Systems for Flexible Elements Need for power transmission - type and classifications of transmission systems - applications - limitations Belt and wire rope drives: Design of belt drives - Flat and V-belt drives - Condition for Transmission of maximum power - Selection of belt and pulleys - Design of wire rope and pulleysDesign of chain drives with sprockets 9 Hours Unit II Spur Gears and Helical Gears Gear Terminology - Speed ratios and number of teeth - Force analysis - Tooth stresses - Dynamic effects Basics of gear design - Gear tooth failure modes Design of Helical Gears - Pressure angle in the normal and transverse plane - Equivalent number of teeth - Forces and stresses Gear lubrication - selection of materials for gears 9 Hours Unit III Bevel Gears and Worm Gears Types of bevel gears - Straight bevel gear - Tooth terminology - tooth forces and stresses. Estimating the dimensions of pair of straight bevel gears - Applications of gear drives Worm gears drives - terminology Applications strength and wear rating of worm gears - thermal considerations - Forces and stresses, estimating the size of the worm gear pair Design of spiral bevel gears - beam and wear strength for bevel and worm gears 9 Hours

170


Unit IV Design of Gear Boxes and Cam Design Gear boxes - applications to spur, helical, bevel and worm gear drives - Standard step ratio - Ray diagram, kinematics layout - Design of single stage, single speed gear boxes - Design of multistage, multi speed gear boxes Cam Design: Types - pressure angle and under cutting base circle determination - relative advantages and disadvantages - forces and surface stresses. Design of gear boxes - application in machine tool 9 Hours Unit V Design of Power Screws and Mechanisms Power screws - Introduction, Forms and Terminology - Efficiency - Stress in screws - Calculation of wear and strength - design of power screws. Design of Ratchet & pawl mechanism and Geneva mechanism Introduction to Snap Latches 9 Hours Total: 45 + 15 Hours Textbooks 1. 2.

T. J. Prabhu, Design of Transmission Elements, Mani Offset, Chennai, 2008. V. B. Bhandari, Design of Machine Elements, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2007.

References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/ R. C. Juvinall and K. M. Marshek, Fundamentals of Machine component Design, John Wiley & Sons, New Delhi 2002. R. L. Norton, Design of Machinery, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi 2004. B. J. Hamrock, B. Jacobson and S. R. Schmid, Fundamentals of Machine Elements, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2007. J. E. Shigley and C. R. Mischke, Mechanical Engineering Design, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2004. S. G. Kulkarni, Machine Design, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.

171


11M604 GAS DYNAMICS AND JET PROPULSION 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives   

To understand the basics of incompressible and compressible flow To study the phenomenon of shock waves and its effect on flow To gain basic knowledge about jet propulsion and Rocket Propulsion

Program Outcomes (POs) (a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology Subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them (b) The graduates will be able to acquire the knowledge, capability of analyzing and solving any concept or problem associated with heat energy dynamics and utilization. Students will be able to understand the working concepts of thermal engineering. (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes Course Outcomes (COs) 

Understand the thermodynamics of the Brayton cycle and how they contribute to overall propulsion system performance. Understand the role and fundamental performance of gas turbine components. Understand the working of turbojet, turboprop, turbofan, and ramjet air breathing propulsion systems.

 



Test 1*

Test 2*

Model Examination*


20 20 20 40 --

20 20 20 40 --

20 20 20 40 --

20 20 20 40 --

100

100

100

100

25

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 25 *

What is energy and momentum equation? What are the various regimes of fluid flow? Define Stagnation state and Critical state. What is Mach number, mach angle, mach cone? Define nozzle and diffuser. What is fanno flow and Raleigh flow? What is mean by shock wave in fluid flow? What is the difference between normal shock and oblique shock? Define nozzle efficiency.


172


10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

Tell the types of jet engines. What is propulsive and overall efficiency? What is thrust augmentation? What is air breathing and non-air breathing engines? Classify the rocket engines. What are the applications of rocket?

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Be aware of fundamentals of compressible and incompressible flow and where to apply that flows? How Flow phenomena works? How to make the fluid passage with hot fluid content? How to avoid void the heat loss and to achieve maximum heat transfer? Realize the shock wave principles how it happen? Comprehend Aircraft engine working principles and various aircraft engines Recognize Rocket engine performance and its application

Apply 1.

2.

3.

A supersonic nozzle expands air from p o = 25 bar and To = 1050 K to an exit pressure of 4.35 bar ; the exit area of the nozzle is 100 cm 2. Determine a. Throat area b. Pressure and temperature at the throat c. Temperature at exit d. Exit velocity as fraction of the maximum attainable velocity and e. Mass flow rate. Ambient air ( p o = 1.013 bar and T o = 288 K ) is sucked by a blower through a convergent nozzle ( throat diameter = 10 cm ) . If the air velocity at the throat reaches the sonic value, determine a. Pressure and temperature at the throat, b. Mass flow rate through the nozzle, and c. Maximum mass flow rate. A turbojet engine is being used to propel an aero plane. The drag is 3900 N. The coefficient of drag is 0.01835. The wing area is 21.25 m2. The air consumption per second of the engine is 14.5 kg / sec and the thrust developed is 8900 N. Calculate the flight speed and effective jet velocity. Also calculate the specific thrust. What is the density ratio at this altitude of 10000 m? Take ρ = 0.5 kg / m3 at this altitude.

Analyze/ Evaluate 1. 2. 3.

Will Best suggestion and decide the best suit fluid transfer in industrial applications. Will try to adopt the aircraft and jet propulsion principles in real time applications Will construct the best fluid transfer system with optimum heat transfer options.

Unit I Compressible Flow Fundamentals Energy and momentum equations for compressible fluid flows- various regions of flows - reference velocities - stagnation state - Wave propagation in elastic medium – propagation of sound waves and derivation for velocity of sound - critical states, Mach number, critical Mach number - types of waves Mach cone - Mach angle - effect of Mach number on compressibility Fluid flow fundamentals11 Hours

173


Unit II Flow Through Variable Area and Constant Area Ducts Isentropic flow through variable area ducts - T-s and h-s diagrams for nozzle and diffuser flows - area ratio as a function of Mach number - mass flow rate through nozzles and diffusers - effect of friction in flow through nozzles. Flow in constant area ducts with friction (Fanno flow) – Fanno curves and Fanno flow equation - variation of flow properties and variation of Mach number with duct length in Fanno flow- Flow in constant area ducts with heat transfer (Rayleigh flow) - Rayleigh line and Rayleigh flow equation variation of flow properties and maximum heat transfer in Rayleigh flow.Wind potential possibilities in and around somanur11 Hours

Unit III Compressible Flow with Normal Shock Governing equations - variation of flow parameters like static pressure, static temperature, density, stagnation pressure and entropy across the normal shock – Prandtl-Meyer equation - impossibility of shock in subsonic flows - flow in convergent and divergent nozzle with shock - normal shock in Fanno and Rayleigh flows - flow with oblique shock (elementary treatment only). Shock waves advantage and disadvantage 6 Hours Unit IV Air Craft Propulsion Systems Aircraft propulsion – types of jet engines – energy flow through jet engines - study of turbojet engine components – diffuser, compressor, combustion chamber, turbine and exhaust systems - performance of turbo jet engines – thrust, thrust power, propulsive and overall efficiencies - thrust augmentation in turbo jet engine - ram jet and pulse jet engines. Modern aircraft propulsion systems9 Hours Unit V Rocket Propulsion Systems Rocket propulsion – Classification of rocket engines – Propellants: solid and liquid propellants, rocket engines thrust equation – effective jet velocity specific impulse – rocket engine performance - Flow through rocket nozzles – mass ratio and propellant mass fraction – Vertical flight of a rocket: powered flight and coasting flight – Rocket applications Rocket propulsion case studies8 Hours Total: 45+15 Hours Textbook 1.

P. Balachandran, Fundamental of Compressible Fluid Dynamics, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2009.


S. M. Yahya., Gas Tables for Compressible Flow, New Age International Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, S. M. Yahya., Fundamental of Compressible Flow, New Age International Pvt Ltd. New Delhi, E. Rathakrishnan, Gas Dynamics, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2008. Patrich.H. Oosthvizen, William E. Carscallen, Compressible fluid flow, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi,2004 Cohen. H., R. E. C Rogers and Sravanamutoo, Gas Turbine Theory, Addison Wesley Ltd.,

174


11M605 OPERATIONS RESEARCH 3 1 0 3.5 Objectives  

To understand the various techniques of optimization in utilization of resources, operations research techniques for industrial applications To Develop analytical skills for solving industrial and real world problems (Identify, Formulate and solve industrial Engineering Problems)


The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry- level placement in both Mechanical Engineering as well as IT companies i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to identify and develop operational research models from the verbal description of the real system.  Able to understand the mathematical tools that are needed to solve optimization problems.  Able to use mathematical software to solve the proposed models.  Able to develop a report that describes the model and the solving technique, analyze the results and propose recommendations in language understandable to the decision making processes in Management Engineering. ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No. 1 2 3 4 5


Test 1*

Test 2*

15 15 25 45 -100

15 15 25 45 -100



26

Remember 1. Define the term operations research. 2. What are the main characteristics of OR 3. Define feasible solution. 4. Name any two methods to solve artificial variable technique. 5. What do you mean by unbounded solution? 6. What do you mean by transportation problem? 7. List any three approaches used with T. P for determining the starting solution (or) IBFS. 8. Define a project. 9. Define a dummy activity. 10. What are the three common errors in the constructing of network? 11. What is meant by critical path? 26 *


175


12. Name the three types of float. 13. List out some basic characteristics of queuing system 14. What do you mean by FCFS? 15. Define sequencing. 16. Write down the formula used to find average weighted cost in replacement. 17. Give any two methods to solve the individual replacement. 18. Classify the replacement model. 19. The concept of obtaining a degenerate basic feasible solution in a LPP is known as ______.

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

State limitation of the Graphical method In what aspect the slack variable differs from surplus variable. How do you check the degeneracy in transportation? How do you solve the unbalanced assignment problem? Compare the transportation with assignment. Distinguish between PERT and CPM. When do you use dummy activity in the network? A waiting customer leaves the queue due to impatience is _________. How do you solve the three machine problem? Why the replacement is necessary? Mention some application areas of queuing model.

Apply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

How the OR technique is used in defense field? How do you evaluate the optimality in transportation? How do you convert the maximization A.P into a minimization one? State the application of travelling salesman problem. Which type of network model is applied in construction industry? Which type of queuing model is applied in petrol bunk?

Analyze/ Evaluate 1.

Select the appropriate optimization techniques for solving the transportation problem and justify it.

Unit I Linear Models Origin of Operations Research - The phases of O.R – Applications - Linear Programming: Formulation Graphical method - Simplex method – Artificial Variable techniques: Big M Method, two phase method. Dual simplex method – simple problems only- shadowing pricing 9 Hours Unit II Transportation and Assignment Model Transportation Problems: Optimal solution by North West corner method – VAM – Least cost method – MODI method. Assignment Problems: Formulation - Unbalanced Assignment Problem – Hungarian algorithm – Traveling Salesman Problem. Introduction to Inventory models - theory only 9 Hours

176


Unit III Network Models Network models - Shortest route - Minimal spanning tree - Maximum flow models - Project network CPM and PERT networks - Critical path scheduling Introduction to crashing- theory only 9 Hours Unit IV Queuing Theory Queuing models - Queuing systems and structures - Notation - parameter - Single Server and multi server models - Poisson input - Exponential service - Constant rate service - Infinite population. Introduction to game theory – theory only 9 Hours

Unit V Sequencing and Replacement Model Sequencing Problem: Models with n jobs with 2 machines – Models with n jobs with 3 machines. Replacement Models: Replacement of items that deteriorate with time – Value of money changing with time & not changing with time – Optimum replacement policy: Individual & Group replacement. Models with n jobs with n machines simple problems only 9 Hours Total: 45 + 15 Hours Textbook 1. Prem Kumar Gupta and D. S. Hira, Introduction to Operations Research, S.Chand and Co., New Delhi, 2004 References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Handy A. Taha, , Operation Research - An Introduction, Pearson Publications., New Delhi, 2008 R. Panneerselvam, Operations Research, Prentice Hall of India., New Delhi, 2010. S . Dharani Venkatakrishnan, Operations Research, Kirthi Publishing House (P) Ltd., Coimbatore 1991. Wagner, Operations Research, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2000. Frederick S. Hiller and Gerald J. Liberman, Operations Research –Concepts and Cases, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2010. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=112106134

177


11M607 COMPUTER AIDED MANUFACTURING LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5 Objectives   

To impart hands on training on CNC Machine tools To acquire practical knowledge through intensive practice on CNC Machines & related software To develop part programs for various components

Program Outcomes (POs) (c) The graduates will be able to learn various techniques available to make shapes and designs in various materials. Students will be understood the methodologies to be followed in casting, fabrication, machining, materials, metallurgy and forming of engineering materials. At the end of the course, students will be able to select and perform suitable method of producing a desirable component in industry. . (g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in both Mechanical Engineering as well as IT companies (j) The graduates can become job-givers rather than just job-seekers (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to develop program for CNC Lathe and Milling machines using cycles  Hands on experience in using CADEM and CAM Express software packages for tool path simulation and NC Code generation  Able to run a robot with basic programming skills. ASSESSMENT PATTERN Internal Assessment Preparation  Remember  Understand  Apply Observation and Results  Analyze  Evaluate Record Mini-Project/Model Examination/Viva-Voce Total


15

15

10

25

10

-

15

10

50

50

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

Define CNC programming Designate the CNC cutting tools. List the types of tool changers. What is meant by modal and non-modal codes? List the code with syntax used for feed rate in different unit system. Name the codes used for units setting in CNC program. Mention the M codes used for Spindle ON, OFF and START and STOP. What are the advantages of canned cycles? What is meant by peck drilling? List G codes used for setting feed rate. What is the use of Macro programming?

178


12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29.

What is use of dwell? Name the G code. Write syntax for end face peck drilling. What is the use of G73 cycle in CNC lathe programming? Write the syntax for G76 - taper threading cycle. What is meant by sub-routine? Name the M code used for coolant ON and OFF. Write M code meant for tool changing. Name the codes used for work clamping and unclamping. What is meant by single block execution? Depict the axis convention used in CNC lathe and Milling. Which G code helps for enabling absolute coordinate system? What are the benefits of using G 76 for internal threading? What is the use of offsetting a tool? Name the codes used for mirror imaging in CNC mill programming. What is machine zero and tool zero? List the advantages of using online programming. Define each word in the following block of information. N 20 G90 X1.5 Z -3 M03 List the different modes for verifying CNC program.

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33.

How to select speed for drilling different materials? How CNC machine works? How the tool changer works? Why CNC turning is preferred than conventional lathe? Differentiate turning centre and machining centre? How the tools are held in the CNC milling? Is G01 modal? How? How to activate metric units in CNC program? What is the need of cutter compensation? Differentiate absolute and incremental programming with example. How the right hand thread can be made? How the canned cycle works? How multiple threads are formed? Name the G code How macros are called inside the programming? Differentiate the uses of G00 and G28. How CNC mill cutter works on different planes? List the G Codes used. How circular interpolation is enabled? When to use sub routines? Differentiate offline programming and on-line programming. What is purpose of dry run with air cutting? Compare modal and non-modal code Why axis convention is required in CNC machines? How nose radius compensation is done? How cutter length compensation is done? How cutter compensation is done? Why simulation is necessary before actual manufacturing? How offsetting is done? Why canned cycles are preferred than single line programming? How to stop the CNC machine in case of emergency condition? List out the functions of part programming. What is the purpose of spindle encoder? Differentiate DNC and CNC. In which order the following functions are executed? Speed, Feed rate, Dwell, G code and M code 34. What is used of speed and feed override?

179


Apply/Evaluate 1.

Mention the applications of the following tools.

2.

Write the part program, simulate and fabricate the following components using XLTURN CNC Lathe.

180


3.

Write the part program, simulate and fabricate the following components using STAR MILL CNC Milling.

181


List of Experiments Exercise on linear and circular interpolation – CNC Lathe Exercise on facing and step turning Exercise on taper turning Exercise on thread cutting Exercise on grooving cycle Exercise on drilling and boring cycle Exercise on linear and circular interpolation – CNC Milling Exercise on contour milling Exercise on drilling Exercise on peck drilling Tool path simulation of various programs using anyone of CAM packages like CADEM/ProManufacturing/CATIA Software 12. Exercise on robot programming – Pick and place, Palletizing  Design experiment  Application oriented experiment Total: 45 Hours Practical Schedule 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

S.No.

Experiment

Hours

1

Study and Practice on CNC Tool setting and Work setting

3

2

Linear and circular interpolation – lathe and milling

3

3

Facing and step turning

3

4

Taper turning

3

5

Thread cutting

3

6

Grooving Cycle

1

7

Drilling and boring cycle

2

8

Contour milling

3

9

Drilling and Peck drilling using Milling

3

10

Tool path simulation using CAM packages

6

11

Robot Programming – Pick and Place, Palletizing

9

12

Application Design experiments and oriented experiments – Fabrication of lettering and logo

6

182


11M608 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICRO CONTROLLERS LABORATORY 2 0 2 3.0 Objectives   

To acquire basic knowledge about Microprocessors To study the Architectures of 8, 16, 32-bit Microprocessors To understand the concept of Assembly language and C language programming

Program Outcomes (POs) (a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. (e) The graduates develop skills to be effective members of a team. Course Outcomes (COs) 1. 2. 3.

Able to identify the various types of microprocessors. Enhancement of programming skills. Able to compute the assembly language programs.




10

15

25

25

5

-

10

10

50

50

Remember 1. Define microprocessor . 2. List out various addressing modes of 8085 and 8086 microprocessors. 3. Recall classifications of 8086 instruction set. 4. Name the different types of memories used in microprocessor and Cold Fire processors. 5. Recall registers organization of 8085. 6. Recall the number and names of various peripherals of 8086 microprocessor. 7. Define T state, machine cycle and instruction cycle. 8. What are the difference between Compiler and Interpreter? 9. Name the three buses of a microprocessor. 10. Recall the register organization of 8086. 11. Recall the pins on the chip 8085 which can be grouped into 6 groups. 12. Recall the pins of 8086. 13. List the various arithmetic instructions of 8085. 14. Name the assembly directives of 8086. 15. Define maskable and non maskable interrupts. 16. Name various condition and non conditional branch instructions. 17. Define interrupt. 18. Recall various constituents in Interrupt vector table.

183


Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

Explain the concepts of assembly language programming. Discuss the flags of 8085 and their utility. Distinguish memory mapped I/O devices and I/O mapped memory devices. Discuss the function of instruction queue in 8086. Explain the predefined interrupts of 8086. Discuss the conditional and unconditional flags of 8086 State the significance of LOCK signal in 8086. Explain Interrupt service routine of 8086. Distinguish addressing modes of 805 and 8086. Describe the process control instructions of microprocessor. Explain various pin attributes of 8085 Distinguish the POP and PUSH, Wait and Halt instructions. Explain ALIGN & ASSUME. Discuss the need of debugging in ALP. Discuss MACROS in 8086. Explain various pin attributes of 8086 Recognize the formation of physical address Differences between microprocessors and controllers.

Apply/Analyze/Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33.

Apply timing diagram to calculate the time required to execute MOV A, B. Use rotate instruction for multiplication operation. Illustrate the timing states of SIM and RIM instructions. Demonstrate the position SP after the pop instruction. Illustrate the 2 K memory construction with flip flops. Illustrate the block diagrams of microprocessors. Apply the read and write cycles to any given instruction. Illustrates various types of interrupts. Demonstrate I/O read and I/O write cylices for a given instruction Practice the conditional jump instructions of 8086. Use various addressing modes a write program for addition of two numbers. Multiply two given numbers without using MUL instruction. Demonstrate the utility of external memory in microprocessors. Illustrate various types of DMA transfer. Use the processor to convert hex code to decimal code. Illustrate the timing diagram for minimum and maximum modes of operation for 8086. Demonstrate the memory read and memory write cycles for a given instruction. Illustrate the timing diagram in minimum and maximum modes of operation. Distinguish Clock generation, Reset generation & synchronization, Test the wait state computation & generation, Ready synchronization. Inspect interfacing of RAM and EPROM memories. Distinguish the performance of 8085 and 8086 processors with respect to their instructions Analyze the Modes of I/O data transfer. Calculate the physical address from the segment address 6055H and offset address as 3000H. How do we select minimum versus maximum modes. Inspect PSW of 8085 and 8086. Analyze NEAR and FAR Call. Inspect the stack operations in 8086. Distinguish NOP and HALT instructions Inspect on rotate instruction. Analyze various types of interrupts in 8085. Distinguish between inter and intra segment jumps. Evaluate the contents of BX by 4 using shift instructions.

184


34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40.

Judge which arithmetic instruction should be used with carry. Compare the addressing modes of 8085 with 8086. Compare memory mapped and I/O mapped memories. Judge the contents of carry and Auxiliary carry flags when carry occurs. Assess the prerequisite for a conditional jump. Evaluate LIFO, LILO, FIFO and FILO Determine the memory address accessed by each of the following instructions in real mode operations, if DS = 1000H ,SS = 2000H, BP = 1000H and DI = 0100H. 41. Compare DMA and eDMA in ColdFire. Unit I 8085 CPU 8085 Architecture – Instruction set – Addressing modes – Timing diagrams – Assembly language programming – Counters – Time Delays – Interrupts – Memory interfacing – Interfacing, I/O devices 6 Hours Unit II Peripherals Interfacing Interfacing Serial I/O (8251)- parallel I/O (8255) –Keyboard and Display controller (8279) – ADC/DAC interfacing – Inter Integrated Circuits interfacing (I2C Standard)- Bus: RS232C-RS485-GPIB 6 Hours Unit III 8086 CPU Intel 8086 Internal Architecture – 8086 Addressing modes- Instruction set- 8086 Assembly language Programming–Interrupts. 6 Hours Unit IV 8051 Microcontroller 8051 Micro Controller Hardware- I/O Pins, Ports And Circuits- External Memory –Counters And TimersSerial Data I/O- Interrupts-Interfacing to External Memory And 8255. 6 Hours Unit V 8051 Programming and Applications 8051 Instruction Set – Addressing Modes – Assembly Language Programming – I/O Port Programming Timer And Counter Programming – Serial Communication – Interrupt Programming –8051 Interfacing: Lcd, Adc, Sensors, Stepper Motors, Keyboard And Dac. 6 Hours Textbooks 1. 2. 3.

Ramesh S. Gaonkar, Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and application with 8085, Penram International Publishing, New Delhi, 2000. John Uffenbeck, The 80x86 Family, Design, Programming and Interfacing, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2002. Mohammed Ali Mazidi and Janice Gillispie Mazidi, The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi, 2003.

References 1. 2. 3.

A. K. Ray and K. M. Burchandi, Intel Microprocessors Architecture Programming and Interfacing, McGraw Hill International Edition, New Delhi ,2000 Kenneth J. Ayala, The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture Programming and Application, Penram International Publishers (India), New Delhi, 1996. M. Rafi Quazzaman, Microprocessors Theory and Applications, Intel and Motorola, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003.

185


List of Experiments 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

Programs for 8/16 bit Arithmetic operations (Using 8085). Programs for Sorting and Searching (Using 8085, 8086). Programs for String manipulation operations (Using 8086). Programs for Digital clock and Stop watch (Using 8086). Interfacing ADC and DAC. Parallel Communication between two MP Kits using Mode 1 and Mode 2 of 8255. Interfacing and Programming 8279, 8259, and 8253. Serial Communication between two MP Kits using 8251. Interfacing and Programming of Stepper Motor and DC Motor Speed control. Programming using Arithmetic, Logical and Bit Manipulation instructions of 8051microcontroller. Programming and verifying Timer, Interrupts and UART operations in 8031 microcontroller. Communication between 8051 Microcontroller kit and PC.  Design oriented experiment  Application oriented experiment Total: 30 + 30 Hours Practical Schedule Sl. No. 1

Experiment

Hours

Programs for 8/16 bit Arithmetic operations (Using 8085).

3

2

Programs for Sorting and Searching (Using 8085, 8086).

3

3

Programs for String manipulation operations (Using 8086).

3

4

Programs for Digital clock and Stop watch (Using 8086).

3

5

Interfacing ADC and DAC. Parallel Communication between two MP Kits using Mode 1 and Mode 2 of 8255. Interfacing and Programming 8279, 8259, and 8253.

3

Serial Communication between two MP Kits using 8251. Interfacing and Programming of Stepper Motor and DC Motor Speed control. Programming using Arithmetic, Logical and Bit Manipulation instructions of 8051microcontroller. Programming and verifying Timer, Interrupts and UART operations in 8031 microcontroller.

3

12

Communication between 8051 Microcontroller kit and PC.

3

13

Design oriented experiment

6

14


6 7 8 9 10 11

3 3

3 3 3

6 Total

45

186


011O701 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS (Common to all branches) 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives  

To understand the basics of Micro and Macro Economics To understand the methods by which Demand Forecasting, Cost Analysis, Pricing and Financial Accounting are done in the Industry

Program Outcomes (POs) a.

The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. The graduates will be able to acquire the knowledge, capability of analyzing and solving any concept or problem associated with heat energy dynamics and utilization. Students will be able to understand the working concepts of thermal engineering. Graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in the industry. The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices.

b.

g. i. k.


Able to understand the terminology used in engineering economic analysis. Able to understand time-value-of-money concepts such as net present worth analysis, equivalent uniform annual worth analysis, benefit/cost analysis, internal rate of return analysis, loans, leveraging, and fixed-income investment analysis. Able to understand the criteria for making economic-based decisions.



Test I27

Test II1

20 30 30 20 100

20 30 30 20 100

Model Examination1 20 30 30 20 100


28

Remember 1. Define Economics 2. Define Managerial Economics 3. What are the branches of Economics? 4. What are the two methodologies used for Investigation in Economics? 5. Name the other disciplines which are linked to Managerial Economics. 6. List the theories that explain the basic objectives of a firm. 7. What are the basic concepts in Decision making?

28 *


187


8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44.

What are the types of decisions a manager is expected to make? What are the techniques used in the process of decision making? What is opportunity cost? What is Demand? What are the types of Demand? What are the variations in the nature of Demand? State the law of Demand. What are the factors determining Demand? Define Elasticity of Demand. State the different degrees of elasticity of Demand? What are the factors determining Elasticity of Demand? State the Law Of Diminishing Marginal Utility. What is Consumer Equilibrium? List the factors effecting Demand Forecasting. What methods will you use for forecasting demand for a new product? Define Cost. What is a semi variable cost. What are fixed costs? Define Short Run and Long Run costs. Define Optimum Size of a Firm. Define Replacement Cost and Historic Cost. What is a Monopoly? What is an Oligopoly? What is Price Discrimination? What are the reasons for Price Discrimination? What are the advantages of Price Discrimination? Define Oligopoly in terms of market share. Name the two types of Oligopoly. What are the objectives of Pricing? What are the two basic methods of Pricing? What is Market Skimming? What is sealed bid pricing? Define Accounting. What are the uses of accounting? What is a Balance Sheet? Definitions of key words used in Financial Statements. What is inflation?

Understand 1. Explain the nature and scope of Economics. 2. Differentiate between Macro and Micro economics 3. List and explain the focus areas of Managerial economics. 4. Give reasons why Mangers aim to Maximize Sales even at the cost of a lower profit. 5. Explain the steps in the decision making process. 6. Differentiate between Mechanistic and Analytical Decision making with xamples. 7. Explain Giffens Paradox. 8. Explain with examples, exceptions to the Law of Demand. 9. Explain the nature of Demand. 10. Differentiate between Extension and Increase in Demand. 11. What is the significance of Elasticity of Demand? 12. Differentiate between Point and Arc Elasticity of Demand. 13. What are the assumptions made when talking about the Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility? 14. Explain the characteristics of the Indifference Curve with examples. 15. Explain the concepts of consumer’s equilibrium and consumers’ surplus with examples. 16. Can Demand Forecasting principles be applied to Services? Substantiate your answer with an example. 17. What is the difference between Accounting Cost and Economic Cost? Explain with an example.

188


18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37.

Match the following type of question between Cost Concepts and their Basis of Distinction Why is a study of Cost-Output Relationship necessary for a good Manager? How is Incremental cost different from Sunk Cost? Differentiate between Monopoly and Monopolistic Competition. Explain the concept of a Perfect Market and its features. Explain Total Revenue, Average Revenue and Marginal Revenue. Distinguish between Cost and Price. Explain with an appropriate diagram, the mechanism of pricing in a Perfectly Competitive Market. Explain the role of Time in price determination. Under what conditions can a firm charge different prices for the same products? What are the characteristic features of an oligopoly industry ? What causes Oligopoly? Why does a firm need to have a Pricing Policy? Explain the types and features of Cost Based Pricing. Explain the types and features of Demand Based Pricing. Explain the types and features of Strategy Based Pricing. Under what conditions does a company go in for Cross Subsidization pricing? Explain the Business Entity concept. What are the advantages of Double-entry Book-keeping? What is the role of the Central bank in controlling inflation?

Apply 1. Compare the merits and demerits of the Deductive Method and the Inductive Method of Investigation. 2. Explain decisions based on the degree of certainty of the outcome with examples. 3. Problems involving Marginal and Incremental Costs. 4. Problems concerning Elasticity of Demand. 5. Problems using statistical methods for Demand Forecasting. 6. Problem – Calculate and plot Average Variable Cost, Average Total Cost, and Marginal Cost and find the optimal production volume. 7. Give examples of products falling under the various kinds of Competition, and the reasons they are able to survive in the market. 8. Give six examples of products that fall under Monopolistic Competitive pricing. 9. Give six examples of products that fall under Oligopolistic pricing. 10. Pick any six Consumer Items and based on your knowledge of the markets, explain the pricing method that you think is most likely to have been followed for each of these items. 11. Compare the types of information that one can derive from a Balance Sheet and a P&L Statement. Analyze/Evaluate 1. “The per-capita income of farmers in the country has to be raised by 20% this year to prevent their migration to cities”. Analyze this statement from the point of view of Positive and Normative Economics. 2. Decision making improves with age and experience. Discuss. 3. Do a survey of the automotive (only cars) industry and analyze the reasons and timing for discounts offered from the point of view of elasticity of demand. 4. What are the methods you would adopt to forecast demand for an industrial product? Assuming that the actual demand versus forecast is very high, what would the most likely reason be for failure of the forecast? 5. “Most of the cost concepts are overlapping and repetitive”. Yes or No? Substantiate your answer with reasons. 6. How would you modify a sealed bid pricing system to take care of different technical approaches by different bidders for a project for which bids are called for, given that the cost varies depending on the technical approach? 7. What are the steps you would take to control inflation?

189


Unit I Introduction Introduction to Economics, Kinds of Economic Systems, Production Possibility Frontier, Opportunity Cost, Objective of Organizations, Kinds of Organizations, Business Decision Making, Legal rights and responsibilities of types of Organizations. 8 Hours Unit II Demand and Supply Functions of Demand & Supply, Law of Demand and Supply, Elasticity of Demand, Demand Forecasting Methods, Price Equilibrium. Role of logistics in managing supply and demand. 8 Hours Unit III Production and Cost Production Function, Returns to Scale, Economies & Diseconomies of scale, Fixed Cost, Variable Cost, Average Costs, Cost Curves, Break Even point, Law of diminishing Marginal Utility. Costing of a product during the stages of its life cycle 10 Hours Unit IV Pricing & Market Structure Components of Pricing, Methods of Pricing, Return on Investment, Payback Period, Market Structure and Pricing, Perfect Competition, Monopoly, Oligopoly, Monopolistic, Non price competition, E-commerce. The secure payment process in e-commerce. 12 Hours Unit V Introduction to Macro Economics & Financial Accounting, National Income – GDP, Per Capita Income, Inflation, Stagflation, Deflation, Business Cycle, Stabilization Policies, Direct Taxes, Indirect Taxes, Balance of Payment. Accounting - Terminology, Book Keeping, P&L, Balance Sheet. Role of Central Excise and Customs 12 Hours Total: 50 Hours Textbook 1.

A. Ramachandra Aryasri and V V Ramana Murthy, Engineering Economics and Financial Accounting, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2006.

References 1. 2. 3.

V. L. Samuel Paul and G S Gupta Managerial Economics – Concepts and Cases Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited , New Delhi, 1981. S N Maheswari, Financial and Management Accounting, Sultan Chand. R Kesavan, C Elanchezhian and T Sunder Selwyn, Engineering Economics and Financial Accounting Laxmi Publication (P) Ltd , New Delhi, 2005.

190


11M702 MECHATRONICS 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives    

To provide a basic background to mechatronics and link to more specialized skills To develop the mix of skills in mechanical engineering, electronics and computing To familiarize about sensors and control system used in mechatronics To develop confidence and competence in designing mechatronics systems

Program Outcomes (POs) (g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in both Mechanical Engineering as well as IT companies. (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. Course Outcomes (COs) 1. Able to understand the working principles of various sensors 2. Able to get clarifications of different actuations systems 3. Able to know how to use controllers and PLC ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No. 1 2 3 4 5


Test 1*

Test 2*

Model Examination*


35 35 30 100

30 40 30 100

30 40 30 100

30 40 30 100

29

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 29 *

What are the basic elements of a measurement system? Define sensor. Define the terms accuracy & precision. What is hysteresis? State the dynamic characteristics of simplified measuring system. Define mechatronics. What is meant by cylinder sequencing? List the factors to be considered when selecting the belt drives. What is MOSFET? State the objectives of DCVs. What are the factors to be considered for selecting solenoids? What is the purpose of Air receiver? What are the types of field effect transistor? List down the features of JFET.


191


15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31.

State the function of Bipolar Transistor. List down the features of synchronous motor. What is a stepper motor? What is meant by adaptive control? What is damper? Define electromechanical system. Define thermal capacitance. What is meant by program scan? List down the different types of timers? What are shift registers? State two methods of Input / Output processing. List down PLC programming methods. What are counters? What is a Latch circuit? What are the factors to be considered for selecting PLC? Where the shift registers are used? What is an engine management? List out the various sensors involved in engine management system? 32. What are the uses of sensors? List the various sensors contained in automatic camera? 33. What are the various movements of robots? 34. Mention the stages in designing a mechatronic system. Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.

State the difference between primary and secondary transducer. How the mechatronics used in industries? State, in general, the principle of operation of transducers and highlight their difference with sensors. Distinguish between accuracy and sensitivity of a transducer. Compare the touch & proximity sensor. Discuss how velocity is measured by using electromagnetic transducers. Differentiate inductive sensors and capacitive sensors. What are the configurations in operating stepper mo tor? Why sequential valves are necessary in pneumatic system? Distinguish between pressure relief valve and pressure reducing valve. Where the timing belts are used? How do you compare the operation of brushless DC motor with the operation of a stepper motor? Why brushless D.C motor has been designed? What is the difference between field- controlled and armature-controlled motors? Why differential controllers are combined with other modes of controllers for practical application? Differentiate between DIAC and TRIAC. Why derivative controller is never used alone? Compare the PLC and a general-purpose computer. Distinguish between traditional design approach and mechatronics approach. How does a simple weighing scale work using traditional mechanical system? How a traditional design of temperature control of domestic central heating system is improved by mechatronic design?

Apply / Evaluate 1. 2.

Identify and explain the various elements that might be present in a control system involving a thermostatically controlled electric heater. Compare and contrast the control system for the domestic central heating system involving a bimetallic thermostat and that involving a microprocessor.

192


3.

4.

5. 6. 7. 8.

9.

You are offered a choice of an incremental shaft encoder or an absolute shaft encoder for the measurement of an angular displacement. What is the principal difference between the results that can be obtained by these methods? Suggest a sensor that could be used, as part of a control system, to determine the difference in levels between liquids in two containers. The output is to provide an electrical signal for the control system. Derive differential equations for a permanent magnet d.c. motor. Derive an expression for a Hydraulic – mechanical systems. Devise a timing circuit that will switch an output ON for 1 s then OFF for 20 s, then ON for 1 s, then OFF for 20 s and so on. Device a circuit by using Ladder logic format and Mnemonics that could be used with a domestic Washing machine to switch on pump to pump water for 100sec into the machine, then switch off and switch on the heater for 50sec to heat the water. The heater is then switched off and another pump is to empty the water from the machine for 100sec. Case studies – o Engine Management System o Automatic Camera o Automatic Car park system

Unit I Mechatronics, Sensors and Transducers Introduction to Mechatronics Systems – Measurement Monitoring Systems Automation – Control Systems – Microprocessor based Controllers. Sensors and Transducers – Performance Terminology – Sensors for Displacement, Position and Proximity; Velocity, Motion, Force, Fluid Pressure, Liquid Flow, Liquid Level, Temperature, Light Sensors – Selection of Sensors. Smart sensors 9 Hours Unit II Actuation Systems Pneumatic and Hydraulic Systems – Directional Control Valves – Rotary Actuators. Mechanical Actuation Systems – Cams – Gear Trains – Ratchet and pawl – Belt and Chain Drives – Bearings. Electrical Actuation Systems – Mechanical Switches – Solid State Switches – Solenoids – D.C Motors – A.C Motors – Stepper Motors – Servomotors. Hybrid motor 9 Hours Unit III System Models and Controllers Building blocks of Mechanical, Electrical, Fluid and Thermal Systems, Rotational – Translational Systems, Electromechanical Systems – Hydraulic – Mechanical Systems. Continuous and discrete process Controllers – Control Mode – Two – Step mode – Proportional Mode – Derivative Mode – Integral Mode – PID Controllers – Digital Controllers – Velocity Control – Adaptive Control – Digital Logic Control – Micro Processors Control. Advanced Controllers. 9 Hours Unit IV Programmable Logic Controllers Programmable Logic Controllers – Basic Structure – Input / Output Processing – Programming – Mnemonics – Timers, Internal relays and counters – Shift Registers – Master and Jump Controls – Data Handling – Analogue Input / Output – Selection of PLC. PLC in Mechatronics. 9 Hours

193


Unit V Design of Mechatronics System Stages in designing Mechatronics Systems – Traditional and Mechatronic Design - Possible Design Solutions Case Studies of Mechatronics Systems, Automatic washing Machine – Automatic Camera - Pick and place robot – Automatic Car Park Systems – Engine Management Systems. Fault finding 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1.

W. Bolton, Mechatronics: Electronic control systems in Mechanical and Electrical Engineering, Pearson Education, New Delhi,2008.

References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

David G. Alciature and Michael B. Histand, Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement Systems, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi,2007. Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik, Mechatronics : Principles, Concepts and Applications, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi,2008 M. D. Singh, and J. G. Joshi, Mechatronics, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,2009. K. P. Ramachandran, G. K. Vijayaraghavan, and M. S. Bala-Sundram, Mechatronics : Integrated Mechanical Electronic Systems, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.,New Delhi 2008. Newton C. Braga, Mechatronic Source Book, Delmar Cengage Learning, 2009. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/112103174/

194


11M703 FINITE ELEMENT METHODS 3 1 0 3.5 Objectives 

To impart basic knowledge in the area of finite element method focusing on design of mechanical components To make one to ensure the design by FEM is correct and can go for real time testing



Program Outcomes (POs) (d) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of engineering design. Understanding the concept generation, design optimization and evaluation. Knowing the fundamentals of intellectual property rights. Students will be able to effectively design various engineering components and make process plan for the production. (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes (COs)  Students will learn the mathematical formulation of the finite element method and how to apply it to basic (linear) ordinary and partial differential equations.  Students will also learn how to implement the finite element method efficiently in order to solve a particular equation.  Students will understand the mathematical and physical principles underlying the FEM as applied to solid mechanics and thermal analysis. ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No. 1 2 3 4 5


Test 1*

Test 2*

Model Examination*



30 30 30 10 100

20 30 30 20 100

20 20 40 20 100

20 20 40 20 100

Remember 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74.

What is the basic concept of finite element method? List the applications of FEM. What are the types of analysis that can be performed in fem? What is weighted residual method? What are the different types of boundary conditions? What is an Eigen value problem? What are the methods for solving equilibrium problem? What are the types of analysis that can be performed in FEM? State the principle of minimum potential energy. What is meant by Discretisation of the domain? What are the properties of stiffness matrix? What are the methods for solving propagation problem? What are the three major categories of problem in FEM? What is natural coordinate system? What is global Coordinate system?

195


_______________________________________________________________________________ * The marks secured Test I and Test II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks. 75. 76. 77. 78. 79. 80. 81. 82. 83. 84. 85. 86. 87. 88. 89. 90. 91. 92. 93. 94. 95. 96. 97. 98. 99.

What is local Coordinate system? What are the advantages of natural Coordinate system What is aspect ratio? Draw one 2 –D element and one 3-D element and name it. What is stiffness matrix? Define CST element with diagram. Define LST element with diagram. What is a truss element? Define beam element, What is meant by plane stress? What is meant by plane strain? What is field variable? Define simplex element. What is meant by Multiplex elements? What are the advantages of polynomial type of interpolation function? Write down the finite element equation for one dimensional heat conduction. What are the three convergence requirement that is to be satisfied for attaining an exact solution? What are higher order elements? Define “serendipity element”. Write down the finite element equation for two dimensional heat transfer problem. Write down the finite element equation for one dimensional heat conduction. Define shape function. What are the types of error in FEA? What are the types of mesh refinement? What are the types of non linearity?

Understand 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41.

Name any 4 commercial FEA packages What is meant by CAD and CAE? What is the difference between Propagation and Steady state problem? Compare FEM with other methods Differentiate between static and dynamic analysis How do you make a node numbering scheme for a fem model? What do you understand by element connectivity? How do you built a finite element model? Differentiate Beam element and Truss element Differentiate between plane stress and plane strain? Differentiate between Multiplex and Complex element. For what the Numerical integration is used in FEM? Is beam element an isoparametric element? Give reason for your answer. Differentiate between Sub and Super parametric element with diagram. How will you select the order of the polynomial How will you draw a Pascal’s triangle and tetrahedron for arranging 2-D and 3-D polynomial Function. 42. Differentiate h-method and p-method of mesh refinement? 43. In Steady state and Propagation there exist ______solution but in Eigen value problem there is no _________ solution. 44. If the interpolation polynomial is of the order two or more the element is known as a____________________element

196


Apply/Evaluate 1. 2.

Elucidate the step by step procedure for solving a static structural problem in FEM for the axially loaded stepped bar. Find the approximate deflection of a simply supported beam under a uniformly distributed load p as shown below using Rayleigh-Ritz method.

p per unit length

x

l

5.

When you will apply the Pascal’s triangle and tetrahedron and for what? In a CST element the nodal coordinates are given by (1,1) (4,1) and (1,4), the temperature distribution has been computed as T1 is 100°C, T2 is 60°C and T3 is 50°C respectively. Calculate the temperature at a point P. Whose coordinates are given by (2,3). Calculate the displacement at a point P. whose co-ordinates are given by (2,3), if the nodal displacement of a triangular element are given by Ui = 3mm Uj = 4mm Uk = 2mm Vi = 2mm Vj = 3mm Vk = 4mm and the nodal co-ordinates are given by (1,1) (4,1) and (1,5)

6.

Calculate the element stresses and strain for the element shown below

3. 4.

(15,10)

(15,5)

(10,7.5)

The nodal displacements are U1 = 2.0mm, V 1 = 1.0mm, U2 =0.5mm, V2 = 0.0mm, U3 = 3.0mm, V3 = 1.0mm. Take E = 2.1 x105 N/mm2 and  = 0.25. Assume plane stress condition 7.

Find the shape function at a point P (6,9) located inside a triangular element and its coordinates are x1 = 4mm, y1 = 8mm, x2 =10mm, y2 = 5mm, x3 = 8mm, y3 = 12mm.

197


Analyze/Evaluate 1.

Find the stresses distribution in the tapered bar shown in fig. below using two finite element under an axial load of P=10N.Cross section areas at root = 200mm2, at the end = 100mm2 and Young’s modulus E = 2x105 N/mm2.

2.

For the two bar truss shown in fig. below determine the displacement at node 1 and stress in element 2. Take A= 200mm2E = 70x 103 N/mm2

3.

Find the temperature distribution in the stepped fin shown in fig. below using two finite element.

4.

Evaluate the integral I = ∫ (2+x+x2 ) dx and compare with exact solution.

1 -1

198


Unit I Introduction-Calculus of Variations Basic concepts of Finite Element Method (FEM) - step by step procedure. Stresses and equilibrium – boundary conditions. strain Vs displacement relations – potential energy and equilibrium - general procedure of FEM-solution of equilibrium problems- Gaussian elimination method- Rayleigh Ritz methodGalerkin method. FEA applications Comparison of FEM with finite difference method and finite volume method 9 Hours Unit II One-Dimensional Problems Discretisation of domain-element shapes, types, size, location & numbers. Coordinate types, 1 –D bar element - shape function using natural coordinates and generalized coordinates, stiffness matrix of a 1-D bar element, finite element formulation of stiffness matrix, load vector and assembly of global equations – example problems. Stiffness matrix and finite element equation for a two noded Truss element – example problems. Types of Non linearity 9Hours Unit III Two-Dimensional Problems Finite element modeling – shape function for the Constant Strain Triangular element using natural coordinates and generalized coordinates , strain displacement matrix of CST element, stress- strain relationship matrix for 2-D element under plane stress and plane strain condition – example problems. Linear Strain Triangular and Quadratic Strain Triangular elements. 9 Hours Unit IV Heat Transfer Basic equations of heat transfer - Shape function of 1-D heat conduction, stiffness matrix for 1-D heat conduction, with free end convection, with internal heat generation- assembly of global equations and load vector, Finite element formulation-Example problems. Higher order elements. Selection of the order of the polynomial, Convergence requirements, Linear, simplex, complex, Multiplex Serendipity and Degenerate element 9 Hours Unit V Isoparametric Element Formulation Errors in FEA, Mesh refinement methods, Iso , Sub & Super parametric element, shape functions for a 2-D four noded and eight noded Isoparametric rectangular element using natural coordinate system – example problems- Gaussian quadrature – example problems. Grid sensitivity test 9 Hours Total 45 + 15 Hours Textbook 1. Chennakesava R. Alavala “Finite Element Methods: Basic Concepts and Applications”, Prentice Hall of India Learning, New Delhi,2008 References 1. S. S. Rao, Finite Element Method in Engineering, Elsevier India, 2005 2. David V. Hutton, Fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi,2005. 3. Robert D. Cook, s. David , Malkucs Michael E. Plesha, Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis, Wiley, New Delhi,2007. 4. T. R. Chandrupatla and A. D. Belegundu, Introduction to Finite Elements Engineering, Pearson Education, New Delhi,2002, 5. S. S. Bhavikati, Finite Element Analysis, New Age International Publishers, 2005 6. http://nptel.dce.edu/section/ME/fem.php

199


11M704 POWER PLANT ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives   

To expose the fundamental power generation principles To use this principle for the engineering applications of power generation To integrate the basic concepts into various thermal applications like gas turbines, boilers, steam turbines, diesel engines, nuclear, hydel power plant and other power plant applications

Program Outcome (POs) (b) The graduates will be able to acquire the knowledge, capability of analyzing and solving any concept or problem associated with heat energy dynamics and utilization. Students will be able to understand the working concepts of thermal engineering. Course Outcomes (COs)   

Able to familiar with power plant systems, terms and definitions and basic power plant engineering design calculations Familiar with the proper design and application of power plant related equipment Able to prepare and present topical issues relevant to power plant design and operations



Test I*

Test II*

35 35 30 100

35 35 30 100

Model Examinations* 35 35 30 100


30

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 30 *

List out the factors to be considered in the selection of power plant. What is meant by super critical boilers? Mention the advantages of modern high pressure boilers. State the advantages of regenerative feed heating in steam power cycle. What is meant by run- off river plant? What is the function of surge tank and draft tube in hydroelectric power plant? Mention the application for diesel engine power plant. What are the factors to be considered for the selection of diesel engine? Name some of the mills used for pulverizing the fuel. Mention the different types of burners used to burn pulverized fuel. State the pollution caused by the power plant. Name the different types of cooling towers available State the advantages of pulverized fuel firing system Mention the different firing system available Name the various methods of ash handling.


200


16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26.

Name the various draught systems What is the cause of smoke? Name the different types of chimney used. Define the term demand factor and diversity factor. What is meant by power plant economics? What are the fixed and operating costs? Define - nuclear chain reaction. Name some of the fissionable and fertile materials. State the functions of control rod, moderator, coolant and reflector. Mention the application of MHD power plant. Mention some of the shielding material for reactors. What is meant by nuclear binding energy?

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

Compare the diesel engine power plant with steam power plant. Compare base load plant and peak load plant. Compare the gas turbine power plant with steam power plant. Compare the performance of the combined cycle operation with the other cycles. Compare the forced draught fan and induced draught fan. Differentiate hand firing and mechanized firing of fuel. Compare the performance of bag house collector and cyclone separator. Name the methods used for calculating the depreciation of the power plant. Compare the Nuclear fission and nuclear fusion process. Explain load factor, load curve, load duration curve. Describe plant capacity factor, utilization factor. What do mean by connected load and maximum demand? How the reactors are classified? Compare the advantages of pressurized water reactor with boiling water reactor. Classify the different types of MHD.

Apply 14. A base load plant power station and standby power station share a common load as follows: Base load station annual output = 200 x 103 MWh Base load station capacity = 48MW Maximum demand on basew load station =45 MW Standby station capacity = 25MW Standby station annual output = 200 x 103MWh Maximum demand on standby station = 15MW Determine the following for the both power stations: a) Load factor, b) Capacity factor. 15. The peak load on a thermal power plant is 75MW. The loads having maximum demands of 35MW, 20MW, 15MW and 18MW are connected to the power plant. The capacity of the power plant is 90MW and the annual load factor is 0.53. Calculate a) The average load on the power plant b) The energy supplied per year c) The demand factor d) The diversity factor. 16. It is required to supply a load with a maximum demand of 500MW and load factor of 0.74. Choice is to be made from a steam power plant, a nuclear power plant and hydro electric power plant. Calculate the overall cost per kWh in case of each scheme given below :

201


S.No

Cost

1 2 3 4 5

Capital cost / MW installed Interest Depreciation Operating cost / kWh Transmission & Distribution cost / kWh

Steam power plant

Nuclear power plant

Hydro electric power plant

Rs 3.8 crore 5% 6% 50paise

Rs 5.2crore 6% 4% 30paise

6 crore 5% 5% 15paise

2paise

2.5paise

4paise

Unit I Introduction to Power Plants and Boilers Layout of Steam, Components, Selection - Steam Boilers and Cycles – High Pressure and Super Critical Boilers – Fluidized Bed Boilers. Combined Power Cycles - Load Duration Curves – Comparison and Selection. Efficiency calculation methods for Boilers 9 Hours Unit II Steam Power Plant Fuel and Ash Handling, Combustion Equipment for burning coal, Mechanical Stokers, Pulveriser, Electrostatic Precipitator, Mechanical Collectors, Draught – different types, Surface Condenser Types, Cooling Towers, Pollution controls Pollution control Methods 9 Hours Unit III Nuclear and Hydel Power Plants Nuclear Energy – Fission, Fusion Reaction, Layout - Types of Reactors, pressurized water reactor, Boiling Water Reactor, Waste Disposal and safety. Hydel Power Plant – Layout - Essential Elements, pumped storage - Selection of Turbines, Governing of Turbines Micro Hydel developments. 9 Hours Unit IV Diesel and Gas Turbine Power Plants Layout and types of Diesel Plant, Components, Selection of Engine Type, applications. Gas Turbine Power Plant – Layout - Fuels - Gas Turbine Material – Open and Closed Cycles – Reheating – Regeneration and Intercooling– Combined Cycle. 9 Hours Unit V Other Power Plants and Economics of Power Plants Geo thermal – OTEC – Tidal - Solar thermal –Wind energy - Wind turbines- MHD Plants. Cost of Electric Energy – Fixed and operating Costs – Economics of load sharing, comparison of economics of various power plants 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours

202


Textbook 1.

S. C. Arora and S. Domkundwar, A course in Power Plant Engineering, Dhanpatrai & Sons, New Delhi, 2008.

References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

M. M. EI-Wakil, Power Plant Technology, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi,1985. P. K. Nag, Power plant Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi,2007. G. R. Nagpal, Power Plant Engineering, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,2002. G. D. Rai, Introduction to Power Plant Technology, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,1995. R. K. Rajput, Power Plant Engineering, Laxmi Publications, New Delhi,1995. http://textofvideo.nptel.iitm.ac.in/1121/lec10.pdf

203


11M707 COMPUTER AIDED ENGINEERING LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5 Objectives  

To understand the types of element used, type of analysis done, interpretation of results, method of solving and analyzing a given problem To have better knowledge in finite element analysis software , applied to structural and heat transfer components at various loading conditions

Program Outcomes (POs) (d) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of engineering design. Understanding the concept generation, design optimization and evaluation. Knowing the fundamentals of intellectual property rights. Students will be able to effectively design various engineering components and make process plan for the production. (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes (COs)    

Students will be able to model, mesh and analyze mechanical components using ANSYS An understanding of the finite element analysis (FEA) The ability of using ANSYS to perform structural and thermal analyses Improved ability to define and solve an engineering problem individually as well as in a team setting

ASSESSMENT PATTERN

Preparation Remember Understand Apply  

Observation and Results Analyze Evaluate Record Mini-Project/Model Examination/Viva-Voce Total

Internal Assessment


10

15

15

20

10

-

15

15

50

50

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

What are the types of co-ordinate systems in 2 dimension drawing? What are the types of co-ordinate systems in 3 D / GUI / goemetric modeling? What are the types of goemetric modeling? Name any five 2D packages. Name any ten 3D packages. Name any ten CAM packages. Name any ten finite element analysis packages. What is 2 ½ D?

204


9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64.

What are the types of non linearity? What are three general modules of FEA software? What are the methods of analysis? What is an exact solution? What is an approximate solution? What is meant by discretisation? What is plane stress? What is plane strain? What is meant by CAD and CAE? What is aspect ratio? What is stiffness matrix? What is an axisymmetric problem? What is bottom up modeling? What is top down modeling? What is structural analysis? What is thermal analysis? What is node? What is an element? What is general post processor? What is nodal solution? What is pre processor? What is pro processor? What type of options we use in preferences? What is h-method and p-method of mesh refinement? What is DOF? What is steady state analysis? What is unsteady state analysis? What are the types of Thermal analysis? What are the types of structural analysis? What are the types of elements used in ANSYS? What are the types of loads? What is truss? What are the theories of failure? What is von mises stress? What is material non linearity? What is geometric non linearity? What is boundary non linearity? What are the types of coupled field analysis? What are the types of meshing involved in ANSYS? Name any three thermal elements in ANSYS? What is transient thermal analysis? Define modal analysis. APDL is an acronym for _______________________ What is a quadratic element? What is a real constant? Expand CFD. Name few applications of FEA. What is an element solution? What are higher order elements? Define beam element? Define Truss element? What is r- refinement method? What are the numerical errors? Name them? Define band width? What is load step in ANSYS? What are the steps involved in pre processor?

205


65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74.

What are the steps involved in pro processor or solution? What are the steps involved in post processor? What all are the ways that a result can be plotted? What is various symmetry encountered in practice? Name the solver methods used in ANSYS to solve non linear problem. What is error estimation? What are basic primitives? Name any ten. What is meant by screen coordinate system? Nonlinear structural behavior arises from a number of causes, name them. In What way Boolean operations are useful.

Understand 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31.

What is the difference between FDM and FEM? How do you identify data loss in ANSYS? Differentiate between material and geometric non-linearity. Why the grid sensitivity test is made in FEA? When you will go for coupled field analysis? What is the difference between animation and modeling? What is the difference between structural analysis & thermal analysis? What is the difference between node & element? Differentiate between h-method and p-method of mesh refinement? What is the difference between static and dynamic analysis? What is the difference between global/ world/ model coordinate system and working/user coordinate system? How to apply loads in thermal analysis? How to apply loads in structural analysis? How to create a node? How to create an element? Is it possible to apply load on key point and solve? How will you print the ansys display? How will you decide on which element to be meshed in ANSYS? How do you animate a result and capture it? How will you decide on the solution you obtain is right?

Apply / Analyze / Evaluate 1.

Determine the maximum deformation that occur when a truss is loaded as shown below. The truss is fully constrained at the one end; while the other end is constrained in y-direction. Load of 150 N act at each point as shown in sketch. The truss is made of A36 steel with a Young’s modulus of 2e5 and Poisson’s ratio of 0.33. Take section of the link as 10 x 30 mm.

206


2.

Determine the maximum deformation, shear force and bending moment that occur when a simply supported beam of 100 x 5 x 5 mm is used. The beam with a point load of 100N is acting downward at mid point of the span. Take Young’s modulus as 2E5 N/ mm2 and Poisson’s ratio as 0.3. Determine the mode shapes and frequencies of a steel fixed beam of circular section having 100 x 8 mm. Take Young’s modulus as 183 GPa Poisson’s ratio as 0.25 and density of 7750 kg/m3 Using ANSYS find out the temperature distribution of a rectangular fin when the heat transfer is steady and convective. The fin size is 10 x 2 x 1 m. A temperature of 500 0 C is admitted on the left side of the fin, while the remaining three sides are subject to convection with film coefficient of 10 W/m 2 0C at 800C and the conductivity of the fin material is 80 W/m 0C

3. 4.

5.

Find out the maximum deformation that occurs in a pressure vessel with a thickness of 25mm as shown below. The vessel is subjected to a pressure of 20 bar at the inner side of the walls. Take Young’s modulus as 20e4 and Poisson’s ratio of 0.3.

All dimesions in mm 6.

Using ANSYS find out the temperature distribution of a 3 D circular fin when the heat transfer is steady and convective.. A temperature of 150 0 C is admitted on the left surface of the fin, while the remaining surfaces are subject to convection.

207


Unit I Introduction to FEA Software Basics of FEA, software available for FEA, Geometric modeling co-ordinate systems, types of elements, preferences available, types of problem, pre processor, pro processor, post processor. 1hour Unit II Geometric Modeling Creation of keypoints,lines,areas and volumes. Modeling using basic primitives, Types of modeling – top down and bottom up, Modeling of 2D components & Modeling of 3D components. Operations – Boolean addition, subtraction, division, extrude. Creation, edition and deletion of entities. 5 hours Unit III Meshing Choosing the element type, assigning - real constants, material properties, size of element or division of element, Free meshing of 2D & 3D components, Mapped meshing of 2D & 3D components. Optimizing element size. 5 hours Unit IV Pro Processor and Post Processor Choosing the type of analysis, constraining the object, loading on node, line, area, volume and distribution of loading and Solving of the problem. Reading of results, Listing the results, Plotting of results – stress, deformation, temperature, vectors etc., animation of results. Saving results and printing. Importing and exporting of files. 1 hour List of Experiments 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

Analysis of Trusses Stress analysis of a plate with a circular hole. Stress analysis of Rectangular L bracket Static analysis of simple Mechanical elements. Stress analysis of beams (Cantilever, Simply supported, fixed end Analysis of a composite system Conduction and Convection heat transfer analysis of a 2D component Convective heat transfer analysis of a 3D component Modal analysis of beams (Cantilever, Simply supported, Fixed ends) Dynamic analysis of a structure Coupled field analysis  Design experiment  Application Oriented experiment Total: 45 Hours

208


Practical Schedule S. No.

Experiment

Hours

1

Analysis of Trusses

3

2

Stress analysis of a plate with a circular hole.

3

3

Stress analysis of Rectangular L bracket

3

4

Static analysis of simple Mechanical elements.

3

5

Stress analysis of beams (Cantilever, Simply supported, fixed ends)

3

6

Analysis of a composite system

3

7

Conduction and Convection heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

3

8

Convective heat transfer analysis of a 3D component

3

9

Modal analysis of beams (Cantilever, Simply supported, Fixed ends)

3

10

Dynamic analysis of a structure

3

11

Coupled field analysis

3

12

Design experiment

3

13


3

209


11M708 MECHATRONICS LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5 Objectives   

To understand the concepts and applications of pneumatic / electro - pneumatic based automation system for industries To develop the Capability of design and implementation of pneumatic / electro - pneumatic circuits for industrial automation To learn the virtual instrumentation software and its applications for automated measurement / monitoring

Program Outcomes (POs) (g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in both Mechanical Engineering as well as IT companies. (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. Course Outcomes (COs)     

Able to design the circuit used in hydraulic and pneumatic systems. Able to write programs to control Programmable Logic Controller. Able to interface Programmable Logic Controller to input and output devices. Able understand the basics of LabVIEW programming and data acquisition. Able to control the speed of stepper motor, level, flow, pressure and temperature.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN Internal Assessment Preparation Remember Understand Apply  

Observation and Results Analyze Evaluate Record Mini-Project/Model Examination/Viva-Voce Total

Remember 1. What is air receiver? 2. What is a FRL unit? 3. Define actuator. 4. What are the types of actuator? 5. What is semi rotary actuator? 6. What are the different types of control valves? 7. What is pneumatic direction control valve? 8. State the use of Time Delay Valves. 9. What is a Quick exhaust valve? 10. What is meant by sequencing circuit?


10

15

15

20

10

-

15

15

50

50

210


11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33.

What are the conditions for the two cylinders to be synchronized? List the factors to be considered while designing a fluid power circuit. Sate the purpose of regenerative circuit. What is automatic sequencing circuit? Define PLC. What is ladder programming? State the function of a LATCH circuit. What is an up counter? What is meant by on-delay timer? What is meant by off-delay timer? List the function of counter. What is a system? Give an example. What is a measurement system? List the two basic forms of the control system. State the purpose of a sensor. Define Relay. State the use of DAQ. What is meant by front panel? What is meant by PID? List the different types of temperature sensors. What is meant by stepper motor? State the function of encoder. What is level sensor?

Understand 1. Compare hydraulic and pneumatic circuit with respect to their characteristics. 2. What are the reasons for pressure drop in pneumatic lines? 3. Why pneumatic systems are not used for heavy application? 4. How the cylinder velocity is controlled? 5. How the cylinder position is controlled? 6. What is the need of lubricator unit in the pneumatic system? 7. Draw the Meter-in circuit. 8. What is the effect of pneumatic circuit using quick exhaust valve? 9. Why are mufflers used in pneumatic system? 10. Differentiate between single acting and double acting cylinders. 11. Compare open loop control system and closed loop control system. 12. Why differential controllers are combined with other modes of controllers for practical application? Apply/Evaluate 1. Verify and test the automatic sequence of Double acting cylinder using Fluidsim software and Pneumatic Trainer kit. 2. Using Fluidsim verify and test the simulation of the A+B+C+A-B-C3. Write a PLC program for the automatic forward and reverse stroke of a double acting cylinder. 4. Using Fluidsim software verify and test the simulation of the following stroke of the cylinder A, B and C. A + , B +, A --, B -- , A + , B +, A --, B -- C + , C – 5. Write a Lab VIEW program to interface with the DIO line to the control the pneumatic cylinder. 6. Write a Lab View program for maintaining the temperature of air to 30°C using DAQ interface module. 7. Write a Lab View program for maintaining the pressure of the vessel to 50 bar using DAQ interface module. 8. Write a Lab View program for maintaining the flow of the liquid to 25 m3/s using DAQ interface module. 9. Write a Lab View program for maintaining the level of the liquid in a tank to 20 cm using DAQ interface module.

211


List of Experiments Standards to be referred ANSI Y32.10 –Graphic symbols BS ISO 1219:1995 – for electrical circuit diagrams 1.

Design and testing of fluid power circuits to control (i) Velocity (ii) direction and (iii) force of single and double acting actuators 2. Design of circuits with logic sequence using Electro pneumatic trainer kits. 3. Simulation of basic Hydraulic, Pneumatic and Electric circuits using software. 4. Circuits with multiple cylinder sequences in Electro pneumatic using PLC. 5. PID controller interfacing. 6. Stepper motor interfacing using Lab VIEW 7. Modeling and analysis of basic electrical, hydraulic and pneumatic systems and temperature. 8. Fluid level, flow control using Lab VIEW / PLC. 9. Fluid pressure control using Lab VIEW / PLC. 10. Fluid temperature control using Lab VIEW / PLC.  Design experiment  Application oriented experiment Total: 45 Hours Practical Schedule Sl. No. 1 2 3 4 5

Experiment Introduction about laboratory Design and testing of fluid power circuits to control (i) Velocity (ii) direction and (iii) force of single and double acting actuators Design of circuits with logic sequence using Electro pneumatic trainer kits Simulation of basic Hydraulic, Pneumatic and Electric circuits using software Circuits with multiple cylinder sequences in Electro pneumatic using PLC

Hours 6 3 3 3 3

6

PID controller interfacing.

3

7

Stepper motor interfacing using LabVIEW

3

8

Modeling and analysis of basic electrical, hydraulic and pneumatic systems and temperature

3

9

Fluid level, flow control using LabVIEW / PLC

3

10

Fluid pressure control using LabVIEW / PLC

3

11

Fluid temperature control using LabVIEW / PLC

3

12

Design experiment

3

13


6

212


11O801 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS (Common to all branches) 2 0 0 2.0 Objectives   

To study the basic issues in Professional Ethics To appreciate the rights of others and to instill moral, social values and loyalty To enable the student in their engineering profession who explore the ethical issues in technological society

Program Outcomes (POs) (e) The graduates develop skills to be effective members of a team. (f) The graduates will demonstrate effective English-language communication skills. (h) The graduates will develop capacity to understand professional and ethical responsibility and will display skills required for continuous and lifelong learning and up gradation. Course Outcomes (COs)    

Students will gain an understanding of the importance of ethics and its importance to the Human Service Profession. Students will demonstrate a beginning knowledge of the Human Service Code of Ethics and the ethical decision-making model. Students will understand the impact of personal values and ethics on their professional roles and responsibilities. Students will demonstrate a beginning understanding of the relationship between personal values and professional values.



Test I†

Test II†

30 40 30 100

30 40 30 100

Model Examination† 30 40 30 100


31

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

31 *

Define Human Values. What are Morals and Values? What do you mean by Civic virtue and Respect for others? Write the various meanings of “Spirituality”? List four different types of Virtues. Mention different Human values. What is meant by moral autonomy? Classify the types of inquiry.


213


9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

What are the steps needed in confronting moral dilemmas? List the levels of moral development suggested by Kohlberg. What do you understand by self-interest and ethical egoism? What are the steps needed in confronting moral dilemmas? What are the three virtues of religion?. What are the professional responsibilities? What is meant by “Informed consent” when bringing an engineering product to market? What is engineering experimentation? What are the different roles and functions of “Code of Ethics”? What are the Limitations of “Code of Ethics”? Name some of the engineering societies which published “codes of ethics”. What is meant by a disaster?

Understand 12. Which are the practical skills that will help to produce effective independent thought about moral issues? 13. Why does engineering have to be viewed as an experimental process? 14. Why isn’t engineering possible to follow a random selection in product design? 15. Why is the “code of ethics” important for engineers in their profession? 16. What does the Balanced Outlook on Law stress in directing engineering practice? 17. Are the engineers responsible to educate the public for safe operation of the equipment? How? 18. What kind of responsibility should the engineer have to avoid mistakes that may lead to accident due to the design of their product? 19. What is the use of knowledge of risk acceptance to engineers? 20. Why is Environmental Ethics so important to create environmental awareness to the general public? 21. Why do the engineers refuse to do war works sometimes? Apply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

How does the consideration of engineering as a social experimentation help to keep a sense of autonomous participation is a person’s work? How does the “code of ethics” provide discipline among the engineers? How would you classify the space shuttle Challenger case accident? How does the manufacturer understand the risk in a product catalog or manual? How does the knowledge of uncertainties in design help the engineers to access the risk of a product? How can the quantifiable losses in social welfare resulting from a fatality be estimated? Give some examples. How does the engineer act to safeguard the public from risk?

Unit I Human Values Morals, Values and Ethics – Integrity – Work Ethic – Service Learning – Civic Virtue – Respect for Others – Living Peacefully – Caring – Sharing – Honesty – Courage – Valuing Time – Co-operation – Commitment – Empathy – Self-Confidence Character – Spirituality in business.. 6 Hours Unit II Engineering Ethics Senses of 'Engineering Ethics' – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral autonomy – Kohlberg's theory – Gilligan's theory – Consensus and controversy – Models of Professional Roles – Theories about right action Self-interest – Uses of ethical theories. 6 Hours

214


Unit III Engineering as Social Experimentation Engineering as experimentation – Engineers as responsible experimenters – Codes of ethics – A balanced outlook on law – The Challenger case study – Bhopal Gas Tragedy – The Three Mile Island and Chernobyl case studies Safety aspects in Nuclear Power plants 6 Hours Unit IV Responsibilities and Rights Fundamental Rights, Responsibilities and Duties of Indian Citizens – Collegiality and loyalty – Respect for authority – Collective bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of interest – Occupational crime – Professional rights – Employee rights – Discrimination Right to Information Act. 6 Hours Unit V Global Issues Multinational corporations – Environmental ethics and Environmental Protection Act – Computer ethics – Engineers as managers – Consulting engineers – Engineers as expert witnesses and advisors – Moral leadership – Sample code of ethics like IETE, ASME, ASCE, IEEE, Institution of Engineers (India), Indian Institute of Materials Management Weapons development. 6 Hours Total: 30 Hours Textbook 1.

M. Govindarajan, S. Natarajan and V. S. Senthil Kumar, Engineering Ethics, PHI Learning Private Ltd, New Delhi, 2012.


Charles D. Fleddermann, Engineering Ethics, Pearson Education/ Prentice Hall of India , New Jersey, 2004. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, Ethics in Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2003. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Protchard and Michael J. Rabins, Engineering Ethics – Concepts and Cases, Wadsworth Thompson Learning, United States, 2005. http://www.slideworld.org/slidestag.aspx/human-values-and- Professional-ethics www.mne.psu.edu/lamancusa/ProdDiss/Misc/ethics.ppt

215


11O10B BASIC ENGLISH I * 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives    

To offer students the basics of the English Language in a graded manner. To promote efficiency in English Language by offering extensive opportunities for the development of four language skills (LSRW) within the classroom. To give an intense focus on improving and increasing vocabulary. To improve Spelling and Pronunciation by offering students rigorous practice and exercises.

Program Outcomes (POs) f) The graduates will demonstrate effective English-language communication skills h) The graduates will develop capacity to understand professional and ethical responsibility and will display skills required for continuous and lifelong learning and upgradation Course Outcomes (Cos) 1. 2. 3.

Able to get Listening skills Able to get fluency in Speaking Able to get intreset in Reading and writing

Unit I Module 1

2 3 4 5

Vocabulary/ Grammar Basic words- 12 most used words in English, usage and pronunciation

Skills Sets Starting a conversation and talking about what one does

Basic words- 20 oft used words, usage and pronunciation Basic words with a focus on spelling Basic words- 10 oft used words, usage and pronunciation Tutorial

Analysing an action plan

Unit II Module Vocabulary/ Grammar 6 Basic words + greetings to be used at different times of the day 7 Last 28 of the 100 most used words 8

Using the 14 target words to form bigger words 9 Palindromes, greetings- good luck, festivals 10 Tutorial *Subject to continuous assessment Unit III Module Vocabulary/ Grammar 11 Homophones

Discriminative listening Content listening and Intonation

Skills Sets Formal conversation Informal conversation between equals Informal dialogues using contracted forms Placing a word within its context- culling out meaning

Skills Sets Formal and informal methods of self-introduction

Skill Sets Sentence construction bolstered by mother tongue Creating and presenting one’s own action plan Informal conversation Reading comprehension

Skill Sets Intonation to be used in formal address Reading practice and peer learning Guided speaking- talking to peers using contracted forms Offering congratulations

Skill Sets Let’s Talk is a group activity that gives them some important pointers of

216


12 13

14 15

Homophone partners, matching words with their meanings Briefcase words- finding smaller words from a big word

Contracted forms of the –be verbs, ‘ve and ‘s Formal and informal ways of introducing others

Compound words and pronunciation pointers Tutorial

Giving personal details about oneself

Unit IV Module Vocabulary/ Grammar 16 Proper and common nouns

Skills Sets Asking for personal information and details

17

Pronouns

Telephone skills and etiquette

18

Abstract and common nouns

Dealing with a wrong number

19

Group names of animals, adjectives

Taking and leaving messages on the telephone

20

Tutorial

Unit V Module Vocabulary/ Grammar 21 Determiners 22

Conjugation of the verb ‘to be’- positive and negative forms

23

Am/is/are questions

24

Present continuous tense-form and usage

25

Tutorial

Unit VI Module Vocabulary/ Grammar 26 Words with silent ‘b’ Present continuous questions 27 Words with silent ‘c’ Simple present tense- form and usage 28 Simple present tense- rules 29 Words with silent ‘g’ Questions in the simple present tense 30 Tutorial

Skills Sets Interrupting a conversation politely- formal and informal Thanking and responding to thanks

Giving instructions and seeking clarifications Making inquiries on the telephone

Skills Sets Calling for help in an emergency Making requests and responding to them politely Describing people Describing places

speech Translating English sentences to Tamil Team work- speaking activity involving group work, soft skills Using the lexicon

Skill Sets Pronunciation pointers- an informal introduction to the IPA Reading aloud and comprehension Reading practice and comprehension Pronunciation pointers

Skill Sets Pair work reading comprehension Comprehension questions that test scanning, skimming and deep reading Small group activity that develops dialogue writing Finishing sentences with appropriate verbs

Skill Sets Dialogue writing Identifying elements of grammar in text extract Guided writing Filling in the blanks with correct markers of tense Total: 45 Hours

Resources 1. Basic English Module, L&L Education Resources, Chennai, 2011.

217


11O10C COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH * 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives  To equip students with effective speaking and listening skills in English  To help the students develop speaking skills in Business English Program Outcomes (POs) f) The graduates will demonstrate effective English-language communication skills h) The graduates will develop capacity to understand professional and ethical responsibility and will display skills required for continuous and lifelong learning and upgradation Course Outcomes (COs): 

The Students will be able to clear the BEC Vantage Level Examination conducted by the Cambridge ESOL

Unit I Grammar and Vocabulary Vocabulary for describing different company structures and company hierarchy – Practice using wh – questions; there is / there are, Definitions of Quality, Vocabulary of quality management – Using nouns and adjectives to form group nouns – Phrases for offering and accepting help and invitations – Telephone terms – Verb tenses – Questions and responses – Conditionals – Gap Filling Exercises. 9 Hours Unit II Listening Business Presentation – Conversation between old friends; introducing a stranger – A Quality Manager talks about his work – Conversation between acquaintances – Sales talk at a sports equipment stand – Small talk among colleagues – A tour of a factory in Italy – Lunch in the factory canteen – A meeting to improve the efficiency of internal communication – A phone conversation arranging to meet – A credit card salesman talks to the bank – A conversation between business acquaintances - A management meeting about a recent merger – A conversation about a town, a country and its people. 9 Hours Unit III Speaking Pronunciation Practice – Describing organizations - A company presentation –– Practicing of conversation starters and closers with friends and strangers – Practice of simple language and step – by – step procedures to describe complex ideas – Explaining visual information – The language of increase and decrease applied to graphs and bar charts - Presenting a work – related graph – Making a telephone call – A sports equipment buyer and a manufacturer’s sales representative talk business – Entertaining a visitor in your country – A short marketing meeting – Negotiating to meet around a busy schedule – Pairs or small groups discuss the implications of problems at an electronics factory – Finding out all you can about a partner – Chairing and holding meetings – Pairwork on questions and answers about places and people. 9 Hours * Subject to continuous assessment

218


Unit IV Reading Signalling the structure of a presentation – introducing, sequencing and concluding a talk - Explaining concepts and ideas – The pattern of phone call conversations – Giving, getting and checking information – Common Business phrases – Giving encouragement: phrases for positive feedback; more emphatic adjectives and adverbs – Giving facts and explaining functions and processes – Asking for and clarifying information – How to state your point, agree and disagree – Practice of frequency, quantity and number A short marketing meeting – Suggesting and agreeing times and places – Phrases for the Chairperson – People at work: their emotions, skills and attitudes. 9 Hours Unit V Writing Making conditions using the present and future conditional Phrases for stalling for time - Common telephone phrases and responses - Business Communication – Calling for Quotation – Letter asking for Clarification – Transcoding – Rearranging the sentences – Cloze – Explaining visual information – Explaining concepts and ideas – Giving, getting and checking information – Business description – Informal negotiations.

9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1.

Jeremy Comfort, Pamela Rogerson, Trish Stott, and Derek Utley, Speaking Effectively – Developing Speaking Skills for Business English, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 2002.


Brook-Hart Guy, BEC VANTAGE: BUSINESS BENCHMARK Upper-Intermediate – Student’s Book, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2006. Aruna Koneru, Professional Communication, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2008. P. Kiranmai Dutt, Geetha Rajeevan and CLN Prakash, A Course in Communication Skills, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2008. Krishna Mohan Balaji, Advanced Communicative English, Tata McGraw-hill Education Private Limited, New Delhi, 2009.

219


11O20B BASIC ENGLISH II * 3 1 0 3.5 Objectives      

To promote fluency even downplaying accuracy To give room for a tacit acquisition of Basic English Grammar through ample listening, reading and writing inputs with direct theory wherever relevant To specifically focus on speaking and conversation skills with an aim to increase speaking confidence To nurture in students the capacity to express themselves lucidly and articulate their thoughts and impressions on a wide gamut of topics both through speech and writing To improve Spelling and Pronunciation by offering rigorous practice and exercises To correct common mistakes and to teach self-assessment techniques

Program Outcomes (POs) f) The graduates will demonstrate effective English-language communication skills h) The graduates will develop capacity to understand professional and ethical responsibility and will display skills required for continuous and lifelong learning and upgradation Course Outcome (COs) 

The students will be able to communicate better with improved fluency, vocabulary and pronunciation.

Unit I Vocabulary/ Grammar

Skills Sets

Skill Sets

Difference between present continuous and simple present tense. Verbs ‘have’ and ‘have got’

Calling for help in an emergency

Reporting an eventjournalistic style

Describing animals

Simple past tense

Inviting people, accepting and declining invitations Refusing an invitation

Asking for and giving directions Self- enquiry and offering one’s opinion on a given topic.

Module 31

32 33

34

Spelling rules & table of irregular verbs Tutorial

35 * Subject to continuous assessment Unit II Questions and the negative form 36 of the simple past tense

37

Asking questions in the simple past tense Past continuous tense

38 39

40

Difference between simple past and past continuous- when and where to use each Tutorial

Apologizing and responding to an apology Reading comprehension Paying compliments and responding to them Describing daily routines

Reading and practicing prewritten dialogues

(Reading) conversation practice Seeking, granting and refusing permission Pair work: writing dialogues and presenting them Reading and comprehension skills

220


Unit III Simple future tense

Talking about the weather

Simple future tense- more aspects, possessive pronouns Future continuous

Talking about possessions Talking about current activities Asking for the time and date

41

42 43 44

45 Unit IV 46

Revision of future tense- simple and continuous forms, prepositions used with time and date Tutorial

Articles a/an

47

Singular- Plural (usage of a/an)

48

Countable and uncountable nouns- a/an and some Articles- the

49

50 Unit V

Discussion- analyzing and debating a given topic

Writing, speaking and presentation skills Reading practiceindependent and shared reading Listening comprehension Sequencing sentences in a paragraph

Transcribing dictation

Speaking: sharing stories about family, village/town, childhood, etc. 10 students Speaking: sharing stories about family, village/town, childhood, etc.- 10 students Speaking: sharing stories about family, village/town, childhood, etc.- 10 students Writing a noticeannouncement

Listening: comprehend and follow multiple step instructions read out by the teacher Reading: make inferences from the story about the plot, setting and characters

Comprehension –logical analysis, process analysis and subjective expression Vocabulary: using context tools to decipher meaning Listening to a poem being recited, answer questions on it and practice reciting the same

Tutorial

51

Articles- the: usage and avoidance

52

Articles- the: usage and avoidance with like and hate

53

Articles- the: usage and avoidance with names of places

This/ that/ these and those 54 55

Making plans- applying grammar theory to written work Opening up and expressing one’s emotions Listening comprehension

Tutorial

Comprehension passage

Speaking: Debate

221


Unit VI 56

One and ones

57

Capitalization and punctuation

58 59

Syntax and sentence constructionrearrange jumbled sentences Cloze

60

Tutorial

Collaborative learningproblem solving Controlled writing Guided writing Free writing

Writing short answers to questions based on reading Listen to a story and respond to its main elements Listen to a poem and discuss its elements Frame simple yet purposeful questions about a given passage

Total:45+15 Hours Resources 1. Basic English Module, L&L Education Resources, Chennai, 2011.

222


11O20C ADVANCED COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH * Objectives  To take part in a discussion in an effective manner  To listen to an explanation and respond  To write a formal communication  To read company literature or any document Program Outcomes (POs) f) The graduates will demonstrate effective English-language communication skills h) The graduates will develop capacity to understand professional and ethical responsibility and will display skills required for continuous and lifelong learning and upgradation Course Outcomes (COs) 1. Read graphs and charts 2. Skim and scan texts like job adverts 3. Read business articles for specific information 4. Understand the structure of a text Unit I Grammar and Vocabulary Comparison of adjectives and adverbs – tenses – simple and complex questions – countable/ uncountable nouns, -ing forms and infinitives – conditionals – comparing and contrasting ideas – modal verbs – while and whereas for contrasting ideas – passives – used to, articles, reported speech, relative pronouns and expressing cause and result – workplace-related vocabulary. 9 Hours Unit II Listening Prediction - the ability to identify information – ability to spell and write numbers correctly – ability to infer, understand gist, topic, context, and function, and recognize communicative functions ( complaining, greeting, apologizing, etc.) – ability to follow a longer listening task and interpret what the speakers say. 9 Hours Unit III Speaking The ability to talk about oneself and perform functions such as agreeing and disagreeing – ability to express opinions, agree, disagree, compare and contrast ideas and reach a decision in a discussion – appropriate use of stress, rhythm, intonation and clear individual speech sounds - take an active part in the development of the discourse - turn-taking and sustain the interaction by initiating and responding appropriately. 9 Hours Unit IV Reading The ability to skim and scan business articles for specific details and information – To understand the meaning and the structure of the text at word, phrase, sentence, and paragraph level – ability to read in detail and interpret opinions and ideas – to develop one’s understanding and knowledge of collocations – ability to identify and correct errors in texts. 9 Hours * Subject to continuous assessment Unit V Writing The ability to write concisely, communicate the correct content and write using the correct register – ability to write requests, instructions, explanations, and ask for information by using the correct format in business correspondences like charts, memo, note, email, letter, fax, report, proposal – understanding formal and informal styles – responding to written or graphic input.

223

3 1 0 3.5


9 Hours Total: 45+15 Hours Text Book 1.

Brook-Hart, Guy, Business Benchmark: Upper Intermediate – Student’s Book, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2006.

References 1. 2.

Whitby, Norman, Bulats Edition: Business Benchmark, Pre-Intermediate to Intermediate – Student’s Book, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2006. Cambridge Examinations Publishing, Cambridge BEC Vantage – Self-study Edition, Cambridge University Press, UK, 2005.

224


11O20H HINDI * 3 1 0 3.5 Objectives   

To help students acquire the basics of Hindi To teach them how to converse in Hindi in various occasions To help learners acquire the ability to understand a simple technical text in Hindi

Program Outcomes (POs) f) The graduates will demonstrate effective English-language communication skills h) The graduates will develop capacity to understand professional and ethical responsibility and will display skills required for continuous and lifelong learning and upgradation Course Outcomes (COs) 

The students will become familiar with the basics of Hindi language and start conversing in Hindi.

Unit I Hindi Alphabet Introduction - Vowels - Consonants - Plosives - Fricatives - Nasal sounds - Vowel Signs - Chandra Bindu & Visarg -Table of Alphabet -Vocabulary. 9 Hours Unit II Nouns Genders (Masculine & Feminine Nouns ending in – ā,і,ī, u,ū )- Masculine & Feminine – Reading Exercises. 9 Hours Unit III Pronouns and Tenses Categories of Pronouns - Personal Pronouns - Second person (you & honorific) - Definite & Indefinite pronouns - Relative pronouns - Present tense - Past tense - Future tense - Assertive & Negative Sentences Interrogative Sentences. 9 Hours Unit IV Classified Vocabulary Parts of body – Relatives – Spices – Eatables – Fruit & Vegetables - Clothes - Directions – Seasons Professions. 9 Hours Unit V Speaking Model Sentences – Speaking practice for various occasions. 9 Hours Total: 45+15 Hours Textbook 1.

B. R. Kishore, Self Hindi Teacher for Non-Hindi Speaking People, Vee Kumar Publications (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.

References 1. Syed, Prayojan Mulak Hindi, Rahamathullah Vani Prakasan, New Delhi, 2002. 2. Ramdev, Vyakaran Pradeep, Saraswathi Prakasan, Varanasi, 2004. * Subject to continuous assessment

225


11O20G GERMAN * 3 1 0 3.5 Objectives  

To help students acquire the basics of German language To teach them how to converse in German in various occasions

Programme Outcomes (POs) f) The graduates will demonstrate effective English-language communication skills h) The graduates will develop capacity to understand professional and ethical responsibility and will display skills required for continuous and lifelong learning and upgradation Course Outcome (COs) 

The students will become familiar with the basics of German language and start conversing in German.

Unit I Grammar & Vocabulary Introduction to German language: Alphabets, Numbers – Nouns - Pronouns Verbs and Conjugations definite and indefinite article - Negation - Working with Dictionary – Nominative - Accusative and dative case – propositions - adjectives - modal auxiliaries - Imperative case - Possessive articles. 9 Hours Unit II Listening Listening to CD supplied with the books, paying special attention to pronunciation: Includes all lessons in the book – Greetings - talking about name – country – studies – nationalities - ordering in restaurants travel office - Interaction with correction of pronunciation. 9 Hours Unit III Speaking Speaking about oneself - about family – studies - questions and answers - dialogue and group conversation on topics in textbooks - talks on chosen topics. 9 Hours Unit IV Reading Reading lessons and exercises in the class - pronunciation exercises: Alphabet – name – country – people – profession – family – shopping – travel – numbers – friends – restaurant – studies - festivals 9 Hours Unit V Writing Alphabets – numbers - words and sentences - Exercises in the books control exercises - writing on chosen topics such as one self – family – studies - country. 9 Hours Total: 45+15 Hours

* Subject to continuous assessment

226


Textbooks 1. 2.

Grundkurs DEUTSCH A Short Modern German Grammar Workbook and Glossary, VERLAG FUR DEUTSCH, Munichen, 2007. Grundkurs, DEUTSCH Lehrbuch Hueber Munichen, 2007.

References 1. 2. 3.

Cassel Language Guides – German: Christine Eckhard – Black & Ruth Whittle, Continuum, London / New York, 1992. Kursbuch and Arbeitsbuch, TANGRAM AKTUELL 1 DEUTSCH ALS FREMDSPRACHE, NIVEAUSTUFE AI/1, Deutschland, Goyal Publishers & Distributers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005. Langenscheidt Eurodictionary – German – English / English – German, Goyal Publishers & Distributers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.

227


11O20J JAPANESE * 3 1 0 3.5 Objectives   

To help students acquire the basics of Japanese language To teach them how to converse in Japanese in various occasions To teach the students the Japanese cultural facets and social etiquettes

Programme Outcomes (POs) f) The graduates will demonstrate effective English-language communication skills h) The graduates will develop capacity to understand professional and ethical responsibility and will display skills required for continuous and lifelong learning and upgradation Course Outcome (COs) 

The students will become familiar with the basics of Japanese language and start conversing in Japanese.

Unit I Introduction to Japanese - Japanese script - Pronunciation of Japanese(Hiragana) - Long vowels Pronunciation of in,tsu,ga - Letters combined with ya,yu,yo - Daily Greetings and Expressions Numerals. N1 wa N2 des - N1 wa N2 ja arimasen - S ka - N1mo - N1 no N2 - …….san - Kanji Technical Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers) 9 Hours Unit II Introduction - Kore - Sore - are - Kono N1 - Sono N1 - ano N1 - so des - so ja arimasen - S1 ka - S2 ka N1 no N1 - so des ka – koko - soko - asoko - kochira - sochira - achira - N1 wa N2 (Place) des – dhoko-N1 no N2 - Kanji-10 - ima….ji…fun des - Introduction of verb - V mas - V masen - V mashitha - V masen deshitha - N1(Time) ne V - N1 kara N2 des - N1 tho N2 / S ne Kanji-10 - Technical Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers) – Dictionary Usage. 9 Hours Unit III - N1(Place) ye ikimas - ki mas - kayerimasu - Dhoko ye mo ikimasen - ikimasendheshitha - N1(vehicle) de ikimasu - kimasu - kayerimasu - N1(Personal or Animal) tho V ithsu - S yo. - N1 wo V (Transitive) - N1 wo shimus - Nani wo shimasu ka - Nan & Nani - N1(Place) de V - V masen ka - V masho - Oo……. Kanji10 , N1( tool - means ) de V - “ Word / Sentence ” wa …go nan des ka - N1( Person ) ne agemus - N1( Person ) ne moraimus - mo V shimashitha - , Kanji-10 – Japanese Typewriting using JWPCE Software, Technical Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers) 9 Hours Unit IV Introduction to Adjectives - N1 wa na adj des. N1 wa ii adj des - na adj na N1 - ii adj ii N1 - Thothemo amari - N1 wa dho des ka - N1 wa dhonna N2 des ka - S1 ka S2 – dhore - N1 ga arimasu - wakarimasu N1 ga suki masu - N1 ga kiraimasu - jozu des - hetha des - dhonna N1 - Usages of yoku - dhaithai thakusan - sukoshi - amari - zenzen - S1 kara S2 - dhoshithe, N1 ga arimasu - imasu - N1(Place) ne N2 ga arimasu - iimasu - N1 wa N2(Place) ne arimasu - iimasu - N1(Person,Place,or Thing ) no N2 (Position) N1 ya N2, Kanji-10 - Japanese Dictionary usage using JWPCE Software, Technical Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers) 9 Hours * Subject to continuous assessment Unit V Saying Numbers , Counter Suffixes , Usages of Quantifiers -Interrogatives - Dhono kurai - gurai – Quantifier-(Period ) ne ….kai V - Quantifier dhake / N1 dhake Kanji - Past tense of Noun sentences and na

228


Adjective sentences - Past tense of ii-adj sentences - N1 wa N2 yori adj des - N1 tho N2 tho Dhochira ga adj des ka and its answering method - N1 [ no naka ] de {nani/dhoko/dhare/ithsu} ga ichiban adj des ka answering -N1 ga hoshi des - V1 mas form dhake mas - N1 (Place ) ye V masu form ne iki masu/ki masu/kayeri masu - N1 ne V/N1 wo V - Dhoko ka - Nani ka – gojumo - Technical Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers) 9Hours Total: 45+15 Hours Textbooks 1. Japanese for Everyone: Elementary Main Textbook 1-1, Goyal Publishers and Distributors Pvt. Ltd., Delhi, 2007. 2. Japanese for Everyone: Elementary Main Textbook 1-2, Goyal Publishers and Distributors Pvt. Ltd., Delhi, 2007.

References Software 1. Nihongo Shogo-1 2. Nihongo Shogo-2 3. JWPCE Software Websites 1. www.japaneselifestyle.com 2. www.learn-japanese.info/ 3. www.kanjisite.com/ 4. www.learn-hiragana-katakana.com/typing-hiragana-characters/

229


11O20F FRENCH * 3 1 0 3.5 Objective  To help students acquire the basics of French language  To teach them how to converse in French in various occasions Programme Outcomes (Pos) f) The graduates will demonstrate effective English-language communication skills h) The graduates will develop capacity to understand professional and ethical responsibility and will display skills required for continuous and lifelong learning and upgradation Course Outcome (COs) 

The students will become familiar with the basics of French language and start conversing in Japanese.

Unit I Alphabet Français (alphabets) - Les accents français (the accents in French) – aigu – grave – circonflexe – tréma - cédille - écrire son nom dans le français (spelling one’s name in French) 9 Hours Unit II Les noms de jours de la semaine (Days of the week) - Les noms de mois de l'année (Months) - numéro 1 à 100 (numbers 1 to 100) 9 Hours Unit III Moyens de transport (transport) - noms de professions (professions) - noms d'endroits communs (places) nationalités (nationalities) 9 Hours Unit IV Pronoms (pronouns) - Noms communs masculins et de femme (common masculine and feminine nouns) Verbes communs (common verbs) 9 Hours Unit V Présentation - même (Introducing Oneself) - narration de son nom - l'endroit où on vit - son âge - date de naissance - sa profession - numéro de téléphone - adresse (name - where one lives – age - date of birth – profession - telephone number and address) - Narration du temps (tellling the time) 9 Hours Total: 45+15 Hours Textbook 1. Angela Wilkes, French for Beginners, Usborne Language Guides, Usborne Publishing Ltd., Ohio, 1987. References 1. Ann Topping, Beginners French Reader, Natl Textbook Co, 1975. 2. Stanley Applebaum, First French Reader, Dover Publications, 1998. 3. Max Bellancourt, Cours de Français, London: Linguaphone, 2000. Software 1. Français Linguaphone, Linguaphone Institute Ltd., London, 2000. 2. Français I. Harrisonburg: The Rosetta Stone: Fairfield Language Technologies, 2001. * Subject to continuous assessment

230


11M001 INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives   

To introduce the advanced topics in combustion phenomenon in engines To make the students familiar with the effects of knocking To make the awareness of pollutants emitted through the use of I C engines

Program Outcomes (POs) (b) The graduates will be able to acquire the knowledge, capability of analyzing and solving any concept or problem associated with heat energy dynamics and utilization. Students will be able to understand the working concepts of thermal engineering. (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes (COs)   

The graduates will be able to acquire the knowledge, capability of analyzing and solving any concept or problem associated with heat energy dynamics and utilization. Able to understand the working concepts of thermal engineering. The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN Bloom’s Taxonomy S. No. (New Version) 1 Remember 2 Understand 3 Apply 4 Analyze/Evaluate 5 Create Total 32

Test 1*

Test 2*

30 40 30 --100

30 40 30 --100



Remember

1. Define the terms i. Octane number and Cetane number. 2. Define volumetric efficiency and clearance ratio. 3. Define the term “knocking” in SI engine. 4. Define the term “SAC volume” 5. What are the major pollutants from SI Engine exhaust? 6. What is meant by homogenous charge compression ignition? 7. Name the types of combustion chambers used in CI engine. Understand 1. Compare LPG and petrol as fuel for SI engine. 2. Mention the advantages of using natural gas as alternate fuel.. 3. List any two salient features of gasoline direct injection engine. 4. State the factors affecting the delay period. 5. What is the effect of Cut-off ratio in the efficiency of a Diesel cycle? 6. Differentiate 2-stroke and 4-stroke engines based on construction. 32 *


231


7. Write short notes on particulate trap 8. Discuss the properties of alcohol as engine fuel. 9. Compare direct and indirect injection systems. Apply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Evaluate the relationship between homogeneous and heterogeneous mixture. How will you differentiate dual cycle with diesel cycle in IC engines? How the ignition takes place in C.I. Engine? For the same compression ratio and heat rejection, which cycle is most efficient: Otto or Diesel? Mention the advantages of turbo charging Indicate the various factors that influence the flame speeds State the modifications to be made to the engine to make it lean burn engine. Indicate the features of mono point and multi point injection systems

Unit I Spark Ignition Engines Spark ignition engine- Mixture requirements - Feedback control - Carburetors -Fuel injection systemsMonopoint and Multipoint injection -Stages of combustion - Normal and Abnormal combustion-Factors affecting knock-Combustion chambers- Introduction to Thermodynamic analysis of S.I. engine combustion. Combustion stoichiometry 9 Hours Unit II Compression Ignition Engines States of combustion in C.I. Engine –Combustion knock in CI engines –Knock comparison in SI and CI Engines-Methods of controlling knock- Direct and indirect injection systems - Combustion chambers - Fuel spray behavior-spray structure, spray penetration and evaporation-Air motion-Turbo charging-Introduction to Thermodynamic analysis of C.I. Engine combustion. Physical factors affecting ignition delay. 9 Hours Unit III Pollutant Formation and Control Pollutant - Sources and types - formation of NOx - Hydrocarbon emission mechanism - Carbon monoxide formation - Particulate emissions – Measurement of exhaust emissions-Methods of controlling emissionsCatalytic converters and Particulate traps. Euro and BS norms 9 Hours Unit IV Alternative Fuels Bio-fuels: Alcohol, Hydrogen, Natural Gas and Liquefied Petroleum Gas – Properties – Suitability - Engine Modifications - Merits and Demerits as fuels. Biodiesel production process 9 Hours Unit V Recent Trends Lean Burn Engines - Stratified Charge Engines – Gasoline: Direct Injection Engine – Common rail Diesel injection system (CDRI)- Homogeneous charge compression ignition - Plasma Ignition – Ignition Measurement techniques. Exhaust gas recirculation 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours

232


Textbook 1.

V. Ganesan, Internal Combustion Engines, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2007.

References 1.

John B. Heywood, Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi,2008 2. S. Rowland Benson and N. D. Whitehouse., Internal combustion Engines, Vol.I and II, Pergamon Press. 3. H. N. Gupta Fundamentals of Internal Combustion Engineering, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2006. 4. R. B. Mathur and R. P. Sharmal Internal Combustion Engines, Dhanpat Rai Publications, 2008. 5. http://www.gtmresearch.com/report/third-and- fourth – generation- bio fuels. 6. B.P.Pundir, I. C. Engines Combustion and Emissions, Narosa Publishing House Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2010 7. J.B.Heywood and E.Sher, Two-Stroke Cycle Engine, Taylor & Francis, 1999. 8. R.Stone, Internal combustion Engines, The Macmillan Ltd, London, 1999. 9. W.W.Pulkrabek, Engineering Fundamentals of the I.C. Engine, Prentice Hall, 1997

233


11M002 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives  

To acquire knowledge about the fundamentals and analysis techniques used in computational solutions of fluid mechanics and heat transfer problems To study the interaction of physical processes and numerical techniques and understand the contemporary methods for boundary layers, incompressible viscous flows, and in viscid compressible flows

Program Outcomes (POs) (b) The graduates will be able to acquire the knowledge, capability of analyzing and solving any concept or problem associated with heat energy dynamics and utilization. Students will be able to understand the working concepts of thermal engineering. Course Outcomes (COs)  

Improve the student’s understanding of the basic principles of fluid mechanics. Provide the student with a significant level of experience in the use of modern CFD software for the analysis of complex fluid-flow systems.



Provide the student with a basic understanding of the theory, principles, and practice of the finite element method.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN Bloom’s Taxonomy S. No. (New Version) 1 Remember 2 Understand 3 Apply 4 Analyze/ Evaluate 5 Create Total 33

Test 1*

Test 2*

20 20 20 40 -100

20 20 20 40 -100



Remember

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Define the terms i. Continuum, ii. Stability Define Reynolds transport theorem. Write the continuity equation. What is known as thermal diffusivity? Explain the terms i. Strokes equation, ii. Euler equations. List out the different types of error? What is Courant number? What is known as Peclet number?

Understand 1. 2. 33 *

Differentiate between compressible and incompressible flow. Compare Implicit and Explicit methods.


234


3. 4.

Write the significance of Von Neumann stability analysis. Give the advantages of staggered grid.

Apply 1. 2. 3. 4.

Develop a Navier-Strokes equation for a Newtonian fluid. Construct the advection-diffusion equation for thermal energy in Cartesian, cylindrical and spherical coordinate systems. Generalize the formulation of first order wave equation. With a suitable example, indicate the significance of upwind differencing scheme.

Analyze/ Evaluate 1. 2.

3.

Starting with the three dimensional incompressible Strokes equations, derive the depth- averaged pressure equation. Develop the transient heat equation ӘT / Әt = Txx + Tyy +1 with the initial condition T ( x,y,0 ) = 0 and the boundary conditions T ( 0, y, t ) = T ( 1,y, t ) = T ( x,0,T ) = T ( x,1,t ) = 0 using finite difference method. Establish the truncation error for a uniform mesh using a finite difference approximation.

Unit I Introduction Impact and applications of CFD in diverse fields - governing equations of fluid dynamics- continuity – momentum and energy - generic integral form for governing equations - Initial and Boundary conditions Classification of partial differential equations- Hyperbolic, Parabolic, Elliptic and Mixed types Applications and Relevance. Linear algebraic equations 9 Hours Unit II Basic Aspects of Discretization Discretization techniques- Finite difference, Finite volume and Finite element method- Comparison of discretization by the three methods. Introduction to Finite differences, Difference equations, Uniform and non-uniform grids, numerical errors, Grid independence test and Optimum step size. Axisymmetric geometry 9 Hours Unit III Grid Generation Transformation of non-uniform grids to uniform grids, General transformation of the equations - Form of the governing equations suitable for CFD - Compressed grids, Boundary fitted co-ordinate systems- Elliptic grid generation - Adaptive grids - Modern developments in grid generation. Automatic grid refinement generation 9 Hours Unit IV Conduction and Convection Steady One dimensional conduction- two and three-dimensional conduction- Steady one-dimensional convection and Diffusion -Transient one-dimensional and two-dimensional conduction- Explicit, Implicit, Crank-Nicolson, ADI scheme-Stability criterion. SIMPLE algorithm for1D heat flow 9 Hours

235


Unit V Incompressible Fluid Flow and Applications of CFD Gradient term and continuity equation- Staggered grid- Momentum equations-Pressure and velocity corrections- Pressure Correction equation - Numerical procedure for SIMPLE algorithm - Boundary conditions for the pressure correction method - Stream function- Vorticity method, Discussion of case studies. Applications of CFD fluent software - Drying, Sterilization, Mixing, Refrigeration. Other applications – Heat exchanger, Clean room condition, Future of CFD in food industry Inviscid simulation of real flows 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1.

J. D. Anderson., Jr. Computational Fluid Dynamics- The Basic with Applications, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi,2004


P. Ghosdastidar, Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2003 K. A. Hoffman, Computational Fluid Dynamics for Engineering, Engineering Education System, Austin, Texas 1989. Muralidhar and T. Sundarajan, Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2002. S. V. Patankar, Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, Hemisphere, New York, 1994. T. J. Chung, Computational Fluid Dynamics, Cambridge University Press, Chennai 2003.

236


11M003 DIRECT ENERGY CONVERSION TECHNIQUES 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives    

To study the various forms of energy and conversion techniques To know the methodologies of producing electrical energy thus fulfilling the energy crisis To introduce knowledge about future energy producing/storage devices like fuel cells At the end of this course the student is expected to understand what are the precious resources in the environment are available for the future generations

Program Outcomes (POs) (b) The graduates will be able to acquire the knowledge, capability of analyzing and solving any concept or problem associated with heat energy dynamics and utilization. Students will be able to understand the working concepts of thermal engineering. (g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in both Mechanical Engineering as well as IT companies. (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to familiar with the different thermal cycles like Otto cycle, Diesel cycle and dual cycle  Able to understand the different energy conversion and energy storage systems and their application  Able the know the fuel cell principles and their performance ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No.


Test 2*

Model Examination*


1 2

Remember Understand

35 30

35 30

35 30

35 30

3 4

Apply Analyze/Evaluate

35 --

35 --

35 --

35 --

5

Create

--

--

--

--

100

100

100

100

Total 34

Test 1*

Remember

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

34 *

What is energy conservation? What are its advantages? What are the methods of energy conservation? What are the methods used to improve the efficiency in thermal power plants. List out the different energy management techniques used in practice. List out the different sources of geothermal energy? What are the specific environmental effects if the geothermal source of energy is used for power generation? What is the function of Ferro Electric Converter?


237


8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

What are the types of Energy Storage Systems? What is the function of a Thermo Magnetic Converter? What is the function of Battery? What is the function of Solar Cells? Define fuel cell. What is the use of Alkali fuel cell? List the various types of fuel cell. What do you meant by electrical storage system? Define Thermoelectric Generator. Define Nernst Effect. What is the purpose of a fuel cell? State various subsystems in a solar thermal energy conversion system. State the functions of the following: 1. Solar thermal collector. 2. Central receiver 3. Thermal storage system in a solar thermal plant.

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.

What is the trend of power development in India in future? What is the fundamental difference between Otto and Diesel cycle? What are the advantages of Stirling cycle over Ericsson cycle? Differentiate between the Brayton and Rankine cycle? Where the Thermoelectric Generator is employed? Why? Why is Thermo Magnetic Converter preferred for thermo electric conversion? Which is the best for energy storage system? Why? Difference between the mechanical and electrical storage system? When do you prefer thermal energy storage system? For what type of application, you would prefer to use methanol fuel in fuel cell. What are the advantages of Alkali electrolyte over molten carbonate electrolyte? What do you understand by distribution of energy consumption? Energy conservation will help to reduce the energy growth in India. Discuss. Use of non-conventional sources is considered a proper and logical method to meet the energy demand in India. Discuss. What is meant by energy management? How to the efficiencies of the ideal Otto cycle and Carnot cycle compare for the same temperature limits? How is the rpm of an actual four stroke gasoline engine related to the number of thermodynamic cycles? What would your answer be for a two stroke engine? How does the thermal efficiency of an ideal Otto cycle change with the compression ratio of the engine and specific heat ratio of the working fluid? Why is high compression ratios not used in spark ignition engines? How does a diesel engine differ from a gasoline engine? How does the ideal Diesel cycle differ from the ideal Otto cycle? Do diesel or gasoline engines operate at higher compression ratios? Why? What is the cut off ratio? How does it affect the thermal efficiency of a Diesel cycle?

238


Apply For fixed maximum and minimum temperatures, what are the effect of the pressure ratio on (a) the thermal efficiency and (b) the net work output of a simple ideal Bray ton cycle? 1. Why thermal energy storage is not of much use in storing electrical energy for peak load application. 2. What is the need of Energy Storage for Electrical Power Systems with the help of a Daily Load Curve? 3. Under what modifications will the ideal simple gas turbine cycle approach the Ericsson cycle? 4. For a specified pressure ratio, why does multistage compression with inter cooling decrease the compressor work, and multistage expansion with reheating increase the turbine work? 5. Compare the following types of collectors to be used for a solar thermal power plant with respect to 1. Temperature 2. Concentration ratio 3. Suitability 4. Cost Unit I Introduction Energy Conversion – Conventional Techniques – Reversible & Irreversible Cycles – Carnot, Stirling & Ericsson – Otto, Diesel, Dual, Lenior, Atkinson, Brayton and Rankine.Application of Brayton and Rankine cycle. Cogeneration rankine cycle 9 Hours Unit II Direct Conversion of Thermal to Electrical Energy Thermoelectric Converters – Thermoelectric refrigerator – Thermoelectric Generator – Thermionic Converters – Ferro Electric Converter – Nernst Effect Generator Thermo magnetic converter 9 Hours Unit III Chemical and Electromagnetic Energy to Electrical Energy Batteries – Types – Working – Performance - Governing Parameters – Hydrogen Energy – Solar Cells. Advance Batteries - Lithium chloride Hybrid vehicles 9 Hours Unit IV Energy Storage Systems Introduction – Storage of Mechanical Energy, Electrical Energy, Chemical Energy, Thermal Energy. Nuclear energy storage system 9 Hours Unit V Fuel Cells Basics – Working Advantages & Drawbacks – Types – Comparative Analysis – Thermodynamics & Kinetics of fuel cell process – Performance of fuel cell Fuel cell for portable and power plant applications 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1. B. K. Hogde, Analysis and Design of Energy Systems, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,1998. References 1. Archie W. Culp, Principles of Energy Conversion, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., Singapore, 2. Rakosh das Begamudre, Energy conversion systems, New age international Publishers, New Delhi, 2000. 3. K. Kordesch and G. Simader, Fuel Cell and Their Applications, Wiley-Vch, Germany M. A. Kettari, Direct Energy Conversion, Addision – Wesley Pub.Co 4. A. B. Hart and G. J. Womack, Fuel Cells: Theory and Application, Prentice Hall, London 5. http://www.personal.utulsa.edu/~kenneth-weston/ 6. http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=108105058

239


11M004 CRYOGENIC ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives   

This course provides students with a practical prospective on the cryogenic world It imparts knowledge on properties of cryogenic fluid, cycles, cryogenic refrigerators and Applications At the end one can able to apply this to practical problems

Course Outcomes (COs) 1. Able to understand the applications of classical thermodynamics to different cryogenic technologies, gas separation and purification system, and low power cryocoolers 2. Able to Understand the measurement equipment and basic experimental skills, in particular of cryogenic heat transfer, superconducting magnetic levitation, as well as low power cryocoolers 3. Able to design the practical cryogenic systems requiring significant consideration of thermodynamic cycles

Program Outcomes (POs) (b) The graduates will be able to acquire the knowledge, capability of analyzing and solving any concept or problem associated with heat energy dynamics and utilization. Students will be able to understand the working concepts of thermal engineering. (g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in both Mechanical Engineering as well as IT companies. (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. SKILL SET 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Able to use the basic principles of cryogenic engineering. Can select the proper Cryo-coolers and Cryo-refrigerators for an industrial application. Identify proper Cryogens Handling system for a particular application. Identify importance of understanding system and component principles to troubleshooting. Able to design the comparative analysis of Cryogens in industrial application.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No.


Test 1*

Test 2*

Model Examination*


1

Remember

25

25

25

25

2

Understand

30

30

30

30

3

Apply

20

20

20

20

4

Analyze/ Evaluate

25

25

25

25

5

Create

--

--

--

--

100

100

100

100

Total

240


Remember 1. What is cryogenic engineering? 2. What are the Properties of Cryogenic fluids? 3. Define Inversion Curve. 4. Define Joule Thomson Effect. 5. Draw T-s diagram of Precooled Linde Hampson Cycle 6. Define Sulzer Helium Liquefaction process. 7. What is the function of Separation plant? 8. What are the types of separation plant? 9. What is the function of a Gas purifier? 10. What are the configurations for heat exchanger? 11. Define surface effectiveness factor. 12. Define multi layer super insulation. 13. What is the use of cryogenic regenerators? 14. List the various types of insulation systems for space propulsion. 15. What do you meant by Aerogel Beads? 16. Define cryogenic propellants. 17. Define specific impulse. 18. What is the purpose of storage tank in rocket propulsion? 19. What is the function of Metallic Resistance thermometer? 20. Define thermocouple. Understand 1. What is the trend of cryogenic engineering in India in future? 2. What is the fundamental difference between simple Lindle hampson and precooled Lindle hampson process? 3. What are the advantages of simple Claude process over kapitza process? 4. Differentiate between the Dual pressure Claude and Heylandt process? 5. Where the Philips helium liquefaction process is employed? Why? 6. Why Simon helium liquefaction process is preferred for liquefaction process for Helium? 7. Which is the best for Helium liquefaction process? Why? 8. Difference between the Linde Brown and L Air Liquide process of Hydrogen seperation? 9. When do you prefer cryogenic separator of Helium? 10. For what type of application, you would prefer to use propellant feed system in rocket propulsion? 11. What are the advantages of Alkali electrolyte over molten carbonate electrolyte? 12. What do you understand by sub atmospheric pressure? 13. Cryogenic engineering will help to reduce the energy growth in India. Discuss. 14. What is meant by magnetic Thermometer? 15. What is the purpose of Optical liquid level indicator? 16. What do you understand by Thermal shields and insulation? 17. Which is the best method for transportation of Cryogenic fluids? 18. Differentiate between the fatigue and impact strength. 19. What are the advantages of pressure swing adsorption over vacuum swing adsorption? 20. Why do you prepare pressure swing adsorption for separation of air? Apply 1. Evaluate the liquid yield, the work per unit mass compressed, the work per unit mass liquefied, and the figure of merit for a simple Linde Hampson system using nitrogen as the working fluid. The system operates between 1 atm and 300K at point 1 and 200atm and point 2. The compressor may be assumed to be 75% reversible and the temperature of approach is 10°C. 2. An ideal gas mixture of 30% methane and 70% hydrogen by volume is to be separated at 300K. Determine the minimum power requirement to produce 1 kg/s of hydrogen. 3. Determine the inside heat transfer coefficient and friction factor for flow of nitrogen gas at 150K and 1 atm inside a 12 mm inside diameter smooth tube that is coiled in a 600 mm diameter helix. The tube wall has a temperature of 160K, and the mass flow rate of the nitrogen gas is 30 kg/s.

241


4. 5. 6.

Determine the threshold field strength for indium at 3 K, assuming that the parabolic rule for the transition curve is valid for indium. When an external magnetic field of 0.0150 tesla is applied to an indium wire, the material changes from the superconducting state to the normal state. Determine the temperature of the wire. Determine the ratio of the electronic contribution to the specific heat to the lattice specific heat for copper at (a) 20K, (b) 2K, and (c) 0.2K.

Analyze/Evaluate 1. To develop cryogenic fluids for medical applications. 2. To develop new cryogenic fluids for space programme. Unit I Fundamentals of Cryogenics Insight on Cryogenics - Properties of Cryogenic fluids - Material properties at Cryogenic Temperatures Carnot Liquefaction Cycle - F.O.M. and Yield of Liquefaction Cycle - Inversion Curve – Joule Thomson Effect - Linde Hampson Cycle - Precooled Linde Hampson Cycle - Claudes Cycle Dual Cycle Helium refrigerated hydrogen liquefaction systems 9 Hours Unit II Separation of Cryogenic Gases Binary Mixtures - T-C and H-C Diagrams - Principle of Rectification - Rectification Column Analysis – McCabe Thiele Method - Adsorption Systems for purification Cryogenic gas plants 9 Hours Unit III Cryo-coolers and Cryo-refrigerators J. T. Cryocoolers - Stirling Cycle Refrigerators - G. M. Cryocoolers - Pulse Tube Refrigerators Regenerators used in Cryogenic Refrigerators Magnetic refrigerators 9 Hours Unit IV Cryogens Handling Cryogenic Dewar Constructive and Design, Cryogenic Transfer Lines - Different Types of Vacuum Pumps - Instrumentation to measure Flow - Level and Temperature. Insulations used in cryogenic systems 9 Hours Unit V Cryogens Handling Applications Applications of Cryogenics in Space Programs – Superconductivity - Cryo Metallurgy - Medical applications Cryo electronics - cryogenic detectors - cryonics 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1. Mamata Mukhopadhyay, Fundamentals of Cryogenic Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, 2010. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Thomas M. Flynn, Cryogenic Engineering, Marcel Dekker, New York 2005. J. G. Weisend, The Handbook of Cryogenic Engineering, CRC Press, 1998. K. D. Timmerhaus and T. M. Flynn, Cryogenic Process Engineering, Plenum Press, New York, 1989. R. B Scott., Cryogenic Engineering, Van Nostrand and Company Inc., 1985. Randall F. Barron, Cryogenic Systems, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 1985. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/112101004/

242


11M005 REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 3 1 0 3.5 Objectives 

To understand the underlying principles of operation in different Refrigeration & Air conditioning systems and components To study the air-conditioning cycles and their applications To provide knowledge on design aspects of Refrigeration & Air conditioning Systems To study the refrigeration and air conditioning components

  

Program Outcomes (POs) b) The graduates will be able to acquire the knowledge capability of analyzing and solving any concept or problem associated with heat energy dynamics and utilization. To teach and train the students about the heat energy dynamics and utilization. Students can able to understand the working concepts of Thermal Engineering. (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices.

Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to understand the principles and practice of thermal comfort  Able to understand the vapor compression and heat-driven refrigeration systems  Able to design considerations of air-side, water-side, ventilation and refrigeration systems  Evaluate applications and design calculations of HVAC&R systems Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version) 1 Remember 2 Understand 3 Apply 4 Analyze/ Evaluate 5 Create Total ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No.

35

Test 1*

Test 2*

20 20 20 40 -100

20 20 20 40 -100



Remember

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 35 *

Write any five applications of refrigeration Define RSHF and Bypass factor. State merits of an air refrigeration system Define ‘tons of refrigeration’ How are the fans classified? List the components of cooling load estimate. Define “COP”. What is the function of throttling valve? What is meant by cascade system? Define specific humidity. State the function of rectifier in vapour absorption refrigeration systems.


243


12. Define by-pass factor for cooling coil. 13. Mention the function of each fluid in a three-fluid vapour absorption system. Understand 1. What do you mean by the term “infiltration” in heat load calculations? 2. Compare the vapour compression and vapour absorption refrigeration systems? 3. What is the refrigeration effect of the refrigerant? 4. Represent the following psychrometric process using skeleton psychrometric chart? a) Cooling and dehumidification, b) Evaporative cooling. 5. How does the actual vapour compression cycle differ from that of the ideal cycle? 6. Which thermodynamic cycle is used in air conditioning of air planes using air as refrigerant? 7. Differentiate absolute humidity and relative humidity? 8. why reciprocating compressor cannot be used as a vaccum pump for producing high vacuum. 9. What are the specific problems concerned to factory air conditioning? 10. Why a throttle valve is used in vapour compressor refrigerator. 11. What are the different factors which must be considered in evaluating cooling load? 12. What are the different means by which this cooling load can be reduced? 13. Compare the use of two position valve with the use of a modulating valve. 14. Differentiate between comfort air-conditioning and industrial airconditioning. Apply 1. Air enters the compressor of an air-standard Brayton cycle at 100kPa, 300K with a volumetric flow ratio of 5m3/s. The compressor pressure ratio is 10. The turbine inlet temperature is 1400K. Determine (a) thermal efficiency of the cycle, (b) back work ratio, (c) net power developed in kW. 2. Dew point temperature of above air is 10.08. How cooling tower should be designed for refrigeration systems? 3. A one tonne refrigerator on vapour compression cycle works within the temperature limits of 268 K and 313 K. Refrigerant leaves the compressor dry and saturated. Calculate the COP (i) if there is no sub-cooling and (ii) If the refrigerant is sub-cooled by 20oC. Also calculate the power required to run the refrigerator in both the cases. The properties of the refrigerant is Temp K 268 4.

hf 31.5

Enthalpy (kJ/kg) hg hfg --154

sf 0.125

Entropy (kJ/kg K) sg ---

sfg 0.574

Sp. heat Cpl 1.03

313 74.59 203.2 ---5 0.6825 ----The atmospheric air at 760 mm of Hg, dry bulb temperature 15 oC and wet bulb temperature 11oC enters a heating coil whose temperature is 41oC. Assuming by-pass factor of heating coil as 0.5, determine dry bulb temperature, wet bulb temperatre and relative humidity of the air leaving the coil. Also determine the sensible heat added to the air per kg of dry air.

Analyze/ Evaluate 1. Design a vapour compression refrigeration system that will maintain the refrigerated space at -15°C while operating in an environment at 20°C using refrigerant 134a as a working fluid. 2. A multi-storied shopping mall has installed 5 x 110 TR reciprocating compressors of which fourcompressors are in use for 16 hours per day. Due to higher energy cost shopping mall chief engineerhas decided to replace reciprocating compressors with screw compressors. Chief engineer needfollowing input from energy consultant.i. Comparison of power consumption of both reciprocating and screw compressors?ii. Annual cost savings (for 350 days operation). Present unit cost Rs 6.50 per kWh, investmentfor 220 TR machine Rs 30 lakh.iii. What should be the size of cooling tower required for proposed screw compressors?

244


Unit I Refrigeration Systems Multistage and multiple vapour compression refrigeration systems - Cascade system - Vapour absorption refrigeration system- Single Effect / Double Effect Systems – Types – Analysis – Advanced cycles .Simulation of Refrigeration cycles, Flowcharting and programming Solar vapour absorption system 9 Hours Unit II Refrigeration System Components Refrigeration Compressors, Different Types, Performance, Capacity Control – Evaporators, Evaporators Circuitry, Applications and Different Types – Condensers, Types, Evaporative Condenser, Optimum Cooling Water Rate and Velocity, Cooling Towers, Range and Approach, Air Washers, Spray Ponds, Natural and Induced Draught System – Expansion Devices Solenoid valve and Shutoff valve 9 Hours Unit III Refrigerants – Refrigeration Controls and Applications Refrigerants - properties - selection of refrigerants, Alternate Refrigerants, Refrigeration plant controls testing and charging of refrigeration Units. Balancing of system components. Control system of temperature, Pressure, Oil Flow. Applications to refrigeration systems - ice plant - food storage plants milk -chilling plants – refrigerated cargo ships Defrost control concept 9 Hours Unit IV Air Conditioning Systems and Components Characteristics of Human metabolic activities with changing climate-sensation of heat and comfort zoneDesign of solar shading devices and Mechanical Ventilation systems- Construction Details of Room Air Conditioner – Window Type, Package Type, Split Type Central Units – Air Distribution Devices – Air Circuits – Air Supply System air cleaning and air filters - humidifiers - dehumidifiers - air washers elementary treatment of duct design - air distribution system Automotive air conditioning system 9 Hours Unit V Cooling Load Calculations Types of loads considered for Air Conditioning - Design of space cooling load - heat transmission through building-Solar radiation - infiltration - internal heat sources (sensible and latent) - outside air and fresh air load - estimation of total load - Domestic, commercial and industrial systems - central air conditioning systems. Computerized cooling load calculations – Packages - Simulation of psychometric processes Simulation of air flow in AC systems - EER value assessment -Environmental issues in simulation Computerized energy calculation Radiant time series cooling load calculation. 9 Hours Total: 45 + 15 Hours Textbook 1. C. P. Arora, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2008. References 1. Langley and C. Billy, Refrigeration and Air conditioning, Ed. 3, Engle wood Cliffs (NJ), Prentice Hall of India ,New Delhi, 2006. 2. Roy J. Dossat, Principles of Refrigeration, Pearson Education , New Delhi, 2007 3. N. F Stoecker and Jones, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, TMH, New Delhi, 2008 4. Manohar Prasad, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 2007 5. J. B Hains, Automatic Control of Heating & Air conditioning ,Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., 2005 6. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcoursecontents/IIT%20Kharagpur/Ref%20and%20Air%20Cond/New_index1.html

245


11M006 RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives  To understand the importance of renewable energy and its utilization for the thermal and electrical energy needs and also the environmental aspects of these resources  The students are expected to understand and analyze the pattern of renewable energy resources and suggest methodologies / technologies for its utilization Program Outcomes (POs) (b) The graduates will be able to acquire the knowledge, capability of analyzing and solving any concept or problem associated with heat energy dynamics and utilization. Students will be able to understand the working concepts of thermal engineering. Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to understand how renewable energy can be used to help reducing greenhouse gases.  Able to understand the principles of solar energy and wind energy.  Able to understand the challenges and problems associated with the use of various energy sources, including fossil fuels, with regard to future supply and the environment ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No. 1 2 3 4 5

36


Test 1*

Test 2*

35 35 30 --100

35 35 30 --100



Remember

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 36 *

State various subsystems in a solar thermal energy conversion system. State the principle of solar thermo electric convertors. What are the applications of solar PV system? Which are the types of geothermal fluids? What is the temperature range? What is geothermal gradient? What is geothermal deposit? State the various forms of Ocean Thermal Resources. State the merits and limitations of Ocean Energy Conversion Plants. What are the limitations of ocean wave energy? Write the principle of oscillating air column ocean wave machine. State the essential features of a probable site for a wind farm. Define yaw control and pitch control. What is ethanol? What is methanol? State the various principal routes of Biomass energy conversion to useful energy. What are the types of fuel cells? Define hydrogen energy.


246


18. What is nuclear fusion? 19. State the various main equipments and main auxiliaries in a Municipal Waste to Energy Incineration plant. State the typical ratings. 20. What is Molten Carbonate Fuel Cells (MCFC)? 21. What is Solid Oxide Fuel Cells (SOFC)? Understand 1.

Compare the following types of collectors to be used for a solar thermal power plant with respect to temperature, Concentration ratio, Suitability i. Flat plate collector ii. Evacuated tube collector 2. Difference between the distributed collector system and central receiver system in solar thermal applications. 3. Why thermal storage is preferred in solar power plants? 4. What is hot dry rock geothermal source? How is it used? 5. Compare a geothermal power plant and a thermal power plant. 6. Describe a binary cycle geothermal power plant. 7. Differentiate between ocean wave energy and ocean tidal energy 8. Compare ocean waves and ocean tides with references to the period, energy density and energy conversion plants. 9. How a wind farm is controlled? Which are the hierarchical control levels? 10. Describe the construction of a typical three blade horizontal shaft wind turbine generator unit. 11. What is the difference between fuel cell and battery? 12. Derive an expression for emf of a fuel cell. Apply 1.

2.

3. 4. 5.

Calculate the angle made by beam radiation with the normal to a flat collector on December 1, at 9.00 AM., solar time for a location at 28o 35’ N. The collector is tilted at an angle of latitude plus 10 o, with the horizontal and is pointing due south. Wind at 1 standard atmospheric pressure and 15oC temperature has a velocity of 10 m/s. The turbine has diameter of 120 m and its operating speed in 40 r.p.m at maximum efficiency. Calculate i. The total power density in the wind stream ii. The maximum obtainable power density assuming efficiency is 40% iii. The total power produced in kW iv. The torque and axial thrust Why geothermal energy has not been in commercial use in India? For a parabolic collector of length 2 m, the angle of acceptance is 15 o. Find the concentration ratio of the collector. What are the main four fusion reactions, which are considered for use in fusion reactors? Which one is most favorable reaction?

Unit I Solar Energy The sun as a perennial source of energy; flow of energy in the universe and the cycle of matter in the human ecosystem; direct solar energy utilization - solar thermal applications – water heating systems, space heating and cooling of buildings, solar cooking, solar ponds, solar green houses, solar thermal electric systems; Solar photovoltaic power generation; solar production of hydrogen 9 Hours

247


Unit II Ocean Energy and Geothermal Energy Wave energy – Energy from waves; energy potential, Conversion devices; Tidal Energy – Basic principle, energy potential, Conversion systems, Ocean thermal energy conversion – Methodology, Applications. Geothermal energy - classification of geothermal resources; schematic of geothermal power plants, operational and environmental problems Estimation of energy and power in simple single basin and double cycle tidal system 9 Hours Unit III Wind Energy Basic principles of wind energy conversion – classification of wind turbines - Types of rotors ; Design of windmills – wind turbine rotor, regulating system for rotor, wind power generation curves - wind data and energy estimation; site selection considerations – Merits and demerits of wind energy systems Selection of optimum wind energy generators 9 Hours Unit IV Bio-Energy Bio mass resources – Conversion technologies – Biochemical conversion – Biomass gasification; Biogas – production, Factors affecting bio gas production – Biogas plants; Energy recovery from Urban waste, power generation from liquid waste – Biomass cogeneration - Bio-fuels Power generation from land fill gas 9 Hours Unit V Emerging Technologies Fuel cell – types – AFCs, PEMFC, PAFC, MCFCs, SOFC – Comparison of Electrolysis and the Fuel cell process; Hydrogen energy – hydrogen production - hydrogen storage – types, using nano-crystalline magnesium based nickel hydride; alcohol energy; nuclear fusion; cold fusion; application Merits and demerits Power from satellite stations 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1.

D. P. Kothari, K. C. Singal and Rakesh Ranjan, Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging Technologies, Prentice Hall of India , New Delhi, 2009.

References Godfrey Boyle, Renewable energy – power for sustainable future, Oxford University Press in association with the Open University, New Delhi,2004. 2. S. A. Abbasi and Naseema Abbasi, Renewable energy sources and their environmental impact Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,2001. 3. John W. Twidell and Anthony D. Weir, Renewable energy resources, English Language Book Society (ELBS), 2006. 4. G. D. Rai, Renewable Energy Sources, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi 2000. 5. Harsh K. Gupta, Sukanta Roy, Geothermal energy: an alternative resource for the 21st century, Elsevier Publication, Netherlands, 2007. 6. S.P.Sukhatme and J.K.Nayak, solar thermal utilisation, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 7. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/IIT MADRAS/Management_Science_II/Pdf/5_1.pdf 8. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/112105051/ 1.

248


11M007 AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives 

To impart knowledge to the students in the principles of operation and constructional details of various Automobile components and subsystems To impart knowledge to students in various systems of Automobile Engineering and to have the practice for Assembling and Dismantling of Engine Parts At the end of the course, the students will be able to have a sound knowledge of the vehicles and the mechanisms involved in the starting systems, ignition systems and an engine control systems

 

Program Outcomes (POs) (a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. (j) The graduates can become job-givers rather than just job-seekers. (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and Modern practices. Course Outcomes (COs) 

At the end of the course, the students will be able to know the principles of operation and constructional details of various Automobile components and subsystems.  To gain knowledge in Automobile Engineering and to have the practice for Assembling and Dismantling of Engine Parts.  At the end of the course, the students will be able to have a sound knowledge and functional importance of every components and control devices in the vehicles. ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No 1 2 3 4 5

37


Test I*

Test II*

30 40 30 --100

30 40 30 --100



Remember

30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 37 *

Name the parts that are attached to the engine block. What is the function of camshaft? What is a circlip? Where it is used? State the advantages of synthetic lubricating oils. Name a few materials used for oil filter elements. What is a dip stick? What is known as common rail fuel injection system? What are the functions of a carburettor? What is the voltage of the batteries generally used in the automotive ignition systems?


249


39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59.

What are the two basic approaches to decrease pollution from automobiles? Define ‘light-off temperature’ of a catalytic converter. Name the electrolyte used in a lambda probe. State the functions of automobile transmission system. What is an over drive? What are its advantages? Define whirling of shafts. What are the objectives of vehicle suspension? Define ‘offset’ with reference to automobile wheels. What are ‘primary ‘and ‘secondary’ brakes? Name any two brake shoe adjusters. List main parts of an ABS. What is a radial engine? Name various type of fuel cells. Enlist main components of a hybrid electric car. Give some application of metal spinning process and explosive forming. List out various types of plastics. What is meant by thermoplastic and thermosetting plastic? Give some application of Blow molding process. What is meant by rotational molding? Name any two brake shoe adjusters. Name any Indian vehicle using common rail

Understand 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24.

How are the materials choosen for chassis frames and body? Which types of engines generally employ air cooling system? How does the feed pump gets drive? How is the seizing of piston caused? Why are the baffle plates provided in the fuel tank? Which type of final drives is used most commonly? Why is an automobile tyre usually black in colour? State the advantages of hydraulic brakes over mechanical brakes? Which material is generally used for brake drums? why? Out of the camber and the castor , which is measured first and why? Why do we provide gear box in a vehicle? Where is the contact breaker located on the engine? Why asbestos being phased out as material for clutch facings? Compare plug-in-hybrids with conventional hybrids. Out of the diesel and petrol engines , which involves less risk of catching fire ? why ? Give the basic difference between a fluid flywheel and a torque converter.

Apply 1.

2.

An automobile clutch has a clutch plate of 160mm inside and 240mm outside diameters. Six springs in the clutch provide a total force of 4.8 kN , when the clutch is new and each spring is compressed 5mm. The maximum torque developed by the automobile engine is 250Nm . Determine (i) factor of safety for the new clutch and (ii) the amount of wear of the clutch facing that will take place before the clutch starts slipping . Assume coefficient of friction for the facing is 0.3. Two shafts, Whose axes are inclined at 20 are connected by means of a Hooke’s joint at 20 . The driving shaft rotates uniformly at 500 r.p.m .What are the maximum and the minimum velocities of the driven shaft?

250


Unit I Vehicle Structure and Engines Types of Automobiles - Vehicle Construction – Chassis – Frame and Body –aerodynamics. Components of Engine – Their forms, Functions and Materials - Review of Cooling and Lubrication systems in Engine – Turbo Chargers – Engine Emission Control by 3–Way Catalytic Controller –. Alternative Energy Resources - LPG –Bio –Diesel – Electric vehicles. Hybrid vehicles – fuel cells 9 Hours Unit II Engine Auxiliary Systems Carburetor–working principle- Electronic fuel injection system – Mono-point and Multi - Point Injection Systems – Construction, Operation and Maintenance of Lead Acid Battery - Electrical systems – Battery generator – Starting Motor and Drives – Lighting and Ignition (Battery, Magneto Coil and Electronic Type)-Regulators-cut outs. – CRDI Variable geometry technology 9 Hours Unit III Transmission Systems Clutch – Types and Construction – Gear Boxes, Manual and Automatic – Simple Floor Mounted Shift Mechanism –Fluid flywheel-Torque convertors– Propeller shaft – Slip Joint – Universal Joints – Differential and Rear Axle – Hotchkiss Drive and Torque Tube Drive. Over drives – transfer box 9 Hours Unit IV Steering, Brakes and Suspension Wheels and Tyres – Wheel Alignment Parameters - Steering Geometry and Types of steering gear box– Power Steering – Types of Front Axle – Suspension systems – Braking Systems – Types and Construction – Diagonal Braking System – Antilock Braking System Tubeless tire, wire drive steering mechanism 9 Hours Unit V Engine Control Systems Control modes for fuel control-engine control subsystems – ignition control methodologies – different ECU’s used in the engine management – block diagram of the engine management system. In vehicle networks: CAN standard, format of CAN standard – diagnostics systems in modern automobiles. Safety system: air bags, parking sensor, cruise control 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1. Kirpal Singh, Automobile Engineering Vol. 1& 2, Standard Publishers, New Delhi. 2009. References 1. Crouse and Anglin, Automotive Mechanism, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2003. 2. Newton, Steeds and Garet, Motor vehicles, Butterworth Publishers, 2000 3. S. Srinivasan, Automotive Mechanics, 2003, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi,2003 4. Joseph Heitner, Automotive Mechanics, East-West Press, 2006. 5. H. M. Sethi, Automobile Technology, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2007

251


11M008 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives 

To provide sound knowledge about various techniques used for the measurement of industrial Parameters To have an adequate knowledge about Transducers and various elements and components of Control system



Program Outcomes (POs) (a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. (g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in both Mechanical Engineering as well as IT companies. (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes (COs)  At the end of the course students able to know the various measuring instruments  Students gain a sound knowledge on general concepts of measurement system  Students able to control any kind of mechanical system with electrical components ASSESSMENT PATTERN

S. No 1 2 3 4 5


38

Test 1*

Test 2*

Model Examination$

Semester End Examination**

40 35 25 --100

35 45 20 --100

30 40 30 --100

30 35 35 --100

Remember

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

38 *

Define Measurement. What is Calibration? Define Sensitivity. Define Precision. What is Systematic Error? Mention the types of Errors. What is piezoelectric effect? What is meant by moral autonomy? Name any two devices used for acceleration measurement. Name any two devices used for vibration measurement. Define Photo cell. Define Solar cell. State the principle used in Bimetallic thermometer. Define Thermocouple.


252


15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.

Define Thermistor. Name the parameters used for measurement of temperature. What is the significance of Pressure measurement? What is Absolute Pressure? Define Gauge Pressure. Give the value for standard Atmospheric pressure. Define Sensitivity of a control system.

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

How electrical amplifications are superior to mechanical amplifications? Distinguish between Vibration and Shock. What is the advantage of using Multi Lever system in Force measurement? How do the static and dynamic characteristics of instruments affect measurement? Compare the static and dynamic characteristics of Measuring Instruments. Distinguish between Recording and Indicating instruments. Why Emissivity is important in radiation temperature measurement? Give the expression for calculating conduction error in temperature measurement of flowing fluids. Why is reference temperature necessary when using thermocouples? What are the difficulties associated with measurement of low resistance? Compare RTD with Thermistor.

Apply 1. 2. 3. 4.

5.

In a NC machine, the displacement of the tool is to be measured accurately. Suggest any one instrument for this. In a mechanical industry, the floor vibrations surrounding a high-speed compressor are to be measured. Discuss any two methods suitable for this condition. How is low pressure measured? A Thermistor of resistance 1000 ohms at 50°C temp is connected in a bridge circuit having all arms of resistance 1000 ohms. The supply voltage to the bridge is 40V. The resistance of the Thermistor increases by 5 ohms for a decrease of temp of 1°C. Find the temp if the open circuit voltage of the bridge is 50mv. An automobile driver uses a control system to maintain the speed of the car at a prescribed level. Sketch a block diagram to illustrate this feedback system.

Unit I General Concepts of Measurement The three stages of Generalized Measurement System – Performance Characteristics – Static and Dynamic characteristics - Factors considered in Selection of instruments – Error analysis and classification, Sources of error – Transducers, Classification - Displacement and Velocity transducers, Tachometer. Types of Electric Strain Gauges – Strain gauge bridges Calibration of strain gauges, gauging techniques and other factors 9 Hours Unit II Acceleration, Vibration and Level Measurement Elementary Accelerometers and Vibrometers - the Seismic instrument as Accelerometer, Piezoelectric and Bonded Strain gauge Accelerometers – Calibration of Accelerometers and Vibrometers – Level measurement – Float and Electrical conductivity methods Introduction to fast fourier transform (FFT) analyzer 9 Hours

253


Unit III Temperature and Pressure Measurement Glass thermometers, Platinum resistance thermometers, Thermistors, Thermocouples, Total Radiation Pyrometers, Temperature measuring problems in flowing fluid - Manometers, Pressure cells, Elastic transducers - Bulk modulus pressure gauge, McLeod gauge, Thermal Conductivity gauge Calibration of pressure gauge using dead weight tester 9 Hours Unit IV Signal Conditioning and Data Acquisition Instrumentation Amplifier characteristics – Wheatstone bridge – Integration, Differentiation and Sampling, A / D and D / A conversion – Elements and Types of Data Acquisition system – Data logging. Recording instruments – Chart recorder, X-Y recorder and U–V recorder Introduction to indicating instruments 9 Hours Unit V Control Systems Open – loop and Closed – loop controls, Elements of Closed loop control system - Introduction to Sampled data, Digital control and Multivariable control system, Mathematical models for Mechanical and Electrical systems, Transfer function, Block diagram representation,. Applications of Control systems – Machine Tool control, Position Control system using Servo motor, Feed water control, Speed control of drives, Temperature control system Signal flow graphs and control system components. 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1.

Thomas G. Beckwith, Roy D. Marangoni and V.John Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2006.

H. Lienhard, Mechanical Measurements,


I. J. Nagrath and Madan Gopal, Control Systems Engineering, New Age International, New Delhi, 2007. Ernest O. Doebelin, Measurement Systems - Application and Design, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd.,, New Delhi, 2005. D.V.S. Murty, Transducers and Instrumentation, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2010. Richard S. Figliola, Donald E Beasley, Theory and Design for Mechanical Measurements, Wiley India Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2010. D. Patranabis, Principles of Industrial Instrumentation, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.

254


11M009 DESIGN OF JIGS, FIXTURES AND PRESS TOOLS (Use of approved design data book is permitted) 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives  To learn various design considerations in designing jigs and fixtures for industrial application  To impart knowledge on press work technology and to learn the various design considerations for making press work dies  Able to design the jigs and fixtures and press work dies for the real world applications Program Outcomes (POs) (g) Graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in Mechanical Engineering as well as IT companies. (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. (j) The graduates can become job-givers rather than just job-seekers. (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices Course Outcomes (COs)  Develop knowledge about the design of different types of jigs and fixtures for various components  Understanding about press working technology and design considerations for making different types of dies  Develop knowledge to design jigs, fixtures and press work dies for real world applications ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No 1 2 3 4 5

39

Bloom’s Taxonomy (New version) Remember Understand Apply Analyze/ Evaluate Create Total

Test I*

Test II*

30 30 25 15 -100

20 30 20 30 -100

Model Examinations* 20 30 20 30 -100


Remember

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11 12 13 14 **

What is meant by tooling? Define jigs and fixtures. List the objectives of tool design. What is the difference between production and inspection devices? List some important tool materials. What is clamping? Define tolerance. Define drill bush. List different types of jigs. List different types of fixtures, List the advantages of modular fixtures. List the uses of inspection fixtures. What is meant by die clearance? What are the major advantages of compound dies?


255


15 What is purpose of stop? 16 List out various types of tooling 17 What are the advantages of jigs and fixtures? 18 What are the important properties of tool materials? 19 List different types of drill bushes. 20 What are the different types of error considered in jigs and fixtures design? Understand 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

What is the difference between jigs and fixtures? Where will you select hydraulic clamping? What is the use of tolerances in jigs and fixtures design? What are the general rules to be applied for designing jigs and fixtures? Why clearance required between work piece and bush? What is milling fixture? Name any two. List the steps to be followed in fixture designing. What are the functions of broaching fixture? Where will you prefer press work over metal cutting process? What is the difference between progressive and combination dies? what is meant by press tonnage? What is the standard method of holding job in surface grinding? What is the minimum wall thickness of drilling bushes? How the jigs are classified? Why angular clearance is necessary?

Apply 1 2 3 4 5 6

How to select the clamping type? How to identify the deviation in V block locator? How to decide drilling bush material, length, wall thickness and clearances? How the turning fixtures differ from milling fixture? Select the jig type for drilling holes in outer periphery of cylindrical Component and state the reason. Select the die type and state the reason for selection to produce M20 plain washer.

Analyze/ Evaluate 1 2 3

Design drilling jig for engine cylinder head. Design lathe fixture for I.C.Engine crank case machining Design die for Induction motor cooling fan cover

Unit I Purpose Types and Functions of Jigs and Fixtures Tool design objectives - Production devices - Inspection devices - Materials used in Jigs and Fixtures – Types of Jigs - Types of Fixtures-Mechanical actuation-pneumatic and hydraulic actuation-Analysis of clamping force-Tolerance and error analysis Locating and supporting methods. 9 Hours Unit II Jigs Drill bushes –different types of jigs-plate latch, channel, box, post, angle plate, angular post, turnover, pot jigs-Automatic drill jigs-Rack and pinion operated - Air operated Jigs components - Design of Jigs for given components Clearance between work piece and bushing 9 Hours

256


Unit III Fixtures General principles of boring, lathe, milling and broaching fixtures- Grinding, planning and shaping fixtures, assembly, Inspection and welding fixtures- Modular fixtures. Design of fixtures for given component. Errors in design and use of fixtures 9 Hours Unit IV Press Working Terminologies and Elements of Dies and Strip Lay Out Press working terminology-Presses and press accessories-Computation of capacities and tonnage requirements - Elements of progressive combination and compound dies: Die block-die shoe - Bolster plate-punch holder-guide pins and bushes – strippers – knockouts-stops –pilots Bending – springback & bend radius 9 Hours Unit V Design and Development of Dies Design and development of progressive and compound dies for Blanking and piercing operations. Bending dies – development of bending dies-forming and drawing dies-Development of drawing dies. Design considerations in forging, extrusion, casting and plastic dies Design a die for a given simple cup shaped component 9Hours Total: 45 hours Textbooks 1. 2.

Edward G. Hoffman, Jigs & Fixture Design, Thomson – Delmar Learning, Singapore, 2004 C. Elanchezhian, Design of Jigs, Fixtures and Press Tools, Eswar Press, 2007


David Spitler, Jeff Lantrip, Fundamentals of Tool Design, Society of Manufacturing Engineers, 2003 Fred Herbert Colvin, Jigs and Fixtures: A Reference Book Showing Many Types of Jigs and Fixtures in Actual Use, and Suggestions for Various Cases, Nabu Press, 2010 P. H. Joshi, Jigs & Fixtures,Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi 2004 Hiram E Grant, Jigs and Fixture, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2003 Fundamentals of Tool Design, CEEE Edition, ASTME, 1983

257


11M010 COMPOSITE MATERIALS AND MECHANICS 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives  To understand the need of composite in structural and non-structural applications  To know the manufacturing, properties and application of different types of reinforcement and matrix  To understand the fabrication techniques involved in the polymer, metal, and ceramic matrix composites Program Outcomes (POs) (i)The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes (COs)   

Able to describe the properties of various available composite materials. Able to design the composite product suitable for specific applications. Able to select suitable composite or smart materials for industrial oriented applications.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No

Bloom’s Taxonomy (New version)

Test I*

Test II*

Model Examinations*

1 2 3 4 5


40 40 20 --100

35 40 25 --100

30 40 30 --100


Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

What is mean by composites? Explain the need for composites. List out the advantages of composite. What are all the types composite based on matrix? Draw neat sketches for (i) fiber (ii) particulate and (iii) laminar composites and mark the different constituents. Mention various forms of fibers used for composite materials. State any two functions of matrix in composite materials. State any two functions of reinforcement in composite materials. What is mean by Whiskers? What is mean by Thermoset Matrix Materials? State the benefits of polymer matrix composites. Give two applications for composites in biomedical applications. What is mean by lamina? Define laminate. What is meant by hybrid composites? Write some of the application of filament winding method. State any four advantages of RTM. List any four defects in compression molded SMC part. What is mean by Nonautoclave curing? Define the term “Metal Matrix Composite”.

258


21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33.

Write down applications of Metal Matrix Composites. List out the advantages of aluminium matrix composite. What is mean by Rule of Mixture? Define the term “squeeze casting” What is the liquid state processes used for manufacturing MMCs? What is mean by powder metallurgy? State the benefits of powder metallurgy. What are monolithic ceramics? Explain the Chemical Vapor Infiltration processes. Write the salient properties of ceramic materials. State any two methods used for manufacturing Carbon/Carbon composites. State any two applications of Carbon/ Carbon composites. What is mean by oxidative etching?

Understand 1. How the composite differs from alloy? 2. What is the need of composite? 3. Why the composite is an orthotropic material? 4. What is use of fillers in composites? 5. Why small diameter fiber is preferred in composite? 6. What are the advantages of ceramics over metals as fibers? 7. Why Sol-gel technique is used for manufacturing glass fiber? 8. Why the polymer matrix composite used in large proportion in aerospace? 9. Why the hand lay-up process mostly preferred? 10. How composite is manufactured by RTM process? 11. What is the use of hardener in polymer matrix composite? 12. How the liquid state processes used for manufacturing of MMCs? 13. What is the use of control systems in an autoclave molding process? 14. How the volume fractions effect the overall performance of the composites? 15. What are all the various process involved in the recycling of PMC’s 16. Where the ceramic matrix composite are mostly used?

Apply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

How many elastic constants are required to describe stress to strain relation for an isotropic material, an orthotropic material and an anisotropic material? What is ratio to be required for mixing the hardener in epoxy for curing purpose? How the fiber angle can be changed in filament winding machine? Find out the young’s modulus of composite having 60% volume fraction of fiber. E f = 68.9 GPa and Em = 3.45GPa Evaluate the effect of fiber volume fraction in composite. Give the solution to avoid improper mixing of reinforcement in MMC.

Unit I Introduction to Composites Fundamentals of composites, characteristics, need for composites, Enhancement of properties, Reinforcements - glass fibers, boron fibers, carbon fibers, organic fibers, aramid fibers, ceramic fibers, oxide and nonoxide fibers, Forms of reinforcements - Roving , Woven fabrics Non woven, random mats, whiskers, Matrix materials – Polymers - Thermosetting resins, thermoplastic resins , Metals, Ceramic materials Fiber surface treatment, sol-gel technique 9 Hours

259


Unit II Polymer Matrix Composites Processing of polymer matrix composites- hand lay-up, Spray lay-up processes, Compression moldingSMC Reinforced reaction injection molding, Resin transfer molding, Pultrusion, Filament winding, Applications of polymer matrix composites Auto clave method, Bulk molding compound, vacuum assisted resin transfer molding, 9 Hours Unit III Metal Matrix Composites Characteristics of MMCs, Various types of Metal matrix composites, Advantages and limitations of MMCs, Effect of reinforcements on properties – Volume fraction – Rule of mixtures, Processing of MMCs - Liquid state processing- stir casting, squeeze casting, infiltration, solid state processing - Powder metallurgy, diffusion bonding, In-situ processes, applications of MMCs. Selection of reinforcement and matrix for MMC 9 Hours Unit IV Ceramic Matrix Composites Need for CMCs, Processing of CMCs- cold pressing and sintering, hot pressing, infiltration, chemical vapor deposition and chemical vapor impregnation, sol-gel and polymer pyrolysis, high temperature synthesis properties and applications of CMC. Quality inspection methods for composites 9 Hours Unit V Advances in Composites Carbon fiber composites – properties, chemical vapor deposition– oxidative etching, liquid phase oxidation carbon/carbon composites - properties and applications of C/C Composites, multifilament superconducting composites Applications smart composites 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbooks 1. 2.

K. K. Chawla, Composite Materials Science and Engineering, Springer, New York, 2008. P. K. Mallick, Fiber-Reinforced Composites: Materials Manufacturing and Design, CRC Press, New Delhi,2007.

References 1. Hong T Hahn and Stephen W. Tsai, Introduction to Composite Materials, Technomic Publishing Co, Inc,1980. 2. T.W Clyne and P.J Withers, An Introduction to Metal Matrix Composites, Cambridge University Press, 1995 3. F.L.Matthews and R.D.Rawlings, Composite Materials: Engineering and Science, Woodhead Publishing, 2005 4. A. K. Kaw, Mechanics of Composite Materials, CRC Press, NY, 2006. 5. J. C.Halpin , Primer on Composite Materials, Analysis, Techomic Publishing Co, 2006. 6. Robert M .Jones, Mechanics of Composite Materials, CRC Press, 2nd Edition , 1998.

260


11M011 DESIGN OF HEAT EXCHANGERS 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives    

To understand the basic types of heat exchangers to fabricate the heat exchanger To study the stress and flow analysis and failures in heat exchanger To study the performance and application of heat exchanger To study the types of condensers and cooling towers

Program Outcomes (POs) (b) The graduates will be able to acquire the knowledge, capability of analyzing and solving any concept or problem associated with heat energy dynamics and utilization. Students will be able to understand the working concepts of thermal engineering. (c) The graduates will be able to learn various techniques available to make shapes and designs in various materials. Students will be understood the methodologies to be followed in casting, fabrication, machining, materials, metallurgy and forming of engineering materials. At the end of the course, students will be able to select and perform suitable method of producing a desirable component in industry. (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes (COs)  

Able to Understand the basic heat transfer processes. Able to Calculate heat transfer rates using correlations of non-dimensional groups, analytical techniques or numerical techniques  Able to Understand the compromises between effectiveness and cost inherent in the design optimization of heat transfer equipment. ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No. 1 2 3 4 5

40


Test 1*

Test 2*

20 30 20 30 -100

20 30 20 30 -100



Remember

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 40 *

What is a heat exchanger? How the heat exchangers are classified? Define heat exchanger effectiveness. What do you meant by fouling in heat exchanger? Give four industrial application of heat exchanger What are the effects of turbulence? Define the term ‘ thermal stress’ List out the limitation of plate heat exchanger


261


9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

What are the modes of condensation? Write down the importance of friction factor. Mention the applications of the heat exchanger. What is meant by film boiling? Write the Wein’s displacement law. Write the relationship between effectiveness and number of transfer units for a parallel flow heat exchanger. 15. Define Reynolds number. 16. Identify industries where the cooling tower is used. 17. What are the salient features of multiple effect evaporators? Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

Differentiate regenerator and recuperator. Why are baffles used in shell-and-tube used in heat exchanger? What characterizes a unit as compact? Differentiate evaporator and condenser. Classify tubular heat exchanger based on operating range? In what way the extended surfaces are helpful in heat exchangers? Differentiate effectiveness and number of transfer units method. compare film wise and drop wise condensation. Why Reynolds number is important? What is the effect of liquid pressure on boiling? Find the various factors which have an effect on heat transfer capacity of an Evaporator. How the local and average convection coefficients for flow past a flat plate are related? Characterize the effect of non-condensable gases on rate of condensation.

Apply 1.

2.

Oil is cooled to 375K in concurrent heat exchanger by transferring its heat to the cooling water that leaves the cooler at 300K. However, it is required that oil must be cooled down to 350K by lengthening the cooler while the oil and water flow rates, their inlet temperatures and other dimensions of the cooler remaining. Air at 1 atm and 400K and with a velocity of U∞=10 m/s flows across a compact heat exchanger matrix having the configuration of circular tube continuous fin heat exchanger. Surface 8.0-3/8T: tube OD=1.02cm; fin pitch=3.15/cm; fin thickness=0.033cm; fin area/total area=0.839; air-passage hydraulic diameter=0.3633 cm; free area/frontal area, σ=0.534; heat transfer area/total volume=587m2/m3. Calculate the heat transfer coefficient, and frictional pressure drop for the air side. The length of the matrix is 0.6 m. A gas-to-air single –pass cross-flow plate-fin heat exchanger has overall dimensions of 0.300m X 0.600m X 0.900m and employs strip fins on the air side. The following information is provided for the air side: Geometrical properties operating conditions Fin density = 0.615mm -1 Volumetric airflow rate = 0.6m 3 /s Plate spacing = 6.35mm Reynolds number = 786 Fin offset length = 3.18mm; Fanning friction factor = 0.0683 Air flow length = 0.6m; Inlet pressure = 110kPa Hydraulic diameter = 0.002383m; Inlet temperature = 4ºC Fin metal thickness = 0.15mm; Outlet temperature = 194.5ºC Minimum free-flow area =0.1177m2; Gas constant forair = 287.04J/kgK; Free-flow area / frontal area = 0.437. Determine the air-side pressure drop.

262


Analyze/ Evaluate 1.

Distilled water with a flow rate of 50kg/s enters a baffled shell-and-tube heat exchanger at 32°C and leaves at 25°C. Heat will be transferred to 150kg/s of raw water coming from a supply at 20°C. Design a heat exchanger for this purpose. A single shell and tube pass is preferable. The tube diameter is 19mm OD with 16mm ID and tubes are laid out on a 6.25cm 2pitch. A maximum length of the heat exchanger of 8m is required because of space limitations. The tube material thermal conductivity is 42.3W/mK. Assume a total fouling resistance of 0.000176m2K/W. Note that surface over design should not exceed 30%. The maximum flow velocity through the tube is also suggested to be 2m/s to prevent erosion. Perform a thermal and hydraulic analysis of the heat exchanger.

2.

A heat exchanger is required to heat treated cooling water with a flow rate of 60 kg/s from 10°C to 50°C using the waste heat from water, cooling from 60°C to 20°C with the same flow rate as the cold water. The maximum allowable pressure drop for both streams is 120 kPa. A gasketed –plate heat exchanger with 301 plates having a channel width of 50 cm and a vertical distance between ports of 1.5 m is proposed and the plate pitch is 0.0035 m with an enlargement factor 1.25. The spacing between the plates is 6 mm. Plates are made of stainless steel (16.5W/mK). For a two-pass arrangement, analyze the problem to see if the proposed design is feasible. Could this heat exchanger be smaller or larger?

Unit I Heat Exchanger Types and Fabrication Heat exchanger types – fluid flow arrangement, types of application – Heat exchanger fabrication – tubular versus flat plate construction, tubes-to-header and joints, Header-sheet mounting,finned surfaces,tube bending and joining -Regenerators and Recuperators – Industrial Applications – Temperature Distribution and its Implications Types of regenerators and recuperators 9 Hours Unit II Flow and Stress Analysis Regenerators heat transfer analysis - Governing equation – influences of longitudinal wall heat conduction and transverse wall heat conduction - Effect of Turbulence – Friction Factor – Pressure Loss – Extended surface, tubular, plate heat exchanger - Stress in Tubes – Header sheets and Pressure Vessels – Thermal Stresses, Shear Stresses, Types of Failures Stress analysis of pulsed flow in plate type heat exchanger 9 Hours Unit III Design Aspects Basic concepts – LMTD method, inverse relationships, the effectiveness method – Design process - Effect of temperature-dependent fluid properties, fin efficiency and surface effectiveness, layer stacking and banking factor, entry and exit losses, header and distributors, effect of longitudinal conduction - Baffles – Effect of Deviations from Ideality Pinch design 9 Hours Unit IV Industrial Compact Heat Exchangers Types and performance of heat exchanger - Tube-fin, Diffusion bonded, welded plate, plate and shell, spiral, compact shell and tubes – heat exchanger reactors with reactant injection, catalytic reactor exchanger – surface selection – process exchangers, refrigeration exchangers Fouling in heat exchangers

263


9 Hours Unit V Condensers and Cooling Towers Condenser – types Design of Surface and Evaporative Condensers – Cooling Tower Performance characteristics. 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbooks 1. 2.

Ramesh K. Shah, Fundamentals of Heat Exchanger Design, Wiley, 2003 Sadik Kakac and Hongton Lu, Heat Exchangers: Selection, Rating and Thermal Design, CRC Press, 2002.


John E. Hesselgreaves, J.E Hesselgreaves, Hesselgreaves, Compact Heat Exchangers: Selection, Design and operation, Pergamon Pub – 2001. Bernd Becher, Hilla Becher, Cooling Towers Mit Press – 2005. Detlev G Kroger, Air cooled Heat Exchanger and Cooling Towers:Thermal – Flower Performance Evaluation and Design Vol-2, Pennwell Books Pub – 2004. L. Wang, B. Sunden and R. M Manglik, Plate Heat Exchangers – Design, Application and Performance - Computational Mechanics – 2007. D. Q. Kern, Process Heat Transfer, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2004.

264


11M012 VIBRATION AND CONDITIONS MONITORING 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives  

To understand the basics of vibration and condition monitoring in mechanical systems To monitor the operating conditions and vibrations of machinery and plant.

Program Outcomes (POs) (a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. (b) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern Practice in vibration. Course Outcomes (COs)   

Standardization in the fields of mechanical vibration and the effects of vibration on machines, vehicles and stationary structures, and of the condition monitoring of machines and structures, using multidisciplinary approaches. Standardization of terminology and nomenclature in the fields of mechanical vibration, mechanical shock and condition monitoring Acquiring knowledge on vibration and shock measuring instrumentation, e.g. transducers, vibration generators, signal conditioners, signal analysis instrumentation and signal acquisition systems

ASSESSMENT PATTERN S.No. 1 2 3 4 5

41


Test 1*

Test 2*

25 30 30 15 -100

20 30 30 20 -100



Remember

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 41 *

Define vibration. Define forced vibration Define free vibration. Define resonance. Define frequency Define simple harmonic motion Define critical speed of the shaft What is transmissibility ratio? Define normal mode Define principle coordinates Define influence Co-efficient List the types of vibration


265


13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

What are types of damping? List out the different methods of vibration State degrees of freedom What is the eigen value and eigen vectors? What is vibration isolation? What is vibration absorber? Differentiate between linear and non-linear vibration. Define coulomb damping.

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

What is the need for vibration analysis test? Mention the parts of vibration systems What is the marginal density function? What is the application of Duhamel's integral? What is an exciter? Name different types. State the condition for stable and unstable node State Lagrange’s equations What are vibration sensitivity criteria? Why vibration monitoring techniques is needed? What is the choice of monitoring parameters? What is the function of artificial damping? What are the condition monitoring methods? How to reduce the vibration at the source? Sate the mathematical modeling of vibrating system What is orthogonality principle?

Apply 1.

Consider two pendulums of length L as shown in the fig. Determine the natural frequency of each pendulum. If k=100 N/m, m1=2 kg, m2=5kg, L=0.20m, a=0.10m.

2.

A spring-mass system is shown in the fig. If the system is initially relaxed and a step-function is applied to the mass, find the response of the system.

3.

Find the natural frequency and amplitude ratio of the system shown in the fig.

266


Analyze/ Evaluate 1. A gun barrel weighing W kg has a recoil spring whose stiffness is k kg/m. If W = 450kg, k = 36000kg/cm and the barrel recoils 1m on firing determine. (a) The initial recoil velocity of the barrel. (b) The critical damping co-efficient of a dashpot which is engaged at the end of the recoil stroke. (c) The time required for the barrel to return to a position 5cm from its initial position. 2. An air compressor, running at a constant speed of 1200 rpm, is having large amplitude of vibration. A vibration absorber is added. The weight of the compressor is 500 lb and the compressor has an unbalance of 1.00 in-lb. Calculate the weight and the spring constant of the absorber if the natural frequencies of the system should be at least 10% from the impressed frequency. Unit I Introduction Relevance of and need for vibration analysis - Mathematical modeling of vibrating systems - Discrete and continuous systems - review of single-degree of freedom systems - free and forced vibrations, Various damping models Ground vibration testing 9 Hours Unit II Two Degree-of-Freedom Systems General solution to free vibration problem - damped free vibration - Forced vibration of undamped system dynamic vibration absorbers - Technical applications Vibration test on torsion pendulum 9 Hours Unit III Multi Degree-of-Freedom Systems Free and forced vibrations of multi-degree of freedom systems in longitudinal torsional and lateral modes Matrix methods of solution-normal modes - Orthogonality principle-Energy methods, Introduction to vibrations of plates Dynamics of rotating machinery 9 Hours Unit IV Vibration Control Introduction – Reduction of Vibration at the Source - Control of Vibration – by Structural design – Material Selection – Localized additions – Artificial damping – Resilient isolation, Vibration isolation Vibrations measurement on lathe 9 Hours Unit V Condition based Maintenance Principles and Applications Introduction - Condition Monitoring Methods - The Design of Information system, selecting methods of monitoring, Machine condition monitoring and diagnosis – Vibration severity criteria – Machine maintenance techniques – Machine condition monitoring techniques – Vibration monitoring techniques – Instrumentation systems – Choice of monitoring parameter Acoustic testing, Active noise and vibration control 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbooks 1. Singiresu S. Rao, Mechanical Vibrations, Prentice Hall Publish, New Delhi,2010. 2. J. S. Rao , Vibratory Condition Monitoring of Machines, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2000. References 1. K. J. Bathe and F. I. Wilson, Numerical Methods in Finite Element Analysis , Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1978. 2. J. P. Den Hartog – Mechanical Vibrations,Crastre press, 2007. 3. Science Elsevier, Hand Book of Condition Monitoring, Elsevier Science, 1996. 4. NPTEL:http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT-%20Guwahati/ve/index.htm 5. www.conditionmonitoringsystem.com/ 6. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=112103112

267


11M013 MECHANICAL BEHAVIORS OF MATERIALS 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives 

To impart knowledge on Mechanical Behavior of Material at various environmental and load conditions To make students to understand the significance of temperature variation and fatigue loading on material property At the end of the course students will be able to consider material failure through temperature, fatigue stress and fracture for selection of materials for any specific application

 

Program Outcomes (POs) (a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. (e) The graduates develop skills to be effective members of a team. (g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in both Mechanical Engineering as well as IT companies. (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. Course Outcomes (COs)   

Able to relate the mechanical properties of materials to their structure. Able to select materials for structural applications. Able to solve realistic and/or fundamental problems relating to the mechanical behavior of materials for individual solutions and tests.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN

S. No.


Test 2*

Model Examination*


1

Remember

35

35

35

35

2

Understand

30

30

30

30

3

Apply

35

35

35

35

4

Analyze/Evaluate

--

--

--

--

5

Create

--

--

--

--

100

100

100

100

Total 42

Test 1*

Remember

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

42 *

Neatly draw stress–strain curve for a ductile material. State Hook's Law. Define true stress–strain. Give the dimensions of Charpy and Izod impact test samples. Define ductile fracture.


268


6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28.

Define fracture toughness. What is theoretical cohesive strength of solids? What are the two standards of the minimum creep rate? What is a Burger's vector? What is the need for tensile testing? What is Orowan's modification? What is homologous temperature? Define Super plasticity. Which test is used to measure toughness? Define Endurance Limit. What is Dislocation? What are the various methods to increase fatigue strength? Draw Goodman diagram for fatigue loading. What is Bauschinger Effect? What are Whiskers? List at least two factors that promote transition from ductile to brittle fracture? What are the three forms of crystal structures for common metals? Mentions two types of dislocations. What is Curie point? What are orthotropic materials? What is TRIP steel? Name the factors that affect KIC test. List strengthening mechanism in solids.

Understand 1. Why is Rockwell hardness test widely used in industries? 2. Differentiate between fatigue and creep failures. 3. Differentiate between slip and twin. 4. Why Interatomic bonds in HCP Materials are stronger than those in FCC crystals? 5. Why FCC Materials have low work Hardening rate? 6. Why bulb filaments made of single crystals? 7. Why Annealing is done after cold working? 8. Differentiate between Edge and Screw dislocation. 9. Specific strength of materials is very high when they are in fiber size but lower when they are in bar form – Why? 10. Why fatigue strength decreases as size of a part increases beyond around 10 mm? 11. Draw the Goodman straight line and the soderberg straight line for designing under fatigue loads. 12. What do you understand by coaxing? 13. Differentiate between cold working and Annealing. 14. Compare tension test and torsion test in terms of the state of stress and strain developed. 15. Differentiate between Ausforming and Martempering 16. How is S–N curve constructed?

269


Apply 1.

The flat bar shown in figure- 1is 10 mm thick and is pulled by a force P producing a total change in length of 0.2 mm. Determine the maximum stress developed in the bar. Take E= 200 GPa.

Fig.1 2. Rocket motor casings may be fabricated from either of two steels: (a) low alloy steel yield 1.2 GPa toughness 70 MPa√m, (b) maraging steel yield 1.8 GPa toughness 50 MPa√m The relevant Code specifies a design stress of yield/1.5. Calculate the minimum defect size which will lead to brittle fracture in service for each material, and comment on the result. 3. The bar of rectangular cross-section, w x b, is edge-cracked and loaded by a tensile force, N, and a bending moment, M. Consider the equilibrated distribution of yield stress across the ligament and hence show that plastic collapse may be caused by any combination of M and N which satisfies: m + n (n + 2α ) = ( 1 - α )2 where α = a/w ; n = N/bwSy ; m = 4M/bw2 Sy

4. 5.

6.

Discuss about slip planes and slip direction (slip system) in FCC,BCC and HCP metals. The toughness of a 700 MPa yield structural steel is estimated to be 140 MPa√m. What size and mass of SEN bend test specimen is necessary, and what capacity of testing machine would be required? Assume fracture at α = 0.5. Estimate the life of the component of the previous problem with an initial crack size of 5 mm, if the material yield is 250 MPa. Assume a plastic configuration factor of ( 1 - α )

Unit I Basic Concept of Material Behavior Elastic deformation – Permanent deformation – Fracture : Tensile, Creep, Fatigue, Embrittlement – Basis for linear elasticity – Anisotropic linear elasticity – Rubber elasticity – Viscoelasticity – Dislocations – Yield strength of a perfect crystal – Edge dislocation – Screw and Mixed dislocation – Twining – Properties of dislocation – Dislocation geometry and crystal structure – Interaction of moving dislocation Dislocation climb. 9 Hours

270


Unit II High Temperature Deformation of Crystalline Material Creep mechanism – Dislocation glide at low temperature, Differential flow creep mechanisms – Creep in two phase alloys – Independent and sequential process – Deformation mechanism maps – Engineering aspects of creep design – Super plasticity – Hot working of metals: Dynamic Recovery and recrystalization Interaction of creep with fatigue. 9 Hours Unit III Tensile Fracture at Low Temperature and Embrittlement Theoretical strength of a crystalline solid – Theories of low temperature tensile fracture – Relation between bonding, crystal structure and fracture mechanism – Mode I, Mode II,Mode III Brittle fracture – Ductile fracture, Embrittlement characteristics and mechanism – Metal – Stress corrosion cracking – Hydrogen Ductile to brittle transition temperature (DBTT). 9 Hours Unit IV Strengthening Mechanisms Work hardening, Boundary strengtneing,solid solution strengthening, particle hardening, Deformation of two phase aggregates,strength,Microstructure and processing – patented steel wire,Martesite,Ausforming,Precipitation hardening in aluminum alloys – TRIP (Transformed induced plasticity) steel,Maraging steel, shape memory alloys – Metallic glass and nano crystalline materialsAustempering 9 Hours Unit V Fracture and Fatigue Importance of Fracture Mechanics, Griffith Fracture Theory, Crack Driving Force & Energy Release Rate, Modes of fracture, Stress intensity factors – Crack propagation in the presence of a notch – Material design for fracture toughness – High temperature fracture modes – Mechanism maps – Failure in super plastic materials – Characteristics of fatigue fracture – Fatigue crack growth rates – Paris Law – Cyclic stress – Strain behavior – Creep – Fatigue interaction Corrosion fatigue.

9 Hours Total: 45 Hours

Textbook 1.

Thomas H Courtney, Mechanical Behavior Materials, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2000.

References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

R. W. Hertzberg, Deformation and Fracture Mechanics of Engineering Materials, John Wiley & Sons, New Delhi,2000. M. A. Meyers and K. Chawla, Mechanical Behavior of Materials, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,2001. George E. Dieter, Mechanical Metallurgy, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2007. Metals Hand Book, Vol.11, Failure Analysis and Prevention, American Society for Metals, 2002. F. A. Mcclintock, and A. S. Argon (eds.,): Mechanical Behavior of Materials, Addison – Wesley Reading,Mass, New Delhi,1966. http://freevideolectures.com/Course/2266/Material-Science/26

271


11M014 DESIGN OF MECHANICAL DRIVES 3 0 0 3.5 Objectives 

To impart the knowledge on how to design the mechanical components like belt, gears, bearing, shaft etc To know the principles and working of various types of mechanical drives



Program Outcomes (POs) (d) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of engineering design. Understanding the concept generation, design optimization and evaluation. Knowing the fundamentals of intellectual property rights. Students will be able to effectively design various engineering components and make process plan for the production, (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programs. Course Outcomes (COs) a. Able to understand the basic geometrical specifications of various machine component with their functional and strength requirements. b.

Able to understand the procedures and standards for designing various machine components with maximum Economy and efficiency


43

Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version) Remember Understand Apply Analyze / Evaluate Create Total

Test I† 25 30 20 25 -100

Test II† 25 30 20 25 100

Model Examination† 25 30 20 25 -100


Remember

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

43 *

Name the types of drives. State uniform pressure theory. Define factor of safety. Name the different types of clutches. Why a positive clutch is used? Discuss the various types of power threads. Define friction drive and speed drive. What are the materials used for lining friction surface? Define pressure angle. What is disk brake? List the different types of bearings.


272


12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

Define contact angle. What is meant by self locking brake? Define module. Define diametral pitch. Define dynamic load rating.

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Identify the parameters to design the clutches. How do you express the life of a bearing? List the advantages of gear drives compared to chain drives. How does the function of a brake differ from that of a clutch? What are the thermal considerations in brake design? What condition must be satisfied in order that a pair of spur gears may have a constant velocity ratio? How the shaft and arms for spur gears are designed? What is herringbone gear? Where are they used? What is Tredgold’s approximation about the formative number of teeth on bevel gear? What are the various forces acting on warm and worm gears?

Apply 1. 2. 3. 4.

How the shaft and arms for spur gears designed in gear box? How to design the clutches for automobiles? A weight is brought to rest by applying brakes to the hoisting drum driven by on total energy observed by the brake. Why are two universal joints often used when there is angular misalignment between two shafts?

Analyze / Evaluate 1. 2.

Design a bevel gear for transmit the power of 100 kW Suggest the suitable design for the universal coupling

Unit I Introduction Power Transmission systems: General considerations, principal types, comparative study of different drives, applications, limitations. Design of shafts 9 Hours Unit II Design of Speed Drives Design of spur, helical, bevel and worm gears. Design of speed gear boxes, standardization of spindle speeds, speed diagrams, selection of bearings, design of housings, lubrication considerations, selection of servo and stepper motors, timing belts. Design of flat, V belt and rope drives 9 Hours

273


Unit III Design of Feed Drives Requirements, types, feed drive using feed boxes, design of power screws, lead screws, selection of recirculating ball screws, LM guide ways, rotary indexing drives, cam drives, applications, feeding mechanisms in automated plants, pneumatic feed units, Principles Design of rack and pinion 9 Hours Unit IV Design of Friction Drives Partial friction drives, couplings, clutches, toothed clutches, unidirectional clutches, safety clutches, drum, disk brakes, design principles. Design of centrifugal clutch 9Hours Unit V Variable Speed Drives Need, different types, applications. Case studies- Design of feeding mechanisms for automation, Design of headstock, Design of cam drive for automate, Selection of timing belt for a CNC machine – Design of tailstock 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Text book 1.

Shigley's, Mechanical Engineering Design, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., Series in Mechanical Engg., New Delhi, 2010.

References 1.

Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, PSG College of Technology, Design Data Book, DPV Printers, 2009. 2. Jack A. Collins, Henry R. Busby, and George H. Staab , Mechanical Design of Machine Elements and Machines – Jhon Wiley & Sons - New Delhi,2009 3. Robert L. Norton, Machine Design, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2010. 4. Alfred Hall (Author), A. Holowenko (Author), H. Laughlin Schaum's Outline of Machine Design- Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2000 5. Mehta N. K., Machine Tool Design – Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi,2010 6. Maitra G.M., Hand book of Gear Design, Tata McGraw Hill.

274


11M015 ENGINEERING INNOVATION (Common to all branches) 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives 

To establish and maintain competitive advantage in the industrial environment through making students capable of applying their innovative and creative skills To secure skills in using various tools to create, innovate and implement new ideas to improve the technology in which they work To make them skilled in protecting their ideas through various available intellectual property rights

 

Program Outcomes (POs) (d) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of engineering design. Understanding the concept generation, design optimization and evaluation. Knowing the fundamentals of intellectual property rights. Students will be able to effectively design various engineering components and make process plan for the production. (g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in both Mechanical Engineering as well as IT companies. (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes (COs)   

Students will be capable of applying their innovative skills at Industrial scenarios Students will be aware and practices in using various creativity tools Student will be capable of protecting their innovative ideas through various intellectual Property Systems in India


44


Test 1*

Test 2*

40 30 30 --100

30 30 40 --100



Remember

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 44 *

What are all the four inputs to Innovation? Define innovation continuum. What are all the steps to convert an Idea into a Concept? What are all the types of Innovation? What is top down innovation? What is Bottom up innovation? What are all the stages of system approach to the innovation process? What is ICI stage?


275


9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.

Define concept. What are all the characteristics of an innovator? What are all the expectation of creative people? What are all the characteristics of a leader to encourage creativity? What is brainstorming? Define psychological inertia. What is TRIZ? What is input and output of a technique? Define contradiction for a technical problem. What is idealization? Write any four contradictions of a TRIZ matrix. What are all Intellectual properties? What is the life period of a Patent?

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28.

Differentiate Invention and Innovation. How important is an Idea? How concept is differentiated from an Idea? Differentiate Invention from Innovation. How innovations are differentiated? Why improvement of product platform is necessary? Why bottom up innovation is challenging than top down? What are all the considerations for an innovation process? Why process models are required? When is the ICI stage ends? and Why? Why is knockout analysis important? How do you measure success of an Innovation? How important is the brainstorming? What are all the advantages of young people in creative environment? How to identify a creative innovator? What do you expect from management as an innovator? What are all the characteristics you have to prove as a creative leader? How can team creativity be promoted in a group or an organization? How important is the criticism in the life of an innovation? Suggest a few areas in which quality circle can be formed in your environment. How contradictions are identified? How each type of contradictions are differentiated? How to find ideality? How standard solutions are found out? Why is IPR protection important? What are all the steps of filing a patent application? What is patent infringement? How copyright is different from other IPRs?

Apply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Propose an idea to make an innovation around you. Identify the type under which your innovation is falling. How are you going to convert your innovation as a group creativity? Give your strategic planning to complete ICI stage. Suggest one topic for conducting brainstorming to improve your innovation. How are you going to form your team and what are all your expectations to select teammates? Can you use TRIZ for creating an idea for your innovation? if so write contradictions and given standard solution in the matrix. Under which IPR category your innovation is falling?

276


Unit I Perspectives on Innovation Innovation Continuum, Sources of Innovation, conditions for successful innovation, Innovation types and product classes – Innovation Matrix, Classification, Top – Down innovation, Bottom – up innovation, Independent innovators Team innovation 8 Hours Unit II Innovation Process Process Considerations, Process Models, Limitations, Idea – Concept – Invention stage, Lateral Thinking, Brainstorming, Pre – Project stage, Measuring Success, Project Stage Product launch Individual and Team Creativity Selecting creative people, Characteristics of Innovators, Expectation of creative people, Creative leadership, Building on ideas, Team creativity and organization, Criticize others ideas Quality circle 8 Hours Unit III New Product Development Introduction, Models, Product Planning, Product Strategy, Competing with other products, Withdrawing products, Market Research - Testing, Discontinuous New Products, Technology Intensive Products, Managing New Product Development Team Case Study 9 Hours Unit IV Product Innovation through TRIZ – Theory to Resolve Inventive Problems Origin of TRIZ - Theory to Resolve Inventive Problems – Problem formulation and functional analysis – Concept of ideality – contradiction : Physical and technical – 39 contradicting parameters – contradiction matrix – 40 Inventive principles – 76 standard solutions – technology evolution trends Case studies 10 Hours Unit V Managing Intellectual Property Intellectual Property Rights, Patents - Introduction, Search, Writing Documents, Fees and Forms, International Classification. Licensing, Patent trolls and Myths, Technology Transfer - Importance, Models, Inward Transfer. 10 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1. Gerard H. (Gus) Gaynor, Innovation by Design, American Management Association, 2002. References 1. Paul Trott, Innovation Management and New Product Development, Pearson Education Limited, New Delhi,2004. 2. Leigh L. Thompson, Hoon-Seok Choi, Creativity and Innovation in Organizational Teams, Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, USA, 2006. 3. John Adair, Leadership for Innovation, Kogan Page Limited, USA, 2007. 4. Robert W. Weisberg, Creativity - Understanding Innovation in Problem Solving, Science, Invention, and the Arts, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., USA, 2006. 5. www.triz-journal.com

277


11M016 AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS (Common for EIE, EEE and MECH Engineering branches) 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives 

To impart knowledge to the students in the principles of operation and constructional details of various Automotive electronic components and subsystems To impact knowledge to students in various electronic subsystems of Automobile Engineering At the end of the course, the students will be able to have a sound knowledge of the vehicles and the mechanisms involved in the starting systems, ignition systems and an engine control systems

 

Program Outcomes (POs) (a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. (j) The graduates can become job-givers rather than just job-seekers. (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes (COs) 

Able to have a sound knowledge of the vehicles and the mechanisms involved in the starting systems, ignition systems and an engine control systems.



Able to understand the various electronic subsystems and its functional importance in Vehicles.


45


Test I*

Test II*

30 40 30 --100

30 40 30 --100



Remember

1. 2. 3. 4.

What is meant by distributor less ignition system? What is the function of detonation sensor? What is the purpose of using wheel sensor in ABS? List the sources of exhaust gas emissions from the automobiles that affect the environmental conditions. 5. State four advantages of a pre-engaged starter when compared with an inertia type. 6. What is dwell angle? 7. What is the function of electromagnetic sensors in electronically sensed ABS? 8. Define Total vehicle dynamics. 9. What is the purpose of Vehicle navigation system? 10. Write the components of Embedded system. 11. What is meant by inductive charging? 45 *


278


12. 13. 14. 15.

What is meant by black box fault finding? What are Euro Norms? What is meant by telematics? What is the concept of CAN with signal format?

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

Differentiate between a solenoid switch and relay switch Whether the petrol fuel injection is different from diesel fuel injection? How does it differ? Write any two advantage of bosch compact alternator. Write the two important methods in pre computerized ignition system to advance the ignition timing? Difference between MAF and MAP sensors. Why do we use Hall Effect sensors in automotive application? How do you obtain the quantity of fuel to be injected in electronic engine management system? Differentiate throttle body and MPFI injection systems. Why acceleration enrichment of fuel is needed? Why a D.C series motor is preferred for the starting system of automobiles? Why an artificial intelligence system used in automobiles? Why digital displays are multiplexed. Differentiate between active and passive safety. Where the cruise control system used in vehicles? Why we are using multi cylinder engine rather than using a larger single cylinder of similar cubic capacity?

Apply 1. 2.

Calculate chemically correct air fuel ratio for complete combustion of octane (C8H18). Design a Electric circuit for automatic seat adjuster, power window , auto lock and for parking assist sensor.

Unit I Automotive Electricals and Electronics: Power train system (air system, fuel system (carburetor and diesel fuel injection, ignition system, exhaust system .Auxiliary systems (cooling, lubrications and electrical system), Transmission system (front, rear and 4 wheel drive, manual, automatic transmission, differential). Braking system (Drum, disc, hydraulic, pneumatic), Steering system (rack and pinion, power steering) Electromagnetic clutch, braking system – ABS. 10 Hours Unit II Need for Electronics in Automotive Systems Basic electrical components and their operations in an automobile: Power train sub system (Starting system, charging system- ignition systems-electronic fuel control), Chassis sub system ( TCS & ESP) – Comfort and safety sub system ( airbags, seatbelt tensioners, cruise control-, parking). Performance (speed, power, torque), Control (emission, fuel economy, drivability and safety) & legislation (environmental legislation for pollution and safety norms). Safety -night vision , lane departure warning. 10 Hours Unit III Introduction to Embedded System Embedded System Definitions: Components of embedded systems. Hardware Module: Microprocessor, Microcontrollers - On –chip peripherals: Program memory (PM) , Data memory(DM), Parallel port structures, Timer, Input capture & Output compare units, ADC, PWM, Introduction to an embedded board.

279


Software Module : IDE – Getting started: Creating new project, creating new files, adding files to project, compile, build, debug and simulation of a project. Embedded system programming: Up-loaders, ISP, ROM Emulators, In-circuit emulators. Debug Interfaces: BDM and JTAG. 10 Hours Unit IV Embedded System in Automotive Applications Engine Management System – Gasoline/ diesel system, various sensors used in system- electronic transmission control- Vehicle Safety System – Electronic control of braking and traction – Body electronics –– System level test- Anti spinning – Engine Interaction systems - Software calibration using engine and vehicle dynamometers- Environmental test for electronic control unit- Application of control elements and control methodology in automotive system. Infotainment systems, navigation systems 10 Hours Unit V Embedded System Communication Protocols Introduction to control networking- Communication protocols in embedded system- SPI, I2C , USB – Vehicle communication protocols- Introduction to CAN, LIN, FLEXRAY Communication protocol: MOST, KWP2000 10 Hours Total: 50 Hours Text book 1. 2.

Tom Denton, Automobile electrical and electronics systems, SAE Publishers, 2004. Ronald K. Jurgon, Automotive Electronics Handbook, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 1999.


William D. Ribbens, Understanding Automotive Electronics, Newnes Publishing, 2003. BOSCH, Automotive Hand Book, 6th edition. William T. M – Automotive electronics systems. Barry Hollembeak, Automotive Electricity, Electronics and Computer Controls, Delmar Publishers, 2001.

280


11M017 MICRO-ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives    

To get an exposure in the application of MEMS for various domains To impart knowledge on MEMS with their manufacturing techniques To create exposure to packaging techniques of MEMS Make students to scale up and scale down the physical quantities of micro system


The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. e) The graduates develop skills to be effective members of a team. i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to know the advanced manufacturing techniques in micro level  Able to gain knowledge on various MEMS materials  Able to gain a sound knowledge on micro fabrication processes ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No. 1 2 3 4 5


46

Test 1*

Test 2*

Model Examination*


40 30 30 --100

40 30 30 --100

40 30 30 --100

40 30 30 --100

Remember

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 46 *

Define MEMS Classify the micro actuator techniques. What is meant by comb drive? What is meant by up scaling and down scaling? What is meant by wafer? What is the use of silicon compounds? State the application of quartz. What is meant by lithography? Differentiate between positive resist and negative resists. Mention any three piezo electric material. State the application of silicon nitride. What is meant by etching? List the various CVD techniques for silicon compounds. What do you meant by LIGA? What do you menat by SLIGA?


281


16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

Define Class 10. What do you meant by clean room? What are the limitations of bulk micro manufacturing? State the general consideration in packing design. What is the need of packaging in MEMS?

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

How the SMA actuation differs from Piezo actuation? How the sensors are classified based on MEMS? How silicon atoms are located in (111), (100), (110) plane. How the photolithography process is carried out? How atoms are located in silicon crystal? How the polycrystalline silicon is made? How Microsystems packaging is classified? How the hardness is achieved by various heat treatment processes?

Apply 1. 2. 3. 4.

How will you choose a suitable material for industrial application? On what basis the micro pump works? Estimate the different scaling factors for the various components? How you perform the surface bonding?

Unit I Introduction Introduction to MEMS and Microsystems, typical products, Microsystems and micro electronics – applications of Microsystems in automobile and other industries, working principle of Microsystems – types of micro sensors, Micro actuation techniques ––MEMS with micro actuators – micro pump – micro motors – micro valves – micro grippers – micro accelerometers, micro fluids MEMS gyroscope, electrostatic fluid accelerator 9 Hours Unit II Materials for MEMS and Microsystems Substrates and wafer – active substrate materials, silicon as a substrate material, silicon compounds- silicon dioxide, silicon carbide, silicon nitride, polycrystalline silicon, silicon piezo-resistors,– - Gallium arsenide, quartz, - piezoelectric crystals – polymers as industrial materials, polymers for MEMS and Microsystems, conductive polymers – Langmuir-Blodgett films, packing materials. Glass, tungsten film and Sillimanite 9 Hours Unit III Fabrication Processes Photolithography – photoresists and application, light sources, phoresist development, removal and postbacking, Ion implantation, diffusion, oxidation process, chemical vapor deposition-working principle, chemical reactions, rate of deposition, physical vapor deposition –sputtering, deposition by epitaxy, etching- chemical etching and plasma etching. Electron beam lithiography and HF etching 9 Hours

282


Unit IV Micromanufacturing Bulk micromanufacturing- etching, isotropic and anisotrotpic etching, wet and dry etching, surface micro machining, – LIGA process- general description materials, electroplating, SLIGA process, Process designphotolithography, thin film fabrication, geometry shaping. Micro cutting and chemical mechanical planarization 9 Hours Unit V Microsystem Packaging Mechanical packaging of microelectronics, Micro system packaging – general considerations, three levels of packaging-die level, device level and system level, interfaces in microsystem packaging, essential packaging technologies, three dimensional packaging, assembly of Microsystems, selection of packaging materials, signal mapping and transduction. Zero level packaging 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1.

Tai- Ran Hsu, MEMS & Microsystems Design and Manufacture, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.


N. P. Mahalik, MEMS, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi,2010 Gardner, W. Julian, K. Varadan Vijay and O. Awadelkarim, Osama, Micro sensors MEMS and Smart Devices, Jhon Wiley & Sons Ltd, 2001. Gad-el-Hak, Mhamed, The MEMS Handbook, CRC Press 2002. S. Fatikow, U. Rembold, Microsystem Technology and Microrobotics, Springer–Verlag, Berlin, Heidelberg, 1997. E. H. Tay, Francis and W. O. Choong , Micrfluids and Bio MEMS applications, Springer, 2002.

283


11M018 NANO-TECHNOLOGIES 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives    

To impart the students to be an expert in advanced technology in the society To develop the students to acquire overall sound knowledge in nano materials To make the students to know the applications of Nano materials in various fields Make the students to select suitable nano fabrication process


The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes (COs)   

Able to know about the various methods used in production of nano materials Independently seek out innovations in the rapidly changing field of nano-technology by selecting proper inspection method Students can use knowledge of nano technology to Follow protocols, Conduct engineering procedures, Fabricate products, Make conclusions about results and Troubleshoot it



Test 1*

Test 2*

Model Examination*



40 30 30 --100

40 30 30 --100

40 30 30 --100

40 30 30 --100

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

What are the important constituents of thin films? What is called nano? What is the unit of nano? What is nano particle? What is known as quantam dots? Which is called as micro crystalline silicon? What is called quasi crystal? What are the various types of quasi crystal? Define nano crystalline. Mention the main methods to create nano particles. Which ball mill is used in attrition method? What is called pyrolysis method? Which process is said to be as wet chemical technique. What is the use of centrifugation? What is the use of nano material in fuel cell? Mention any three current nano technology applications. Mention any three nano machining techniques.

284


18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25.

What is called top up nano fabrication? What is called bottom up nano fabrication? What are the various modes in Scanning probe microscopy? Define piezo force mode. What is called Magnetic Force Mode? What is the difference between nanotech, biotech and synthetic biology? What is nano medicine? What is the principle adopted in sol-gel process?

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

How the nano materials are classified? How the high energy ball mill used to produce nano materials? In what way the nano materials helpful in various fields? Whether LIGA process is suitable to fabricate nano structures? Can we use quantam material in nano fabrication processes? Is it necessary to inspect the nano particles in each step during production?

Apply 1. 2.

How the nano material is choose for particular application? On what basis the production process of nano material is selected?

Unit I Introduction to Nanomaterials Amorphous, Crystalline, microcrystalline, quasicrystalline and nanocrystalline materials- historical development of nano materials-problems in fabrication and characterization of nano materials. Optical properties of nano materials 9 Hours Unit II Production of Nanomaterials Methods of production of nanomaterials, Sol-gel synthesis, Inert gas condensation, Mechanical alloying or high-energy ball milling, Plasma synthesis, and Electro deposition. Chemical vapour deposition 9 Hours Unit III Application of Nanomaterials Applications in Electronics, Chemical, Mechanical engineering industries-Use of nanomaterials in automobiles, aerospace, defense and medical applications – Metallic, polymeric, organic and ceramic nanomaterials. Application of nano in food and agriculture industry 9 Hours Unit IV Nanofabrication and Machining LIGA, Ion Beam Etching, Molecular Manufacturing Techniques - Nano Machining Techniques, Top/ Bottom up Nano fabrication Techniques, Quantum Materials. Molecular motors, electro chemical micro machining 9 Hours

285


Unit V Inspection of Nanomaterials Scanning Probe Microscopy (SPM) - Contact Mode, Tapping Mode, Scanning Tunneling Mode (STM). Advanced Scanning Probe Microscopy – Electrostatic force Mode (EFM)- Magnetic Force Mode (MFM)Scanning Thermal Mode (STM), Piezo Force Mode (PFM). Scanning Capacitance Mode (SCM), Nanoidentation. Biosensing with nanopores 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbooks 1. 2.

Mark Ratner and Daniel Ratner, Nano Technology, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003. Bharat Bhushan, Springer Handbook of Nano Technology, Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, New york 2004.


J. Tlusty, Machining Processes and Equipment, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,2000 Rebecca L. Johnson, Nanotechnology, Learner Publication company, 2006. Richard Booker and Eary Boysen, Nanotechnology, Weily Publications, 2008. Ampere A TSeng Nanofabrication fundamentals and application, World Scienticfic Co, Pvt, Ltd, Singapore, 2008. http://www.nanotech-now.com/

286


11M019 DESIGN OF AIR - CRAFT STRUCTURES 4 0 0 4.0 Objectives    

To learn the basics of aircraft systems, structures and components To get exposure to the aircraft and aerospace industry To understand the applicability aspects in Aircraft design To acquire the theoretical and practical knowledge to design the aircraft structures

Program Outcomes (POs) i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes (COs)    

Able to know about different steps in aircraft design process Able to know about different parts of an aircraft and their design procedures Learns about various types of loads acting on different parts of an aircraft Knows about various repair steps for different types of structure failures


Bloom’s Taxonomy (New version) Remember Understand Apply Analyze/ Evaluate Create Total

Test I*

Test II*

30 20 20 30 -100

30 20 20 30 -100

Model Examinations 30 20 20 30 -100


47

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 47

What are the types of frames? Define Plane truss and Space truss? Give some examples. What are the methods used to analyze the plane & space frames? What are the assumptions made in analyzes of a truss? What is cantilever truss? What is simply supported truss? What are the primary and secondary stresses in the analysis of a truss? Define: Continuous beam. What are the advantages of Continuous beam over simply supported beam? Define: Moment distribution method. (Hardy Cross method). Define: Stiffness factor. Define: Distribution factor. Define Flexural Rigidity of Beams. Define: Constant strength beam. Define: Composite beam. Define: Proof Resilience. Write the formula to calculate the strain energy due to torsion

*The marks secured Test I and Test II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks.

287


17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29.

Write the Castigliano’ s first theorem. Define : Maxwell Reciprocal Theorem. Define : Modulus of resilience. What is slenderness ratio ( buckling factor)? What is its relevance in column? What are the limitations of the Euler’ s formula? List out different theories of failure Define: Maximum Shear Stress Theory. ( Tresca’ s theory) Define: Plasticity ellipse. What are the real-time difficulties of structural damages? Write the Euler’s formula for different end conditions. What shape is more suitable for nose of aircraft? What are the trouble suiting methods in design of aircraft structure? What is ADL analysis in aircraft structural damage?

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Differentiate short and long column. Compare the unit load method and Castigliano’ s first theorem Differentiate the statically determinate structures and statically indeterminate structures? Differentiate maneuver load and actuator load. Why inertia load in the aircraft engine? How to select the suitable materials for design the aircraft skin. Why super plastics are used to make the skin of aircraft?

Apply 1. Find the strain energy per unit volume, the tensile stress for a material is given as 150 N/mm ². Take E = 2 x10 N/mm ². 2. Find the strain energy per unit volume, the shear stress for a material is given as 50 N/mm ². Take G= 80000 N/mm ². Analyze/ Evaluate 1. Design of wing of new aircraft structural model. 2. Select the suitable materials for nose point of the aircraft 3. Design new structural profile for the aircraft to reduce the thrust force. Unit I Introduction Overview of the Aircraft Design Process: Introduction, phases of Aircraft Design, Aircraft Conceptual Design Process, Conceptual Stage, Preliminary Design, Detailed Design, Design methodologies 3Hours Fundamentals of Structural Analysis Review of Hooke’s Law, Principal stresses, Equilibrium and Compatibility, Determinate Structures, St Venant’s Principle, Conservation of Energy, Stress Transformation Stress strain relations 4Hours Introduction to Aircraft Structures Types of Structural members of Fuselage and wing section Ribs, Spars, Frames, Stringers, Longeron, Splices, , Types of structural joints, Types of Loads on structural joints. Sectional properties of structural members and their loads 5 Hours

288


Unit II Aircraft Loads Aerodynamics Loads, Inertial Loads due to engine, Actuator Loads, Maneuver Loads, VN diagrams, Guest Loads, Gust Loads, Ground Loads, Ground Conditions, Miscellaneous Loads. 6 Hours Aircraft Materials and Manufacturing Processes Material selection criteria, Aluminum Alloys, Titanium Alloys, Steel Alloys, Magnesium Alloys, copper Alloys, Nimonic Alloys, Non Metallic materials, Use of Advanced materials smart materials, Manufacturing of A/C structural members , Overview of Types of manufacturing processes for composites, Sheet metal Fabrication , Machining, Welding, super plastic Forming and Diffusion Bonding Composite materials 6 Hours Unit III Structural Analysis of Aircraft Structures Theory of Plates - Analysis of plates for bending, stresses due to bending, plate deflection under different end conditions, Strain energy due to bending of circular, rectangular plates, plate buckling, compression buckling, shear buckling, Buckling due to in plane bending moments, Analysis of stiffened panels in buckling, Rectangular plate buckling, Analysis of stiffened panels in post buckling of sheel panels for Buckling, Compression loading, Shear Loading / Shell Shear Factor, Circumferential Buckling Stress Sample exercises& example Problems 12 Hours Unit IV Theory of Beams – Symmetric Beams in pure Bending, Deflection of beams, Unsymmetrical Beams in Bending, Plastic Bending of beams, Shear Stresses due to Bending in Thin Walled Beams, Bending of Open Section Beams, Bending of Closed Section Beams, Shear Stresses due to Torsion in Thin Walled Beams. Sample exercises & example Problems 12 Hours Unit V Airworthiness and Aircraft Certification Definition, Airworthiness Regulations, Regulatory Bodies, Type certificate, General Requirements, Requirements Related to Aircraft Design Covers, Performance and Flight Requirements, Airframe Requirements, Landing Requirements, Landing Requirements, Fatigue and Failsafe requirements, Emergency provisions, Emergency Landing requirements. Real time case study-aircraft certification 7 Hours Aircraft Structural Repair Types of Structural damage, Nonconformance, Rework, Repair, Allowable Limit, Repairable Damage Limit, Overview of ADL Analysis, Types of Repair, Repair Considerations and Best Practices. 5 Hours Total: 60 Hours Textbooks 1. Daniel P. Raymer, Aircraft Design – A Conceptual Approach, American Institute of Aeronautics and Ast; 2006 2. Michael Niu, Airframe Structural Design, Adaso Adastra Engineering Center, 2006. References 1. Dave Anderson, Introduction to Flight, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi,2008. 2. Lan moir, Allan Seabridge, Aircraft Systems: Mechanical, Electrical and Avionics Subsystems integration, Wiley, 2008. 3. Michael Niu, Aircraft stress Analysis and Sizing, Technical Book Co., 2005. 4. Roger D . Schaufele, the Elements of Aircraft Preliminary Design, Aries Publications, 2000. 5. Dale Hurst, Aircraft Structural Technician, Avotek publishers, 2001.

289


11M020 FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives 

To emphasis the importance of group technology, cellular manufacturing systems - significance and impact in manufacturing areas To introduce the basics and components of FMS to the learners To enlighten the students about the engineering aspects of Robots and their applications

 

Program Outcomes (POs) (a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes (COs) 

Able to gain insight about the state-of-the-art research areas related to FMS and real-time shop floor control Understand the fundamentals of applicable processes and techniques in FMS Ability to design process and integrated systems that achieve system design by considering productivity and quality

 

ASSESSMENT PATTERN Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)

S. No. 1 2 3 4 5


48

Test 1*

Test 2*

Model Examination*


45 30 25 --100

45 30 25 --100

40 35 25 --100

40 35 25 --100

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

48 *

Classify the types of production processes. Define flexible automation. Mention some advantages of flexible automation. What is meant by programmable automation? Define fixed automation. State few reasons for automation. Define part family. Define group technology. What is PFA? Which features are considered for form code in OPTIZ coding? What factors are influencing the best machine arrangement in cells? Write the digit sequence followed in OPTIZ coding system.


290


13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41.

What is cellular manufacturing? List the advantages of cellular manufacturing. What are the types of machine cells? List out the types of machine cell design. Name few coding systems used for parts identification. What are the components of FMS? Name different types of FMS. State few FMS layout configurations. List the planning and design issues of FMS. Depict the FMS loop layout. Why scheduling is required in FMS? Mention few benefits of FMS. What are applications of AS/RS? Define scheduling. What are the two basic categories of automated storage systems? Define accuracy and repeatability. Classify robot based on work volume. How do you specify a robot? What is meant by work volume? What is the function of a gripper? What is the use of an end effectors? What is work cell control? Name different types of robot cell layout. What is a Range in sensors? What is the meaning of proximity sensing? What is Tactile Sensor? Define spatial resolution. What parameters are considered in deigning robot cell? What are the objectives of AS/RS?

Understand 1. What is the difference between product layout and process layout? 2. How the part families are formed? 3. What is the difference between hierarchical structure and chain type structure in a classification and coding system? 4. What are the typical objectives when implementing cellular manufacturing? 5. What is the difference between virtual machine cell and formal machine cell? 6. How to select proper material handling system for FMS? 7. When do we use knowledge based scheduling? 8. Differentiate AS/RS and Carousel storage system. 9. Whether AGVs are preferred to use in FMS? If yes why? 10. How do you classify robots from the view points of applications of FMS? 11. How robot can be used in assembly? 12. What is the difference between repeatability and accuracy in a robotic manipulator? 13. Why simulation FMS is necessary? 14. What parameters are considered in deigning robot cell?

291


Apply 1.

Develop the form code ( first five digits ) in the OPTIZ system for the parts illustrated below

2.

Using notation scheme for defining manipulator configurations, draw diagrams of the following robots: a) TRT, b) VVR, c) VROT

3.

The linear joint of a (type L) certain industrial robot is actuated by a piston mechanism. The length of the joint when fully retracted is 600mm and when fully extended is 1000mm. If the robot’s controller has an eight bit storage capacity, determine the control resolution for this robot.

Unit I Introduction and Flexible Manufacturing Cell Types of production, characteristics, applications, Flexibility in machining systems, need for FMS, Flexible Automation, where to apply FMS technology. Characteristics, Flexible Machining systems, achieving flexibility in machining systems, Machine cell design, quantitative techniques. Levels of automation 9 Hours Unit II Group Technology Part families, parts classification and coding, types of classification and coding systems. Machine cell design: The composite part concept, types of cell designs, determining the best machine arrangement, benefits of group technology Rank order clustering 9 Hours

292


Unit III Flexible Manufacturing Systems Components of an FMS, types of systems, FMS work stations. Material handling and storage system: Functions of the handling system, FMS layout configurations. Material handling equipment – AS/RS. Planning, scheduling and control of FMS - Scheduling - Knowledge based scheduling - Hierarchy of computer control - Supervisory computer. FMS planning and design issue, Sizing the FMS 9 Hours Unit IV Computer Software, Simulation and Database of FMS System issues - Types of software - specification and selection - Trends - Application of simulation software - Manufacturing data systems - data flow - CAD/CAM considerations - Planning FMS database.Area of application of FMS 9 Hours Unit V Robotic technology and Applications Joints and links, common robot configurations, work volume, types of robot control, accuracy and repeatability, other specifications, end effectors, sensors in robotics. Characteristics of robot applications, robot cell design, types of robot applications: Material handling, processing operations, assembly and inspection Work cell Control and Interlocks 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1.

Mikell P. Groover, Automation Production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing System, Prentice Hall of India, PTR Upper Saddle River, NJ, USA, 2007.

References 1.

Nanua Singh, Systems Approach to Computer Integrated Design and Manufacturing, John Wiley and Sons, 1998. 2. Joseph Talvage and Roger G. Hannam, Flexible Manufacturing systems in practice, Marcel Dekker Inc., NewYork, 1987 3. S. R. Prasad, R. Prabhakar and S. Dhandapani, Intelligent Flexible Autonomous Manufacturing Systems, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2000 4. N. K. Jha, Handbook of Flexible Manufacturing Systems, Academic Press Inc., 1998 5. Satya Ranjan Deb, Robotics Technology and Flexible Automation, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2001

293


11M021 COMPUTER INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives  To learn the basics of CAD/CAM integration and concept of the group technology  To have a exposure to various automation principles  To know the network management and installation and the DBMS concepts Program Outcomes (POs) (a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. (c) The graduates will be able to learn various techniques available to make shapes and designs in various materials. Students will be understood the methodologies to be followed in casting, fabrication, machining, materials, metallurgy and forming of engineering materials. At the end of the course, students will be able to select and perform suitable method of producing a desirable component in industry. (g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in both Mechanical Engineering as well as IT companies. Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to understand the methods of representation of wireframe, surface, and solid modeling systems with corresponding algorithms.  Able to develop the database system for the Manufacturing Industry.  Be familiar with the background of various automation principles. ASSESSMENT PATTERN

S. No.


Test 1*

Test 2*

Model Examination*


1

Remember

40

35

35

35

2

Understand

35

25

25

25

3

Apply

20

30

30

30

4

Analyze/Evaluate

--

--

--

--

5

Create

--

--

--

--

100

100

100

100

Total 49

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 49 *

Define CIM. What do you mean by MAP? List out the structures of coding system available. What is meant by CAPP? Mention the approaches of it. What is the key machine concept in cellular manufacturing? What are the elements of CIM? What are the objectives of CIM? State the major areas of CIM.


294


9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38.

Define process planning. What are the functions of process engineering? State the steps in process planning. What are the factors affecting process planning? Define CAPP. Write down the equipment/devices used in Factory Data Collection Systems. Write any two benefits of FMS. Define Group Technology. List out the stages in Group Technology. Define Part families. What are the methods available for solving problems in GT? List out the premises for the developed of DCLASS code. What is Production flow analysis? What are the applications of GT? What are the results of Process Planning? Gives the major objectives of a Production Management Systems (PMS). Define SFC. What are the primary functions of SFC? What are the phases of SFC? What Bar code consists? What are the types of Bar code? What is Direct attached Storage? What are the types of SFC? Define flexible manufacturing systems. What arc the objectives of FMS? What is Local Area Network(LAN)? What are the reasons for using LAN? What are the features of LAN? What is topology? What are the advantages of LAN?

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

What do you understand by the term islands of automation? Why the GT code is used in the manufacturing industry? Compare the different types of automatic identification technologies. Differentiate between the variant process planning and generative process planning approaches. How the Shop Floor Control is achieved? Why Generative approach is mostly preferred than Variant CAPP? Compare the Manufacturing Automation Protocol and Technical Office Protocol.

Apply 1.

Develop the form code (First five digits) in the Opitz system for the part illustrated in figure.

295


2.

Apply rank order clustering technique to the part-machine incidence matrix to identify logical part families and machine groups. Parts are identified by letters and the machines are identified numerically

Machines 1 2 3 4 5 6

3.

A 1

B

1

1

Parts C

D

E 1

1 1

1

1

1

1

F 1

1 1

A roller conveyor moves tote pans in one direction at 150 ft/min between a load station and an unload station, a distance of 200 ft. The time to load parts into a tote pan at the load station is 3 sec per part. Each tote pan holds 8 parts. In addition, it takes 9 sec to load a tote pan onto the conveyor. Determine: (a) spacing between tote pan centers flowing in the conveyor system and (b) flow rate of parts on the conveyor system. (c) Consider the effect of the unit load principle. Suppose the tote pans were smaller and could hold only one part rather than eight. Determine the flow rate in this case if it takes 7 sec to load a tote pan onto the conveyor (instead of 9 sec for the larger tote pan) and it takes the same 3 sec to load the part into the tote pan.

Unit I Introduction The meaning and origin of CIM- the changing manufacturing and management scene - External communication - islands of automation and software-dedicated and open systems-manufacturing automation protocol – introduction to CAD/CAM integration Reliability and precision in automation 9 Hours

296


Unit II Group Technology and Computer Aided Process Planning History of group technology- role of G.T. in - part families - classification and coding - DCLASS and MICLASS and OPITZ coding systems-facility design using G.T. - benefits of G.T-cellular manufacturing. Process planning - role of process planning in CAD/CAM integration - approaches to computer aided process planning - variant approach and generative approaches - CAPP and CMPP process planning systems. Facility layout planning 9 Hours Unit III Shop Floor Control and Flexible Manufacturing System(FMS) Shop floor control-phases -factory data collection system -automatic identification methods- Bar code technology-automated data collection system. FMS-components of FMS - types -FMS workstation material handling and storage systems- FMS layout -computer control systems-application and benefits Introduction to AS/RS 9 Hours Unit IV CIM Implementation and Data Communication CIM and company strategy - system modeling tools -IDEF models - activity cycle diagram CIM open system architecture (CIMOSA)- manufacturing enterprise wheel-CIM architecture- Product data management-CIM implementation-software. Communication fundamentals- local area networks -topology -LAN implementations - network management and installations. - PDM Tools 9 Hours Unit V Open System and Database for CIM Open systems-open system inter-connection - manufacturing automations protocol and technical office protocol-(MAP/TOP).Development of databases -database terminology- architecture of database systemsdata modeling and data associations -relational data bases - database operators - advantages of data base and relational database. OSI model-different types of layer 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1.

Mikell. P. Groover, Automation, Production Systems and computer integrated manufacturing, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.


P. Radhakrishnan , S. Subramanyan and V. Raju, CAD/CAM/CIM, New Age International (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2000. S. Kant Vajpayee, Principles of Computer Integrated Manufacturing, Prentice Hall of India, 2003. Roger Hanman, Computer Intergrated Manufacturing, Addison – Wesley, 1995. Mikell. P. Groover and Emory Zimmers Jr., CAD/CAM, Prentice Hall of India , New Delhi 1998. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT Delhi/Computer%20Aided%20Design%20&%20ManufacturingII/index.htm

297


11M022 NON TRADITIONAL MACHINING PROCESSES 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives   

To study the advanced machining processes To understand the difference between traditional and unconventional machining processes To know the principles and working of various nontraditional processes based on mechanical, electrical, electrochemical and thermal energy

Program Outcomes (POs) (c) The graduates will be able to learn various techniques available to make shapes and designs in various materials. Students will be understood the methodologies to be followed in casting, fabrication, machining, materials, metallurgy and forming of engineering materials. At the end of the course, students will be able to select and perform suitable method of producing a desirable component in industry. (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. Course Outcomes (COs) 

Able to understand difference between conventional and unconventional machining processes. Able to select the suitable machining process to machine the hard advanced materials. Be familiar with different energy involved in non traditional machining processes.

 



Test 1*

Test 2*

40 40 20 --100

30 50 20 --100



50 51

Remember

27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37.

51 *

Name few unconventional machining processes. Expand the terms; MRR. IEG, ECM, EDM and USM. What is an abrasive? Mention the abrasives used in mechanical energy based processes. Name the electrolytes used in EDM. State any two characteristics of a good dielectric fluid. What is the use of dielectric fluid? List out the main parts of AJM process. Write down the function of sonatrode. Mention four applications of unconventional machining. Name the parts of plasma arc machining.


298


38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47.

What is the principle of EDM? Expand LASER. What are the tool materials preferred for EDM and ECM processes? State two applications for LBM. What are the advantages of chemical machining? Write two limitations of WJM process. What is MRR? Name the power circuits used in EDM. What are the types of LASERS? Define: Plasma.

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

Identify the processes that can machine electrically conductive materials. Identify the processes in which plastic materials can be machined. Compare electrolyte and dielectric fluid. How EBM differs from PAM? How material removal takes place in EBM process? In which process frequent short circuiting will happen? Identify the parameters those mostly influence surface quality of a plasma arc machined part. How ECG differs from ECM? In what way the spark produced in ECM and EDM differ from each other? How the grinding wheel used in ECG, is able to conduct electricity? Why two types of mirrors are used in producing LASER light in Ruby laser? What is the principle of material removal in ECM? How water can machine hard materials like metals? State the mechanism of metal removal in electro chemical grinding. How electrochemical honing differs from conventional honing. How to produce plasma?

Apply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Why short circuiting happens in ECM? Knowing all the parameters of EDM process how to arrive the material removal rate? In which cases the chemical machining can be conveniently applied? Which method can give better surface finish, an EDM or an EBM? Justify. How to find out the material removal rate for a metal and an alloy machined using ECM?

Unit I Introduction Unconventional Machining Process – Introduction, Need – Classification – Comparison of conventional and unconventional machining process - Energies employed in the processes– Brief overview of all various techniques – selection AJM, WJM, USM, EDM, ECM, EBM, LBM, PAM. Future of non-conventional machining processes 9 Hours Unit II Mechanical Energy Based Processes Abrasive Jet Machining – Water Jet Machining – Ultrasonic Machining.. Working Principles – equipment used – Process parameters – Material removal rate-Variation in techniques used – Applications. Abrasive-water jet machining 9 Hours

299


Unit III Electrical Energy Based Processes Electric Discharge Machining- working Principles-equipments-Process Parameters- Material removal rate electrode / Tool – Power Circuits-Tool Wear – Dielectric – Flushing – Wire cut EDM – Applications-Recent developments in Electro discharge machining. Micro electro discharge machining 9 Hours Unit IV Chemical and Electro-Chemical Energy Based Processes Process principles of Chemical machining and Electro-Chemical machining -Etchants-maskants-techniques -Process Parameters – Material removal rate -Applications-equipments-Electrical circuit-Process Parameters-Electro chemical grinding, Electro chemical honing and Electro chemical deburring Applications. Pulsed electro chemical machining 9 Hours Unit V Thermal Energy Based Processes Laser Beam machining, Plasma Arc Machining - Principles – Equipment - Electron Beam Machining. Principles – Equipment - Types-Beam control techniques- Material removal rate - Applications. Laser enhanced etching 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1.

P. K. Mishra, Non Conventional Machining, Narosa Publishing House,New Delhi, 2007.

References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

G. F. Benedict. Nontraditional Manufacturing Processes, Marcel Dekker Inc., New York, 1987 P. C. Pandey and H.S.Shan, Modern Machining Processes, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd.,New Delhi, 2008. Mc Geough, Advanced Methods of Machining, Chapman and Hall, London Paul De Garmo, J.T.Black, and Ronald.A.Kohser, Material and Processes in Manufacturing Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2007. Vijaya Kumar Jain, Advanced Machining Processes, Allied Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=112105126

300


11M023 ADVANCED CASTING PROCESSES 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives   

At the end of this course the student should be able to understand the need for special casting processes To understand the principles, tools and possible defects in each casting process To understand the knowledge on process capabilities of various special casting processes


The graduates will be able to learn various techniques available to make shapes and designs in various materials. To make students understand requirements and methodologies to be followed in casting, fabrication, machining, materials, metallurgy and forming of engineering materials. At the end of the course, students will be able to select and perform suitable method of producing a desirable component in industry. i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes (COs)  Acquire knowledge about various steps and processes involved in sand casting  Understanding about various special casting processes and their applications  Develop knowledge about equipments used, process parameters of casting processes and causes and remedies of casting defects. ASSESSMENT PATTERN

S.No. 1 2 3 4 5


Test 1*

Test 2*

Model Examination*


40 35 25 --100

30 40 30 --100

35 40 25 --100

35 40 25 --100

52 53

Remember

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

53 *

Write the basic steps in the casting process. Write the advantages of casting process. What are the functions of a riser in the green sand mould? Write the advantages and limitations of wood as the pattern material. Name the materials used for pattern making. Define the terms core print, chaplets and chills. Give four applications of shell moulded castings. Write the factors to be considered in design of casting. Discuss the various pattern allowances. How does curing agent added to sand mix in shell moulding?


301


11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41.

Name the tests used in the shell molding process. Write down the sand mix for shell molding. Name three lubricants used in shell molding process. What is the function of mould release agent? What is meant by ‘expendable pattern’? Name four materials suitable for making pattern in investment casting process. What does ‘autoclave’ means in foundry operations? List out the properties needed for a ceramic core. Name the parameters that control the ‘ceramic shell mould’ process. What are the methods employed in removal of wax pattern. How the control is applied in De-Lavaud process? What is called as ‘silica gel’? Write its usage. List the factors affecting selection of die material. What is meant by 'slip' and 'raining' as applied to centrifugal casting? What are the major problems of carbon-di oxide process? Name atleast four investment casting alloys. List out the castings produced by centrifugal casting. Need the casting process by which hollow castings are produced. What are the process variables in centrifugal casting? State the use of 'ejector pins' in die casting. Name the metal injection mechanisms followed in die casting. What is called as melt loss in die casting? List the pattern materials for carbon-di oxide process. State any two advantages of CO2 process. List out the process parameters in full mould process. Name the process control variables of squeeze casting. Give the limitations of squeeze moulding method. What are the various types of cores used in die casting? What is vacuum die-casting? What is meant by ‘pre expanded polystyrene’? Name four products made by electro slag casting process.

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22.

Write the differences between pattern and core. Compare the different types of sand moulds. State the necessity for allowances to a pattern. Why the binder is added to molding sand? Write the requirements of a good pattern. What is the aim of inspection and testing of castings? What is the necessity of sand testing? State the ways of improving sand permeability. What type of mould is used for making a frustum of cone? How the blow holes and cracks inside the casting can be inspected? Only metal patterns are used in ‘shell mould casting processes. Why? What is meant by ‘stuccoing’? When is it used? How the ‘shell thickness’ can be controlled? What type of sand is used in shell molding? Why? In what way the shell molding process is advantageous than sand casting? State the purpose of additives, fillers and resins in the preparation of ‘wax pattern’. Why ‘firing’ of shell is carried out? Compare the process of hot and cold chamber metal injection mechanism What is called as 'G factor'? Give its importance. How the core is removed from castings? Write down the significance of centrifugal force in casting process. Why venting is necessary in die-casting and how it is achieved?

302


23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29.

Why cooling of dies is necessary during their operation? Give the purpose of providing coating over polystyrene pattern. Why the full mould process is called so? Compare the process of pressure die casting and permanent mould casting. Compare the process of true centrifugal, semi centrifugal and centrifuged casting. Why permanent moulds are preheated before operations? Why there are two entry points in centrifugal casting?

Apply 1. 2. 3.

Prepare a list of 15 well known castings used for household, industrial or art applications. Compare the specific features and process capabilities for the Investment, Shell molding and Centrifugal casting processes Identify the pattern material and type of pattern based on the application requirements of the following components: a. Toys b. Rocker arm c. Valves d. Safety tools e. Gears f. Engine block g. Brake drum

Unit I Introduction Introduction to sand casting - Types of sands - Sand properties - Moulding methods: Manual and machine Pattern and its types - Materials - Allowances - Cores and types - Sand reclamation - Casting defects Inspection and testing - Need for special casting processes - Applications. Methods of constructing patterns - characteristics, ingradients and additives of moulding and core sands 9 Hours Unit II Shell Molding Introduction to the process - Machines - Patterns and materials - Hot coating, warm coating, and cold coating processes - Sand, resin and other materials - Process parameters characteristics of shell mould castings - Defects and their causes in moulds and cores - Hot box and cold box processes - ABC process Recent trends in Shell casting and applications 9 Hours Unit III Investment Casting Process - Pattern and mould materials - Block mould and ceramic shell mould - Advantages and limitations - Mercast and Shaw processes - CLA process - CLV process - Plaster moulding process - Magnetic molding process. Process capability of investment casting and applications 9 Hours Unit IV Centrifugal and Die Casting Centrifugal process - Types: Centrifugal, semi-centrifugal and centrifuged casting processes - Calculation of rotating speed of the mould - Equipment - Dies for permanent mould castings - Pressure die casting Die casting machines: Immersed plunger type and gooseneck process - Design considerations for die casting methods - Low pressure die casting. Cleaning and finishing of centrifugal and die-castings and applications

303


9 Hours Unit V Continuous Casting, CO2 and Full Mould Processes Introduction to continuous castings - Reciprocating mould process - Direct chill process - Casting of steel, aluminum, brass material in continuous casting - CO2 mould / core hardening process - Full mould process - Principles – Applications Other special process - squeeze casting, slush casting and electro slag casting processes. 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbooks 1. 2.

P. L. Jain, Principles of Foundry Technology, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2009. A. K. Chakrabarti, Casting Technology and Cast Alloys, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2005.


ASM International Handbook Committee, ASM Handbook Volume 15:Casting, ASM International, 2008 Howard F. Taylor, Meston C Fleming & John Wulff, Foundry Engineering, Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi, 1993. Jain Dharmendra, Foundry Technology, CBS Publishers & Distributors, 2007. Peter Beeley. Foundry Technology, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2001. http://www.scribd.com/doc/15885832/Metal-Casting-Full-Lecture-Notes

304


11M024 METAL FORMING 3

0 0 3.0

Objectives  

To learn various techniques available to make shapes and designs in various Materials. To understand requirements and methodologies to be followed in forming and fabrication of engineering materials.

Program Outcomes (POs) (a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. (g) Graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in both Mechanical Engineering as well as IT companies. (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes (COs)   

Able to select of suitable metal forming process for different types of applications Able to understand different metal forming processes Able to the suitable process parameters for different processes



Test I*

Test II*

30 40 30 --100

30 40 30 --100



54 55

Remember

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

55 *

Define Slip and twinning. What is meant by Strain rate? Classify the metal forming process. State the features of different types of rolling mill. What is the advantage of tandem rolling? List the parts made by shape rolling. Define forge ability. Give the advantages and drawbacks of forging process. What is upset forging? What are the advantages of isothermal forging? Define extrusion. What is tubular extrusion? Define extrusion ratio. What is impact extrusion?


305


15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26.

Define tube drawing. What is spring back? Give the advantages of sheet metal forming Define deep drawing. What is press brake? What is metal spinning? Define stretch forming. Define blanking and piercing. What is meant by high energy rate forming? Give some application of metal spinning process and explosive forming. Define the term super plasticity. Define fine blanking.

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

What is the difference between rolled plate and sheet? Why roller leveling necessary? What is the difference between cold, warm and hot forging? Hoe does extrusion varies from rolling and forging? What is the difference between extrusion and drawing? Why metal is cold worked? How press forging differ from drop forging? Why cold rolling is done by four high rolling mill? How hydraulic presses are compare with mechanical press? Why number of passes required rolling a steel bar? How the metal is prepared for drawing operation? How can the cutting force be reduced in sheet metal operation?

Apply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6. 7.

How can u tell whether a certain part is forged or cast? Rolling reduces the thickness of plates and sheets. However it is possible to reduce the thickness by simply stretching the material .Would this be a feasible process? What changes would you expect in the strength, hardness, and ductility of metal after being drawn through dies? What is the purpose of heat treatment in forging? A block of lead 25 mm X 25mm X 150 mm is pressed between flat dies to a size 6.25 mm X 100 mm X 150 mm. If the uniaxial flow stress is 6.9 MPa and µ=0.25 determine the pressure distribution over the 100 mm dimension and the total forging load. Determine the maximum possible reduction for cold rolling a 300 mm thick slab when µ=.08 and the roll diameter is 600 mm. What is the maximum reduction on the mill for hot rolling when µ= 0.5? Calculate the rolling load if steel sheet is hot rolled 30 percent from a 40 mm thick slab using a 900 mm diameter roll. The slab is 760 mm wide. Assume µ=0.30.The plane strain flow stress is 140 MPa at entrance and 200 MPa at the exit from the roll gap due to the increasing velocity.

Unit I Theory of Metal Forming Metallurgical aspects of metal forming – slip – twining - mechanics of plastic deformation – effects of temperature – strain rate-microstructure and friction in metal forming – spring back effect – yield criteria and their significance – classification of metal forming processes. Various methods of analyzing the metal working processes (slip-line field theory, upper bound solution, stab methods) 9 Hours

306


Unit II Forging and Rolling Processes Principle-classification – equipment, tooling-processes – parameters and calculation of forces during forging and rolling processes – Ring compression tests – Post forming heat treatment – Defects(cause and remedy) – applications. Residual stresses in forging, driving torque and power in rolling 9 Hours Unit III Extrusion and Drawing Processes Classification of extrusion processes – tool, equipment and principle of these processes – influences of friction – Extrusion force calculation – Defects and analysis – Rod/wire drawing –tool – equipment and principle of processes defects – Tube drawing and sinking processes – Mannesmann processes of seamless pipe manufacturing. Hydrostatic extrusion, tandem wire drawing 9 Hours Unit IV Sheet Metal Forming Processes Classification – conventional and HERF processes – Presses - types and selection of presses – formability diagram – formability of sheet metals – Principle, process parameters – equipment and application of the following processes – Deep drawing, spinning - stretch forming, plate bending, press brake forming – Explosive forming – electro hydraulic forming – magnetic pulse forming. Rubber hydro form process 9 Hours Unit V Recent Advances Super plastic forming – electro forming – fine blanking – P/M forging – Isothermal forging highspeed hot forging -high velocity extrusion. Orbital forging, liquid metal forming 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbooks 1. 2.

R. Narayanasamy, Metalworking Technology, Prentice Hall of India , New Delhi,1999. B.L. Juneja, Fundamentals of metal forming processes , New Age International (P) Ltd,New Delhi,2006.


Dieter, Mechanical Metallurgy, McGraw-Hill , Revised Edition 2007. Serope Kalpakjian, Manufacturing engineering and Technology , Pearson Publishing Co.,New Delhi, 2001. William F. Hosford & Robert M. Caddel, Metal forming , (Mechanics & Metallurgy), Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1990. Sinha and Prasad, Theory of metal forming and metal cutting, Dhanpat Rai Pub (p) Ltd. 1999. Rao P.N, Manufacturing Technology, TMH Ltd., 2007. (Revised Edition).

307


11M025 PROCESS PLANNING AND COST ESTIMATION 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives   

To introduce the process planning concepts To make cost estimation for various products after process planning To know the importance of machining time for various operations

Program Outcomes (POs) g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry- level placement in both Mechanical Engineering as well as IT companies. i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes (COs) o  

Able to understand the different types of production process and its application. Able to understand the importance of costing. Be familiar with the elements of cost and its importance in costing process.


56


Test 1*

Test 2*

30 40 30 --100

30 40 30 --100



Remember

1. What is meant by process planning? 2. State the general approaches to process planning 3. Define breakeven point. 4. List out commercially available CAPP systems 5. Define standardization 6. What do you mean by simplification? 7. Define Cost Estimation 8. List out some methods of costing. 9. What are the components of a job estimate? 10. What is ladder of cost? 11. Give some example for administrative expenses. 12. What is meant by overhead expenses? 13. Who are called indirect labour? 14. What you mean by Depreciation? 15. Define Depreciation due' to Physical Decay. 16. The cost consists of prime cost and factory expenses is known as _____ 56 *


308


17. Define Shear Loss. 18. What do you mean by tong hold loss? 19. Write the equation for estimation of machining time. 20. Define tear down time 21. List the various data required to make a cost estimate. Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

What is the effect of simplification? What are the factors affect process planning? Compare manual process planning with computer aided process planning. State the importance of realistic estimates. What are factors for calculating the probable cost of the product? Differentiate between estimating and costing in terms of organizing department. Process material is direct material (True / False) How to determine the direct labour cost? When do you prefer allocation of overhead expenses by unit rate? In what aspect the direct differ with indirect expenses? Differentiate hot forging and cold forging Write down some depreciation situation due to functional conditions. In general what is the amount of scale loss considered? State the significance of speed in machining time

Apply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

State the applications of Break even analysis. What do you mean by Break-even point in terms of sales value? Which type of cost estimation is applied in construction industry? Write down the importance of costing. Type of depreciation where a machine is to be replaced while it is functioning is known_______. How do you evaluate the machining time for shaping?

Unit I Process Planning Types of Production - Standardization, Simplification - Production design and selection - Process planning, selection and analysis - - Steps involved in manual experience based planning and computer aided process planning - Retrieval, generative - Selection of processes analysis- Breakeven analysis. – Introduction to group technology 9 Hours Unit II Estimating and Costing Importance And Aims Of Cost Estimation - Functions Of Estimation - Costing - Importance And Aims Of Costing - Difference Between Costing And Estimation - Importance Of Realistic Estimates - Estimation Procedure. Introduction to method study, work study 9 Hours

309


Unit III Elements of Cost Introduction - Material Cost - Determination of Material Cost Labour Cost - Determination of Direct Labour Cost - Expenses - Cost of Product (Ladder of cost) – Problems- Analysis of overhead expenses Factory expenses - Depreciation - Causes of depreciation - Methods of depreciation - Administrative expenses - Selling and Distributing expenses - Allocation of overhead expenses - problems.Introduction to cost accounting theory only 9 Hours Unit IV Product Cost Estimation Estimation in forging shop - Losses in forging - Forging cost – Problems - Estimation in welding shop Gas cutting : Material cost, Labour cost and finish on cost – Problems Estimation in foundry shop Estimation of pattern cost and casting cost – Problems Methods & types of estimates 9 Hours Unit V Estimation of Machining Time Importance of machine time calculations - Estimation of machining time for Lathe operations - Estimation of machining time for drilling, boring, shaping, milling and grinding operations - Problems. Estimation of machining time for planning operations simple problems only 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbooks 1. 2.

R. Kesavan, E Elanchezhian and B Vijaya Ramnath, Estimating and Costing New Age International Publications, 2008. B. P. Sinha, Mechanical Estimating and Costing, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., 2001.


S. K. Mukhopadhyay,Production Planning and Control-Text and cases,PHI Pvt. Ltd 2007. Chitale.A.V. and Gupta.R.C., Product Design and Manufacturing, PHI, ,2000. R.S and Tailor, B.W, Operations Management, PHI, , 2003. T. R. Russel Banga & S. C. Sharma ., Mechanical Estimating and Costing, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2007.

310


11M026 INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives   

To analyze robot manipulators in terms of their kinematics, control. Enable to program and control an industrial robot system that performs a specific task. To discuss various applications of industrial robot systems.


The graduates will be able to learn various techniques available to make shapes and designs in various materials. Students will be understood the methodologies to be followed in casting, fabrication, machining, materials, metallurgy and forming of engineering materials. At the end of the course, students will be able to select and perform suitable method of producing a desirable component in industry. (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes (COs)  To establish an understanding of the fundamental concepts of industrial robotics.  To build the necessary theoretical background todesign a robot for industrial application.  To analyze robot manipulators in terms of their kinematics, control. ASSESSMENT PATTERN

S. No. 1 2 3 4 5


Test 1*

Test 2*

Model Examination*



40 30 30 --100

40 40 20 --100

30 40 30 --100

30 40 30 --100

57 58

Remember

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

58 *

What is a manipulator? Define ‘robot arm’. Give the standard definition for an industrial robot. State the laws of robot. Expand: PUMA, SCARA and UNIMATION. What is accuracy? What is work volume of a robot? Name the drive systems used for a robot. Classify industrial robots. Mention few application areas of an industrial robot. Name the components of a machine vision system. What is proximity sensor?


311


13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

What is touch sensor? What is force sensor? Name the methods used to estimate the cost in implementing a robot. What are types of robot programming? What is a teach pendant?

Understand 1. Differentiate accuracy and repeatability. 2. How to increase the accuracy of a robot arm? 3. Why the payload is calculated with load at the outer position of the arm? 4. Can robots completely replace the human efforts in industry? Why? 5. Why RCC is required? 6. Which application is easiest to program for a robot? 7. What kind of end effector is required to stack the glass plates? Why? 8. A LPG cylinder is to be arc welded using a robot; how to program it for automation? 9. Electric drives are not suitable robots handling inflammable products. State the reason. 10. State the differences between proximity and touch sensors. 11. Why force sensor is needed for a robot? 12. What are the job opportunities available in a robot assisted automation? 13. Why safety is important in robot zone? 14. State the usage of teach pendant compared to programming method 15. Where to apply inverse kinematics? 16. When the forward kinematics is advantageous? Apply 1. A frame F has been moved 9 units along x-axis and 5 units along the y-axis of the reference frame. Find the new location of the frame. 2. A point P(7, 3, 2)T and it is subjected to the transformation described (i0 rotation of 90º about z-axis. (ii) followed by a rotation of 90º about y-axis (iii) followed by a translation [4 -3 7]. Find the coordinates of the point relative to the reference frame. 3. Calculate the inverse matrix of the following transformation matrix: 4. A cool drink bottling company needs to utilize robot in the packing section. How to do it? Justify your answer. 5. Write a program to flange drilling operation using VAL programming. 6. What type of robots can be applied in inspection? Give reasons. Unit I Introduction Definition of a robot – scope of industrial robots, Robot anatomy – robotics and automation, law of robots, specification of robots, resolution, repeatability and accuracy of manipulator. Classification of robots and justifying the use of robots. Drive mechanisms – hydraulic, electrical, pneumatic drives. Economic and social issues 9 Hours Unit II Robot Control and Kinematics Power transmission systems and control - mechanical transmissions method– Rotary to rotary, rotary to linear conversions - rotary problem- remote centered compliance devices. End effectors – vacuum, magnetic and air operated grippers. Robot Kinematics- Forward Kinematics, Inverse Kinematics and Differences –Forward Kinematics and Reverse Kinematics of Manipulators with Two, Three Degrees of Freedom (In 2 Dimensional), Four Degrees of Freedom (In 3 Dimensional) – DH matrices. Micro motor and micro gripper 9 Hours

312


Unit III Robot Sensors and Vision Systems Sensors – types – tactile sensors, proximity and range sensors, contact and non-contact sensors, velocity sensors, touch and slip sensors, force and torque sensors. Robotic vision systems, imaging components, image representation – picture coding, object recognition and categorization, visual inspection, robot cell, design and control layouts. Performance characteristics of a robot 9 Hours Unit IV Robot Programming and Artificial Intelligence Robotics programming: Teach Pendant Programming, Lead through programming, Robot programming Languages – VAL Programming – Motion Commands, Sensor Commands, End effecter commands, and Simple programs. Simple programs for drilling operations using VAL 9 Hours Unit V Industrial Applications Application of robots in machining - Welding - Assembly - Material handling - Loading and unloading-CIMhostile and remote environments. Inspection and future application-safety, training, maintenance and quality. Economic analysis of robotics. SCARA robots, wheeled robots, Bipedal robots (humanoid robots), hexapod robots. Robot cell 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbooks 1. 2.

M. P. Groover, Industrial Robotics – Technology, Programming and Applications, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2001. D. Richard, Klafter, A. Thomas, Chmielewski and Michael Negin, Robotics Engineering – An Integrated Approach, Prentice Hall of India , New Delhi, 2001.


K. S. Fu, R. C. Gonzalez and C. S. G. Lee, Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2003. Yoram Koren, Robotics for Engineers, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2004. James G. Keramas, Robot Technology Fundamentals, Cengage Learning, 2011. Subir Kumar Saha., Introduction to Robotics, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2008. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=112101099.

313


11M027 RAPID PROTOTYPING 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives  

To provide knowledge of methods for the manufacturing of prototypes from computer based models To understand the entire process of direct manufacturing from the creation of computer based models to their physical realization To understand the various methods of manufacturing and their merits, demerits and applications To impart students to convert CAD models into real life engineering components

 

Program Outcomes (POs) (g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in both Mechanical Engineering as well as IT companies. (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to understand the various rapid prototyping, rapid tooling, and reverse engineering technology  Able to gain knowledge to select appropriate technology for product development  Able to use tools to explore rapid prototyping techniques and CAD modelling software ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No 1 2 3 4 5

59


Test I*

Test II*

30 40 30 --100

30 40 30 --100



Remember

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 59 *

Define Rapid prototyping. State triangulation algorithm. What is the importance of Time compression engineering or concurrent engineering? State the various types of RP processes. What are the different geometric modeling techniques. Define Vertex-to-vertex rule. How rapid prototyping processes are classified? What are the process parameters affecting model creation in Stereolithography? Define Tesselation. What are the Different RP formats available? What are the process parameters affecting model creation in Direct Metal Laser Sintering? State the limitations of LOM. List out the materials used in LOM and SLS. What are the process parameters affecting model creation in FDM, LOM, SGC & 3DP? What is photopolymerisation? What is support materials used in RP processes?


314


17. What is the atmosphere used in SLS model creation? 18. Define Solid ground curing. 19. List the materials used for the following RP processes: i) Stereo lithography ii) FDM iii) LOM iv) SGC 20. Write the various types of RP processes. 21. What is Solid ground curing process? 22. Define Rapid prototyping. 23. Write the disadvantages of STL process. 24. List the materials used in direct metal laser sintering process. 25. Name some neutral file format used for slicing of parts. 26. Which method is used for curing of parts made by the FDM process? 27. What is the significance of maintaining a higher temperature at the nozzle? 28. List some of the medical applications using RP models. 29. What is Rapid Tooling?

v) 3DP

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

What are the limitations of wireframe and surface modeling over Solid modeling? How a solid model is developed using Constructive Solid Modeling? How the parts made by FDM process are superior to other RP processes? Why are post processing operations necessary for RP processes? Why support materials not necessary in SLS process? Distinguish between Direct and Indirect tooling. How the Rapid prototyping processes are classified? Is it significant to use number of layers in STL process? How STL Files are created? How the photo polymerization process occurs in STL? How Solid ground curing is carried out? How information flows from data creation to STL file formatting across an RP system? How models are developed by material addition and material removal process? Why carbon dioxide atmosphere is necessary in SLS process? How lateral distortion of paper prototype by water absorption is prevented in LOM? Why RP process generated models are preferred in medical applications?

Apply 1. 2. 3.

How process parameters affect surface finish, dimensional accuracy of parts manufactured in stereolithography process? Evaluate the effect of process parameters in Selective Laser Sintering Process? Which RP process will you prefer for manufacturing the given components (fig 1&2)? Justify your selection based on economy and dimensional accuracy?.

Fig 1

Fig 2

315


Unit I Introduction Need for time compression in product development, Product development – conceptual design – development – detail design – prototype –RP Data Formats - Information flow in an RP system Generation of STL file- Steps in RP- Factors affecting the RP process- Materials for RP- applications of RP- RP in Indian scenario. Introduction to geometric modeling – wireframe, surface and solid modeling 9 Hours Unit II Stereolithography Classification of RP systems, Stereolithography systems – Principle – process parameters – process details – machine details, Applications – Direct Metal Laser Sintering (DMLS) system – Principle – process parameters – process details – machine details, Applications. Application of stereolithography in bio-medical engineering 9 Hours Unit III FDM and LOM Fusion Deposition Modeling – Principle – process parameters – process details – machine details, Applications – Laminated Object Manufacturing – Principle – process parameters – process details – machine details, Applications. Case study on FDM in evaluation and testing of Sukhoi super jet landing gear 9 Hours Unit IV SGC, 3DP and LENS methods Solid Ground Curing – Principle – process parameters – process details – machine details, Applications. 3 – Dimensional printers – Principle – process parameters – process details – machine details, Applications, and other concept modelers like thermo jet printers, Sander’s model maker, JP system 5, Object Quadra system. Laser Engineering Net Shaping (LENS) - Ballistic Particle Manufacturing (BPM) – Principle. Manufacturing RC car parts with 3D printing 9 Hours Unit V Rapid Tooling and Applications of RPT Introduction to rapid tooling – Direct and indirect method - Software for RP – STL files, Magics, Mimics. Application of Rapid prototyping in Medical field, manufacturing and automotive industries.Rapid prototyping finishing processes 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1. Chua Chee Kai, Leong Kah Fai and Lim Chu Sing, Rapid Prototyping: Principles and Applications, World Scientific Publishing Company, Singapore, 2010. References 1. D. T. Pham and S. S. Dimov, Rapid Manufacturing, Springer-Verlag, London, 2001. 2. Paul F. Jacobs: Stereo Lithography and other RP & M Technologies, SMENY, 1996. 3. Frank W. Liou, Rapid Prototyping and Engineering Applications: A toolbox for prototype development CRC Press- Technology and Engineering, 2007. 4. Terry Wohlers, Wohlers Report 2000, Wohlers Associates, USA, 2000. 5. J. G. Conley, Rapid Prototyping and Solid Free Form Fabrication, Journal of Manufacturing Science and Engineering, vol. 19, Nov 1997, pp 811-815. 6. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/112107078/37.html 7. http://www.materialise.com/materialise/view/en/449917-Rapid+Manufacturing.html

316


11M028 WELDING TECHNOLOGY 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives    

To understand the basic concepts, working principles of welding and special welding processes. To learn different welding methods and its applications. To acquire knowledge about welding symbols, welding design, and welding automation. To learn destructive, non destructive testing and inspection of welded joints.

Program Outcomes (POs) (g) Graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in Mechanical Engineering (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes (j) The graduates can become job-givers rather than just job-seekers (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices Course Outcomes (COs) 

Utilize effective techniques for proper care and safe use of welding tools and other related equipment.



Understand characteristics of a variety of metals used in the fabrication industry.



Demonstrate competence in the selected welding processes: SMAW, GMAW, FCAW, and GTAW


60


30 40 30

Model Examinations* 30 40 30

Semester End Examination 30 40 30

--100

--100

--100

Test I*

Test II*

30 40 30 --100

Remember

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 60 *

Define welding process. What are the advantages of welding process? List the various welding positions. List the various types of welding joints. What is arc length? What are the different types of arc welding? Name the commonly used gases in gas welding. Define weldability. List the function of fluxes. What is filler material?


317


11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

What is explosive welding? List the important safety measures to be taken in welding shop. Write the various welding defects. State the application of soldering process. How the weld bead is indicated by the weld symbol? What are the advantages of submerged arc welding? Name any three welding NDT methods. Name any four welding destructive testing methods. Name any two under water welding application. List any six welding application. What are the different methods of arc initiation? What is the abbreviation of DCSP and DCRP? What are the advantages of using robots in welding? What is the use of fluxes? What is key hole? What are the different types of tracking?

Understand 1 Why edge preparation is necessary? 2 How the arc is produced in arc welding? 3 When will you use DCSP welding? 4 When will you use DCRP welding? 5 How CI welding differ from MS welding? 6 How fluxes are applied in arc and gas welding? 7 When filler rod is required in welding process? 8 What are the factors to be considered for the selection of welding rod? 9 What is the difference between submerged arc welding and TIG welding? 10 Why cleaning of welding surface is necessary? 11 How resistance welding is differ from arc welding? 12 What do you understand by the term heat balance? 13 How solid state welding differ from arc welding? 14 State the basic differences between resistance welding and arc welding? 15 Distinguish between welding, brazing and soldering. 16 What is the difference between TIG and GMAW welding? 17 How CI welding differ from MS welding? 18 What is tool tipping and how is it done? 19 List any five welding process designation. 20 What is the use of backing plate in submerged welding? Apply 1 Draw a double V butt joints for a 50mm thick mild steel plate and represent the same with welding symbols. 2 Find out the correct welding process to make a tube having 150mm Bore and 500mm length from 1.5mm thick stainless steel sheet and state the reason for selection. 3 Suggest suitable inspection method to check welding quality for the following components a) Boiler b) Tank Unit I Basics and Principles of Welding Process Welding – classification – types of weld joints-weld position- edge preparation- fluxes- filler rod- safety aspects in welding - gas welding – arc welding – electrode: types, selection, coding -shielded metal arc welding, GTAW, GMAW, SAW, Resistance welding (spot, seam, projection, percussion, flash types) – atomic hydrogen arc welding. Thermit welding 9 Hours

318


Unit II Special Welding Processes Electron beam and Laser beam welding – plasma arc welding – stud welding – friction welding – explosive welding – ultrasonic welding – roll bonding-diffusion bonding – cold welding – welding of plastics.brazing and soldering Underwater welding 9Hours Unit III Weld Design and Metallurgy Welding symbols: welding dimension, No. of examination, area of examination, brazing symbol, NDT symbol – welding design : selection of joint, selection of weld type- allowable strengths of welding, allowable strengths of weld under steady loads, allowable fatigue strengths of welds, design of welds subjected to combined stresses, weld throat thickness.Welding Metallurgy: Metallurgy of steel, melting of electrode and parent metal, solidification of weld metal, gas absorption, gas metal reaction, slag metal reaction, surface phenomena and solid state reaction- weldability Weldability of cast iron, steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloys 9 Hours Unit IV Automated Welding Automation – welding automation – welding operation, structure analysis – classification of welding automation – Introduction to welding robots – robotic welding system – types of welding robots- Robot selection mechanics – Design of welding robots – Joint tracking system Introduction to welding fixtures 9 Hours Unit V Weld Defects and Inspection and Testing of Welding Weld defect – Surface defects, subsurface defect – Sources of weld defect –– Arc, resistance and friction welding process defects – Introduction to inspection and testing of welds –Types of testing & inspection : Visual inspection and measurement, Destructive Testing – Tensile Tests, Impact Tests, Bend Tests, Break Tests, Etch Tests - Non-Destructive Testing – Liquid Penetrant Testing, Magnetic Particle Testing, Eddy Current Testing, Radio Graphic Testing, Magneto Graphic Testing, Ultrosonic Testing, Acoustic Emission Testing, Tightness test - Testing of pipe, plate, boiler, drum, tank destructive testing methods. Acceptance levels of arc welding defects 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook(s) 1. Little, Welding technology, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2004. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

R. S. Parmer, Welding Processes & Technology, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2008. R. S. Parmer, Welding Engineering & Technology, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2008. O. P. Khanna, A text book of Welding Technology, Dhanpat rai publications (II- edition) - New Delhi, 2002. Metals Hand Book, Volume 6, ASM, 2001. www.weldingtypes.net/ http://freevideolectures.com/Course/3308/Welding-Engineering

319


11M029 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives     

To study production system and various layouts Acquire knowledge in process planning and control To study work and work measurement To Gather knowledge in inventory control To know system analysis and maintenance

Program Outcomes (POs) (a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. (g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry- level placement in both Mechanical Engineering as well as IT companies. (h) He graduates will develop capacity to understand professional and ethical responsibility and will display skills required for continuous and lifelong learning and upgradation. (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education Programmes. Course Outcomes (COs)   

Able to get the knowledge of various production systems, layouts and managing skills Able to acquire idea of different process planning and control methods Able to interpret the principles of types of studies and charts.


61


Test 1*

Test 2*

30 40 30 --100

30 40 30 --100



Remember

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 61 *

What is industrial engineering? List out the roles of industrial engineer. What is the production and manufacturing? What are the types of layout? Methods to design the workstation? what is process planning? Define group technology. What is the use of SIMO chart? what is work sampling? what is micro motion and macro motion study?


320


11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

What is inventory? What do you mean by ABC analysis? What is mean by just in time in manufacturing? Define KANBAN technique. What are the recent developments in system analysis and maintenance?

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

How the Production system Sequences? How Factors affecting production system and productivity? Types of Various layouts What is process planning, production planning and various charts? How to do the Workplace management and utilization of optimum manpower Where to apply the ABC analysis?

Apply 1. 2. 3. 4.

Will able to Perform the production management. Will able to set the production system as well as to manage the system. Will able to perform industry working evaluation and streamline the processes. Will aware about System related repairs & maintenance and issues.

Unit I Production System Industrial engineering - Concept, History and development, Applications, Roles of Industrial engineer. Production management, Industrial engineering versus production management, operations management. Production system – Analysis, Input output model, Productivity, Factors affecting productivity. Plant layout, Process layout, Product layout, Combination layout, Fixed position layout, Flow pattern, Workstation design Plant layout procedure. 9 Hours Unit II Process Planning and Control Process planning – definition, procedure, Process selection, Machine capacity, process sheet, process analysis, process chart – symbols, outline process chart, flow process chart. Group technology – functional and group layout, classification and coding system, formation of component family. Production planning, economic batch quantity, loading, scheduling.Production control – dispatching, routing. Progress control – bar, curve, gantt chart, route & schedule chart, line of balance Case studies in process planning. 9 Hours Unit III Work Study Work study – definition, need, advantages, objectives of method study and work measurement, method study procedure, flow diagram, string diagram, multiple activity chart, operation analysis, analysis of motion, principles of motion economy, design of work place layout & ergonomics, therbligs, SIMO chart, stop watch procedure, micro & macro motion study. Predetermined motion time system, work sampling – principle, procedure. Problems 9 Hours

321


Unit IV Inventory Management Inventory – control, classification, management, objectives, functions. Economic order quantity, inventory models, ABC analysis, Material Requirement Planning(MRPI), Manufacturing Resource Planning(MRP II), Operating cycle, Just in Time manufacturing system, KANBAN technique, lean manufacturing, Supply chain management. Material handling – functions, principles, Engineering and economic factors, Material handling equipment – selection, maintenance, types, Principle of unit load and concept of containerization and palletisation 9 Hours Unit V System Analysis and Maintenance System concept - system analysis, systems engineering, techniques, applications. Value analysis – aim, technique, procedure, advantages, value engineering, value control, types of values. Re-engineering, Business process re-engineering. Plant maintenance – objectives, importance, maintenance engineer – duties, functions and responsibilities. Types – breakdown, scheduled, preventive, predictive. Plant maintenance schedule, Recent developments in maintenance 9 Hours Total : 45 Hours Textbook 1.

O. P. Khanna, Industrial Engineering and Management, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New Delhi, 2008

References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

J. A. Tompkins and J. A. White, Facilities planning, John Wiley, 2010. Benjamin W. Neibel, Motion and time study, Richard .D .Irwin Inc., 2006. Hamdy M. Taha, Operations Research, an Introduction, McMillan Co.,2008. Lee J. Krajewski, Larry P.Ritaman, Operations Management ,Addison Wesley,2007. Ravi Shankar, Industrial Engineering and Management, Golgotia Publications Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2009. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT-ROORKEE/INDUSTRIALENGINERRING/index.htm

322


11M030 PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS 3 1 0 3.5 Objectives 

To introduce the mathematical foundations on theory of probability and to apply the concept present in the often encountered discrete and continuous probability models To acquire knowledge on the concepts of correlation and regression, for the application of problems in engineering Describes the fundamental principles of hypothesis testing To demonstrate an ability to design and conduct experiments using one way and two way classification and ANOVA analysis

  


An ability to be familiar with fundamentals of probability, random variable and distributions thus acquire the capability to applying them in decision making. b) The graduates will be able to acquire the knowledge, capability of analyzing and solving any concept or problem associated with heat energy dynamics and utilization. Students will be able to understand the working concepts of thermal engineering. d) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of engineering design. Understanding the concept generation, design optimization and evaluation. Knowing the fundamentals of intellectual property rights. Students will be able to effectively design various engineering components and make process plan for the production. e) An ability to participate and succeed in competitive examinations. Course Outcomes (COs)   

Able to develop the skill to think logically and critically using probability concepts. Able to acquire the knowledge in hypothesis testing for small and large samples. Able to collect, understand, organize and analyze data for decision making using statistical techniques.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN

S. No 1 2 3 4 5

63


Test I62

Test II1

Model Examination1



20 40 30 10 100

20 40 30 10 100

20 40 30 10 100

20 40 30 10 100

Remember

1. Define Probability 2. Define Random Variable. 3. Write the formula for Exponential Distribution.

63 *


323


4. Normal Distribution and Normal Probability curve is ------ shape and symmetrical about the line --5. State types of Two - Dimensional random variable. 6. The coefficient of correlation lies between -------. 7. State kinds of problems of tests of hypothesis. 8. What is the Level of Significance usually employed in testing of hypothesis. 9. The t-distribution ranges from ---------. 10. State one use of Chi-Square Distribution. Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

If A and B are events in S such that P (A  B)=1/4, P( A )=2/3 and P(A  B)=3/4. Find P( A /B). State Bayes’s theorem. State the central limit theorem. If X is a uniform random variable in [-2, 2], find the p.d.f. of X and var(X). State any two properties of Poisson process.  ( x2  y 2 )

The joint pdf of the R.V. (X,Y) is given by f(x,y) = K xy e ,x>0, y>0. Find the value of K and prove also that X and Y are independent. The joint probability function (X , Y ) is given by P(x,y) = k(2x + 3y), x = 0,1,2; Y = 1,2,3 Find marginal distribution. What is the importance of confidence limits in testing of hypothesis ? State 2 differences between CRD and RBD. Name the basic principles of experimental design.

Apply 1. 2.

3. 4.

5.

6. 7.

8. 9.

If at least one child in a family of three children is a boy, what is the probability that all three are boys. In a class of 100 students 75 are boys and 25 are girls. The chance that a boy gets a first class is 0.25 and the probability that a girl gets first class is 0.21. Find the probability that a student selected at random gets a first class. The overall percentage of failure in a certain examination is 40. What is the probability that out of a group of 6 candidates at least 4 passed the examination. In a newly constructed township, 2000 electric lamps are installed with an average life of 1000 burning hours and standard deviation of 200 hours. Assuming the life of the lamps follows normal distribution, find the number of lamps expected to fail during the first 700 hours. From a sack of fruits containing 3 oranges, 2 appls and 3 bananas, a random sample of 4 pieces of fruit is selected. If X is the number of oranges and Y is the number of apples in the sample, find P ( X +Y ≤ 2 ) . The two equations of the variables X and Y are x = 19.13 - 0.87y and y = 11.64 - 0.50x. Find the correlation co-efficient between X and Y. What is the importance of confidence limits in testing of hypothesis ? 40 people were attacked by a disease and only 36 survived. Will you reject the hypothesis that the survival rate , if attacked by this disease is 85% in favour of the hypothesis that it is more , at 5% level of significance. What is the Use of F- distribution. When do you use paired t-test.

324


Analyze/ Evaluate 1. A given lot of IC-chips contains 2% defective chips. Each is tested before delivery. The tester itself is not totally reliable. Probability of tester says the chip is good when it is really good is 0.95 and the probability of tester says chip is effective when it is actually defective is 0.94.If a tested device is indicated to be defective, what is the probability that it is actually defective ? 2. A passenger arrives at a bus stop at 10.00A.M,knowing that the bus will arrive at sometime uniformly distributed between 10.00A.M and 10.30A.M.What is the probability that he will have to wait longer than 10 min ? If at 10.15A.M the bus has not yet arrived, what is the probability that he will have to wait atleast 10 additional minutes ? 3. In a certain factory turning razor blades, there is a small chance of 1/500 for any blade to be defective. The blades are in packets of 10. Use Poisson distribution to calculate the approximate number of packets containing i) 1 defective ii) 2 defective blades respectively in a consignment of 1000 packets. 4.

X and Y are two R.V’s having joint density function 1  (6  x  y );0  x  2,2  y  4 . f ( x, y )   8  0 : otherwise 

5.

Find i) P( X  1  Y  3), ii ) P( X  Y  3)and iii ) P( X  1 / Y  3) . If X and Y are independent random variables each normally distributed with mean as 0 and variance as 

2

find the density function of

 y r  x 2  y 2 and  tan 1   .  x 6.

The table below gives the number of aircraft accidents that occurred during the various days of the week. Test whether the accidents are uniformly distributed over the week. Days : Mon Tue Wed Thur Fri Sat No.of accidents: 14 18 12 11 15 14 7. A certain drug is claimed to be effective in curing cold. In an experiment on 500 persons with cold, half of them were given the drug and half of them were given the sugar pills.The patients reaction to the treatment are recorded in the following table. Helped Harmed No effect Drug 150 30 70 Sugar pills 130 40 80 On the basis of this data,can it be concluded that the drug and sugar pills differ significantly in curing cold? 8. Random samples of 400 men and 600 women were asked whether they would like to have a school near their residence.200 men and 325 women were in favour of the proposal . Test the hypothesis that the proportion of men and women in favour of the proposal are same , at 5% level of significance. 9. An experiment was designed to study the performance of 4 different detergents for fuel injectors: Engine 1 Engine 2 Engine 3 Totals Detergent A 45 43 51 139 Detergent B 47 46 52 145 Detergent C 48 50 55 153 Detergent D 42 37 49 128 Totals 182 176 207 565 Looking on the detergents as treatments and the engines as blocks ,obtain the appropriate analysis of variance table and test at the 0.01 level of significance whether there are differences in the detergents or in the engines. 10. Analyse the variance in the following Latin Square of yields (in kgs) of paddy where A,B,C and D denote the different methods of cultivation. D122 A121 C123 B122 B124 C123 A122 D125

325


A120 B119 D120 C121 C122 D123 B121 A122 Examine whether the different methods of cultivation have given significantly different.

Unit I Probability and Random Variable Axioms of probability - Conditional probability - Total probability - Baye’s theorem - Random variable Probability mass function - Probability density functions - Properties- Moments Moment generating functions and their properties 9 Hours Unit II Standard Distributions Binomial, Poisson, Geometric, Uniform, Exponential, Gamma, Weibull and Normal distributions and their properties –Problems Functions of a random variable 9 Hours Unit III Two Dimensional Random Variables Joint distributions - Marginal and conditional distributions – Covariance - Correlation and Regression Transformation of random variables Central limit theorem (Without proof) 9 Hours Unit IV Testing of Hypothesis Sampling distributions – Testing of hypothesis for mean, variance, proportions and differences Chi-square and F distributions

. 9 Hours

Unit V Design of Experiments Analysis of variance – One way classification –Two way classification Latin square 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbooks 1. T. Veerarajan, Probability, Statistics and Random Processes, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi , 2006. 2. R. A. Johnson, Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for Engineers , Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009. References 1. R. E. Walpole , R. H. Myers, R. S. L. Myers and K. Ye , Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists , Pearsons Education, New Delhi , 2002. 2. S. Lipschutz and J. Schiller , Schaum’s outline Series - Introduction to Probability and Statistics , Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 1998. 3. S. C. Gupta and J. N. Kapur , Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics , Sultan Chand, New Delhi,1996. 4. S. Ross, A first Course in Probability , Pearson Education, New Delhi , 2002.

326


11M031 MARKETING MANAGEMENT 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives 

To introduced to key marketing ideas and phenomena, especially the core theme of delivering benefits to customers To impart skills in marketing analysis and planning To communicate knowledge on management and also about basic concepts of supply chain management due to logistics levels

 

Program Outcomes (POs) (a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes (COs) 1.

Apply the new Management techniques in Marketing , project and real time applications.


64


Test 1*

Test 2*

40 30 30 --100

40 30 30 --100



Remember

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 64 *

Define Marketing management Define the project What is meant by marketing mix Basic criteria of segmentation Reduce it to a set of manageable tasks Define pricing Functions of product development Name any few market strategy What is meant by portfolio analysis How to classify pricing methods Define supply chain management Why branding is required? Name any two basis of market segmentation. Distinguish between marketing and sales. What are the buy phases? State the importance of pricing? Define pull strategy. List out the constitutes of good marketing research. How do you classify industrial products?


327


19. Write any four public relation tools. 20. What is a brand? How do you build brand identity? 21. What trends are taking place in channel dynamics? Understand 1. What are the characteristics of an effective marketing mix? 2. How can informal communication among various departments in an organization facilitate the marketing function? 3. Why should a company attempt to emotionally engage its customers 4. Of the various roles played by consumers in the decisions making process, which one is more important and why? 5. Why is it important for a company to study its environment? 6. What are the important requirements for commissioning a good research? 7. What are the essential conditions in designing a questionnaire to elicit a correct response from the respondent? 8. Define Marketing Management. 9. Define the terms: Exchange and Transactions. 10. Give one example of each of the following: Places and Ideas to be marketed. 11. Brief ‘Selling Concept” 12. What is mean by strategic marketing plan 13. Which are the different types of customers? 14. Explain ‘competition power’ used to motivate channel members? 15. In which organization structure a company can avoid geographic or customer duplication? 16. Give the difference between transformational and transactional leadership. 17. What is mean by profit margin quota and give its importance. 18. State the critical success factors for making distribution strategy effective. Apply 1. 2. 3.

How do customers or clients come into the program? How alpha and beta testing methods are adopted for market testing of business goods? Discuss the regulatory framework for businesses in India? How do these regulations affect multinational companies that are doing business in India? 4. What constitutes good marketing research? 5. What are the objectives of salesmanship? 6. How do consumer characteristics influence buying behavior? 7. What are the emerging opportunities and challenges to a marketer of consumer durables. 8. What factors would you consider in determining the sample size for a marketing research study? 9. How alpha and beta testing methods are adopted for market testing of business goods? 10. Critically analyze the importance of marketing department relationships with other functional departments in the organization. Unit I Introduction Marketing: Definition, Marketing process, Core concepts, The Marketing Environment, Marketing Mix, Philosophies of Marketing Consumer markets Vs business markets. 9 Hours Unit II STP and Buyer Behaviour Segmentation: Levels, Importance, Process, Bases of Segmentation – Targeting - Positioning – Consumer Behaviour: Decision making process, Buying roles, Influencing factors Organizational Buyer behaviour 9 Hours

328


Unit III Product and Pricing Product: Meaning, Types of Goods, Product hierarchy, New Product Development: Process, Pricing: Meaning Types, methods, issues 9 Hours Unit IV Marketing Strategy Marketing Plan: Components – Marketing Strategy: Formulation and Implementation, Portfolio analysis, BCG Matrix, GEC Grid. Marketing research: importance, process. 9 Hours Unit V Promotion and Distribution Promotion: Promotion Mix, Advertising: Importance, Sales Promotion: Importance, Methods: Customer oriented, Trade oriented – Marketing Channels: Channel levels, Channel Members, Roles, Channel Management, Retailing: Trends in Retailing Logistics and supply chain management 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1.

Phillip Kotler, Principles of Marketing: A South Asian Perspective, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2010.


V. S. Ramasamy and S. Namakumari, Marketing Management: Global Perspective Indian Context, Macmillan Publishers India, 2009. Donald S. Tull and Del I. Hawkins, Marketing Research: Measurement and Method, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2010. Rajan Saxena, Marketing Management, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2009. www.ocw.mit.edu/courses/sloan-school-of-management/15-810 marketing- management- fall2004/lecture-notes

329


11M032 ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIORS AND MANAGEMENT 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives  

To enable the students to understand the perspectives of management To give an insight about the functions of management like planning, organizing, staffing, leading, controlling To familiarize the students with organizational culture and help them to manage change



Program Outcomes (POs) (e) The graduates develop skills to be effective members of a team. (h) The graduates will develop capacity to understand professional and ethical responsibility and will display skills required for continuous and lifelong learning and up gradation. Course Outcomes (COs)  To demonstrate understanding of the key concepts and ways of analysing factors relating to individuals, groups and organisations.  To distinguish between different types of employee performance, learning, personality and motivational theories.  To understand the importance of organisational behaviour in Business settings.  To identify the process of group formation, group structure, the role of the individual in groups and team working.  To identify and explain the historical changes in organisational structure and design and the importance of the concepts of conflict and institutions for organisations ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No 1 2 3 4 5


Test 1*

Test 2*


40 40 20 --100

40 40 20 --100

Model Examination 40 40 20 --100


65

Remember 1. Define management. 2. List the functions of managers. 3. What do you mean by policy? 4. What is staffing? 5. State the functions of attitude. 6. What is group dynamics? 7. Differentiate Strong from Weak cultures. 8. What is the role of change agent? Understand 1. Describe the Evaluation of management. 2. Explain patterns of management Analysis. 65 *


330


3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Discuss the Planning Process. Explain the process of formulating career strategy of an employee. Compare and contrast Maslow’s and Herzberg’s motivation theory. Describe the personality attributes influencing Organizational Behaviour. Predict the problems involved in creating and sustaining an organizational culture. Explain organization development intervention strategies.

Apply 1. If you were the chief executive officer of a large corporation, how would you ‘institutionalize’ ethics in the organization? 2. “Formal organization is the intentional structure of roles and informal organization is a network of personal and social relations”. Comment 3. Design a performance appraisal matrix for a production Engineer. 4. Many other disciplines have contributed to the discipline of Organizational Behaviour. Justify. 5. Validate why values are important in understanding behaviour of people. 6. High cohesiveness in a group leads to higher group productivity. Comment. 7. Construct a proforma for studying the satisfaction level of employees as influenced by the culture of the organization. 8. Illustrate with an example, why change is an ongoing activity in an organization. Unit I Management Overview: Management - Definition, nature and purpose, Evolution of management, patterns of management Analysis, Functions of managers, management and society - Operation in a pluralistic society, Social responsibility of managers, Ethics in managing. 9 Hours Unit II Management Functions - I Planning: Objectives, Types, Steps, Process, policies. Organizing - Nature and purpose, Departmentation, Line and staff, Decentralization. Staffing - Selection, performance appraisal, career strategy. 9 Hours Unit III Management Functions-II Leading - Human Factor in managing, Behavioral models, Creativity and innovation. Motivation –theories. Leadership - Ingredients of Leadership, Styles. Communication. Controlling – control Techniques. 9 Hours Unit IV Organizational Behaviour Meaning and importance of Organizational Behaviour, challenges and opportunities for Organizational Behaviour, Attitudes Job satisfaction, personality and values. Perception, Groups and Teams, conflict management. 9 Hours Unit V Organizational culture and Dynamics Organizational Culture – Definition, Functions, creating and sustaining culture, creating an Ethical Organizational culture. Organizational change – forces for change, managing change, change agents, resistance to change, approaches to managing organizational change, Organizational Development in intervention. 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1. Herold Koontz and Heinz Weihrich, Essentials of Management, Mc Tata Graw Hill, New Delhi, 2010. References 1. Robbins, Judge, Sanghi, Organizational Behaviour, Pearson, New Delhi,2009 2. Fred Luthans, Organizational Behaviour, Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi,2009

331


11M033 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives 

To Gain knowledge on the principles of management for all kinds of people in all kinds of organizations To have basic knowledge on international aspect of management To have a clear understanding of the managerial functions like planning, organizing, staffing, leading and controlling

 

Program Outcomes (POs) (e) The graduates develop skills to be effective members of a team. (h) The graduates will develop capacity to understand professional and ethical responsibility and will display skills required for continuous and lifelong learning and up gradation. Course Outcomes (COs)    

Expertise on responsibilities of a Manager. Expertise on Organizational Hierarchy and Staffing. Familiar with various Motivational Theories. Familiar with budgets and controlling techniques.



Test 1*

Test 2*

30 40 30 --100

30 40 30 --100



66 67

Remember

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

67 *

What is Management? What are all the characteristics of Management? What are all the role of management in Organisation? Who is the father of Scientific Management? What is scalar chain? What are all the functions of management? What is partnership? What is private limited company? Define planning. What are all the objectives of planning? What are all the different types of planning? Mention the required reasons for the need of policies.


332


13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49.

Classify budgets. What is MBO? What is planning premises? Define organising. List out the steps involved in organisation process. State the kinds of organisational charts. What are the types of departmentation? What is matrix structure? List out the sources of authority. What is staff authority? What is decentralization? What are the steps involved in manpower planning? What is stress interview? What is performance appraisal? What is Halo effect? What is managerial grid? List down the human factors in managing. Define creativity. What is SCAMPER tool? What is meant by brain storming? Define Motivation? Name the steps involved in motivation process? What are the types of motivation? Mention the various types of communication in organisation. What is control? What are the characteristics of control? What is feed forward control? What is management by expectation? Define budget. What are the classification of Budget? What is zero base budget? What is PERT and CPM? What are the factors affecting productivity? Define OR. What is Value analysis? What is polycentric attitude? What is geocentric attitude?

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

Write some important functions of top management. Write the demerits of sole trading. What are all the problems of partnership? Give an example of public and private limited companies. What are all the guidelines for objective setting? What are all the benefits of Management by Objective? When the strategy planning fails? What are the practices made in making effective premising? How to evaluate the importance of a decision? What do you understand by effective organising? How informal organisation characteristics differ from formal organisation? State the advantages and disadvantages of departmentation by enterprise function. Give a note on departmentation by customers. Compare line and staff authority. What are all the disadvantage of decentralization? Differentiate recruitment and selection.

333


17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27.

How to make an effective appraisal? What are all the sources of an organisational conflict? Differentiate innovation and invention. How can be harmonizing objectives achieved? What are the important assumptions made on Y theory? Mention the importance of motivation. Differentiate motivation and satisfaction. Why is budget control important? How PERT and CPM in used? How to use MIS for middle management? How to calculate ROI?

Apply 1. 2.

3. 4. 5.

6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

In addition to a paid job, where else might a person develop managerial experience? In recent years, many employers seek out technically trained job candidates who also have studied management. What advantages do you think employers see in a technical person studying management? Why do large companies encourage many of their employees to “think like entrepreneurs”? What do you think might be advantages of making business executives adhere to a code of ethics as do physicians and lawyers? During weather emergencies such as a severe ice storm, some companies send out an alert that only “essential” employees should report to work. Explain why managers should or should not stay home on such emergency days. What is your reaction to the following statement made by many business graduates? “It may be nice to study ethics, but in the real world the only thing that counts is money.” Give examples of rights that you think every employee is entitled to. Some business owners make a statement such as, “We’re too busy to bother with strategy. We have to take care of the present.” What might be wrong with their reasoning? How might the use of Internet search engines help you make better decisions on the job? Describe the general approach a firm of five real-estate developers might take to use the nominal group technique for deciding which property to purchase next. Why would a heavy equipment company like Caterpillar hire a Ph.D. in economics as the CEO? Gantt charts have been around for almost 100 years, and they are now implemented with software. Why do Gantt charts have such staying power? An important part of management is dealing with people. Where is the human touch in any of the techniques described in the subject? How can a manager tell whether an employee is resisting change?

Unit I Historical Development Definition of Management – Science or Art – Management and Administration – Development of Management Thought – Contribution of Taylor and Fayol – Functions of Management Types of business organization 9 Hours Unit II Planning Nature & Purpose – Steps involved in Planning – Objectives – Setting Objectives – Process of Managing by Objectives – Strategies, Policies & Planning Premises- Decision-making Forecasting 9 Hours

334


Unit III Organizing Nature and Purpose – Formal and informal organization – Organization Chart – Structure and Process – Departmentation by difference strategies – Line and Staff authority – Benefits and Limitations – DeCentralization and Delegation of Authority – Staffing – Selection Process - Techniques –Managerial Effectiveness Human resource development 9 Hours Unit IV Directing Scope – Human Factors – Creativity and Innovation – Harmonizing Objectives – Leadership – Types of Leadership Motivation – Hierarchy of needs – Motivation theories – Motivational Techniques – Job Enrichment – Communication – Process of Communication – Barriers and Breakdown – Effective Communication Electronic media in Communication 9 Hours Unit V Controlling System and process of Controlling – Requirements for effective control – The Budget as Control Technique – Information Technology in Controlling – Use of computers in handling the information – Productivity – Problems and Management – Control of Overall Performance – Direct and Preventive Control – Reporting – The Global Environment – Globalization and Liberalization International management and global theory of management 9 Hours Total: 45 hours Textbook 1.

Herald Koontz and Heinz Weihrich, Essentials of Management, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.


Koontz, Principles of Management, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., 2008. JAF Stomer, Freeman R. E and Daniel R Gilbert, “Management”, Pearson Education, 2004. Joseph L Massie Essentials of Management, Prentice Hall of India, (Pearson), 2003. Fraidoon Mazda, Engineering Management, Addison Wesley, 2000. Tripathy PC and Reddy PN, Principles of Management, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1999

335


11M034 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES FOR ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS 3 1 0 3.5 Objectives 

To Understand the art of optimization for obtaining the best results under given resources -Men, Machine, Materials, Energy and Money). To develop analytical Skills for solving industrial and real world problems. To Understand various nonlinear/non-traditional optimization techniques for solving real word engineering Problems.

 

Program Outcomes (POs) i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices. Course Outcomes (COs)    

Understand the basic of traditional and non-traditional optimization techniques. Enhace the learning skill of single variable and multi variable traditional optimization techniques. Enhace the learning skill of non-traditional optimization techniques like in the Genetic algorithms, Particle swarm optimization, Simulated Annealinga andAnt colony methods. Provide the skill for solving the design and manufascturing engineering problems using traditional and non-traditional optimization techniques.


68

Bloom’s Taxonomy (New version) Remember Understand Apply Analyze/ Evaluate create Total

Test I*

Test II*

20 20 20 30 10 100

20 20 20 30 10 100

Model Examinations* 20 20 20 30 10 100


Remember

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 68 *

What is meant by objective function? Define design variables Define constraints. What are the types of optimization Define golden selection method Define direct search method. What the software development in optimization Define Lagrange multiplier. What are the different Evolutionary Optimization Techniques? Define parameters input to optimization. Define algorithm What are the basic steps in optimizations?


336


Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

Difference between single and multi objective function. Why multi-objective functions needed? Difference between discrete and continues variables. Why mutation in GA? Difference between single and multi-crossover in GA. What are the new developments in Optimization? Difference between Newton and Cauchy method. Difference between constraint and unconstraint problem. What is better searching method? Why? Is optimization works outside the boundary? Why? Classify optimization constraints.

Apply 1. How to validate the optimization techniques results? 2. Apply GA algorithm for CNC Machine parameter optimization. 3. Apply GA algorithm to parameter optimization of any non-traditional machining process. 4. Apply PSO for designing of helical spring Analyze/ Evaluate 1. Using DE method for finding optimum shaft diameter of given rod. 2. Can find the minimum cost for the given tolerance problem. Give an example. 3. Using GA techniques, find the optimum scheduling for a material purchasing company. Create 1. Develop the new optimization techniques algorithm for the Gear design problem. 2. Developing new concept to improve the performance of GA/SA/PSO algorithm. Unit I Single Variables Optimization Techniques General Characteristics of mechanical elements, adequate and optimum design, principles of optimization, formulation of objective function, design constraints – Classification of optimization problem – Classification of optimization techniques. Single variable Techniques of unconstrained minimization: Dichotomous search – Fibonacci method - Golden section - Interpolation methods. Quadratic and cubic interpolation 9 Hours Unit II Multi - Variable Optimization Techniques Multi-variable techniques - Direct search methods: Random search – Hooke and Jeeve’s – Simplex method Descent methods – Cauchy method- Newtons method – Introduction to constrained optimization techniques- Concept of penalty function – Lagrange multiplier - Introduction to Multi objective optimization Software development 9 Hours Unit III Evolutionary Optimization Techniques Genetic algorithms, Simulated Annealing techniques, Particle swarm optimization, Ant colony algorithm, Differential evolution - Implementation of algorithm using Software- MATLAB –GA,SA Program. 9 Hours

337


Unit IV Engineering Applications Design optimization: Design of simple axial, transverse loaded members for minimum cost, maximum weight – Design of shafts and torsionally loaded members – Design of springs, Gears. Implementation of algorithm. Design of Leaf Spring, Epicycloids gear-train Optimization. 8 Hours Unit V Engineering Applications Optimal tolerance allocation, scheduling optimization and operating parameters optimization for CNC Machine Tool. Implementation of algorithm using software 10 Hours Total: 45 + 15 Hours Textbooks 1. 2.

Singiresu S. Rao, Engineering Optimization – Theory and Practice, New Age International Publications, 2010. Jasbin. S. Arora, Introduction to Optimum Design, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., Singapore, 2006.


Kalyanamoy Deb, Optimization for Engineering Design Algorithms And Examples, Prentice Hall of India, 1995. D. E. Goldberg, Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine, Barnen, Addison-Wesley, New York, 1989. R. Saravanan, Manufacturing Optimization Through Intelligent Techniques, CRC Press, Taylor and Francis Publications, Florida, USA, 2006. Dimitris Bertsimas, John N. Tsitsiklis , John Tsitsiklis , Dimitris Bertsimas , John Tsitsiklis, Introduction to Linear Optimization , 2000. Dimitri P. Bertsekas, Nonlinear Programming, Edition II, 2000.

338


11M035 INDUSTRIAL TRIBOLOGY (Use Approved Data Book is permitted) 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives   

To expertise the concepts of the theory of friction and wear and its measurements To create expertise on theory of lubricants physical properties and its standards, design and performance analysis of fluid film bearings To impart knowledge on the principles involved in surface treatment and modifications for enhancing the life of a product based on its application.

Program Outcomes (POs) a. e. i. k.

The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. The graduates develop skills to be effective members of a team. The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices.

Course outcomes (COs)   

The students will become familiar with the fundamentals of theory of friction and wear and their mechanisms The students will get sound knowledge on theory of lubricants and its properties and also the design and performance analysis of fluid film bearings. Able to understand the basics principles involved in surface modifications for enhancing the life of bearing applications.

Assessment Pattern

S.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Total

Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version) Remember Understand Apply Analyze Evaluate Create

Test 1*

Test 2*

Model Examination*


40 40 20 ---100

30 40 20 10 --100

30 30 20 20 --100

30 30 20 20 --100

69

Remember 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. *

Define friction and what are the laws of friction? What is Coulomb friction and sticking friction? Bring out the various layers of a typical metallic surface. Define fretting wear. Discuss adhesive wear, two and three body abrasive wear. What are the characteristics of adhesive and abrasive wear? Give a brief note on a mechanism of wear.


339


63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 77. 78. 79. 80. 81. 82. 83. 84. 85. 86.

What are the situations in which abrasive wear occur? Name method of wear measurements. What are tz he precautions necessary in wear measurements? How surface coatings can improve wear resistance? Mention any four methods of applying surface coatings Give desirable features of lubricants What is meant by hydrostatic lubrication? Give examples for hydrostatic lubrication. Name the different regimes of lubrication. List the different types of lubricants in use mentioning their applications. Give the different mechanisms of boundary lubrication. Give a brief note on elasto hydrodynamic lubrication. Write the salient features of hydrostatic lubrication. How do you evaluate the stiffness of a journal bearing? Name a few applications where hydrostatic bearings are used. Give at least two examples in each of partial and journal bearings. What are the advantages of hydrostatic bearings? Give the various methods used for manufacturing races of rolling element bearings. Define basic load rating. List rolling-element bearing defects. What are the components of surface geometry? What are the major causes for the failure of rolling bearings? List any four rolling bearing failures. What are the main reasons for the vibration of oil lubricated journal bearings?

Understand 31. 32. 33. 34. 35.

36. 37.

38. 39. 40. 41.

42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48.

How surface properties are important from the point of tribology? Why composite wear rate is less than that of aluminium for lower limiting pressure? How will you evaluate friction factor experimentally? Sliding friction is dependent on surface roughness, why? Calculate the adhesive wear of a pin of diameter 20 mm and length 40 mm. The sliding distance is 30 mm. Archard’s wear coefficient is 2 x 10 -4, load acting on the pin is 20 kN, yield strength of the materials is 900 MPa. Derive an expression for finding the volume of abrasive wear in metallic sliding system. In the following pair of surfaces, which pair is the best in terms of wear properties? Give reasons Low carbon steel - Hardened steel Low carbon steel - Bakelite Low carbon steel - Tungsten carbide What is all the design features affecting bearing vibration. When will you go for hydrostatic lubrication system? How does viscous index number influence in selection of lubricants? Compare the property “cooling” for the lubricants: (a) Mineral oil with additives (b) Synthetic oil (c) Grease (d) Dry lubricant How are lubricants classified? What are the properties required for a good lubricant? Distinguish between hydrodynamic and Elasto hydrodynamic lubrication. Explain in detail two applications for Elasto hydro dynamic lubrication. Discuss the effect of clearance on temperature rise and flow rate in a hydrodynamic journal bearings. Why is selective assembly used in ball bearing manufacturing? What do you understand by L10 life of rolling element bearings? What is meant by ‘real bearing area’ of a bearing surface?

340


49. What are bearings performance measurements? 50. Why bearings are preloaded in machine tool spindle drive application? Apply/Evaluate 1. 2. 3.

4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

9.

Discuss the wear properties of metallic and non metallic material. Discuss the friction properties of metallic and non metallic material. Explain the influence of the following in determining sliding friction of metals: (a) Surface finish (b) Surface energy (c) Hardness Explain the types of additives used and their functions for the manufacturing of engine oils. Describe the characteristics and causes of rolling bearing failures and preventive measures. Explain the set-up of four ball and pin-on-disc type friction and wear measuring instrument. Discuss the nature and types of failure in tribological components. Indicate the effect of the following factors on friction coefficient using sketches: a. Load b. Speed, and c. Surface roughness Explain the situations in which the following lubrication occur: d. Boundary lubrication e. Elasto-hydrodynamic lubrication Give two examples for each case.

Unit I Surfaces And Friction Topography of Engineering surfaces- Contact between surfaces - Sources of sliding Friction - Adhesion Ploughint- Energy dissipation mechanisms Friction Characteristics of metals - Friction of non metals. Friction of lamellar solids - friction of Ceramic materials and polymers - Rolling Friction - Source of Rolling Friction - Stick slip motion - Measurement of Friction 9 Hours Unit II Wear Types of wear - Simple theory of Sliding Wear Mechanism of sliding wear of metals - Abrasive wear Materials for Adhesive and Abrasive wear situations - Corrosive wear - Surface Fatigue wear situations Brittle Fracture wear - Wear of Ceramics and Polymers - Wear Measurements 9 Hours Unit III Lubricants and Lubrication Types Types and properties of Lubricants - Testing methods - Hydrodynamic Lubrication – Elasto-hydrodynamic lubrication- Boundary Lubrication - Solid Lubrication Hydrostatic Lubrication 9 Hours Unit IV Film Lubrication Theory Fluid film in simple shear - Viscous flow between very close parallel plates - Shear stress variation Reynolds Equation for film Lubrication - High speed unloaded journal bearings - Loaded journal bearings Reaction torque on the bearings - Virtual Co-efficient of friction - The Somerfield diagram 9 Hours

341


Unit V Surface Engineering and Materials for Bearings Surface modifications - Transformation Hardening, surface fusion - Thermo chemical processes - Surface coatings - Plating and anodizing - Fusion Processes - Vapour Phase processes - Materials for rolling Element bearings - Materials for fluid film bearings - Materials for marginally lubricated and dry bearings 9 Hours Total Hours: 45 Textbook 1.

Prasanta Sahoo, “Engineering Tribology”, Prentice-Hall India, 3rd edition, New Delhi, 2011.

References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Bharat Bhusan, “Introduction to Tribology”, Wiley Publication, 2 nd edition, 2013. I.M. Hutchings, “Friction and Wear of Engineering Material", Edward Arnold, London, 1992. T.A. Stolarski, “Tribology in Machine Design ", Industrial Press Inc., 1990. E.P. Bowden and D. Tabor, "Friction and Lubrication ", Heinemann Educational Books Ltd., 1974. A. Cameron, “Basic Lubrication theory ", Longman, U.K., 1981. M.J. Neale (Editor), “Tribology Handbook ", Newnes. Butter worth, Heinemann, U.K., 1975. http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/downloads/110105039/ http://www.onlinevideolecture.com/mechanical-engineering/nptel-iitdelhi/tribology/?course_id=527

342


11M036 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives   

To understand concepts like value ,value addition, operations system To understand and appreciate the product design process and apply various tools such as perceptual maps, benchmarking etc. To understand the concepts like lean thinking, theory of constraints

Programme Outcomes (POs) (e) The graduates develop skills to be effective members of a team. (h) The graduates will develop capacity to understand professional and ethical responsibility and will display skills required for continuous and lifelong learning and up gradation. Course Outcomes (COs)   

Appreciate the significance of operations management in both product and service industry Understand the product / service design and operations planning process Be able to take decisions in design, planning and control of operations systems

Assessment Pattern S. No 1 2 3 4 5


Test 1*

Test 2*


40 40 20 --100

40 40 20 --100



70

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 70 *

Define Operations Management List out the skills operations manager need to possess What are the steps of mfg strategy? List the different types of layouts List different types of forecasting methods Define capacity What are the four measures of performance types included in Balanced Score Card What are the seven wastes under the lean management concepts Define value added, non value added and required non value added Define economies of scale Define the product and service Define cycle time and throughput time What are the key aspects of product design?


343


Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

What do understand by core competency? Explain the concept of order qualifier and order winner Explain policy deployment process Explain the lean management concept Explain the concept of economies of scope Summarise the manufacturing strategy process Explain the manufacturing planning process Explain with a neat diagram the product design process.

Apply 1.

Touch Key is trying to determine how best to produce its newest product, Soft keyboards. The keyboards could be produced in-house using either Process A or Process B, or purchased from a supplier. Cost data are given below. For what levels of demand should each process be chosen?

Process A Process B Supplier 2.

Fixed Cost (Rs) 160,000 400,000 0

Variable Cost (Rs) 200 80 400

Sequence the following jobs by (i) SPT, (ii) DDATE, and (iii) SLACK. a. Calculate mean flow time, mean tardiness, and maximum tardiness for the above three sequencing rules. b. Which sequencing rule would you recommend? Why? Job Processing Time Due Date 4 8 A 2 5 B 8 18 C 5 7 D

Analyse / Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Distinguish between order winner and order qualifier Compare and contrast different types of layout Compare and contrast batch production, mass production, and continuous production in the tabular form Compare SPT scheduling with FCFS Differentiate goods manufacturing from service manufacturing Compare and Contrast economies of scale and economies of scope Compare and contrast level production plan with the chase plan Compare and contrast process improvement with process reengineering

Create 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Develop an operations system model for the manufacturing process of your choice Select a product of your choice, decide the volume of manufacturing, plan the process and develop a layout for the same. Construct a product structure tree for a bicycle. Write the assumptions Construct the BOM for the ball point pen. Write the assumptions Construct the flow chart and the process chart for the photocopying process. Identify steps for improvement.

344


Unit I Introduction to Operations Management; value; value chain; operations system; goods & service concepts. Mfg strategy: steps of manufacturing strategy - Defining the Primary Tasks, Assessing the Core Competencies, Determining Order Qualifiers & Winners, Positioning the Firm; Deploy the Strategy policy deployment; balanced score card Product Design; product life cycle; product design outcomes; Effective Design process; steps in product design; perceptual map; concurrent design; DFM; design review 9 Hours Unit II Service Design: service characteristics; Service Design Process; Service Process Matrix; Service Blueprinting Processes and Technology: Vertical Integration; virtual integration; Outsourcing; Product Process Matrix; process selection through breakeven analysis; process improvement; process flow chart; Process Innovation & Process Reengineering; Principles for Redesigning Processes 9 Hours Unit III Capacity and Facilities Planning: definition, capacity enhancement strategies; Economies & Diseconomies of Scale; economies of scope; Facility Layout - Job Shop Layout; Process Layout; Product Layout; Line Balancing using LOT RULE; Fixed Position Layout; Cellular Layout; FMS Layout; mixed model assembly line Facility Location Models: Types of Facilities; Site Selection: Where to Locate; Location Analysis Techniques 9 Hours Unit IV Forecasting: Strategic Role of Forecasting in Operations Management; Components of Forecasting Demand; Time Series Methods; Forecast Accuracy; Regression Methods Sales and Operations Planning: The Sales and Operations Planning Process; Strategies for Adjusting Capacity; Strategies for Managing Demand; Quantitative Techniques for Aggregate Planning 9 Hours Unit V Resource Planning: Material Requirements Planning (MRP); Capacity Requirements Planning (CRP); Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP II); Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) Lean Systems: Basic Elements of Lean Production; Benefits of Lean Production; Implementing Lean Production; Lean Services; Lean Six Sigma; Lean and the Environment; Lean Consumption Scheduling: Objectives in Scheduling; Loading; Sequencing; Monitoring; Advanced Planning and Scheduling Systems; Theory of Constraints 9 Hours Total Hours: 45 Textbook 1.

Rusell, R.S. & Taylor, B.W., “Operations Management Along the Supply Chain, Wiley Student Edition, 6th Ed., 2009.

References 1. Krajewski, L. J., and Ritzman, L.P., “Operations Management: Strategy and Analysis”, 6 th Edition, Pearson Education, 2003. 2. Chase, R.B., Aquilano, N.J., and Jacobs, F.R., “Operation Management for Competitive Advantage”, 10th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003. 3. Mahadevan, B. Operations Management: Theory and Practice, 2th Ed., Pearson Education, 2010.

345


11M037 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives   

To understand the project types and the need for project portfolio management To understand the need for aligning the projects to the company’s strategy To understand the planning, organizing, staffing, leading, monitoring and control of the implementation of a project for its completion within cost, time and performance parameters

Programme Outcomes (POs) (e) The graduates develop skills to be effective members of a team. (h) The graduates will develop capacity to understand professional and ethical responsibility and will display skills required for continuous and lifelong learning and up gradation. Course Outcomes (COs)   

Plan the projects using appropriate project planning terminology Understand and appreciate the project management philosophy in managing the triple constraints Understand and apply the project management tools & techniques such as Gantt chart, PERT, CPM, crashing the network for reducing the time duration etc.

Assessment Pattern S. No 1 2 3 4 5


Test 1*

Test 2*


40 40 20 --100

40 40 20 --100



71

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 71 *

Define Project Management List out the skills project manager need to possess Define organization culture List the different types of organization structure List different categories of projects Define scope, deliverable, objectives What is a “project rollup,” and how does the project manager use this information? What is strategic mgt? What are the key Ingredients of Mission Statement? What two factors you like to balance in case of project portfolio mgt? Write the expansions of PERT, CPM What is the importance of Cost & Time Estimation in project management? What are the reasons for adjusting Estimates?


346


Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

List and describe in one sentence each of the ten primary characteristics which, in aggregate, capture the essence of an organisation’s culture. With the help of a neat and legible sketch, explain “Tracking Gantt chart”. Explain why PM Need to Understand the Strategy? Explain the strategic management process How the risk mgt process should be? How to manage the risk? Summarise the project planning process Comprehend the project audit and closure process

Apply 1.

Use a weighted score model and choose between three methods (A,B,C) of financing the acquisition of a major competitor. The relative weights for each criterion are shown in the following table as are the scores for each location on each criterion. A score of 1 represents unfavourable, 2 satisfactory, and 3 favourable. Method Category Weight A B C Consulting cost 20 1 2 3 Acquisition time 20 2 3 1 Disruption 10 2 1 3 Cultural differences 10 3 3 2 Skill redundancies 10 2 1 1 Implementation risks 25 1 2 3 Infrastructure 10 2 2 2

2.

A four-year financial project has net cash flows of Rs20 lakhs; Rs25 lakhs; Rs30 lakhs and Rs50 lakhs in the next four years. It will cost Rs75 lakhs to implement the project (initial investment). If the required rate of return is 10.2, conduct the discounted cash flow calculation to determine the NPV. Use formula method (Do not use NPV tables) (a) Determine the number of inventory turns and the days of supply for each year. (b) As the company has grown, does it appear that the company’s supply chain performance has improved? Explain your answer. (c) If the company wants to improve its supply chain performance, what items should it focus on? Why?

3.

Consider the following data for a project never before attempted by your company Activity A B C D E F G H

a. b. c.

Expected Time (weeks) 2 6 4 2 4 5 3 2

Draw the AON network diagram for this project Identify critical path and estimate the project’s duration. Calculate the Free slack for each activity.

Immediate Predecessors -A A A B B,C,D B E,F

347


Analyse / Evaluate 1. Expound on the adage, “Projects proceed smoothly until 90 percent complete and then remain at 90 percent forever.” 2. Compare and contrast PERT with CPM 3. Compare and contrast macro and micro estimation methods 4. When do you need it? – Yesterday. Analyse and discuss the statement from project management perspective 5. Identify various needs of reducing the project duration? 6. Analyse and discuss the statement “What if Cost, Not Time, Is the Issue”? Create 1. Develop an PBS for the project process of your choice 2. Develop a WBS for a project in which you are going to build a table fan. Give an example of the work packages in one of your cost accounts. Develop corresponding OBS which identifies who is responsible for what. 3. Develop a project network for the house construction. Write the assumptions clearly. 4. For the house construction project identify various possible risks and develop a risk management plan Unit I Modern Project Management: Definition; project life cycle; challenges; benefits; integrated approach; portfolio management; technical & sociocultural dimensions Organization Strategy and Project Selection: Projects and Strategy; strategic management process; Project Portfolio Management Problems; A Portfolio Management System; project selection criteria; Project Proposals 9 hours Unit II Organization: Structure and Culture: Project Mgt Structures; Choosing appropriate project mgt structures; Organisational culture; Implications of Organisational culture for organising projects Defining the Project: Steps; WBS &OBS; Responsibility matrices; Communication Plan 9 hours Unit III Estimating Project Times and Costs: Factors influencing estimation; Guidelines for estimating, Time; Cost & Resources; Macro v/s Micro Estimation; Methods for estimating Time & Cost; Developing budgets; Refining estimates; Creating database for estimation Developing a Project Plan: Developing the Project Network; From Work package to Network; Constructing a Project Network; Activity –on-Node Fundamentals; Network Computation Process; Using the Forward & Backward Pass Information; Practical Considerations 9 hours Unit IV Managing Risk: Risk Management Process; Steps of risk management Scheduling Resources and Costs: The scheduling Problem; Types of Project Constraints; Classification of a Scheduling Problem; Resource Allocation Methods; Splitting / Multitasking; Benefits of Scheduling Resources; Assigning Project Work; Multiproject Resource Schedules Reducing Project Duration: Rationale; Options for accelerating; Project Completion; Cost Duration Graph; Constructing a Project Cost-Duration Graph; Practical Considerations 9 hours Unit V Progress and Performance Measurement and Evaluation: Structure of a Project Monitoring Information System; The Project Control Process; Monitoring Time Performance; Integrated Information System; Developing a Status Report; Indexes to Monitoring Process; Forecasting Final Project Cost; Other Control Issues Project Audit and Closure: Project Audits; The Project Audit Process; Project Audits: The Bigger Picture; Project Closure; Team, Team Member, and PM Evaluations 9 hours Total Hours: 45

348


Text Book Gray Clifford & Eric Larson “Project Management: the Managerial Process” Tata McGraw Hill, IV Ed. 2010 References 1. Meredith JR & SJ Mantel “Project Management: A Managerial Approach” John Wiley, V Ed. 2005 2. Rosenau MD Jr & GD Githens “ Successful Project Management” John Wiley, IV Ed. 2006 3. Richman “Project Management: Step by Step” PHI Learning, 2009.

349


11M038 SIX SIGMA CONCEPTS 3 0 0 3 Objectives  

To evoke an appreciation of the Six Sigma concept to sustain a culture of process and result oriented improvement. To impart the strong conceptual framework and the practical skills on the appropriate tools and techniques at the specific place of work to take up Black Belt Projects.

Program Outcomes (POs) (e) The graduates develop skills to be effective members of a team (h) The graduates will develop capacity to understand professional and ethical responsibility and will display skills required for continuous and lifelong learning and upgradation (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices Course Outcomes (COs)  

Students can understand the various techniques in business. The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in both Mechanical Engineering as well as IT companies. Students can learn about quality control, inspection, handling methods and techniques etc..



Assessment Pattern

S. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6


Test 1*

Test 2*

Model Examination*


25 30 30 10 05 -100

20 30 30 10 10 -100

10 20 30 20 20 -100

10 20 30 20 20 -100

Remember 48. List out the benefits of Six Sigma. 49. What are the Six Sigma Strategies? 50. Mention the elements of SIPOC process model 51. What makes apply of Six-Sigma concept in services more challenging? 52. List out the potential advantages of DMAIC. 53. What are the major roles in a Six-Sigma Organization? 54. Define QFD and state its core concepts. _____________________________________________________________________________________ __________ *The marks secured Test I and Test II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks.

350


Understand 33. 34. 35. 36.

State the advantages of Six Sigma road map. What are the considerations involved in major redesign at Sigma shores transportation? What will Quality as a “Six-Sigma” improvement project? Why Six Sigma needs Lean?

Apply / Evaluate 4.

5. 6. 7.

Compare Six-Sigma and TQM approaches on the following aspects. 1. Integration 2. Leadership 3. Training Explain the essential themes of Six-Sigma. Describe Six-Sigma from a Cost/Benefits perspective views. List out and explain sequentially the various DFSS phases.

Create 1.

What happens to number of errors in output i. When appraisal cost is increased? ii. When prevention cost is increased?

Unit I Overview Of Six Sigma Concepts History of Six-sigma, Benefits, Tools and Themes of Six-Sigma programme. Ingredients of six-sigma, cost of quality. 9 hours Unit II key concept of the six-sigma system A six-sigma vision of business leadership; An introduction to sigma measurement; Six-Sigma improvement and management strategies; The DMAIC Six-Sigma improvement model; Six-Sigma v/s TQM (comparison with TQM). 9 hours Unit III The Six-Sigma Road Map Advantages of six-sigma roadmap; Steps in roadmap; overview and rational behind each step. Application of six-sigma in service; Comparison of service and manufacturing; challenges making six-sigma work in services; using lean sigma in service. 9 hours Unit IV Adopting Six-Sigma Relevance of six-sigma programme; Strategy phase of six- sigma program; preparing leaders to launch and guide effort. Preparing black belts and other key roles - Master Black belt; Champion and Green belts. 9 hours

351


Unit V Training The Organization For Six –Sigma Essentials of effective training; planning curriculum; selecting the right six- sigma projects-Essentials; Process and Do’s and Don’ts. 9 hours Total Hours: 45 Textbook 1.

Jay Arthur, “Lean Six Sigma – Demystified”, Tata McGraw Hill Companies Inc, 2007.

References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Kai yang and Basemel-Haik, “Design for Six-Sigma: A Roadmap for product Development”, McGraw Hill, 2003. Crrevelng C.M., Slutsky J.L and Antis D., “Design for Six- Sigma”, Pearson Education; 2003 Michael.L.George, “Lean Six- Sigma for Service”. Tata McGraw Hill, 2003. Peter S. Pande, Robert P. Neuman, Roland Cavanagh R., “The Six- Sigma way-How GE”, Motorola and Other Top Companies are Honing their Performance, McGraw Hill, 2001. Stamatis D.H., “Six–Sigma and Beyond-Foundations of Excellent Performances”, St.Lucie press 2001. Mikel Harry and Richard Schroeder.A, “Six-Sigma: The Break through Management Strategy”, Currency Book Published by Doubleday, 2000. Tom Luyster and Don Tapping, “Creating Your Lean Future State: How to Move from Seeing to Doing”, Productivity Press, 2006. 8. Rick Harris, Chris Harris & Earl Wilson, “Making Materials Flow”, Publisher: Lean Enterprise Institute, Inc., 2003.

352


11M039 TOYOTA PRODUCTION SYSTEM 3 0 0 3 Objectives     

To understand the philosophy of Toyota towards improvements To understand the significance and methods of waste elimination To understand the need for creating the flow in manufacturing process To be able to apply the TPS method of problem solving To be able apply various tools like 5S, standardized work table, value stream mapping etc.

Programme Outcomes (POs) (e) The graduates develop skills to be effective members of a team. (h) The graduates will develop capacity to understand professional and ethical responsibility and will display skills required for continuous and lifelong learning and up gradation. Course Outcomes (COs)  Achieve a good foundation of TPS  Explain the concept and importance of TPS in manufacturing management for continuous improvement of the organization.  Develop capability and skills in handling various TPS tools. Assessment Pattern S. No. 1 2 3 4 5


Test 1*

Test 2*

30 40 30 --100

30 40 30 --100



72

Remember 1. 2.

3. 4. 5.

List the seven wastes as per TPS Answer the terminology in one or two sentences a. Single piece flow b. Jidoka c. Poka yoke What are the prerequisites of standardized work Write the expansions of TWI, VSM List the six requirements of leaders as per TPS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Explain pull system Explain the use of kanban system in the implementation of pull system discuss“ be more like the tortoise than the hare” discuss “carefully aim before firing” summarise the concept of VA, NVA and RNVA comprehend on the building blocks of TPS House

Understand

353


Apply 1. 2. 3.

Select a process of your choice and give examples of wastes that may be embedded in the process. Categorise these wastes under the seven wastes of TPS Value added time for a particular process is 12’ and the non-value added time is 88’ determine the process ratio. For the data given below, calculate the number of kanban cards required for the single card kanban system a. Weekly demand = 909 units b. Replenishment lead time =4 wks c. Safety stock factor = 0.10 d. Container size = 250

Analyse / Evaluate 1. Expound on the adage, “begin the process of educating all your leaders on your company’s way.” 2. Compare standardized work chart with standardized work combination table 3. Every problem is an improvement opportunity - Analyse and discuss the statement from TPS perspective 4. Purpose of technology is to serve people and processes – discuss 5. Good flow depends upon good balancing of cycle times – analyse the statement 6. Compare and contrast the Toyota way of handling large, medium and small issues Create 1. Develop a 5S program for the place of your choice 2. Identify a problem of your choice and develop different mistake proofing concepts. Compare and contrast these methods 3. Develop a standardized work combination table for the process of your choice. Assume the data necessary. Depiction should be neat and legible 4. Take a problem of your choice and demonstrate the use of five-whys to identify the root cause. Unit I Overview of Toyota Way Principles Define Your Corporate Philosophy and Begin to Live It: Creating & Living Your Philosophy; Maintaining Continuity of Purpose. Starting the Journey of Waste Reduction: Lean Means Eliminating Waste; Developing a Long-Term Philosophy of Waste Reduction; Value Stream Mapping; Creating Flow; Sequential and Concurrent Continuous Improvement Create Initial Process Stability: First Get to Basic Stability; Indicators of Instability; Clearing the Clouds; Objectives of Stability; Strategies to Create Stability; Identify and Eliminate Large Waste; Standing in the Circle Exercise; Standardized Work; 5S 9 Hours Unit II Create Connected Process Flow: One-Piece Flow Is the Ideal; Reduce Waste by Controlling Overproduction; Strategies to Create Connected Process Flow; Single-Piece Flow; Key Criteria for Achieving Flow; Pull; Pull in a Custom Manufacturing Environment; Creating Pull Between Separate Operations Establish Standardised Processes and Procedures: Standardized Work or Work Standards?; Objective of Standardization; Strategies; Types of Standardization; Standardized Work; Standardized Work Documents; Standardized Work as a Baseline; Takt Time as a Design Parameter; Importance of Visual Controls; Standardization Is a Waste Elimination Tool 9 Hours Unit III Leveling: The Leveling Paradox; Heijunka; Smoothing Demand for Upstream Processes; Establishing a Basic Leveled Schedule; Incremental Leveling and Advanced Heijunka; Points of Control

354


355

Build a Culture that stops to Fix Problems: Developing the Culture; The Role of Jidoka: SelfMonitoring Machines; The Problem-Resolution Cycle; Minimizing Line Stop Time; Build Quality Inspections into Every Job; Poka Yoke; Creating a Support Structure Make Technology Fit with People and Lean Processes: Beliefs About Technology, People, and Processes: Tailoring Technology to Fit 9 Hours Unit IV Problem Solving Toyota Way: Problem as an Improvement Opportunity; Telling the Problem-Solving Story Develop Thorough Understanding of the Situation and define the problem: Finding the True Problem; Examining a Problem in Reverse; Defining the Problem; Building a Strong Supporting Argument Complete a Thorough Root Cause Analysis: Principles of Effective Analysis; Seeking Problem Causes; Distill Root Cause Analysis; A3 One-Page Report 9 Hours Unit V Consider Alternative Solutions while Building Consensus: Broadly Consider All Possibilities; Simplicity, Cost, Area of Control, and the Ability to Implement Quickly; Develop Consensus; Test Ideas for Effectiveness; Select the Best Solution; Define the Right Problem Plan-Do-Check-Act : Plan: Develop an Action Plan; Do: Implement Solutions; Check: Verify Results; Act: Make Necessary Adjustments to Solutions and to the Action Plans; Act: Identify Future Steps; Finally Some Action 9 Hours Total Hours: 45

Textbook 1.

Liker JK, & david Meir, Toyota way Field Book – A practical guide for implementing Toyota’s 4Ps, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006

References 1. 2.

Liker JK, Toyota way, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006 Carreira B, Lean Manufacturing that Works, PHI, 2007


11M040 NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING (Common to all Branches) 3 0 0 3 Objectives  Acquire knowledge in NDT, which has wider application in engineering industry.  To make the student knowledgeable in the area of non destructive testing, their convergence and to apply technology in engineering industry. Programme Outcomes (POs) d) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various NDT techniques and thus acquire the capability to applying them in service. Course Outcomes (COs) 1. This program is indeed a testimony for the interaction between Industry and Educational Institution.

2. The courses will also benefit students who plan to gain knowledge prior to entering the field of Nondestructive Testing (NDT).

3. To give basic knowledge of techniques for non-destructive testing of welds. ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No 1 2 3 4 5 Total

Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version) Remember Understand Apply Analyze/ Evaluate Create

Test I73 30 40 30 10 100

Test II1

Model Examination1

30 40 30 10 100

30 40 30 10 100

End Semester Examination 30 40 30 10 100

Remember 1 State advantages of NDT methods. 2 Define penetrant. 3. Write the definition of Gamma rays. 4. State the necessary and sufficient condition for the Ultrasonic test. 5. Write the use of developers. 6. Define Eddy current. 7. Write the general form of X-ray production. Understand 1. Find the suitable NDT method for testing of non ferrous metals. 2. Find the suitable Penetrant for testing of alumium. Apply 1. Use method of Magnetic particle test to find the defect in ferrous metals. Analyze / Evaluate 1. Discuss about X-ray production. 2. Using the method of Ultrasonic technique to find the defects in stainless steel material. 73


356


Unit –I Visual Testing Fundamentals of Visual Testing -Vision, lighting, material attributes, environmental factors, Visual perception, direct and indirect methods -Employer defined applications, metallic materials including raw materials and welds -Inspection objectives, inspection checkpoints, sampling plan, inspection pattern etc. classification of indictions for acceptance criteria -Codes, Standards and Specifications (ASME, ASTM, AWS etc.) 9 Hours Unit –II Liquid Penetrant Testing Principles – types and properties of liquid penetrants - developers – advantages and limitations of various methods -Preparation of test materials -Application of penetrants to parts, removal of surface penetrants, post cleaning- Control and measurement of penetrant process variables -selection of penetrant method solvent removable, water washable, Post emulsifiable – Units and lighting for penetrant testing - dye penetrant process, applicable codes and standards. 9 Hours Unit –III Magnetic Particle Testing Theory of magnetism -ferromagnetic, Paramagnetic materials -characteristics of magnetic fieldsmagnetic hysterisis -magnetisation by means of direct and alternating current - Depth of penetration factors -Circular magnetisation techniques, field around a strength conductors, right hand rule field - Longitudinal magnetization - field produced by current in a coil, shape and size of coils, field strength, current calculations. 9 Hours Unit –IV Ultrasonic testing (UT) Ultrasonic testing – basic properties of sound beam, ultrasonic transducers, inspection methods, technique for normal beam inspection, flaw characterization technique, ultrasonic flaw detection equipment modes of display, immersion testing, advantage, limitations; acoustic emission testing – principles of AET and techniques. 9 Hours Unit –V Radiography Testing X-ray film – structure and types for industrial radiography - use of film - latent image formation on film radiographic exposure, reciprocity law, photographic density -X-ray and gamma ray exposure charts exposure time calculations - film handling and storage - Effect of film processing on film characteristics Processing defects and their appearance on films - control and collection of unsatisfactory radiographs. 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Text books 1. Baldev Raj, Jayakumar T., Thavasimuthu M., ‘Practical Non-Destructive Testing’, Narosa Publishing, 1997. References 1. Eddy Current Testing, Classroom Training Handbook, (CT-6-5), San diego, CA, General Dynamics/Convair Division, 1979. 2. Eddy current Manual by V.S. CEECO, Van, Drunen and F.L. Shaw, supplied by A.S.N.T

357


11O0PA NANO SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives   

To impart knowledge on nanoscience and technology To create an awareness on the nanomaterials At the end of the course the students are familiar with nanomaterials and their applications

Program Outcomes (POs) e)



Able to learn the different types of techniques used to develop the nanomaterials. Able to understand the various applications of nanomaterials in day-to-day life. Able to utilize nanomaterials into medical and industries to develop technology.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN S.No 1 2 3 4 5 6


74

Test 1

Test 2



25 25 20 20 10 -

25 25 20 20 10 -

20 25 20 20 15 -

20 25 20 20 15 -

100

100

100

100

Remember 22. Define nanoscale. 23. Give the differences between nano and thin materials. 24. Give the usage of nanomaterials in medical field. 25. What are the techniques used to find properties of materials? 26. What are the day-to-day life applications of nanomaterials? 27. What do you mean by total energy of the system? 28. What do you mean by top down and bottom up approach? 29. How physical properties vary while converting the material into nano size? 30. What is SWCNT and MWCNT? 31. What are the applications of CNT? 32. Mention the general characterization techniques of nanomaterials. 33. How electron microscopy differ from scanning electron microscopy? 34. Define diffraction.

74 


358


35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48.

Write the different diffraction techniques to analyse the properties of nanomaterials. What is meant by surface analysis of nanomaterials? What are quantum dots? Write the importance of self-assembly technique. What is organic FET? State the principle of LED. Why nanomaterials are used as energy storage device? Write the bio medical applications of nanomaterials. List the advantages of nanomaterials as compared to bulk materials. Which is having high efficiency among injection and quantum cascade laser? Write the uses of FET. What is nano magnet? Mention the applications of nanomagnets in industries. Write the advantages of nano robot in medical field.

Understand 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43.

How the nano dimension particle varies with bulk one? Explain the different classifications of nanostructures. Elucidate the significance of MWCNT over SWCNT. Explain structural, electrical, mechanical properties of nanoscale materials. What are the applications of CNT? Why the electrical properties are more important as compared to other properties of nanomaterials? How nanomaterials are produced by machining process? Give the importance of vapor phase deposition method for the production of nanomaterials. Explain the sol-gel technique of nanomaterial production. How the nanomaterials are analyzed in scanning electron microscopic technique? Elucidate how nanomaterials are produced by template method? List the general classifications of characterization methods of nanomaterials. Explain how FTIR is used to analyze the bonding in nanomaterials? Why the TEM is widely used than SEM? Explain. What are the advantages and disadvantages of TEM? Explain the quantum confinement in semiconductor nanostructures. Explain the different fabrication techniques of nanoscale materials. Explicate in which way thermally annealed quantum well technique is better than epitaxial growth technique? Explain the electro statically induced quantum dots and quantum wire technique. Why semi conducting nano material is more important than other nanomaterials? What are the advantages of nanomagnetic materials? How nanomaterials are used in organic FET? Why the organic LEDs are manufactured from nanomaterials? How nanomaterials are used in quantum cascade laser? Why nano photo voltaic fuel cells are used? Explain the bio medical applications of nanodevices.

Apply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Clarify the effects of nanometer length scale of particles. Give the reason for the effect of nanoscale dimensions on various properties. Explain how the size of the particle will effect on their mechanical and structural properties of the material? Why sol gel method is used widely to synthesis nanomaterials? Templating method is better than physical vapor deposition method to synthesis nanomaterials. Why? Why ordering of the nano system is more important? Give reason.

359


7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

Explain how nanomaterials are characterized by imaging techniques? Why diffraction techniques are used to characterize the nanomaterials? Explain how nanomaterials are analyzed by transmission electron microscope? Clarify the differences between self-assembly and self-organization. Explain how organic light emitting diode overcomes the drawback of LCD? How we can use CNT as a storage device in battery? Why nanomaterials are used in optical memory devices? How we can store nano particles?

Analyze/ Evaluate 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Distinguish between SWCNT and MWCNT. Compare organic FET and organic LED. Why nano structured particles are found in potential applications? Give the relation between properties and applications of nano particles. Explain with relevant example about the synthesize of nano structured materials employing selfassembly and template based methods. 11. Analyze the relation between magnetic and nanomaterials. Unit I Nano Scale Materials Introduction-classification of nanostructures, nanoscale architecture – effects of the nanometer length scale – changes to the system total energy, changes to the system structures– effect of nanoscale dimensions on various properties – structural, thermal, chemical, mechanical, magnetic, optical and electronic properties. Differences between bulk and nanomaterials and their physical properties. 9 Hours Unit II Nanomaterials Synthesis Methods Fabrication methods – top down processes – milling, litho graphics, machining process – bottom-up process – vapor phase deposition methods, plasma-assisted deposition process, colloidal and solgel methods – methods for templating the growth of nanomaterials – ordering of nanosystems, self-assembly and self-organization. Magnetron sputtering process to obtain nanomaterials. 9 Hours Unit III Nano Characterization Techniques General classification of characterization methods – analytical and imaging techniques – microscopy techniques - electron microscopy, scanning electron microscopy, transmission electron microscopy, atomic force microscopy – diffraction techniques – spectroscopy techniques-X-ray spectroscopy. Electrical properties of nanomaterials. 9 Hours

360


Unit IV Inorganic Semiconductor Nanostructures Quantum confinement in semiconductor nanostructures - quantum wells, quantum wires, quantum dots, super lattices– fabrication techniques – requirements, epitaxial growth, lithography and etching, electrostatically induced dots and wires, quantum well width fluctuations, thermally annealed quantum wells and self-assembly techniques . Quantum efficiency of semiconductor nanomaterials. 9 Hours Unit V Nanodevices And Applications Organic FET- principle, description, requirements, integrated circuits- organic LED’s – basic processes, carrier injection, excitons, optimization - organic photovoltaic cells- carbon nano tubes- structure, synthesis and electronic properties -applications- fuel cells- nano motors -bio nano particles-nano – objects. Applications of nano materials in biological field. 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbooks 1. 2. 3. 4.

Robert W. Kelsall, Ian W. Hamley, Mark Geoghegan, Nanoscale Science and Technology, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, 2005. T. Pradeep, NANO: The Essentials Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, McGraw – Hill Education (India) Ltd, 2007. Handbook of Nanoscience, Engineering and Technology, Kluwer publishers, 2002. B. Wang, Drug Delivery: Principles and Applications,Wiley Interscience 2005.


Michael Kohler, Wolfgang Fritzsche, Nanotechnology: An Introduction to Nanostructuring Techniques, Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH & Co.2004. William Goddard, Donald .W.Brenner, Handbook of Nano Science Engineering and Technology, CRC Press, 2004. Bharat Bhushan, Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology, 2004. Charles P Poole, Frank J Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, John Wiley and Sons, 2003. Mark Ratner, Daniel Ratner, Nanotechnology: A Gentle Introduction to the Next Big Idea, Prentice Hall, 2003.

361


11O0PB LASER TECHNOLOGY 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives   

To impart knowledge on laser principles To create expertise on the applications of laser in various engineering fields At the end of the course the students are familiar with generation and applications of laser in various engineering fields

Program Outcomes (POs) a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to analyze the function resonant cavity.  Able to describe the various techniques involved in the laser materials and determine the Performance of laser materials.  Able to determine the measurement of distance, length, velocity, acceleration, current, Voltage and atmospheric effect. ASSESSMENT PATTERN

S.No 1 2 3 4 5 6


Test 1

Test 2



25 25 20 20 10 -

25 25 20 20 10 -

20 25 20 20 15 -

20 25 20 20 15 -

100

100

100

100

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 

What is a laser? How the basic laser action is achieved? Distinguish between spontaneous emission and stimulated emission. What is population inversion? Mention the important characteristics of laser. How four level laser is more efficient than the three level laser? What is a resonant cavity? What role does an optical resonant cavity play in a laser? What are the host materials for solid lasers? Mention the different techniques involved in lasers. Define atmospheric effect. How will you measure the distance using laser?


362


12. What is the basic principle behind the holography? 13. Mention the medical applications of lasers. Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Write the conditions needed for laser action. What is meant by pumping of atoms? How optical excitation occurs in three level lasers? What is the principle of laser action? Compare the activator and host materials for solid lasers. Distinguish between Czochralski and Kyropoulous techniques. How will you determine the velocity of laser source? List the applications of laser in welding and cutting. Why laser is called as non-material knife?

Apply 1.

2. 3. 4. 5.

The first line of the principal series of sodium is the D line at 580 nm. This corresponds to a transition from the first excited state (3p) to the ground state (3s). What is the energy in electron volts of the first excited state? What is the ratio of the stimulated emission and spontaneous emission at a temperature of 250 oC for the sodium D line? Calculate the threshold condition for the ruby laser in which the appropriate parameters are as follows: νo =4.3x 1014 Hz; Δνo=1.5x1011 Hz; no= 1.76; τsp= 4.3x10-3 s; τphoton=6x10-9s. A He-Ne laser emits light at a wavelength of 632.8 nm and has an output power of 2.3mW. How many photons are emitted in each minute by this laser when operating? Calculate the wavelength of emission from a GaAs semiconductor laser whose band gap energy is 1.44 eV.

Analyze 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Why laser beam should be monochromatic? How the population inversion happening in lasers? Write the reaction for excimer laser action. Which method is used to achieve population inversion in a dye laser? Why we cannot use ordinary light source for LIDAR? How the optical disk data storage plays a vital role in computer memory storages?

Evaluate 1.

2. 3.

The life time of the excited state (2p) for spontaneous emission is 1.6x 10 -9s. The energy difference between the excited state (2p) and the ground state (2s) is 10.2eV. Find the value of stimulated emission coefficient during a transition from an excited state (2p) to the ground state. A laser beam can be focused on an area equal to the square of its wavelength (λ2). For a He-Ne laser, λ = 6328Ǻ. If the laser radiates energy at the rate of 1mW, find the intensity of the focused beam. Transition occurs between a metastable state E3 and an energy state E2 just above the ground state. If emission is at 1.1μm and E2= 0.4x10-19J, find the energy of the E3 state.

Unit I Laser Fundamentals Introduction - principle - spontaneous emission - stimulated emission - population inversion-Pumping mechanisms - characteristics. Types of lasers –principle, construction, working, energy level diagram and applications of dye laser – chemical laser – excimer laser. Laser action.

9 Hours

363


Unit II Threshold Condition Einstein coefficients A and B – spontaneous life time – light amplification – principle of laser action – laser oscillations – resonant cavity – modes of a laser. Conditions involved in laser production.

9 Hours

Unit III Laser Materials Activator and host materials for solid lasers - growth techniques for solid laser materials - Bridgman and Stock-Berger technique – advantages and disadvantages - Czochralski and Kyropoulous techniques – merits and demerits. Techniques of producing laser.

9 Hours

Unit IV Laser in Science Introduction – harmonic generation – stimulated raman emission – self focusing – laser and ether drift – rotation of the earth – photon statistics. Applications of Laser in ranging.

9 Hours

Unit V Laser in Industry Introduction – Applications in material processing: laser welding – hole drilling – laser cutting – laser tracking – Lidar – laser in medicine. Applications of Laser in sensors.


Textbooks 1. 2.

K.Thiyagarajan and A.K.Ghatak, LASER:Theory and applications. Macmillan India Limited, 2000. M. N. Avadhanulu, An Introduction To Lasers Theory And Applications, S. Chand Publisher, 2001.


K.P.R.Nair, Atoms, Molecules And Lasers, Narosa Publishing House, 2009. K. R. Nambiar ,Lasers: Principles Types And Applications , New Age International Publications, 2006. Alphan Sennaroglu, Solid-State Lasers And Applications, CRC Press, 2006 Bela A Lengyel, Introduction to Laser Physics, John Wiley and Sons, 1966.

364


11O0PC ELECTRO OPTIC MATERIALS 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives  

To impart knowledge on electro-optic materials To develop fundamental understanding of various electro-optic materials in communication




Able to Understand the mechanism involved in the laser action. Able to Know the birefringence and optical property of the material.



Test 1

Test 2



25 25 20 20 10 -

25 25 20 20 10 -

20 25 20 20 15 -

20 25 20 20 15 -

100

100

100

100

Remember 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58.

75

Define laser action. Give the properties of LASER. Differentiate between stimulated and spontaneous emissions. Define continuous and discrete time signals. Define anisotropic media. What is an acoustic optic effect? Define a liquid crystal. Mention the different types of polarizing devices. Give examples for direct and indirect band gap materials. Highlight the usage of a NLO material.


365


Understand 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53.

How the population inversion state in laser is achieved? Give examples for continuous and discrete time signals. Elucidate the importance of coherence in laser action. Why birefringence property in an optical material is formed? In which effect KDP crystal is working? How the codirectional coupling occurs? List out the conditions in which the NLO property of a material emerges. What is the purpose of switching to quantum mechanics from classical mechanics? Why we prefer LCD displays rather than CRT displays? What are the advantages of injection laser diode?

Apply 1. Find the intensity of a laser beam of 10mW power and having a diameter of 1.3 mm. Assume the intensity to be uniform across the beam. Given: P=10mW, d= 1.3 mm. 2. Discuss the three level pumping scheme for laser action. 3. Why is the optical resonator required in lasers? 4. Where can we find the practical applications of wave plates? 5. How to elevate the contrast ratio in display devices which uses in the nematic structures? 6. Non linearity in glasses occurs. Justify the argument. Analyze/ Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4.

Compare ordinary and laser light properties. Differentiate wave refractive index and ray refractive index. Differentiate longitudinal and transverse electro optic effects. Bring out the importance of electro optic devices.

Unit I Basics of Lasers Introduction – Einstein coefficients – laser beam characteristics – spontaneous and stimulated emission population inversion - light amplification – threshold condition – laser rate equations – two level laser – three level laser – mode selection – transverse mode – longitudinal mode. Spatial and temporal coherence. 9 Hours Unit II Wave Propagation in Anisotropic Media Introduction – double refraction – polarization devices - Nicol prism – Glan-Thomson prism – retardation plates – Soleil Babinet compensator – Plane waves in anisotropic media – wave refractive index - ray refractive index - ray velocity surface – index ellipsoid. Optical activity. 9 Hours Unit III Electro Optic Effect Introduction – KDP crystals – longitudinal mode – phase modulation – amplitude modulation – transverse mode. Acousto-optic effect – small Bragg angle diffraction – large Bragg angle diffraction – codirectional coupling – contradirectional coupling - applications. Modulators. 9 Hours

366


Unit IV Non Linear Optics Introduction – self focusing phenomenon – second harmonic generation – phase matching – birefringent phase matching – quasi phase matching – frequency mixing. Semiconductors – measurement of third order optical non-linearities in semiconductors. Frequency doubling nature of materials. 9 Hours Unit V Electro Optic Devices Introduction – light emitting diode – direct and indirect band gap materials – homo junction – hetero junction – advantages – disadvantages – applications. Injection laser diode – characteristics – advantages – disadvantages. Liquid crystal displays – dynamic scattering – field effect – advantages – disadvantages. Optoelectronic devices. 9 Hours Total 45 Hours Textbooks 1. 2. 3.

Ajoy Ghatak and K. Thyagarajan, Optical electronics, Cambridge University Press, 7th reprint 2006. B. Somanathan Nair, Electronic devices and applications, Prentice - Hall of India private limited, 2010. Frank L. Pedrotti, S. J. Leno S. Pedrotti and Leno M. Pedrotti, Introduction to optics, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2008.

References 1. 2. 3.

Ji - ping Huang and K.M.Yu, New Non Linear Optical Materials, Nova, Science Publishers, 2007. J .D. Wright, Molecular crystals, Cambridge university press, 2nd edition, 1995. R .W. Munn (Ed) and C. N. Ironsid, Molecular crystals, Blackie Academic & Professional, Glassgow,1993.

367


11O0PD VACUUM SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives  To impart a sound knowledge on the vacuum science  To develop the necessary background to perform projects involving vacuum and deposition techniques  At the end of the course the students are familiar with the various vacuum deposition technologies employed in the various engineering fields Program Outcomes (POs) a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them Course Outcomes (COs)   

Able to understand the fundamentals of vacuum technology. Able to understand the various measuring instruments of vacuum. Able to utilize of various components to create high vacuum.



Test 1

Test 2



25 25 20 20 10 -

25 25 20 20 10 -

20 25 20 20 15 -

20 25 20 20 15 -

100

100

100

100

Remember 1. Define the term mean free path. 2. Give the pressure ranges of low and medium vacuum. 3. State Avogadro’s law. 4. List out the assumptions of kinetic theory. 5. What are the types of pump used to create vacuum? 6. What are the gauges that are used to measure the vacuum? 7. Name the direct reading gauges and indirect reading gauges. 8. Name the operation limits of penning gauge. 9. Name the ultra high vacuum gauges. 10. List out the methods of leak detection. 11. Give the importance of baffles and traps. 12. Mention the gauges that can measure ultra high vacuum. 13. Define throughput. 76


368


14. Give the Ohm’s law of vacuum technology. 15. Name the sorbent materials that have widespread use in vacuum production. Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

How will you measure the pumping speed in a vacuum unit? How will you seal the substance outside to maintain high vacuum? Why does constant volume method have the disadvantage in measuring the pumping speed? Differentiate between the pirani gauge and penning gauge. Differentiate the primary gauges from secondary gauges. How is the pumping speed measured? How does a rotary pump produce a low pressure? Derive the relation between the effective pumping speed and conductance of the evacuation pipe. Explain the designing of UHV evacuation systems. How are the vacuum surfaces cleaned?

Apply 13. 14. 15. 16.

How will you deposit the material from the plasma etching method? Why is cold cathode ionization gauges preferred to hot cathode gauges? Explain the applications of turbomolecular pump. A vacuum chamber has a volume of 100 litres and an operating gas load of 7.5 x 10 -5 torr-lites/sec. The desired operating pressure is 7.5 x 10-8 Torr. Connections between the chamber and diffusion pump and the diffusion pump and rotary pump are to meet good design practice (assume S E/SD=1/5). Calculate the pumping speed at the chamber, the minimum connecting pipe conductance and the minimum speed required for the backing pump together with the minimum diffusion pump speed required to meet these requirements. 17. Surface to volume ratio plays a major role in pumping systems. Why? Analyze/ Evaluate 1. 2. 3.

Why is the diffusion pump widely used in scientific instruments? Oil diffusion pump system can be used as a high vacuum pumping system. Why? Compare real and virtual leaks.

Unit I Vacuum Systems Introduction – units of vacuum – kinetic aspects of gases in a vacuum chamber – physical parameters at low pressures – classification of vacuum ranges – gas flow at low pressures – throughput and pumping speed – flow rate and conductance. Evacuation rate – out gassing – gas flow – turbulent flow. 9 Hours Unit II Production of Vacuum Classification of vacuum pumps – rotary vane pumps – roots blowers – diffusion pumps – molecular drag and turbo-molecular pumps – sorption pumps – gettering and ion pumping – cryopumping measurement of pumping speed. Noble pumps for inert gases. 9 Hours

369


Unit III Pressure Measurement Classification of gauges – mechanical gauges – McLeod gauge – thermal conductivity gauges – Hot cathode ionization gauges – Bayard - Alpert gauge – cold cathode ionization gauges – Penning gauge – magnetron gauge. Measurement problems in partial pressure analysis.

9 Hours

Unit IV Vacuum Materials and Leak Detection Sources of gases and vapours – materials for vacuum system – vacuum seals – vacuum valves – traps and baffles – leak detection – pressure test – spark-coil test – leak testing using vacuum gauges – halogen leak detector – mass-spectrometric leak detector. Special design considerations – glass to metal seals – high voltage metal feedthrough.

9 Hours

Unit V Applications of Vacuum Systems Design considerations – vacuum system for surface analysis – space simulators – vacuum based coating units for thin film deposition – thermal evaporation – sputtering process – chemical vapor deposition - metallurgical applications. Plasma etching – pulsed vapour deposition – PE chemical vapour deposition.

9 Hours Total 45 Hours

Textbooks 1. Rao V.V, Ghosh T.B, Chopra K.L, Vacuum science and technology, Allied Publishers Limited, 2005. 2. Dorothy M. Hoffman, John H. Thomas, Bawa Singh, Handbook of Vacuum science and technology, Elsevier Science & Technology Books, 1997. References 1. David M. Hata, Introduction to vacuum technology, Pearson Printice Hall, 2007. 2. John F. O'Hanlon, A user’s guide to vacuum technology”, John Wiley & Sons, 2003. 3. Chambers.A, Modern vacuum physics, Chapman & Hall, CRC Press, 2005.

370


11O0PE SEMICONDUCTING MATERIALS AND DEVICES 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives  To improve knowledge on semiconducting materials  To develop the necessary understanding of semiconducting materials and their applications  At the end of the course the students are familiar with various semiconducting materials and their applications Program Outcomes (POs) a)



Able to understand the mechanism involved in the semiconductors. Able to know the current components and current gain of the material.



Test 1

Test 2



25 25 20 20 10 -

25 25 20 20 10 -

20 25 20 20 15 -

20 25 20 20 15 -

100

100

100

100

Remember 1. What properties are desirable in semiconductors? 2. Explain the Kronig-Penny model. 3. Define drift current density. 4. What is meant by breakdown? 5. Explain the minority carrier distribution in p-n junction diode. 6. Define temperature effect. 7. What is the basic principle of bipolar junction transistor? 8. Define current crowding. 9. What are optoelectronic devices? 10. Describe the operation of a laser diode. Understand 1. How does conductivity of a semiconductor change with rise in its temperature? 2. How does the thickness of the depletion layer in a p-n junction vary with increase in reverse bias?

77


371


3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

How does the energy gap in an intrinsic semiconductor vary, when doped with a pentavalent impurity? Explain the mobility effects on carrier density. What do you understand by the term “holes” in a semiconductor? Explain how they move under the influence of electric field. What is the a.c response of the p-n diode? How is the solar cell functioning?

Apply 1. In general what is the relation between density of states and energy? 2. What is meant by the term, doping of an intrinsic semiconductor? 3. Give the ratio of the number of holes and the number of conduction electrons in an intrinsic semiconductor. 4. Write the function of base region of a bipolar junction transistor. 5. Sketch the energy bands of a forward-biased degenerately doped pn junction and indicate how population inversion occurs. Analyze/ Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4.

What types of charge-carriers are there in a n-type semiconductor? What are the disadvantages of using laser diode? What are the defect levels in semiconductors? Consider an optical cavity. If N>>1, show that the wavelength separation between two adjacent resonant modes is ∆λ=λ2/2L.

Unit I Properties of Semiconductor Energy bands – allowed and forbidden energy bands – Kronig Penny model – electrical conductivity in solids based on energy bands - band model – electron effective mass – concept of holes in semiconductor – density of states – extension to semiconductors. k-space diagram.

9 Hours

Unit II Carrier Transport Properties Carrier drift – drift current density – mobility effects on carrier density – conductivity in semiconductor – carrier transport by diffusion – diffusion current density – total current density – breakdown phenomena – avalanche breakdown. Graded Impurity Distribution.

9 Hours

Unit III P-N Junction Diode Qualitative description of charge flow in p-n junction – boundary condition – minority carrier distribution – ideal p-n junction current – temperature effects – applications – the turn on transient and turn off transient. Charge storage and diode Transients.

9 Hours

Unit IV Bipolar Junction Transistor Introduction to basic principle of operation – the modes of operation – amplification – minority carrier distribution in forward active mode – non-ideal effects – base with modulation – high injection emitter band gap narrowing – current clouding – breakdown voltage – voltage in open emitter configuration and open base configuration Frequency Limitations.

9 Hours

372


Unit V Opto Electronic Devices Optical absorption in a semiconductor, photon absorption coefficient – electron hole pair generation - solar cell – homo junction and hetero junction - Photo transistor – laser diode, the optical cavity, optical absorption, loss and gain - threshold current. Photoluminescence and Electroluminescence.

9 Hours Total 45 Hours

Textbooks 1. Donald A Neamen, “Semiconductor physics and devices”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007 2. Albert Malvino,David J Bafes, “Electronic Principles”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007 References 1. 2.

Kevin F Brennan, The Physics of Semiconductors, Cambridge University Press, 1999. Micheal Shur, Physics of Semiconductor Devices, Prentice Hall of India, 1999.

373


11O0YA

POLYMER CHEMISTRY AND PROCESSING 3 0 0 3.0


To impart knowledge on the basic concepts and importance of polymer science, chemistry of polymers and its processing To make understand the principles and applications of advanced polymer materials Knowledge and application of different polymers and its processing




Able to understand the various types of polymers and its industrial application. Able to compute the efficiency of polymer materials.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN

S.No 1 2 3 4 5 6


Test I

Test II



20 20 30 20 10 100

20 20 30 20 10 100

10 20 30 20 20 100

10 20 30 20 20 100

Remember 1. Define polymer and degree of polymerization. 2. What is functionality of a polymer? Give example. 3. What is the nomenclature of a polymer? 4. Discuss the addition and chain growth polymerization with example. 5. What is copolymerization? What are the different types of copolymers? 6. Write the mechanism of addition polymerization. 7. Explain briefly the various constituents of a plastic, with example. 8. Distinguish between thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics. 9. List the various additives in processing of plastics. What are their functions? 10. Explain homogeneous and heterogeneous polymerization. 11. Write the differences between melt and interfacial polycondensation. 12. Briefly explain about emulsion polymerization. 13. Explain compression and extrusion moulding of plastics with diagram. 14. What is extrusion and injection moulding? Discuss with diagram. 

The marks secured in the Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks.

374


15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24.

Name any four compounding ingredients of plastics. Write their functions with example. What is calendaring? Write short account on reinforced plastics. Outline the method of lubrication of plastic material. Explain about crosslinking and blowing agents with examples. Write an account of flame retardant polymers. Write short notes on melt, dry and wet spinning process. Give the classification of foaming polymers with examples. Explain with examples the relationship between structure and properties of polymers. Describe about coordination and ring opening polymerization.

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Write the important of plasticizers and UV stabilizers? Compare addition and condensation polymerization reaction with example for each type . Give the classification of foaming polymers with examples. Suggest different types of additives for preparing reinforced polymers? What are the different types of polymeric resins? Give the significances of antioxidants and antiozonants additives. What are the functions of ingredients of polymers? List the importance of cross- linkers.

Apply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

How polymers are classified based on source and application? What are the polymers that can be calendared into sheets? Give examples for thermosetting and thermoplastic polymers. What are the polymers suited for compression and injection moulding? What are the articles produced by blow moulding?

Analyze / Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

What are the polymers suitable for insulations? Write the special properties of teflon? How the vinyl chloride is converted into polymer? How nylon 6 is prepared? What is the process involved in manufacturing cellophane sheets? What are the different zones involved in simple extrusion polymer process? Bring out the differences between thermoforming and vacuum-forming process?

Unit I Principles of Polymer Science Polymerization reactions - types – examples - degree of polymerization and average molecular weights. Thermoplastics and thermosetting resins - examples. Electrical - mechanical - thermal properties related to chemical structure. Insulating materials - polymer alloys - composites. Importance of glass transition temperature. 9 Hours Unit II Polymerization Mechanism Addition polymerization - free radical mechanism - cationic and anionic polymerization - copolymerization - condensation polymerization –nylon 6,6, ring opening polymerization –nylon 6, coordination polymerization -. Preparation, properties and industrial applications of polystyrene and bakelite. Application of industrial polymers.

9 Hours

375


Unit III Polymerization Techniques Homogeneous and heterogeneous polymerization – bulk polymerization- PMMA,PVC, solution polymerization - polyacrylic acid, suspension polymerization-preparation of ion exchange resins, emulsion polymerization-synthetic rubber. Melt solution and interfacial polycondensation. Salient features, advantages and disadvantages of bulk and emulsion polymerization. Preparation of biodegradable polymers.

9 Hours

Unit IV Additives for Polymers Moulding constituents-fillers, plasticizers, lubricants, anti-aging additives, antioxidants, antiozonants, UV stabilizers, flame retardants, colorants, blow agents, crosslinking agents -functions-significance with suitable examples and applications in industrial processing. Ecofriendly sustainable additives.

9 Hours

Unit V Polymer Processing Compression – injection - extrusion and blow mouldings. Film casting - calendering. Thermoforming and vacuum formed polystyrene, foamed polyurethanes. Fibre spinning - melt, dry and wet spinning. Composite fabrication - hand-layup - filament winding and pultrusion. Application of fibre reinforced plastics.


Textbooks 1. 2.

V. R. Gowarikar, N. V. Viswanathan and Jayadev Sreedhar, Polymer Science, New Age International (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2003. Joel R. Fried, Polymer Science and Technology, Prentice Hall of India (P). Ltd., 2005.


F. W. Billmeyer, Text Book of Polymer Science, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2007. Barbara H. Stuart, Polymer Analysis, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2002. George Odian , Principles of Polymerization, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2004. R. J. Young and P. A. Lovell, Introduction to Polymers, Nelson Thornes Ltd., 2002.

376


11O0YB ENERGY STORING DEVICES AND FUEL CELLS 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives 

To make students understand the concept and working of different types of batteries and to analyze batteries used in electric vehicles To make students learn about the concept of fuel cells, its types and to relate the factors of energy and environment Students develop the skill of analyzing various energy storing devices and fuel cells at the end of the semester

 




Able to understand the various types of cells and energy storage devices. Able to compute the efficiency of cells. Able to develop eco-friendly energy sources.



Test I

Test II



20 20 30 20 10 100

20 20 30 20 10 100

10 20 30 20 20 100

10 20 30 20 20 100

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 

What are dry cells? What are alkaline batteries? State Ohms law. Write the functions of ultra-capacitor. Is lead acid battery thermodynamically reversible cell? Differentiate between electrochemical and electrolytic cells. Name the electrolyte present in the Li battery. Mention the role of heart pacemaker in cardiology. Classify the types of fuel cell. Differentiate between diode and electrode. What is meant by redox reaction? What are the advantages of H2-O2 fuel cell?

The marks secured in the Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks.

377


13. Name the factors which are affecting the efficiency of fuel cell. 14. What are eco-friendly cell? Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

How do you assess the life cycle of fuel cells? What is the role of impurities in photovoltaic cells? How do you convert the chemical energy into electrical energy? Suggest any two secondary storage devices for automobiles. What types of cells are used in space applications? Construct the alkaline fuel cell. How do you harvest the energy from tides? What are natural geysers? Differentiate between photo electrochemical and photovoltaic cells.

Apply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

What are passive solar heat collectors? What are active solar heat collectors? Lithium battery is the cell of future - Justify. Write the anodic reaction and cathodic reactions of NICAD battery. Is the dry cell follows thermodynamic reversibility rule? What types of vehicles typically use methanol? What are the economic impacts of using hybrid electric vehicles?

Analyze / Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

How does a fuel cell differ from traditional methods of energy generation (like batteries)? What are the feedstocks can be used to make biodiesel? What is DuPont’s experience in fuel cells? How the biomass is converted into biofuel? What are the effects of gasoline and ethanol emissions on the environment? What are the effects of diesel and biodiesel emissions on the environment? How do you obtain ethanol from lignocellulosic biomass? What is meant by green technology?

Unit I Batteries Characteristics - voltage, current, capacity, electricity storage density, power, discharge rate, cycle life, energy efficiency, shelf life. Primary batteries- zinc-carbon, magnesium, alkaline, manganous dioxide, mercuric oxide, silver oxide batteries-Recycling/Safe disposal of used cells. Document the various batteries and its characteristics used in mobile phones and lap tops. 9 Hours Unit II Batteries for Electric Vehicles Secondary batteries- Introduction, cell reactions, cell representations and applications- lead acid, nickelcadmium and lithium ion batteries - rechargeable zinc alkaline battery. Reserve batteries: Zinc-silver oxide, lithium anode cell, photogalvanic cells. Battery specifications for cars and automobiles. Development of batteries for satellites. 9 Hours

378


Unit III Types of Fuel Cells Importance and classification of fuel cells - description, working principle, components, applications and environmental aspects of the following types of fuel cells: alkaline fuel cells, phosphoric acid, solid oxide, molten carbonate and direct methanol fuel cells. Fuel cells for space applications.

9 Hours

Unit IV Hydrogen as a Fuel Sources of hydrogen – production of hydrogen- electrolysis- photocatalytic water splitting – biomass pyrolysis -gas clean up – methods of hydrogen storage- high pressurized gas -liquid hydrogen type -metal hydride – hydrogen as engine fuel – features, application of hydrogen technologies in the futurelimitations. Cryogenic fuels.

9 Hours

Unit V Energy and Environment Future prospects-renewable energy and efficiency of renewable fuels – economy of hydrogen energy – life cycle assessment of fuel cell systems. Solar Cells: Energy conversion devices, photovoltaic and photoelectrochemical cells – photobiochemical conversion cell. Bio-fuels from natural resources.


Textbooks 1. 2. 3.

M. Aulice Scibioh and B. Viswanathan, Fuel Cells: Principles and Applications, University Press, India, 2006. F. Barbir, PEM fuel cells: Theory and practice,Elsevier, Burlington, MA, 2005. M. R. Dell Ronald and A. J. David, Understanding Batteries, Royal Society of Chemistry, 2001.


M. A. Christopher Brett, Electrochemistry: Principles, Methods and Applications, Oxford University, 2004. J. S. Newman and K. E. Thomas-Alyea, Electrochemical Systems, Wiley, Hoboken, NJ, 2004. G. Hoogers, Fuel Cell Handbook, CRC, Boca Raton, FL, 2003. Lindon David, Handbook of Batteries, McGraw Hill, 2002. H. A. Kiehne , Battery Technology Hand Book,. Expert Verlag , Renningen Malsheim, 2003.

379


11O0YC CHEMISTRY OF NANOMATERIALS 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives  To impart knowledge on the basic concepts and importance of nanochemistry including synthesis  To make students understand the principles and applications of nanomaterials  Knowledge about the characterization and applications of nanomaterials Program Outcomes (Pos a)


Course Outcomes (COs)    

Understanding the various methods of synthesis and characterization techniques of nanomaterials. Compute new preparation methodologies. Utilization of nanomaterials in various emerging fields. Realize the importance of nanoscience and its applications in day to day life.



Test I

Test II



25 25 20 20 10 100

25 25 20 20 10 100

15 25 20 20 20 100

15 25 20 20 20 100

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 

What do you mean by nano? Define nanotechnology. Define nanoscience. Define top down and bottom up approach. Define nanostructured material. Classify nanomaterials and give examples for them. List any four day to day commercial applications of nanotechnology. Write down any four challenges that are faced by researchers in nanotechnology. Define carbon nanotube. Define bucky ball. Define nanocomposite. What are the types of nanocomposites? List any four material characterization techniques. List any four bottom up approaches for the synthesis of nanopowders. What is biomimetic approach? Explain Feynman’s statement.


380


15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29.

What is the dimension of quantum dot? Explain the principle behind lithography. Mention the different types of lithography. What is meant by photolithography? Explain the principle behind vapour phase deposition. What is meant by chemical vapour deposition? Explain sputtering. What is meant by plasma enhanced CVD? What is meant by bubblers? Explain the principle behind MOVPE. What are colloids? What is nanosafety? What is meant by surface induced effect? How are nanomaterials defined? What are the uses of nanoparticles in consumer products?

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

What is the difference between nanoscience and nanotechnology? When and where Feynman delivered his lecture on nanotechnology and what is the name of his classical lecture? What are the induced effects due to increase in surface area of nanoparticles? What are the advantages and disadvantages in mechanical synthesis of nanopowders? What are the characteristics of nanoparticles that should be possesed by any fabrication technique? On what principle mechanical milling is based on? How is LPE used to obtain nanowire or nanorods? How is the template used to obtain nanowire or nanorods? What is the role of nanotechnology in water purification? Differentiate self-assembly from self-organisation. How nanoparticles are stored? List the important physical and chemical properties of nanomaterials? How are nanomaterials detected and analysed? How are nanomaterials prepared for biological testing? What are the physical and chemical properties of nanoparticles? How are nanoparticles formed? Discuss the health effects of nanoparticles?

Apply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Why do we want nanotechnology in our life? What is the role of nanotechnology in medicinal field? Expand AFM. What is the grain size range of nanostructure materials? Differentiate top-down from bottom-up approach needed for nanosynthesis. Why do nanostructured particles find potential applications? How nanostructured particles are used in health applications?

381


Analyze/ Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Compare the relative merits of chemical, physical, biological and hybrid methods for the preparation of nanomaterials. Compare the relative merits of the usage of photons and particles in lithography. Differentiate glow discharge from RF sputtering. How can we reduce/save our energy resources by using nanotechnology? What is the relation between properties and applications of nanoparticles? What is the current status of nanoscience and nanotechnology? What are the potential harmful effects of nanoparticles?

Unit I Nanoworld Introduction – History of nanomaterials – concepts of nanomaterials – size and confinement effects – nanoscience – nanotechnology – Moor’s law. Properties – electronic, optical, magnetic, thermal, mechanical and electrochemical properties. Nanobiotechnology – molecular motors – optical tweezers. First industrial revolution to the nano revolution.

9 Hours

Unit II Synthesis of Nanoparticles Introduction – hydrolysis-oxidation - thermolysis – metathesis - solvothermal methods. Sonochemistry: nanometals - powders of metallic nanoparticles - metallic colloids and alloys - polymer metal composites metallic oxides - rare earth oxides - mesoporous materials - mixed oxides. Sono electrochemistry nanocrystalline materials. Microwave heating - microwave synthesis of nanometallic particles. Magnetron sputtering process to obtain nanomaterials.

9 Hours

Unit III Types and Functionalization of Nanomaterials Polymer nanoparticles, micro, meso and nanoporous materials. Organic – inorganic hybrids, zeolites, nanocomposites, self-assembled monolayers, semiconductor quantum dots, nanofibres, supramolecular nanostructures. functionalization of nanomaterials – stabilization methods. Reactivity of ω-functional groups on ligand shells. Implications of nanoscience and nanotechnology on society.

9 Hours

Unit IV Physical and Chemical Characterization Electron microscopes: scanning electron microscope (SEM) – transmission electron microscope (TEM) – atomic force microscope (AFM): working principle – instrumentation – applications. UV-visible spectroscopy: principle – instrumentation (block diagram only) – applications. FT-IR spectroscopy: introduction – instrumentation (block diagram only) – applications –merits and demerits. Nanoscience and technology research institution.

9 Hours

Unit V Applications of Nanomaterials Nanocatalysis, colorants and pigments, self-cleaning – lotus effect, anti-reflective coatings, antibacterial coatings, photocatalysis, nanofilters for air and water purifiers. Thermal insulation – aerogels, smart sunglasses and transparent conducting oxides – molecular sieves – nanosponges. Harnessing nanotechnology for economic and social development. 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours

382


Textbooks 1. 2. 3.

C N R Rao, Nanoworld – An Introduction to Nanoscience and Technology, Jawaharlal Nehru centre for advanced scientific research, Bangalore, India, 2010. C N R Rao, A Muller and A K Cheetham, The Chemistry of Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and Applications, Vol. 1 & 2, John-Wiley and Sons, 2005. T Pradeep, Nano: The Essentials, Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, 1st Edn., Tata Mcgraw Hill publishing company, 2007.


Geoffrey A Ozin, André C Arsenault , Nanochemistry: A Chemical Approach to Nanomaterials, Royal Society of Chemistry, 2009. G B Sergeev, Nanochemistry, 1st Edn.,Elsevier, 2006. S Chen, Functional Nanomaterials: A Chemistry and Engineering Perspective (Nanostructure Science And Technology), Springer,2010. Yury Gogotsi, Nanomaterials Handbook, Taylor and Francis group, USA, 2006.

383


11O0YD

CORROSION SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3.0


To impart knowledge about the various types of corrosion and its mechanism To make students understand the various methods of corrosion control, corrosion testing and monitoring Students acquire the basic knowledge about corrosion and its control.



Course Outcomes (COs) 

Able to understand why corrosion related problems are complex and interrelated in the engineering field. Able to Compare the mechanism of dry corrosion and electrochemical corrosion to support corrosion Able to Characterize and analyze different forms of corrosion and its study techniques.

 

ASSESSMENT PATTERN

S.No 1 2 3 4 5 6


Test I

Test II



25 25 20 20 10 100

25 25 20 20 10 100

15 25 20 20 20 100

15 25 20 20 20 100

Remember 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 

What is corrosion? What are the types of corrosion? Define dry corrosion. Explain the mechanism. Explain the mechanism of electrochemical corrosion. What are the units to measure corrosion rate? Galvanic corrosion. Discuss. Describe the Pourbaix digrams of Mg, Al and Fe and their limitations. List out the different forms of corrosion. Explain. What are inhibitors? Explain the mechanisms of various corrosion scale formation and its types.


384


11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

Write the working principle of Tafel polarization techniques. How polarization and impedance techniques used to measure the corrosion products? Define cathodic protection. List its types. What are non-electrochemical and electrochemical methods of corrosion testing and monitoring? What is Tafel linear polarization?

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Explain why corrosion rate of metal is faster in aqueous solution than atmosphere air? What are the factors influencing the corrosion rate? Explain. Discuss the Pilling-Bedworth rule. Differentiate between electrochemical and dry corrosion. How inhibitors are used to protect the corrosion rate of the metal? Explain. What are consequences of Pilling-Bedworth ratio? List the difference between filliform corrosion and pitting corrosion.

Apply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Compare the effects of corrosion products. Why pitting corrosion is localized corrosion? Explain. Describe alternatives to protective coatings. Identify different forms of corrosion in the metal surface. Explain how we could reduce corrosion of metals. What are the measures to be taken to reduce corrosion fatiques? What are the major implications of enhanced techniques of corrosion product analysis?

Analyze/ Evaluate 4. 5. 6.

List reasons why it is important to study of corrosion. How Tafel polarization and impedance techniques used to measure the corrosion products? Explain how we could reduce corrosion of metals?

Unit I Introduction to Corrosion Importance and cost of corrosion – spontaneity of corrosion – passivation - importance of corrosion prevention in various industries - the direct and indirect loss of corrosion- galvanic corrosion: area relationship in both active and passive states of metals - Pilling Bed worth ratio and its consequences - units of corrosion rate - mdd and mpy - importance of pitting factor - Pourbaix digrams of Mg, Al and Fe and their advantages and disadvantages . Corrosion of metals by other gases. 9 Hours Unit II Forms of Corrosion Different forms of corrosion - uniform corrosion-galvanic corrosion, crevice corrosion, pitting corrosion, intergranular corrosion, selective leaching, erosion corrosion, stress corrosion- high temperature oxidation, kinetics of protective film formation and catastrophic oxidation corrosion. Industrial boiler corrosion, cathodic and anodic inhibitors 9 Hours

385


Unit III Mechanisms of Corrosion Hydrogen embrittlement- cracking, corrosion fatigue - filliform corrosion, fretting damage and microbes induced corrosion. Mechanisms of various corrosion scale formation - thick layer and thin layer - insitu corrosion scale analysis. Analyze the rust formation in mild steel using weight loss method 9 Hours Unit IV Cathodic and Anodic Protection Engineering Fundamentals of cathodic protection - types of cathodic protection systems and anodes. Life time calculations - rectifier selection. Stray current corrosion problems and its prevention. Coating for various cathodic protection system and their assessment- inhibitors - corrosion of steels. Anodic protection-Design for corrosion control. Role of paints and pigments to protect the corrosive environment 9 Hours Unit V Corrosion Testing and Monitoring Corrosion testing and monitoring - electrochemical methods of polarization- Tafel extrapolation polarization, linear polarization, impedance techniques-Weight loss method - susceptibility test – testing for intergranular susceptibility and stress corrosion. Analyze the instruments for monitoring the corrosion. 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbooks 1. 2. 3.

Zaki Ahmad, Principles of Corrosion Engineering and Corrosion Control, Elsevier Science and Technology Books, 2006. R. Winstone Revie and Herbert H. Uhlig, Corrosion and Corrosion Control: An Introduction to Corrosion Science and Engineering, John Wiley & Science, 2008. Mars G. Fontana, Corrosion Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, Singapore, 2008.


ASM Hand Book, Vol. 13, Corrosion, ASM International, 2005. Pierre R. Roberge, Hand Book of Corrosion Engineering, McGraw Hill, New York, 2000. Denny A. Jones, Principles and Prevention of Corrosion, Prentice Hall Inc., 2004. A.W. Peabody, Control of Pipeline Corrosion, NACE International, Houston, 2001.

386


11O001 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT I 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives   

To gain knowledge on basics of Entrepreneurship To gain knowledge of business entity, source of capital and financially evaluate the project To gain knowledge on production and manufacturing system

Program Outcomes (POs) e) The graduates develop skills to be effective members of a team b) The graduates can become job-givers rather than just job-seekers Course Outcomes (COs)     

Entrepreneurial thinking Innovation techniques in developing business Legal aspects of a business Skills on finance and cash flow Skills on planning operations

ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6

78


Test I†

Test II†

20 20 20 10 20 10 100

20 20 20 10 20 10 100

Model Examination† 20 20 20 10 20 10 100

Semester End Examination 20 20 20 10 20 10 100

Remember

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

78 *

What is entrepreneurship? What are the factors that motivate people to go into business? Define a small-scale industry. Define tiny industry. Who is an intrapreneur? State functions of SISI. What is serial entrepreneur? What is Technopreneurship? What is reversal method? What is brainstorming? What do you mean by term business idea? Mention any two schemes Indian government provides to the development of entrepreneurship. What is a project report? What is project scheduling?


387


15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27.

Mention any four techniques available for project scheduling. What is contract act? Define MOU. What are al the types of sources of finance for an entrepreneur? Mention any five external sources of finance to an entrepreneur. Classify the financial needs of an organization. What is short term finance? What is return on capital? What is capital budgeting? What is product design? What is quality council? What is inventory? What is lean manufacturing?

Understand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

Why is entrepreneurship important of growth of a nation? Mention the essential quality required for someone to be an entrepreneur. Why is motivational theories important for an entrepreneur? How is network analysis helpful to the development of an entrepreneur? Mention the essential requirements for a virtual capital. How under-capitalization affects an entrepreneur. Differentiate proprietorship and partnership. Mention the causes of dissolution of a firm. How important is the support of IDBI to an entrepreneur? What are the salient features of New Small Enterprise Policy, 1991? Why scheduling is very important for a production design?

Apply / Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

If you want to become as an entrepreneur, what will be your idea? Select any one of the creative idea generation method and suggest an innovation that you can implement in your business. Write a short notes on various legal aspects that you have to consider to run you business. How will you generate you capital and other financial supports? In case of getting enough financial support, plan your business and plot the various stages using any of the tools or techniques.

Create 1. 2. 3.

Draft a sample project report for your business. Do a network analysis using PERT and CPM for your business plan. Write a brief report to apply to a financial organization for seeking financial support to your business.

Unit I Basics of Entrepreneurship Entrepreneurship Competence, Entrepreneurship as a career, Intrapreneurship, Social entrepreneurship, Serial entrepreneurship (Cases), Technopreneurship. Entrepreneurial Motivation 6 Hours

388


Unit II Generation of Ideas Creativity and Innovation (Cases), Lateral thinking, Generation of alternatives (Cases), Fractionation, Reversal Method, Brain storming Utilization of Patent Databases 8 Hours Unit III Legal Aspects of Business Contract Act, Sale of Goods Act, Negotiable Instruments – Promissory Note, Bills and Cheques, Partnership, Limited Liability Partnership (LLP), Companies Act – Kinds, Formation, Memorandum of Association, Articles of Association (Cases). Business Plan Writing 10 Hours Unit IV Business Finance Project evaluation and investment criteria (Cases), Sources of finance, Financial statements, Break even analysis, Cash flow analysis. Calculation of Return on Investment 11 Hours Unit V Operations Management Importance – Functions –Deciding on the production system – Facility decisions: Plant location, Plant Layout (Cases), Capacity requirement planning – Inventory management (Cases) – Lean manufacturing. Project Planning 10 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1.

Donald F. kuratko, Entrepreneurship – Theory, Process & Practice, South western cengage learnng, USA, 2009.

References 1. Hisrich, Entrepreneurship, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2005. 2. Prasanna Chandra, Projects – Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation and Reviews, Tata McGrawHill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2000. 3. Akhileshwar Pathak, Legal Aspects of Business, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006. 4. Norman Gaither and Greg Frazier, Operations Management, Thomson Learning Inc, 2007. 5. Edward De Bono, Lateral Thinking, Penguin Books, 1990.

389


11O002 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT II 3 0 0 3.0 Objectives The students on completion of the course will be able to  Evolve the marketing mix for promoting the product / services  Handle the human resources and taxation  Understand Government industrial policies / support provided and prepare a business plan. Program Outcomes (POs) e) The graduates develop skills to be effective members of a team b) The graduates can become job-givers rather than just job-seekers Course Outcomes (COs) 

Increase in awareness of the entrepreneurship Development for engineering decisions.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN S. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6


Test I†

Test II†

30 30 20 10 10 -100

30 30 20 10 10 -100

Model Examination† 30 25 20 10 10 05 100

Semester End Examination 30 25 20 10 10 05 100

79

Remember 1. Who are Fabian Entrepreneur? 2. Explain the Views on Schumpeter on Entrepreneurship? 3. Mention the three functions of NSIC? 4. Narrate the role of IDBI in the development of Entrepreneurship? 5. What are Project Objectives? 6. What are the stages in a Project Lifecycle? 7. Give the meaning of Feasibility Report? 8. Explain the objective of Entrepreneurial Training? 9. What is Motivating Training? 10. Who is a Small Scale Entrepreneur? 11. How to develop Rural Entrepreneur? 12. What are the Social Problems of Women Entrepreneur? 13. Differentiate between entrepreneur and entrepreneurship. 14. What are the types of entrepreneurs? 15. Explain the various qualities of entrepreneur. 16. Briefly explain the different merchant castes in India. 17. What is entrepreneurship training? 18. Discuss any three programmes supporting women entrepreneurs.

79 *


390


19. Write a note on the role of NISIET. 20. What are the challenges and opportunities available in SSI's? Understand 1. Narrate any six differences between a Manager and an Entrepreneur? 2. Explain briefly various types of Entrepreneur? 3. What are the elements of EDP? 4. What is the role played the commercial banks in the development of Entrepreneur? 5. How would you Classify Projects? 6. What are the stages in project Formulation? 7. What are the target groups of EDP? 8. What are the major problems faced by Small Entrepreneur? 9. What are the problems & prospects for women entrepreneur in India? Apply/Evaluate 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Describe the various functions performed by Entrepreneurs? Explain the role of different agencies in the development of Entrepreneur? Discuss the criteria for selecting a particular project? Describe the role of Entrepreneur in the Development of Country? Define business idea. Elaborate the problems and opportunities for an entrepreneur. Elaborate the schemes offered by Commercial banks for development of entrepreneurship. Explain the significant role played by DIC & SISI for the development of entrepreneurship. Design a short Entrepreneurship development programme for farmer Discuss the role and importance of the following institutions in promoting, training and developing entrepreneurs in India:

Create 1. 2. 3.

All economy is the effect for which entrepreneurship is the cause"-Discuss. Review the entrepreneurial growth by the communities of south India. What are the problems of Women entrepreneurs and discuss the ways to overcome these barriers? 4. Discuss the importance of small scale industries in India. 5. Critically examine the growth and development of ancillarisation in India. 6. Discuss the various sources and collection of credit information of entrepreneurs. 7. Briefly explain the recommendation and policy implication for survival of SME's. 8. Discuss the role of the Government both at the Central and State level in motivating and developing entrepreneurship in India. 9. “Developing countries like India need imitative entrepreneurs rather than innovative entrepreneurs”. Do you agree? Justify your answer with examples. 10. What are the reasons of very few women becoming entrepreneurs in a developing country like India? Whether Indian women entrepreneurs have now made an impact and shown that they too can contribute in economic development of the country? Discuss with examples. 11. Discuss the “Culture of Entrepreneurship” and its role in economic development of a nation. What factors contribute to nurturing such a culture? Unit I Marketing Management Formulating Marketing strategies, The marketing plan, Deciding on the marketing mix (Cases), Interactive marketing, Marketing through social networks, Below the line marketing, International marketing - Modes of Entry, Strategies (Cases). Five P's of marketing, SSI Policy Statement 10 Hours

391


Unit II Human Resource Management Human Resource Planning (Cases), Recruitment, Selection, Training and Development, HRIS, Factories Act 1948 (an over view) Global Trends in Human Resource Management 10 Hours Unit III Business Taxation Direct taxation – Income tax, Corporate tax, MAT, Tax holidays, Wealth tax, Professional tax (Cases).Indirect taxation – Excise duty, Customs, Sales and Service tax, VAT, Octroi, GST(Cases) Recent Trends for a Troubled Tax, professional tax slab 8 Hours Unit IV Government Support Industrial policy of Central and State Government, National Institute and Agencies, State Level Institutions, Financial Institution Global Entrepreneurship Monitor, Excise Exemption Scheme 7 Hours Unit V Business Plan Preparation Purpose of writing a business plan, Capital outlay, Technical feasibility, Production plan, HR plan, Market survey and Marketing plan, Financial plan and Viability, Government approvals, SWOT analysis. Small Industry Cluster Development Programme, National Equity Fund Scheme 10 Hours Total: 45 Hours Textbook 1.

S. S. Khanka, Entrepreneurial Development, S. Chand & Co, New Delhi, 2010


Hisrich, Entrepreneurship, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005. Philip Kotler, Marketing Management, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003. K. Aswathappa, Human Resource and Personnel Management – Text and Cases, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007. P. C. Jain, Handbook for New Entrepreneurs, EDII, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2002. Akhileshwar Pathak, Legal Aspects of Business, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.

392


11M0XA CONDITION MONITORING 1 0 0 1.0 Objectives  

To understand the basics of condition monitoring in mechanical systems To understand the Maintenance of machine, methods of monitoring and techniques

Course Outcomes (COs)  Gaining invaluable insights into the benefits of CBM  Understanding the reasons for selecting particular maintenance strategies  Understanding effective methodologies for implementing Condition Monitoring Techniques  Identifying the optimum maintenance strategy for different types of equipment  Gaining practical approaches to minimize the risk of plant and machinery breakdowns  Awareness of International Standards covering asset management General concept of condition monitoring, general issues of condition monitoring, Main components in a condition monitoring system. Maintenance type, Condition based maintenance systems, Machine maintenance techniques. Noise/sound monitoring, Crack monitoring, Leakage monitoring, Lubricant monitoring. Machine condition monitoring techniques, Vibration monitoring techniques, selecting methods of monitoring. Introduction, Machinery Alignment, “Rough” Alignment Methods, Vibration monitoringcauses. Total: 20 Hours Textbooks 1. 2.

B K N Rao, Handbook of Condition Monitoring, Elsevier, 1996 Singiresu S Rao, Mechanical Vibrations, Pearson Education, 2004

References 1. 2. 3.

J S Rao, Vibratory Condition Monitoring of Machines, Narosa publishing house, 2000 Davies, Handbook of condition monitoring: techniques and methodology, Chapman & Hall, 1998 J Hywel Williams, Alan Davies, Paul R Drake, Condition-based maintenance and machine diagnostics, Kluwer academic publishers ,1994 4. www.conditionmonitoringsystem.com/ 5. http://www.ecgcorp.com/velav/

393


11M0XB DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURE AND ASSEMBLY 1 0 0 1.0 Objectives   

To study the use of tolerances in manufacturing Application of this study to machining and casting processes To make the student familiar with solving different problems in design modifications of the product related to various manufacturing techniques

Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to describe the fundamentals of limits, fits and tolerance.  Able to apply the concepts of design for manufacturing in casting, forging, welding and form design products.  Able to perform and tolerance analysis in the products made by casting, welding and forming process. Tolerances: Limits and Fits, tolerance Chains and identification of functionally important dimensions Geometric tolerances. Materials choice - Influences of materials - Space factor - Size - Weight. Introduction - Pattern, Parting line, Mould, Machined holes and cored holes. Design of castings based on parting line considerations and minimizing core requirements. Form design of welded fabrication - welding processes - stresses - Designing cast members using Welds. Form design aspects in Forging- Design aspects of welding and forging of mechanical components. Introduction - Design features to facilitate machining – Drills, Milling cutters - Reduction of machined area - Simplification by separation - Simplification by amalgamation. Introduction - Identification of uneconomical design - Modifying the design - Datum features - Design for Recyclability - Design for remanufacture. Total: 20 Hours Textbooks 1. 2.

G Boothroyd, P Dewhurst and W. Knight, Product Design for Manufacture and Assembly, Marcell Dekker, 2002 Harry Peck, Designing for Manufacture, Pitman Publishing, 1983


A K Chitale and R. C. Gupta, Product Design and Manufacturing, PHI 2007 Robert Matousek, Engineering Design, Blackie & Son Limited, 1963 R Bryan , Fischer, Mechanical Tolerance stackup and analysis, Marcell Dekker, 2004 J G Bralla, Hand Book of Product Design for Manufacturing, McGraw Hill Publications, 2000 http://www.dfma.com/

394


11M0XC DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS USING TAGUCHI APPROACH 1 0 0 1.0 Objectives  

By learning and applying this technique, students can significantly reduce the time required for experimental investigation Apply for product/process optimization

Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to reduce the variation in a process through robust design of experiments  Able to produce high quality product at low cost to the manufacturer  Able to create orthogonal arrays for the parameter design indicating the number of and conditions for each experiment. Overview of DOE and taguchi approach- common experiments and methods of analysis. Orthogonal arrayproperties –case studies - L -4, L-8, L-12,L-16,L-32 Orthogonal array - L-9,L-18, L-27 Orthogonal array ANOVA-Degrees of freedom-confidence level and interval – exercises. Total: 20 Hours Textbooks 1. 2.

Ranjit K Roy, Design of Experiments using the Taguchi Approach, John Wiley & sons, Inc., 2001 Ranjit K Roy, A Primer on the Taguchi Method, Society of Manufacturing Engineers, Michigan, 1990

References 1.

Genichi Taguchi, Subir Chowdhury and YuinWu, Taguchi’s Quality Engineering Hand Book, John Wiley & Sons, Inc

395


11M0XD GEOMETRIC DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING 1 0 0 1.0 Objectives  To understand the basics of GD&T and its practical applications  To understand the proper way to specify dimensions and tolerances, symbols, datum, position, location, run out and profile Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to describe the standards and fundamentals of limits, fits and tolerance.  Able to understand and apply the rules and symbols of dimensioning and tolerance in various products.  Able to perform and tolerance analysis in the products made by casting, welding and forming process. Introduction to Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing - Dimensioning and Tolerancing Fundamentals Symbols, Terms, and Rules-Datum –Application, Datum feature identification-Inclined, cylindrical datum feature. Form – flatness, straightness, circularity, cylindricity - Position – Maximum Material Condition, Least material Condition - Location - Position, Coaxiality - Concentricity – Symmetry – Exercises - Run out - Definition, circular runout, total runout Profile –Definition, Specifying profile, radius refinement with profile –profile of conical feature. Total: 20 Hours Textbooks 1.

Gene R Cogorno, Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing for Mechanical Design, McGrawHill, 2006

References 1. 2.

Alex Krulikowski, Fundamentals of Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing, Delmar Cengage Learning, 1997 Gary K Griffith, Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing: Application and Inspection, Prentice Hall

396


11M0XE INTELLIGENT OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES 1 0 0 1.0 Objectives  To Learn Nontraditional Optimization techniques  To develop the skill to apply the optimization techniques for real time mechanical engineering problems. Course Outcomes (COs)  Enhance the intelligent optiomization skill in the Genetic algorithms, Particle swarm optimization, Artificial nueral network, Ant colony and Tabusearch methods.  Improve skill for solving the various application’s problems using intelligent optimization techniques.  Provide the strong funtamental idea and steps improving the logical programming skill of the students. Introduction, General Structure of GA-Selection Techniques-Constrained and unconstrained optimization problems-Mutation operators-Cross Over Functions-Example Problems. Introduction-Classical particle swarm optimization method - Molecular Dynamics Formulation –conservative and non-conservative Environments- Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration techniques for PSO- Example problems. Introduction, Types of ANN, Elements of ANN- Weight function, Threshold Function , Hidden Layer network, Basic fundamental rules-Example for Feed forward back propagation and perspective neural network model. Introduction, Basic steps in SA, Unconstrained and constrained problems, Re-annealing concept, Example simple Design problems. Introduction to Ant colony and Tabu search method- Concept Explanations- Comparison study of GA with Ant Colony and Tabu Search Algorithm, Application Traveling Salesman problems. Total: 20 Hours Textbooks 1.

S S Rao, Optimization Techniques, New Age International, 2007


James F Kennedy, James Kennedy, Russell C. Eberhart and Yuhui Shi, Swarm intelligence, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2001 M Mikki and Ahmed A Kishk, Particle Swarm Optimization: a Physics-Based Approach, Morgan & Claypool, Jan 2008 Mohamad H Hassoun, Fundamentals of artificial neural networks, Prentice Hall of India Learning, 2010 R Saravanan, Manufacturing Optimization through Intelligent Techniques, Published by CRC Publications, Taylor and Francis, U.S.A., 2006

397


11M0XF LEAN MANUFACTURING 1 0 0 1.0 Objectives  To acquire the general knowledge to deliver consistently high quality and value added products and services to the customer in a lean environment  To understand the terminology relating to lean operations in both service and manufacturing organizations Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to understand and apply the concept of lean thinking to the processes  Able to understand and appreciate the concept of flow and its significance in manufacturing processes  Able to understand and apply various lean manufacturing tools towards process improvements History – Evolution - Toyota production system - Lean manufacturing overview - Work place organization Visual controls - Pull production and cellular manufacturing - Value flow pull - Value and perfection lean – Mapping the present – Mapping the future - Product and process development – Value stream analysis Over production - Waiting - Work In Progress - Transportation - Inappropriate processing - Excess motion or ergonomic problems - Defected products - Underutilization of employees Just In Time - Kanban tooling - Total Productive Maintenance – 5S - Single Minute Die Exchange - Lean six sigma - Flow charting - Identifying and eliminating unnecessary steps - Setup time - reduction approaches - Steps in implementing lean strategy – Lean accounting system Total: 20 Hours Textbooks 1.

Dennis P Hobbs, Lean Manufacturing Implementation, J. Ross Publications, 2004


Jeffrey K Liker, The Toyota Way-14 Management Principles, Mc-Graw Hill, New York, 2004 Pascal Dennis, Lean Production Simplified, Productivity Press, USA, 2002 James P Womack, Daniel T. Jones, Lean Thinking: Banish waste and create wealth in your corporation, Simon & Schuster UK Limited, Free Press, 2003 Jay Arthur, Lean Six-Sigma Demystified, Tata McGraw-Hill Company, New Delhi, 2007 Richard J Schonberger, World Class Manufacturing, Free Press, 2008

398


11M0XG SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT 1 0 0 1.0 Objectives  To acquire the general knowledge to deliver consistently high quality and value added products and services to the customer in a supply chain environment  To understand the terminology relating to supply chain operations in both service and manufacturing organizations Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to Design the supply chain network for a given set of requirements  Able to understand and appreciate various approach towards improving efficiency and responsiveness  Able to understand and appreciate various supply chain frameworks and be able to apply the same in supply chain decision making Supply Chain – Fundamentals, Importance, Decision Phases, Process View. Supplier – Manufacturer – Customer Chain. Drivers of Supply Chain Performance. Overview of Supply Chain Models and Modeling Systems. Definition of Supply Chain Management (SCM), Scope, SCM as a Management Philosophy, Functions of SCM. Distribution Network Design – Role, Factors Influencing, Options, Value Addition. Models for Facility Location and Capacity Location. Impact of uncertainty on Network Design. Network Design Decisions Using Decision Trees. Supply Chain Network Optimization Models. Overview of Demand Forecasting in the Supply Chain. Aggregate Planning in the Supply Chain. Managing Predictable Variability. Managing Supply Chain Cycle Inventory. Uncertainty in the Supply Chain – Safety Inventory. Determination of Optimal Level of Product Availability. Coordination in the Supply Chain. CrossFunctional drivers, Role of sourcing in a supply chain, Logistics providers, Procurement process, Supplier selection, Design collaboration, Role of Pricing and Revenue Management in a supply chain. e–Business – Framework and Role of Supply Chain in e-Business and B2B Practices. Supply Chain IT Framework. Information Systems Development. Packages in Supply Chain –eSRM, eLRM, eSCM. Reverse and Green Supply Chain Management. Total: 20 Hours Textbooks 1. 2.

Sunil Chopra and Peter Meindl, Supply Chain Management, Pearson Education, 2004 S G Deshmukh and R P Mohanty, Essentials of Supply Chain Management, Jaico Publishing House, 2009


Monczka, Purchasing and Supply Chain Management, Thomson Learning, 2002 Shapiro Jeremy F, Modeling the Supply Chain, Thomson Learning, 2002 Janat Shah, Supply Chain Management Text and Cases, Pearson 2009 David Simchi-Levi, Designing and managing the supply chain, Tata McGraw-Hill Editions, New Delhi, 2000 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Supply_chain_management

399


11M0XH TOOL DESIGN AND MANUFACTURING 1 0 0 1.0 Objectives   

To understand the concept and basic mechanics of metal cutting To study principles of designing Jigs, fixtures and dies for industrial applications To understand the concept of die making procedures and Machines used for producing die

Introduction to metal cutting – general motions of machine tools – mechanics of metal cutting – chip formation – friction and temperature. Principles of jigs and fixture design – locating and clamping methods – devices and its objectives – computer applications in fixture design and analysis. Fundamentals of Cutting tool design - types and its properties, Tool geometry - Design of single and multi point cutting tools Introduction – selection of die sets – simple and progressive die - bending die – single and double action die. Introduction – principle of operation –Wire cut EDM - Electrical Discharge Machining (EDM) – Electro Chemical Machining (ECM) Applications. Total: 20 Hours Textbooks 1. 2.

B C Sen and A. Battacharya, Principles of Metal Cutting, New Central Book Agency C Donaldson, G H Lecain and V C Goold, Tool Design, TMH, 1978

References 1.

Richard R Kibbe, John E Neely, Roland O Merges and Warren J White, Machine Tool Practices, Prentice Hall of India, 2003 2. J R Paquin and R E Crowley, Die Design Fundamentals, New York-Industrial Press Inc 3. Dallas B Daniel, Progressive Dies, SME, 1994 4. Smith A David, Die Design Hand Book , SME, 1990 5. P K Mishra, Nonconventional Machining, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2008

400


11M0XI TOTAL PRODUCTIVE MAINTENANCE 1 0 0 1.0 Objectives  

It is essential for a practicing engineer to have an understanding of the total productive maintenance, Mechanical Systems, Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems Maintenance, etc To have a clear idea of the advanced maintenance systems. The paper aims at providing the students the basic ideas in these areas

Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to know about different types of maintenance for different types of mechanical components  Learns the different steps to be followed for different types of maintenance  Able to know about how maintenance to be adopted for breakdown reduction Defining TPM- Need & Objectives, Benefits- Stages of implementing TPM- Tools in TPM- Equipment Maintenance - Mechanical Systems Maintenance- Hydraulic and Pneumatic System Maintenance Electrical & Electronic Parts. Routes of Autonomous Maintenance-Initial cleaning- eliminating sources of dirt- inspection & lubrication standards- General inspection- Autonomous inspection- Standardization & Autonomous Management. Establishing a Maintenance Plan-Preliminary considerations- Systematic method- Maintenance Plan and schedule planning-schedule of Plant shut downs- Production machines Maintenance practice - Machine Reconditioning - Maintenance Management Evaluation. Planned Maintenance- Understanding & Restoring Basic conditions- Maintenance Informative System- Periodical Maintenance- Predictive Maintenance- Lubricant analysis- Breakdown Reduction. Maintenance scheduling- Predictive and Preventive maintenance - machine health monitoring systems- spare parts – inventory and maintenance- Training & Education- Office TPM. Total: 20 Hours Textbooks 1.

K Venkataraman, Maintenance Engineering and Management, PHI Learning, 2007


Kenneth E Rizzo, Total Production Maintenance-A Guide for the Printing Industry, GATF Press, 2001 S Nakajima, Introduction to Total Production Maintenance, Productivity Press, 2003 R C Mishra & Pathak K, Maintenance Engineering & Management, Prentice Hall of India Publication, 2002 J Juran, Handbook of Quality Control, Tata McGraw Hill Publication, 2001 O P Khanna, Industrial engineering and management, Dhanpat rai publications (pvt.) ltd, 2011

401


11M0XJ INTRODUCTION TO PIPING ENGINEERING 1 0 0 1.0 Objectives  To impart knowledge on piping processes.  To create expertise in Preparation of Plot Plan-Preparation of Equipment Layouts Program Outcomes (POs) a)

The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them.

d) The graduates becoming familiar with fundamentals of engineering design and understanding the concept generation, design optimization and evaluation. Knowing the fundamentals of intellectual property rights. Students will be able to effectively design various engineering components and make process plan for the production Course Outcomes (COs)  

Able to understand the process diagrams Able to understand the process layouts and piping drawings

Introduction to Piping, Process Diagrams (PFD, UFD, P&ID, Line List etc) Pipe Fittings- Pipe Flanges, Valves and Piping Special Items -Various codes and standards used in power and process industries-. Overview of Technical Queries and Technical Bid Evaluations - Preparation of Plot Plan-Preparation of Equipment Layouts-Preparation of Piping General Arrangement Drawings-Preparation of Cross Sectional Drawings-Piping Isometric Drawings-Material Take off-Preparation of Piping Material Specification-, Valve Material Specification-Pipe Wall thickness Calculations-Branch reinforcement calculationsIntroduction to Stress Analysis-Types of stresses-Significance of forces and moments in piping systemExpansion Loop and Bellows-Pipe Supports- Support Types-Support Selection-Support Location-Support Span Calculation Total: 20 Hours Text book(s) 1. Sam Kannappan, Introduction to piping stress analysis – John Wiley & sons, 2006. Reference(s) 1. Mohinder L. Nayyar, Piping Engineering Hand book – McGraw Hill, 2000. 2. M. W. Kellogg Company, Design of Piping Systems - John Wiley & Sons, 2006.

402


11M0XK PRODUCT RELIABILITY 1 0 0 1.0 Objectives  

To impart knowledge on reliability mathematics and reliability models To create expertise on product maintainability and introduce software reliability

Program Outcomes (POs) b) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. e)

The graduates becoming familiar with fundamentals of engineering design and understanding the concept generation, design optimization and evaluation. Knowing the fundamentals of intellectual property rights. Students will be able to effectively design various engineering components and make process plan for the production


Able to understand the FMEA evaluations Able to understand the software reliability models

Definitions, stage gate approach, reliability mathematics, reliability models, parametric and catastrophic methods, reliability predictive modeling.Goal and vision, concepts and types of FMEA evaluations, fault tree model.Test design by failure modes and aging stresses. Aging due to cyclic force, Miner’s rule. Maintainability concepts and analysis measures of maintainability, design for serviceability, supportability and maintainability preventive maintenance scheduling. Software reliability - Definitions, waterfall lifecycle, techniques to improve software reliability, software reliability models. Total: 15 Hours


Naikan V N A, “Reliability Engineering and Life Testing”, PHI Learning Private Limited, 2009. Prabhakar Murthy D N and Marvin Rausand, “Product Reliability”, Springer-Verlag London Limited, 2008. Dana Crowe and Alec Feinberg, “Design for Reliability”, CRC Press, 2001. John W Priest and Jose M Sanchez, “Product Development and Design for Manufacturing – A Collaborative Approach to Producibility and Reliability”, Second Edition, Marcel Dekker, 2001. Michael Pecht, “Product Reliability, Maintainability and Supportability Handbook”, CRC Press, 2009.

403


11M0XL INDIAN PATENT LAW 1 0 0 1.0


To make students familiar about Indian patent law To make the students find the patentability of any invention To make the students aware of legal background of various process of Indian Patent

system

Program Outcomes (POs) h) The graduates will develop capacity to understand professional and ethical responsibility and will display skills required for continuous and lifelong learning and up gradation. Course Outcomes (COs)   

Students will be strong in various provisions of Indian Patent Law Students will be able to find patentability of any invention Student will be aware of various legal provisions of Indian patent system

Preliminary, Inventions Not Patentable, Applications for Patents, Publication and Examination of Applications, Opposition Proceedings to Grant of Patents, Anticipation , Provisions for Secrecy of Certain Inventions, Grant of Patents and Rights Conferred Thereby, Patents of Addition, Restoration of Lapsed Patents, Surrender and Revocation of Patents, Register of Patents, Patent Office and Its Establishment, Powers of Controller Generally, Working of Patents, Compulsory Licenses and evocation, Central Government, Suits Concerning Infringement of Patents, Appeals to the Appellate Board, Penalties, Patent Agents, International Arrangements Total: 15 Hours References 1.Indian Patent Act 1970 2.Indian Patent Rules2003 3.www.ipindia.nic.in

404


11M0XM PROBLEM SOLVING TECHNIQUES 1 0 0 1.0 Objectives  

To understand the basic concepts of quality control method of problem solving To create an awareness and understanding of quality control tools & techniques

Quality Control Tools and story -seven steps of story -seven quality control tools – problem definition – observation – analysis – solution identification – actions and execution – checking – standardisation – case study –basic problem solving . Total: 20 Hours Textbook(s) 1. L.Suganthi & Anand A Samuel, Total Quality Management, PHI Learning, 2009 Reference(s) 1. Jain P L Jain, Quality Control and Total Quality Management, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2001 2. Peter N. T. Pang, The Essentials of Quality Control Management, Trafford Business & Economics, 2003 3. B. Janakiraman, R. K. Gopal, Total Quality Management: Text and Cases, Prentice Hall of Indian Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi- 110001, 2006. 4. Shigeru Mizuno, Management for Quality Improvement: The Seven New Qc Tools, Productivity Press, 1988

405


11M0XN ELECTRIC VEHICLE TECHNOLOGY 1001

Objectives  To understand various components of battery electric vehicles and hybrid vehicles  To understand various energy storage techniques and devices for electric vehicles  To gain knowledge on design electric vehicles Program Outcomes (POs) c) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices Course Outcomes (COs)  

Able to understand the electric vehicle components and energy storage devices Able to understand the design of electric vehicles

Social and environmental importance of hybrid and electric vehicles. Hybrid and electric tractions, drive-train topologies, power flow control topologies, fuel efficiency analysis. Configuration and control of dc motor drives, induction motor drives, magnet motor drives, switch reluctance motor drives, drive system efficiency. Energy storage requirements in hybrid and electric vehicles, different energy storage devices. case studies: design of a hybrid electric vehicle (HEV), design of a battery electric vehicle (BEV) References: 1. Iqbal Hussein, Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals, CRC Press, 2003. 2. Mehrdad Ehsani, Yimi Gao, Sebastian E. Gay, Ali Emadi, Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles: Fundamentals, Theory and Design, CRC Press, 2004. 3. James Larminie, John Lowry, Electric Vehicle Technology Explained, Wiley, 2003.

406


11M0XO AUTOMOTIVE EXHAUST SYSTEM 0 0 0 1 Objectives  To understand the concepts and design of exhaust systems and catalytic converters  To disseminate information about various types of exhaust systems and strategies relevant to indian automotive industry  To identify the various factors to be considered for selection of exhaust manifold system Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to understand the various factors influencing on the exhaust systems and catalytic converters  Able to do the design and modeling of exhaust manifold systems  Able to apply the CFD tool to improve the automotive exhaust systems Program Outcomes (POs) c)

The graduates will be able to learn various techniques available to make shapes and designs in various materials and Understanding the methodologies to be followed in casting, fabrication, machining, materials, metallurgy and forming of engineering materials. At the end of the course, students will be able to select and perform suitable method of producing a desirable component in industry.

i)

The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes.

k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices Exhaust system - Exhaust system Function – Parts – Types – Catalytic Convertor – Types – 2WAY – 3 WAY CATCON Mufflers – Types – Principles – Design trade off – BS IV and above norms - EGR – SCREGR Function – Pollution control - SCR - Function – Pollution control - CATIA V5 application for Exhaust system - Modeling – Assembly – Drafting - Basics with Exhaust manifold modeling practical session - CFD analysis - Uniformity index – Space velocity – Flow analysis – Pressure drop – CPSI optimization 20 Hours References 1. Dr. Kirpal Singh, Automobile Engineering (Volume II), Standard publishers distributors. 2. Ronald M. Heck, Robert J. Farrauto and Suresh T. Gulati, Catalytic Air Pollution Control: Commercial Technology, Wiley, 3rd Edition, Feb 2009.

407


11M0XP CONTINUOUS IMPROVEMENT (KAIZEN)

1 0 0 1.0 Objectives  To acquire the general knowledge to deliver consistently high quality and value added products and services to the customer in a Manufacturing environment  To understand the terminology relating to continuous improvement in manufacturing organizations Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to identify the continuous improvement metrics  Able to understand and appreciate the various tangible and intangible benefits  Able to understand and appreciate various tools applied and methodology adopted to run a KAIZEN event History – Evolution - Toyota production system - Lean Manufacturing – Fundamentals, Importance, Definitions, Phases, Lead time - Supplier – Manufacturer – Customer Chain ,Work place organization Visual controls - Pull production and cellular manufacturing – Waste identification - Over production Waiting - Work In Progress - Transportation - Inappropriate processing - Excess motion or ergonomic problems - Defected products - Underutilization of employees - Organizations Vision, Mission, Strategy Deployment and Key performance Indicators. Importance of Measurement. Gap Analysis, Identification of KAIZEN projects. Methodology, team formation, Problem statement, Data collection, Brainstorming, Analysis, containment action, corrective action and preventive action. Overview of performance metrics visual control. Total: 20 Hours Textbooks 1.

Dennis P Hobbs, Lean Manufacturing Implementation, J. Ross Publications, 2004


Jeffrey K Liker, The Toyota Way-14 Management Principles, Mc-Graw Hill, New York, 2004 Pascal Dennis, Lean Production Simplified, Productivity Press, USA, 2002 James P Womack, Daniel T. Jones, Lean Thinking: Banish waste and create wealth in your corporation, Simon & Schuster UK Limited, Free Press, 2003 Jay Arthur, Lean Six-Sigma Demystified, Tata McGraw-Hill Company, New Delhi, 2007 Richard J Schonberger, World Class Manufacturing, Free Press, 2008

408


11M0XQ EMBEDDED PROGRAMMING 1001 Objectives  To enable students to programme and embed logics on Microcontroller  To enable students to design circuits and control various actuators such as DC motors  To enable students to get information from optical/proximity sensors and to control the actuators Program Outcomes (POs) a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in Mechanical, Mechatronics and Electrical Engineering as well as IT companies Course Outcomes (COs)  Will be able to select suitable Microcontroller for required application  Will be able to programme and control DC motors using Microcontroller  Will be able to get signal from sensors, logically process and control the actuators Overview of Embedded Systems, 8051 Microcontroller, AVR Microcontroller, C Language Programming, PIC Microcontroller, ARM Processors, Circuit Designing, PCB Layout Design, Programming Environment, Embedded System Programming, Microcontroller Interfacings, Digital Signal Processing Total: 20 Hours

409


11M0RA DESIGN OF AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS - - - 3.0 Objectives  To impart knowledge about automotive system  To learn the recent developments in clutch, gearbox, transmission systems, automotive electronics and the students will have command over automotive system concepts and application Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to understand the methodological and operational aspects of mathematical disciplines, basic sciences, industrial and information technologies.  Familiar with issues concerning the disciplinary areas of Mechanics, Automation, Electronics and Computing  Able to understand the economic issues concerning their application to solving cost-efficiency problems and the comparison of alternatives in engineering problems  Qualified automation engineers to meet the requirements of designing appropriate industrial automation systems. Recent developments in Vehicle Structure and Engines - types of chassis - types of frames – materials - unitized frame body construction - Design of Engine Components - Material for various engine components - valves, valve springs and flywheel - Clutch and Brakes - calculation of critical parameters of clutches - Pressure distribution in brakes - internally expanding brakes - disc brakes Transmission Systems - parameters - differential, axle shafts and gear box - Suspension and Steering System - Oscillation and smoothness of ride - Automotive electronics Sensors in automobiles - engine management system - Case studies on automotive design References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

www.antya.com/detail/Automotive-Technology/80736. www.gtubooks.com/Automobile-Engineering http://www.inderscience.com/browse/index.php?journalCODE=ijvd http://ameusc.wordpress.com/2008/03/04/international-journal-of-vehicle-design-is-live-in-e- journals/ http://www.ijat.net/

410


11M0RB GEOMETRIC MODELING OF CAD - - - 3.0 Objectives  Understand the intricate nature of CAD system and the methods of representation of wireframe, surface, and solid modeling systems  Understand the mathematical basis for geometric modeling of curves and surfaces and their relationship with computer graphics  Gain experience in design projects involving multiple Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to know the basics of CAD system and the methods of representation of wireframe, surface, and solid modeling systems  Able to know the mathematical basis for geometric modeling of curves and surfaces and their relationship with computer graphics CAD Systems and Graphics Transformations - subsystems of CAD - hardware and software - Networking of CAD systems - generative, cognitive and image processing graphics - static and dynamic data graphics Transport of graphics data - graphic standards - Mathematical Representation of Curves and Surfaces Wireframe models - parametric representation of curves - curve manipulation - surface models Mathematical Representation of Solids - boundary representation - constructive solid geometry - solid manipulations - Visual Realism and Computer Animation - Model cleanup - hidden line/surface/solid removal - shading and colors - Computer and Engineering animation - Animation types and techniques design applications - Product Design and Development - Mass Property Calculations - geometric properties - mass property evaluation - design and engineering applications - Assembly modeling - Testing mating conditions - Assembly load conditions - Assembly analysis.

Reference 1. http://www.idav.ucdavis.edu/education/GraphicsNotes/Transformations/Transformations.html 2. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcourse- contents/IITDelhi/Computer%20Aided%20Design%20&% 20ManufacturingI/index.htm

411


11M0RC DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS - - - 3.0 Objectives    

To understand the details of various design methods To understand the details of factorial design To know the concept of regression models Students will be able to conduct research effectively

Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to create the orthogonal array in experimental design  Able to find screen out factors skills  Able to save on costs but also make improvements in the quality of their product as well as ensure process efficiency. Guidelines for designing experiments - applications of experimental design - Sampling and Sampling Distributions - Randomized Designs - Experiments with a Single Factor Design - Analysis of Variance Model Adequacy Checking - Determining Sample Size - Regression Approach to the Analysis of Variance - Factorial Designs - Two-Factor Factorial Design - General Factorial Design - Blocking in a Factorial Design - 2k Factorial Design - Block Designs - Three-Level and Mixed-Level Factorial and Fractional Factorial Designs - Regression Models – Linear – Parameters - Hypothesis Testing in Multiple Regression Confidence Intervals - Prediction of New Response Observations - Regression Model Diagnostics - Testing for Lack of Fit. References 1. 2. 3. 4.

www.wiley.com/college/montgomery http://www.inderscience.com/browse/index.php?journalID=351&year=2009&vol=1&issue=1 http://www.emeraldinsight.com/journals.htm?articleid=840145 http://www.statease.com/articles.html

412


11M0RD INDUSTRIAL SAFETY - - - 3.0 Objectives     

To anticipate, identify, evaluate, and control workplace hazardous conditions and practices To develop effective safe operating procedures and comprehensive safety and health programs To address identified hazards, conditions, and practices in a cost effective manner To support employees and managers in developing a positive organizational safety culture To measure and evaluate occupational safety and health performance

Course Outcomes (COs)  Have a basic knowledge of the legal requirements/ codes of practice and Occupational Safety and Health (OSH) applicable to construction sites.  Describe the common types of work-related accidents and diseases and identify potential OSH hazards at construction sites, and recommend associated preventive measures including the use of personal protective equipment.  Describe the importance of, and procedures for, reporting accidents and dangerous occurrences  Have a basic knowledge of the safety management principles applicable to the construction industry.  Have a knowledge of professional and ethical standard within the context of OSH responsibilities and to develop good safety practices essential for maintaining a safe and healthy workplace. Energy source – Fires – Fire extinguishers – types and handling. Personal protective equipments – n e e d - Types – electricity and chemical – Industrial Hygiene – House keeping – Machine Guarding and its types - applications – Safety in welding and Gas cutting – material handling- Explosive chemicals – handling and storage – Testing of such chemicals. Hazards and its types - Release of hazardous materials– Thermal power plant – Atomic power plant – mining industries – Fertilizers – petroleum refinery – Guide lines for setting standards for safe equipments and safe operation in the above industries.-Types of organization – Safety committee – EHS policy – Safety education - Employee participation on safety – motivation - First aid – Principles and methods – Training. Legal aspects of Industrial safety – Factories act – Mines act – pollution control acts for water – air and land – child labour and women employee acts- OSHAS 18001-207. References 1. 2. 3. 4.

http://www.OSHA.gov http://me.queensu.ca/undergraduate/laboratory/safety.php International Journal of Reliability, Quality and Safety Engineering International Journal of Injury Control and Safety Promotion

413


11M0RE PLANT LAYOUT AND MATERIAL HANDLING - - - 3 Objectives  To describe the concepts of and plant layout and materials handling  To identify the various factors to be considered for selection of plant location-from state/area to the specific site Course Outcomes(COs)  Able to understand the various factors influencing the choice of an initial layout and its subsequent modification  Able to reduce the unit cost of production for manufacturing Program Outcomes (POs) d) The graduates will be able to learn various techniques available to make shapes and designs in various materials and Understanding the methodologies to be followed in casting, fabrication, machining, materials, metallurgy and forming of engineering materials. At the end of the course, students will be able to select and perform suitable method of producing a desirable component in industry. l)

The graduates are expected to have knowledge of contemporary issues and modern practices

Introduction to facility design & its requirements - need for layout study – types of layout- facilities design - sources of information for facilities design - process design - flow analysis techniques- Site selectionplant location analysis – factors- costs - location decisions – auxiliary -plant cost– land – building and production – equipment - material cost - services requirement- employee services - space requirementsactivity relationship analysis - Office layout techniques and space requirements - area allocation application of computer simulation and modeling - Organization chart - activity relationship chart production routing sheets - flow process chart - worksheet for activity relationship chart- nodal diagramoperation chart - assembly chart for product - package design unit load design - departmental layout production flow analysis (PFA) - line balancing - financial analysis – design cycle – SLP procedure manpower - machinery requirements - Computations of machine requirements - area and cost of production equipments - unit load concept - material handling system design - handling equipment types - selection and specification. 30 Hours References 3. Fred E Meyers, and Matthew P Stephens., “Manufacturing Facilities Design and Material Handling”, Prentice - Hall, Inc., 3rd Edition, 2005. 4. Choudary, R and Tagore, G.R.N., “Plant Layout and Materials Handling”, Khanna publishers, New Delhi, 2001. 5. Tompkins, J.A., and White, J.A., “Facilities and Planning”, 4 th Edition, John Wiley and sons, New York, 1984. 6. Richard Francis, L., and John, A., White, “Facilities Layout and Location - an Analytical Approach”, Prentice Hall Inc. New Delhi, 1992. 7. www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/.../material%20handling/lecture1.htm 8. www.gobookee.org/plant-layout-and-material-handling-james-apple 9. www.emeraldinsight.com/Insight/html/Output/Published/EmeraldFullTextArticle/Pdf/0690201304 _ref.html

414


11M0RF INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMATIC CONTROLS - - - 3 Objectives

Introduction to modern control methods applied to mechanical, manufacturing, and mechatronic systems. Course Outcomes (COs) 1. Model dynamic systems through block diagrams and signal flow graphs 2. Analyze characteristics of dynamics systems and measures of their performances 3. Use MATLAB in analyzing dynamics systems and control systems Program Outcomes (POs)

a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes Basic Elements of control System – Transfer function, Modeling of Mechanical systemModeling of Electrical & thermal systems, -Block diagram reduction Techniques – Signal flow graph. MATLAB Basics - First Order Systems – Impulse and Step Response analysis of second order systems – Steady state errors – P, PI, PD and PID Compensation, Analysis using MATLAB. Bode Plot, Polar Plot, and Nyquist Plot – Frequency Domain specifications from the plots. , Stability: Routh – Hurwitz method, Root Locus Method Case study: Speed control of DC Motor, Position control of DC motor, Cruise control, Active suspension control, Inverted pendulum, Ball on Beam system. 30 Hours References

1. Thomas G. Beckwith, Roy D. Marangoni and V.John H. Lienhard, Mechanical Measurements, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2006. 2. I. J. Nagrath and Madan Gopal, Control Systems Engineering, New Age International, New Delhi, 2007. 3. Ernest O. Doebelin, Measurement Systems - Application and Design, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd.,, New Delhi, 2005. 4. link: http://ctms.engin.umich.edu/CTMS/index.php?aux=Home

415


11M0RG – ADVANCED MATERIALS CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES - - - 3.0 Objectives  

To learn about advanced materials characterization techniques that will impart knowledge to students on the state-of-the-art technologies that are relevant to industries and government/corporate R&D establishments. To introduce the principles of the most popular and advanced characterization techniques based on microscopy, chemical, physical, structural analysis and thermal techniques.

Program Outcomes   

The students will be able to understand the principles and knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of the various types of advanced analytical methods. The students will have the capability to clearly understand the various advanced materials characterization methods and identify their role in evaluating structureproperty relationship. The students will possess the knowledge to recommend appropriate characterization methods for specific materials-related issues.

Introduction to various conventional and advanced classes of materials - Overview on physical, thermal, structural, mechanical properties of materials - Density, modulus, coefficient of thermal expansion, contact angle, surface tension measurements Introduction to various properties obtained by X-ray diffraction - Differential Scanning Calorimetry, Thermo-gravimetry, Differential Thermal Analysis - Coupled Mass Spectrometry - Dynamic Mechanical Analysis - Thermo-Mechanical Analysis - Atomic Force Microscopy - Scanning Electron Microscopy, Transmission Electron Microscopy, Energy Dispersive X-ray analysis - Electron Probe Micro Analysis, Auger Electron Spectroscopy, X-ray Photo Electron Spectroscopy, Secondary-Ion Mass Spectrometry, Time-of-flight Secondary-Ion Mass Spectrometer, Synchrotron Radiation Techniques In-depth understanding through Case Studies. Total: 30 hours References: 1. A. K. Tyagi, Mainak Roy, S. K. Kulshreshtha and S. Banerjee, Advanced Techniques for Materials Characterization, Trans Tech Publications, 2009. 2. Sam Zhang, Lin Li, Ashok Kumar, Materials Characterization techniques, CRC Press, 2008.

416


11M0RH – WORK STUDY AND ERGONOMICS - - - 3.0 Objectives  To enable the students to realize the importance of work study in industry  To enable the students to understand the importance of ergonomics for improving the productivity of an industry Program Outcomes (POs) a) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them g) The graduates will become equipped with the knowledge and skills necessary for entry-level placement in Mechanical, Mechatronics and Electrical Engineering as well as IT companies Course Outcomes (COs)  Have a basic knowledge of the work studies and its significance.  Able to design a comfortable environment for working inside an industry.  Proficient to design the projects by considering the ergonomics aspects Introduction to work study and its Importance – Factors influencing work study- Work study components and its importance- Work method design- Principles of motion economy- Rules concerning human body – Equipment design and workplace layout – Application of motion economy principles in workplace design - Introduction to ergonomics - Objectives – Anatomy, posture and body mechanics- Types of posture – Types of body movement – Anthropometric principles in workspace and equipment design- Modern ergonomics and future directions- Introduction to human anthropometrics and system design - Anthropometric measurements- Work capacity, stress and fatigue - Physical, cognitive and organizational ergonomics - Workplace design- User centered design – Design for seated and standing workers – Design for repetitive tasks – Design for manual handling tasks – Design of displays and controls Product design considerations- Design of physical environment References: 1. Ralph M Barnes, “Motion and Time Study: Design and Measurement of Work”, John Wiley & Sons, 7th edition, USA, 1980. 2. R S Bridger, “ Introduction to Ergonomics”, TMH, 3rd edition, New York, 2008. 3. Mark S Sanders and Ernest J McCormick, “ Human Factors in Engineering and Design”, TMH, 6th edition, New York. 4. Kejill B Zandin, “ Maynard’s Industrial Engineering Handbook”, TMH, 7th Edition NY, 1993. 5. George Kanawaty, “Introduction to Work Study”, International Labour Organization, 4th edition, Geneva, 1992 6. www.ergonomics.org.uk/learning/what-ergonomics 7. www.ergonomics.org

417


11M0RI – APPLIED MECHANICS AND DESIGN ---3 Objectives   

To make the students to apply the mind to desin. To impart basic knowledge in design and focusing on design of mechanical components To make one to ensure the design and can go for real time testing

Program Outcomes (POs) f)

The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them (d) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of engineering design. Understanding the concept generation, design optimization and evaluation. Knowing the fundamentals of intellectual property rights. Students will be able to effectively design various engineering components and make process plan for the production. (i) The graduates will have sound foundation for entering into higher education programmes. Course Outcomes (COs)    

Apply to solve problems dealing with forces in a plane or in space and equivalent force systems. Understand the fundamental concepts of mechanics of deformable solids and including static equilibrium, geometry of deformation, material behavior and have theoretical background for further structural analysis and design. Apply the fundamental principles of statics and dynamics to machinery, vibrations and able to determine velocities & accelerations of various planar mechanisms. Apply proper dimensions for the machine component for specific applications, check the failure modes and design the machine component for particular applications.

Free body diagrams and equilibrium; trusses and frames; virtual work; kinematics and dynamics of particles and of rigid bodies in plane motion, including impulse and momentum (linear and angular) and energy formulations; impact. Stress and strain, stress-strain relationship and elastic constants, Mohr’s circle for plane stress and plane strain, thin cylinders; shear force and bending moment diagrams; bending and shear stresses; deflection of beams; torsion of circular shafts; Euler’s theory of columns; strain energy methods; thermal stresses. Displacement, velocity and acceleration analysis of plane mechanisms; dynamic analysis of slider-crank mechanism; gear trains; flywheels. Free and forced vibration of single degree of freedom systems; effect of damping; vibration isolation; resonance, critical speeds of shafts. Design for static and dynamic loading; failure theories; fatigue strength and the S-N diagram; principles of the design of machine elements such as bolted, riveted and welded joints, shafts, spur gears, rolling and sliding contact bearings, brakes and clutches. Total : 30 Hours References 6. F.P. Beer, and Jr. E.R Johnston, Vector Mechanics for Engineers – Statics and Dynamics, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 2012.

418


7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

R. K. Bansal, A text book of Strength of Materials, Lakshmi Publications (P) Limited, New Delhi, 2010 Egor P. Popov, Engineering Mechanics of Solids, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2010. D. K. Singh, Mechanics of Solids, Pearson Education New Delhi ,2010. S. S. Rattan, Theory of Machines, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2011. John J Uichker and Joesph E. Shigley, Theory of Machines and Mechanism, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2005. 12. V. B. Bhandari, Design of Machine Elements, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2010. 13. Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, PSG College of Technology, Design Data Book, M/s.Kalaikathir Achchagam, 2009. 14. J. E. Shigley and C. R. Mischke, Mechanical Engineering Design, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.

419


420

11M0RJ – PRODUCT AND PROCESS DEVELOPMENT 0 0 0 3 Objectives  

To impart knowledge about product planning and product specifications. T o impart knowledge about product concept selection and testing.

Programme Outcomes (PO): (d) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of engineering design. Understanding the concept generation, design optimization and evaluation. Knowing the fundamentals of intellectual property rights. Students will be able to effectively design various engineering components and make process plan for the production Course Outcomes (COs): At the end of the course 1. Students can describe the steps to be followed in product design from planning to proto typing testing. 2. Students can design products .

Introduction - Characteristics of Successful Product Development-Interdisciplinary activity-Duration and Costs of Product Development- Challenges of Product Development –Development Processes and Organizations-A Generic Development Process-Concept Development: The Front-End Process Adapting the Generic Product Product Planning - Product Planning Process- Identifying Opportunities- Evaluating and Prioritizing Projects- Allocating Resources and Timing- Pre-Project Planning-Reflect on the Results and the Process Identify the Customer Need - Identifying Customer Needs- Raw Data from Customers- Interpreting Raw Data in Terms of Customer Needs- Organizing the Needs into a Hierarchy-Establishing the Relative Importance of the Needs-Reflecting on the Results and the Process Product Specifications & Concept Generation - Specifications - Specifications Established - Establishing Target Specifications-Setting the Final Specifications- Concept Generation-The Activity of Concept Generation-Clarify the Problem- Search Externally-Search Internally-Explore Systematically- Reflect on the Results and the Process. Concept Selection & Testing - Concept Selection- Overview of Methodology-Concept Screening-Concept Testing-Define the Purpose of the Concept Test- Choose a Survey Population- Choose a Survey FormatCommunicate the Concept- Measure Customer Response-Interpret the Results- Reflect on the Results and the Process Total: 30 Hours References 1. Ulrich K. T and Epinger S. D, Product Design and Development, McGraw-Hill International Edns, 2012 2. Otto K and Wood K, Product Design, Pearson Publication, 2008. 3. Stuart Pugh, Tool Design – Integrated Methods for successful Product Engineering, Addison Wesley Publishing, NY, 2005. 4. Rosenthal S, Effective Product Design and Development, Business One Orwin, Homewood, 2004.


11M0RK – METROLOGY IN INDUSTRY 0 0 0 3 Objectives  

To understand the concept of various quality standards in tool rooms. To know the machine vision methods for on-line measurements.

Program Outcomes (POs) b) The graduates will become familiar with fundamentals of various science and technology subjects and thus acquire the capability to applying them. c) The graduates will be able to learn various techniques available to make shapes and designs in various materials. Students will be understood the methodologies to be followed in casting, fabrication, machining, materials, metallurgy and forming of engineering materials. At the end of the course, students will be able to select and perform suitable method of producing a desirable component in industry. Course Outcomes (COs)  Able to understand the various types of measurements and its techniques.  Able to select the proper selection of instruments for the suitable application. General cares and rules in measurement, International standardization, SI units and quantities, BISNPL – advantages, ISO 9000 quality standards, QS 9000 standards, Environment standards, metrology room measuring standards room. Opto electronic devices – CCD – On-line and in-process monitoring in production – application image analysis and computer vision – Image analysis techniques – Spatical feature – image extraction – segmentation – digital image processing – vision system for measurement – comparision laser scanning with vision system. Types of screw threads, terminology, proportions of ISO metric thread, measurement of major, minor and effective diameters. Gear terminology and standard proportions, spur gear measurement, checking of composite errors, base pitch measurement, clean room environment. Equipment erection, commissioning, testing procedure for lathe, milling, continuous process line. First aid, safety precautions in installation of equipment, protocol for repair and testing, inspection check list. 30 Hours TEXT BOOKS: 1. Gupta I C, “A text book of Engineering Metrology”, Dhanpat Rai publications, New Delhi, 2011. 2. Jain R K, “Mechanical and Industrial Measurements”, Khanna Publishers Co Ltd., New Delhi, 2012. 3. Holmen J P, “Experimental Methods for Engineers”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications Co Ltd, 2010. 4. John G Nee, “Fundamentals of Tool Design” Society of Manufacturing Engineers, Fourth Edition, 2008. 5. Dominique Placko, “Metrology in Industry: The Key for Quality”, ISTE, 2011. REFERENCES: 1. Narayana K , “Engineering Metrology”, Scitech Publication, 2011. 2. Kaniska Bedi, “Quality Management”, Oxford University Press, Chennai, 2012.

421


11M0RL – AIR POLLUTION EFFECTS MEASUREMENTS AND CONTROL 0003 Objectives:    

To know the fundamentals of Air pollutants and their effects To know the Air pollutants regulations and its control strategies To develop a basic understanding of the control technologies used to control air pollution emissions To make the awareness of Global change

Program Outcomes (POs): (h) The graduates know the seriousness and the remedies of global change (k) The graduates are expected to have knowledge of basic understanding of the mechanism that lead to the formation and emissions of air pollutants. Also the graduates are familiar with the control technologies used to control air pollution emissions Course Outcomes (COs)   

Able to understand the mechanism that leads to the formation and emissions of air pollutants Able to know the seriousness and the remedies of global change Able to know the control technologies used to control air pollution emissions

Air pollutants and their effects - Regulations and control strategies - Control of sulphur dioxide - Control of nitrogen oxides - Mobile sources - Atmospheric particulate matter Particle dynamics - Cylones and fabric filters - Particle Settlers - Electrostatic Precipitators- Particle Scrubbers - Air pollution modelling Indoor air pollution -Global change 30 Hours References 2. Rao C S, Environmental Pollution Control Engineering, New Age International, New Delhi, 2012 3. B. Seifert and T. Lindvall, Indoor Air Quality: A Comprehensive Reference Book (AIr Quality Monographs), Elsevier Science Ltd, 2012 4. Kenneth Wark, Cecil Francis Warner and Wayne T. Davis, Air Pollution, Addison-Wesley, 2011 5. S.C. Bhatia, Textbook of Air Pollution and Its Control, Atlantic Publications, 2010

422


6. Balram Pani, Textbook of Environmental Chemistry, I K International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd, 2012 7. Abhijit Mallick, Environmental Science and Management, Viva Books, 2013 8. Masters Gilbert M. and Ela Wendell P., Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science, PHI, 2012

423